HomeMy WebLinkAboutSpecifications CITY OF RENTON
POLICE TRAINING CENTER &
CITY ATTORNEY
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
PROJECT LOCATION
1055 S . Grady Way , 4 ' " Floor
RE NTO N , WA 98056
PROJECT MANUAL
BID DOCUMENTS
JuLv i
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 00 0110
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 00--PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
00 00 01- Instruction to Bidders
00 00 02-Advertisement for Bids
00 00 03- Bid Proposal Form
00 0107-Seals Page
00 0110-Table of Contents
00 42 00-Statement of Bidders Qualifications
00 42 10- Bid Submittal Checklist
00 43 36- Proposed Subcontractors Form
00 72 00-General Conditions
00 80 00 01- Bid Bond Form
00 80 00 02-Contract Bond Template
00 80 00 03-Sample Agreement
00 80 00 04-Certification of Wage Compliance
00 80 00 05- Non-Collusion Affidavit
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 01--GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011130- Hazardous Materials
0114 00-Work Restrictions
0123 00-Alternates
0125 00-Substitution Procedures
0130 00-Administrative Requirements
0140 00-Quality Requirements
0142 16- Definitions
0150 00-Temporary Facilities and Controls
0170 00- Execution and Closeout Requirements
0174 19-Construction Waste Management and Disposal
0178 00-Closeout Submittals
DIVISION 02--EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 4100- Demolition
DIVISION 03--CONCRETE (NOT USED)
DIVISION 04--MASONRY (NOT USED)
DIVISION 05--METALS (NOT USED)
Job Number 2170712.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS
CAG-19-196 0001 10 - 1/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
DIVISION 06--WOOD,PLASTICS,AND COMPOSITES
06 20 00- Finish Carpentry
06 4100-Architectural Wood Casework
DIVISION 07--THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION (NOT USED)
DIVISION 08--OPENINGS
08 12 13- Hollow Metal Frames
08 14 16- Flush Wood Doors
08 7100- Door Hardware
08 80 00-Glazing
DIVISION 09--FINISHES
09 05 61-Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation
09 2116-Gypsum Board Assemblies
09 30 00-Tiling
09 5100-Acoustical Ceilings
09 65 00- Resilient Flooring
09 68 13-Tile Carpeting
09 90 00- Painting and Coating
DIVISION 10--SPECIALTIES
10 26 01-Wall and Corner Guards
10 28 00-Toilet Accessories
10 5100-Specialty Lockers
DIVISION 11--EQUIPMENT
1115 01-Security Barrier
DIVISION 12--FURNISHINGS
12 24 00-Window Shades- MechoShade Systems.
12 36 00-Countertops
DIVISION 20--MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
20 0000-GENERAL MECHANCIAL REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 22--PLUMBING
22 05 17-Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping
22 05 23-General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping
22 05 48-Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
22 05 53- Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
22 07 19- Plumbing Piping Insulation
TABLE OF CONTENTS Job Number 2170712.00
0001 10-2/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
22 10 05- Plumbing Piping
22 10 06- Plumbing Piping Specialties
22 30 00- Plumbing Equipment
22 40 00- Plumbing Fixtures
DIVISION 23--HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR-CONDITIONING(HVAC)
23 05 13- Motors, ECMs and Variable Drives
23 05 23-Valves for HVAC Piping
23 05 29- Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 05 48-Vibration and Seismic Controls
23 05 53- Mechanical Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 05 93-Air System Testing and Balancing
23 05 95-Water System Balancing
23 07 13- Eqipment/Ductwork Insulation
23 07 19- HVAC Piping Insulation
23 09 00-Addition to Existing Controls
23 1119- HVAC Piping Specialties
23 1123- Pumps for HVAC Equipment
23 20 00- Hydronic System
23 2100-Sleeves and Seals for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 3113-Steel Ductwork
23 33 00- HVAC Specialties
23 36 00-VAV Terminal Box Units
23 37 00-Air Terminals
23 8146-Water to Heat Pump
23 90 00- Mechanical Demolition
2.01 DIVISION 26--ELECTRICAL
26 00 00- Electrical General Conditions
26 00 05- Electrical Existing Conditions
26 05 19-Wires and Cables
26 05 26-Grounding and Bonding
26 05 32-Outlet and Pull Boxes
26 05 33- Raceway
26 05 34- Metal Clad Cable(Type MC)and Fittings
26 05 36-Cable Trays
26 09 23- Lighting Control Panel
26 27 26-Switches and Receptacles
26 28 13- Fuses
26 28 16- Disconnects and Fused Switches
Job Number 2170712.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS
CAG-19-196 0001 10 -3/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
26 50 00- Lighting
DIVISION 27--COMMUNICATIONS
27 00 00- Low Voltage System General Requirements
27 05 28- Pathways for Communications Systems
27 20 00- Data and Voice Infrastructure
DIVISION 28--ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 13 00-Access Control System
DIVISION 31--EARTHWORK
DIVISION 32--EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 33--UTILITIES (NOT USED)
DIVISION 46--WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT(NOT USED)
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS Job Number 2170712.00
0001 10-4/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI — Bid Documents 15 July 2019
DOCUMENT 00 00 01 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FOR CITY OF
RENTON CONSTRUCTION
PART 0—INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.1 EXPLANATION TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS
A. Any prospective Bidder desiring an explanation or interpretation of the solicitation, drawings,
specifications, etc., must submit a request in writing to the Owner/Architect/Engineer(O/A/E)
seven (7) calendar days before the bid due date. Oral explanations or instructions given before the
award of a contract will not be binding. Any information given a prospective Bidder concerning a
solicitation will be furnished promptly to all other prospective Bidders by addendum to the
solicitation, if that information is necessary in submitting bids or if the lack of it would be
prejudicial to other prospective Bidders.
B. In accordance with the legislative findings and policies set forth in Chapter 39.19 RCW the City of
Renton encourages participation in all of its contracts by MWBE firms. However, no preference
will be included in the evaluation of bids, no minimum level of MWBE participation shall be
required as a condition for receiving an award, and bids will not be rejected or considered
nonresponsive on that basis.
C. The City of Renton encourages participation in all of its contracts by Veteran-owned
businesses.http://www.dva.wa.gov/program/certified-veteran-and-servicemember-owned-
businesses
1.2 PREPARATION OF BIDS —CONSTRUCTION
A. Bids must be: (1)submitted on the Bid Form, or copies of forms,furnished by the Owner or the
Owner's agent, and (2) signed in ink. The person signing a bid must initial each change
appearing on any Bid Form. If the bid is made by a corporation, it shall be signed by the
corporation's authorized designee. The address of the Bidder shall be typed or printed on the Bid
Form in the space provided.
B. The Bid Form may require Bidders to submit bid prices for one or more items on various bases,
including: (1) lump sum base bid; (2) lump sum bid alternate prices; (3) unit prices; or (4) any
combination of items 1 through 3 above.
C. If the solicitation includes alternate bid items, failure to bid on the alternates may disqualify the bid.
If bidding on all items is not required, Bidders should insert the words"no bid" in the space
provided for any item on which no price is submitted.
D. Substitute bid forms will not be considered unless this solicitation authorizes their submission.
1.3 BID GUARANTEE
A. When the sum of the base bid plus all additive bid alternates is $35,000.00 or less, bid security is
not required.
B. When the sum of the base bid plus all additive alternates is greater than $35,000.00, a bid
guarantee in the amount of 5% of the base bid amount is required. Failure of the Bidder to
provide bid guarantee when required shall render the bid non-responsive.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Job Number 2170712.00
00 00 01 - 1/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI — Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Acceptable forms of bid guarantee are: A bid bond or postal money order, or certified check or
cashier's check made payable to the City of Renton Treasurer.
The Owner will return bid guarantees (other than bid bond) to unsuccessful Bidders as soon as
practicable, but not sooner than the execution of a contract with the successful Bidder. The
successful Bidder's bid guarantee will be returned to the successful Bidder with its official notice to
proceed with the work of the contract.
D. The Bidder will allow 60 days from bid opening date for acceptance of its bid by the Owner.
The Bidder will return to the Owner a signed contract, insurance certificate and bond or bond
waiver within 15 days after receipt of the contract. If the apparent successful Bidder fails to sign
all contractual documents or provide the bond and insurance as required or return the documents
within 15 days after receipt of the contract, the Owner may terminate the award of the contract.
E. In the event a Bidder discovers an error in its bid following the bid opening, the Bidder may
request to withdraw its bid under the following conditions:
1. Written notification is received by the Owner within 24 hours following bid opening.
2. The Bidder provides written documentation of the claimed error to the satisfaction of the
Owner within 72 hours following the bid opening.
The Owner will approve or disapprove the request for withdrawal of the bid in writing. If the
Bidder's request for withdrawal of its bid is approved, the Bidder will be released from further
obligation to the Owner without penalty. If it is disapproved, the Owner may retain the
Bidder's bid guarantee.
1.4 ADDITIVE OR DEDUCTIVE BID ITEMS
The low Bidder, for purposes of award, shall be the responsive Bidder offering the low aggregate
amount for the base bid item, plus additive or deductive bid alternates selected by the Owner,and
within funds available for the project.
The Bidder agrees to hold all bid alternate prices for sixty (60) days from date of bid opening.
1.5 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA
Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of all addenda to this solicitation by identifying the addenda
numbers in the space provided for this purpose on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may result in the bid
being declared non-responsive.
1.6 SITE INVESTIGATION AND CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE WORK
The Bidder acknowledges that it has taken steps necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the
work, and that it has investigated and satisfied itself as to the general and local conditions which can
affect the work or its cost, including but not limited to; (1) conditions bearing upon transportation,
disposal, handling, and storage of materials; (2)the availability of labor, water, electric power, and
road; (3) uncertainties of weather, river stages, tides, or similar physical conditions at the site; (4) the
conformation and conditions of the ground; and (5)the character of equipment and facilities needed
preliminary to and during the work. The Bidder also acknowledges that it has satisfied itself as to
character, quality, and quantity of surface and subsurface materials or obstacles to be encountered
insofar as this information is reasonably ascertainable from an inspection of the site, including
exploratory work done by the Owner, as well as from the drawings and specifications made a part of
this contract. Any failure of the Bidder to take the actions described and acknowledged in this
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Job Number 2170712.00
00 00 01 -2/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI — Bid Documents 15 July 2019
paragraph will not relieve the Bidder from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty and cost
of successfully performing the work.
1.7 BID AMOUNTS
A. The bid prices shown for each item on the Bid Form shall include all labor, material, equipment,
overhead and compensation to complete all of the work for that item.
B. The Owner will obtain and pay for the general building permit for this project prior to project
Notice to Proceed. The Bidder is required to pay for the electrical permit.
C. The Bidder agrees to hold the base bid prices for sixty (60) days from date of bid opening.
1.8 TAXES
All bid amounts shall include Washington Sales Tax (WSST) based on the City of Renton rate
(currently 10%) entered on the appropriate location on the Bid Form. All other taxes imposed by law
shall be included in the bid amount. The Owner will include WSST in progress payments. The
Contractor shall pay the WSST to the Department of Revenue and shall furnish proof of payment to
the Owner if requested.
[NOTE: Contractor must bond for contract amount plus the WSST]
1.9 SUBMISSION OF BIDS
A. Bids must be submitted on or before the time specified in the Advertisement for Bids.
B. The Bid Form shall be submitted in a sealed envelope addressed to the office specified in the
Advertisement for Bids. The envelope shall have printed on the outside:
1. The project number and description.
2. The name and address of the Bidder
3. Identification as Bid Form.
C. Prior to the bid opening, the Owner's representative will designate the official bid clock. Any part
of the Bid Form, or in the rare situation of a bid modification, not received prior to the times
specified, per the designated bid clock, will not be considered and the bid will be returned to the
Bidder unopened.
D. A bid may be withdrawn in person by a Bidder's authorized representative before the opening of
the bids. Bidder(s) representative will be required to show ID and sign on bid summary sheet
before it will be released.
E. People with disabilities who wish to request special accommodation, (e.g., sign language
interpreters, braille, etc.) need to contact the Owner ten (10) working days prior to the scheduled
bid opening.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Job Number 2170712.00
00 00 01 -3/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI — Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.10 BID RESULTS
After the Bid Opening, Bidders may obtain bid results from the Owner.
1.11 LOW RESPONSIBLE BIDDER
A. Mandatory Responsibility Criteria: Before award of a public works contract, a Bidder must
meet the following mandatory responsibility criteria under RCW 39.04.350(1)to be considered a
responsible Bidder and qualified to be awarded a public works project. The Bidder must:
1. At the time of bid submittal, have a certificate of registration in compliance with chapter
18.27 RCW;
2. Have a current state unified business identifier number;
3. If applicable, have industrial insurance coverage for the Bidder's employees working in
Washington as required in Title 51 RCW; an employment security department number as
required in Title 50 RCW; and a state excise tax registration number as required in Title 82
RCW;
4. Not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or
39.12.065(3).
5. Within the three-year period immediately preceding the date of the bid solicitation, not have
been determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the
department of labor and industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or
general jurisdiction to have willfully violated, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, any provision of
chapter 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW.
(Before award of a public works contract, a bidder shall submit to the contracting agency a
signed statement in accordance with RCW 9A.72.085 verifying under penalty of perjury that
the bidder is in compliance with the responsible bidder criteria requirements. A contracting
agency may award a contract in reasonable reliance upon such a sworn statement.)
B. Supplemental Responsibility Criteria: In addition to the mandatory Bidder responsibility,the
Owner has adopted relevant supplemental criteria for determining Bidder responsibility which the
Bidder must meet (RCW 39.04.350(3)).
1. The Owner shall consider an overall accounting of the attached supplemental criteria for
determining Bidder responsibility "DIVISION 00 0400 SUPPLEMENTAL RESPONSIBILITY
CRITERIA".
2. At least seven (7) days prior to the bid submittal deadline, a potential Bidder may request that
the Owner modify the supplemental responsibility criteria.The Owner will evaluate the
information submitted by the potential Bidder and respond before the bid submittal deadline.
If the evaluation results in a change of the criteria, the Owner will issue an addendum to the
bidding documents identifying the new criteria.
3. Upon Owner's request, the apparent low Bidder must supply the requested responsibility
information within two (2) business days of request by Owner. Withholding information or
failure to submit all the information requested within the time provided may render the bid
non-responsive
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Job Number 2170712.00
00 00 01 -4/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI — Bid Documents 15 July 2019
4. If the Owner determines that the apparent low Bidder is not responsible, the Owner will notify
the Bidder of its preliminary determination in writing.
5. Within three (3) days after receipt of the preliminary determination, the Bidder may withdraw
its bid or request a hearing where the Bidder may appeal the preliminary determination and
present additional information to the Owner.
6. The Owner will schedule a hearing within three (3) working days of receipt of the Bidder's
request.
7. The Owner will issue a Final Determination after reviewing information presented at the
hearing.
8. If the Owner determines a Bidder to be not responsible, the Owner will provide, in writing, the
reasons for the determination. If the final determination affirms that the Bidder is not
responsible, the Owner will not execute a contract with any other Bidder until two (2)
business days after the Bidder determined to be not responsible has received the final
determination.
9. The Owner's Final Determination is specific to this project, and will have no effect on other or
future projects.
1.12 CONTRACT AWARD
A. The Owner will evaluate bid responsiveness and responsibility.
1. A bid will be considered responsive if it meets the following requirements:
a. It is received at the proper time and place.
b. It meets the stated requirements of the Bid Form.
c. It is submitted by a licensed/registered contractor within the state of Washington at the
time of bid opening and is not banned from bidding by the Department of Labor and
Industries.
d. It is accompanied by a bid guarantee, if required.
2. A bid will be considered responsible if it meets the following requirements:
a. It meets the mandatory responsibility criteria established in RCW 39.04.350 and an
overall accounting of the supplemental responsibility criteria established for the project
B. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids and to waive informalities.
C. The apparent low Bidder,for purpose of award,shall be the responsive and responsible Bidder
offering the low aggregate amount for the base bid plus selected additive or deductive bid
alternates and meeting all other bid submittal requirements.
1.13 DOCUMENTS (ATTACHED)
A. Advertisement for Bids
B. Bid Form
C. Supplemental Bidder Responsibility Criteria
D. General Conditions for Construction
E. Bonds - Bid and performance
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Job Number 2170712.00
00 00 01 -5/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI — Bid Documents 15 July 2019
F. Sample contract
G. Certification of Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes
H. Non-Collusion, Anti-trust and Minimum Wage Form
Note: Payment Bond and Performance Bond are required. These forms will be provided by
the Owner.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Job Number 2170712.00
00 00 01 - 6/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
DOCUMENTS 00 00 02 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
The City of Renton invites interested and qualified contractors to submit sealed bids for the following project:
TITLE: City Attorney I Police Training Center
ESTIMATED BASE BID COST RANGE: $1,500,000 - $2,000,000
SUBMITTAL TIME/DATE/LOCATION: 11:30 AM, August 2, 2019
Office of the City Clerk
Seventh Floor, Renton City Hall
1066 Grady Way, Renton,WA, 98067
Public Bid Opening will commence at approximately
11:40 AM in Room 621, Sixth Floor.
PRE-BID CONFERENCE & SITE WALK: 9:00 A.M. July 23, 2019 at
1055 S. Grady Way, 4th Floor
Renton, WA, 98057
Attendance at the pre-bid conference &site walk is
mandatory.
The work consists of constructing an approximately 9,800 ft.2 tenant improvement to part of the existing fourth
floor for office use to include demolition, addition of new partitions, doors, sidelites, mechanical, lighting, power
& communications, paint and other finishes.
Bid documents will be available for download on July 18th, 2019, at the following websites:
• City of Renton at http://rentonwa.gov/bids
• Builders Exchange of Washington, Inc. at httr)://www.bxwa.com.
• Daily Journal of Commerce Plan Center at httr)://r)lancenter.doc.com
Questions about the project shall be addressed to, Kim Doyle, Mackenzie, 500 Union Street, Suite 410, Seattle,
WA, 98101, phone 206-749-9993, email kdoyle(a)-mcknze.com
Free-of-charge access to project bid documents (plans, specifications, addenda, and Bidders List) is provided to
Prime Bidders, Subcontractors, and Vendors by going to www.bxwa.com and clicking on "Posted Projects",
"Public Works", and "City of Renton". This online plan room provides Bidders with fully usable online
documents with the ability to: download, view, print, order full/partial plan sets from numerous reprographic
sources, and a free online digitizer/take-off tool. It is recommended that Bidders "Register" in order to receive
automatic e-mail notification of future addenda and to place themselves on the "Self-Registered Bidders
List". Bidders that do not register will not be automatically notified of addenda and will need to periodically
check the on-line plan room for addenda issued on this project. Contact Builders Exchange of Washington at
(425) 258-1303 should you require assistance with access or registration.
The City's fair practices/non-discrimination policies and the State of Washington prevailing wage rates are
applicable for this public works project located in King County. Bidders are responsible to verify and use the
most recent prevailing wage rates. The "Effective Date" for this project is the Bid Form due date above. The
applicable prevailing wage rates may be found on the Department of Labor& Industries website located at
httr)s:Hfortress.wa.aov/lni/waaelookur)/PrvWaaelookur).asr)x.
Bidders will be required to provide Bid security in the form of a Bid Bond of a sum no less than 5 percent of the
Bid Amount.
Refer to other bidding requirements described in Document 00 21 13- Instructions to Bidders.
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Job Number 2170712.00
00 11 13 - 1/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
Bidders are required to complete and submit Bid Form as described in Document 00 42 00 - Bid Form.
Your offer will be required to be submitted under a condition of irrevocability for a period of 60 days after
submission.
The City reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids and to waive informalities.
THE CITY OF RENTON
Jason Seth, City Clerk
Published:
Daily Journal of Commerce July 18, 2019
Daily Journal of Commerce July 25, 2019
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Job Number 2170712.00
0011 13 -2/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
CITY OF RENTON
MAIL TO: CITY CLERK 1055 GRADY WAY, RENTON, WA, 98057
HAND DELIVER TO: OFFICE OF THE CITY CLERK
SEVENTH FLOOR, RENTON CITY HALL
1055 GRADY WAY, RENTON, WA, 98057
BID FORM
In compliance with the contract documents, the following bid form is submitted:
1) BASE BID
1a) BASE BID:
(Written) (Numeric)
1 b) SALES TAX ON BASE BID (The combined sales tax rate for Renton, WA is 10%):
(Written) (Numeric)
1c) TOTAL BASE BID
(Written) (Numeric)
2) BID ALTERNATES
The undersigned proposes to perform work called for in the following alternates as indicated on the Contract
Documents for the following resulting additions and or deletions to the Basic Bid. The bidder agrees to hold the
following alternate bid prices for sixty (60) consecutive calendar days from the date designated for receipt of
bids.
A.1. Base Bid for Alternate No. 1
Change in Contract Time: Extend date for Substantial Completion.
ADDIDEDUCT $
(Numeric)
A.2. Sales Tax on Alternate No. 1 (The combined sales tax rate for Renton, WA is 10%):
ADDIDEDUCT $
(Numeric)
BID PROPOSAL FORM Job Number 2170712.02
00 00 03- 1/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
A.3. TOTAL FOR ALTERNATE No. 1: TOTAL ADD I DEDUCT $
(Numeric)
TIME FOR COMPLETION:
Contract Time-The undersigned hereby agrees to Substantially Complete all the work under the Base
Bid (and accepted Alternates) within by November 15, 2019(Base Bid) or December 13, 2019(if Alt.
No. 1 is accepted).
Final Completion — All the Work shall be fully and finally completed in accordance with the contract
documents within 30 calendar days after the date of Substantial Completion.
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
The undersigned agrees to pay the Owner as liquidated damages the sum of .;,- for each
consecutive calendar day that is in default after the Contract Time. Liquidated damages shall be
deducted from the contract invoice after taxes and retainage.
RECEIPT OF ADDENDA
Receipt of the following addenda is acknowledged:
Addendum No. Addendum No.
Addendum No. Addendum No.
Name of Firm
NOTE: If Bidder is a corporation, write State of Incorporation;if a partnership, give full names and addresses of all parties below.
Signed by Official Capacity
Print Name
Address
City State Zip Code
Date Telephone FAX
State of Washington Contractor's License No.
Federal Tax ID # E-mail address:
Employment Security Department No.
BID PROPOSAL FORM Job Number 2170712.02
00 00 03-2/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 00 0107
SEALS PAGE
ARCHITECT
MACKENZIE
BRETT HANSON 11w
REGISTERED
ARCHITECT
500 UNION STREET,#410
l
SEATTLE,WA 98101 son
IF w INGT
TELEPHONE: (206)749-9993
EMAIL: BHANSON@MCKNZE.COM
MECHANICAL ENGINEER
BCE ENGINEERS,INC R0BERrS
�4� WASy�L�'��
JOE SNYDER,P.E.
6021 12TH STREET EAST,SUITE 200
4 77$v
FIFE,WA 98424 R ���
NAI. ,ANC•
TELEPHONE: (253)922-0446
EMAIL: JOE.SNYDER@BCEENGINEERS.COM `
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER
BCE ENGINEERS,INC
IN
BEN HEDIN, P.E. =f
6021 12TH STREET EAST,SUITE 200
43255
FIFE,WA 98424 SCIy� C,R`
ONAL E 4I I Q
TELEPHONE: (253)922-0446 7' t
EMAIL: BEN.HEDIN@BCEENGINEERS.COM
Job Number 2170712.00 SEALS PAGE
CAG-19-196 0001 07- 1/2
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI — Bid Documents 15 July 2019
STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
Each Contractor bidding on work included in these Contract Documents shall prepare and submit the following
data:
1. Name of Bidder:
2. Business Address:
3. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under the present firm name?
4. Contracts now in hand. Number of Contracts:
Total Gross Amount$
5. Contracts not completed. Gross Amount$
6. General character of work performed by firm:
7. List at least two and up to four projects of a similar nature which have been completed by the Contractor
within the last ten years. List the client, the year the project was completed, and the gross dollar amount
of each project:
Gross Dollar Year
Amount Project Name, Client Name and Phone Number Completed
8. Identify the proposed superintendent for this project.
Name of Superintendent
Reference Phone Number
List 2 similar projects with reference and phone number
STATEMENT OF BIDDERS QUALIFICATIONS Job Number 2170712.00
00 42 00 - 1/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI — Bid Documents 15 July 2019
10. Have you changed bonding companies within the last three years?
If so, why?
12. Within the last five years, have you been sued by the client or have you ever sued the client or been a
party to a suit on any public works contract for a special district, school district, municipality, county or
state government?
Describe the nature of the suit.
Disposition of case, if settled:
Failure to complete this section in full shall be considered grounds for resection. Provide additional
pages if necessary.
13. Within the last five years, have you ever not completed a contract, or been replaced on a contract, for
any public works contract for a special district, school district, municipality, county or state government?
Describe the nature of problem.
Disposition of the problem if settled.
Failure to complete this section in full shall be considered grounds for resection. Provide additional
pages if necessary.
14. Bank references:
Company
Authorized Signature:
Title:
**END OF SECTION 00 42 00**
STATEMENT OF BIDDERS QUALIFICATIONS Job Number 2170712.00
00 42 00 -2/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
BID SUBMITTAL CHECK LIST
FORMS
Forms which must be submitted as a complete bid proposal are listed here:
1. Section 00 00 03- BID PROPOSAL FORM
2. Section 00 42 00—STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
3. Section 00 80 00 1 - BID BOND FORM
4. Section 00 80 00 4 -CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH WAGE PAYMENT STATUTES
3. Section 00 80 00 5 - NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
(Items 1-10 are to be completed prior to bid)
1. Have you included costs for each item in the Bid Form?
2. Has Bid Bond or Certified Check been enclosed with your Bid?
3. Is the amount of the bid guarantee at least 5% of the total amount of the Bid?
4. Has the proposal been properly signed?
5. Do written amounts of the bid proposal agree with amounts shown in figures?
6. Have you completed the Statement of Bidder's Qualifications?
7. Have you certified receipt of addenda?
8. Have you completed the Deposit or Bid Bond Form - Deposit Statement?
9. Are all of the Bid Forms included in a sealed and properly endorsed envelope?
**END OF SECTION**
BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST Job Number 2170712.00
0042 10- 1/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST Job Number 2170712.00
0042 10-2/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 00 43 36
PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM
PARTICULARS
1.01 HEREWITH IS THE LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS REFERENCED IN THE BID SUBMITTED BY:
1.02 (BIDDER)
1.03 TO(OWNER): CITY OF RENTON
1.04 DATED AND WHICH IS AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE BID FORM.
1.05 THE FOLLOWING WORK WILL BE PERFORMED(OR PROVIDED)BY SUBCONTRACTORS AND COORDINATED
BY US:
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
2.01 WORK SUBJECT SUBCONTRACTOR NAME
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM
CAG-19-196 00 43 36 - 1/2
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM Job Number 2170712.00
00 43 36-2/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
DOCUMENT 00 7200 - GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
CONTENTS
Section Description
Paqe
PART 1 -GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 Definitions................................................................................................. 3
1.2 Order of Precedence................................................................................... 4
1.3 Execution and Intent................................................................................... 5
PART 2-INSURANCE AND BONDS
2.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance...................................................................... 5
2.2 Coverage Limits......................................................................................... 6
2.3 Insurance Coverage Certificates.................................................................... 6
2.4 Payment and Performance Bonds.................................................................. 6
2.5 Alternative Surety....................................................................................... 7
2.6 Builders Risk............................................................................................. 7
PART 3-TIME AND SCHEDULE
3.1 Progress and Completion............................................................................. 8
3.2 Construction Schedule................................................................................. 8
3.3 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work for Convenience......................................... 8
3.4 Owner's Right to Stop the Work for Cause....................................................... 9
3.5 Delay....................................................................................................... 9
3.6 Notice to Owner of Labor Disputes................................................................. 10
3.7 Damages for Failure to Achieve Timely Completion........................................... 10
PART 4-SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS
4.1 Discrepancies and Contract Document Review................................................. 11
4.2 Project Record........................................................................................... 11
4.3 Shop Drawings........................................................................................... 11
4.4 Organization of Specifications........................................................................ 12
4.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications & other Documents...................... 12
PART 5-PERFORMANCE
5.1 Contractor Control and Supervision................................................................ 13
5.2 Permits, Fees and Notices............................................................................ 14
5.3 Patents and Royalties.................................................................................. 14
5.4 Prevailing Wages........................................................................................ 14
5.5 Hours of Labor........................................................................................... 15
5.6 Nondiscrimination....................................................................................... 15
5.7 Safety Precautions...................................................................................... 16
5.8 Operations, Material Handling, and Storage Areas............................................. 17
5.9 Prior Notice of Excavation............................................................................. 18
5.10 Unforeseen Physical Conditions..................................................................... 18
5.11 Protection of Existing Structures, Equipment, Vegetation, Utilities, & Improvements. 18
5.12 Layout of Work........................................................................................... 19
5.13 Material and Equipment................................................................................ 19
5.14 Availability and Use of Utility Services............................................................. 19
5.15 Tests and Inspections.................................................................................. 19
5.16 Correction of Nonconforming Work................................................................. 20
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2170712.00
00 72 00 - 1/48 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
5.17 Clean Up................................................................................................... 21
5.18 Access to Work.......................................................................................... 21
5.19 Other Contracts.......................................................................................... 21
5.20 Subcontractors and Suppliers........................................................................ 21
5.21 Warranty of Construction.............................................................................. 23
5.22 Indemnification........................................................................................... 23
PART 6- PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
6.1 Contract Sum............................................................................................. 24
6.2 Schedule of Values..................................................................................... 24
6.3 Application for Payment................................................................................ 24
6.4 Progress Payments..................................................................................... 25
6.5 Payments Withheld..................................................................................... 25
6.6 Retainage and Bond Claim Rights.................................................................. 26
6.7 Substantial Completion................................................................................. 26
6.8 Prior Occupancy......................................................................................... 26
6.9 Final Completion, Acceptance, and Payment.................................................... 26
PART 7-CHANGES
7.1 Change in the Work.................................................................................... 26
7.2 Change in the Contract Sum......................................................................... 28
7.3 Change in the Contract Time......................................................................... 33
PART 8-CLAIMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION
8.1 Claims Procedure....................................................................................... 35
8.2 Arbitration................................................................................................. 36
8.3 Claims Audits............................................................................................. 36
PART 9-TERMINATION OF THE WORK
9.1 Termination by Owner for Cause.................................................................... 38
9.2 Termination by Owner for Convenience........................................................... 39
PART 10- MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
10.1 Governing Law........................................................................................... 39
10.2 Successors and Assigns.............................................................................. 40
10.3 Meaning of Words....................................................................................... 40
10.4 Rights and Remedies................................................................................... 40
10.5 Contractor Registration................................................................................. 40
10.6 Time Computations..................................................................................... 40
10.7 Records Retention....................................................................................... 40
10.8 Third-Party Agreements............................................................................... 41
10.9 Antitrust Assignments.................................................................................. 41
10.10 Headings and Captions................................................................................ 41
PART 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1 DEFINITIONS
A. "Application for Payment" means a written request submitted by Contractor to A/E for payment of
Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and approved Schedule of Values,
supported by such substantiating data as Owner or A/E may require.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2170712.00
00 72 00 -2/48 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. "Architect," "Engineer," or"A/E" means a person or entity lawfully entitled to practice architecture or
engineering, representing Owner within the limits of its delegated authority.
C. "Change Order" means a written instrument signed by Owner and Contractor stating their agreement
upon all of the following: (1) a change in the Work; (2) the amount of the adjustment in the Contract
Sum, if any, and (3) the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any.
D. "Claim" means Contractor's exclusive remedy for resolving disputes with Owner regarding the terms
of a Change Order or a request for equitable adjustment, as more fully set forth in Part8.
E. "Contract Award Amount" is the sum of the Base Bid and any accepted Alternates.
F. "Contract Documents" means the Advertisement for Bids, Instructions for Bidders, completed Bid
Form, General Conditions, Modifications to the General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Public
Works Contract, other Special Forms, Drawings and Specifications, and all addenda and
modifications thereof.
G. "Contract Sum" is the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor, for performance of the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents, including all taxes imposed by law and properly chargeable
to the Work, except Washington State sales tax.
H. "Contract Time" is the number of calendar days allotted in the Contract Documents for achieving
Substantial Completion of the Work.
I. "Contractor" means the person or entity who has agreed with Owner to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
J. "Da s : Unless otherwise specified, day(s) shall mean calendarday(s)."
K. "Drawings" are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design,
location, and dimensions of the Work, and may include plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules,
and diagrams.
L. "Final Acceptance" means the written acceptance issued to Contractor by Owner after Contractor has
completed the requirements of the Contract Documents, as more fully set forth in Section
6.09 B.
M. "Final Completion" means that the Work is fully and finally complete in accordance with the Contract
Documents, as more fully set forth in Section 6.09 A.
N. "Force Maieure" means those acts entitling Contractor to request an equitable adjustment in the
Contract Time, as more fully set forth in paragraph 3.05A.
O. "Notice" means a written notice which has been delivered in person to the individual or a member of
the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended or, if delivered or sent by
registered or certified mail, to the last business address known to the party giving notice.
P. "Notice to Proceed" means a notice from Owner to Contractor that defines the date on which the
Contract Time begins.
Q. "Owner" means the City of Renton, or its authorized representative with the authority to enter
into, administer, and/or terminate the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and
make related determinations and findings.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2170712.00
00 72 00 -3/48 CAG-19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
R. "Person" means a corporation, partnership, business association of any kind, trust, company, or
individual.
S. "Prior Occupancy" means Owner's use of all or parts of the Project before Substantial
Completion, as more fully set forth in Section 6.08 A.
T. "Progress Schedule" means a schedule of the Work, in a form satisfactory to Owner, as further
set forth in Section 3.02.
U. "Project" means the total construction of which the Work performed in accordance with the
Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by Owner or
by separate contractors.
V. "Project Manual" means the volume usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding
requirements, sample forms, and other Contract Documents.
W.
"Project Manager" means the Owners designated manager for the project with authority to direct
the Contractor and to approve or disapprove the Work.
X. "Project Record" means the separate set of Drawings and Specifications as further set forth in
paragraph 4.02A.
Y. "Schedule of Values" means a written breakdown allocating the total Contract Sum to each
principal category of Work, in such detail as requested by Owner.
Z. "Specifications" are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements
for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and
performance of related services.
AA. "Subcontract" means a contract entered into by Subcontractor for the purpose of obtaining
supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any kind for or in connection with the Work.
BB. "Subcontractor" means any person, other than Contractor, who agrees to furnish or furnishes any
supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any kind in connection with the Work.
AA. "Substantial Completion" means that stage in the progress of the Work when the construction is
sufficiently complete, as more fully set forth in Section 6.07.
AB. "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, and includes,
but is not limited to, labor, materials, supplies, equipment, services, permits, and the manufacture
and fabrication of components, performed, furnished, or provided in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
1.2 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE
Any conflict or inconsistency in the Contract Documents shall be resolved by giving the documents
precedence in the following order:
1. Change Orders
2. Owner Issued Clarifications
3. Signed Public Works Contract
4. Section 00 72 00 - General Conditions
5. Project Manual--provisions in Division 0 shall take precedence over provisions of any
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -4/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
other Division.
6. Project Manual--provisions in Division 1 shall take precedence over subsequent divisions.
7. Drawings--in case of conflict within the Drawings, large scale drawings shall take
precedence over small scale drawings.
8. Technical Specifications
9. Signed and Completed Bid Form.
10. Instructions to Bidders.
11. Advertisement for Bids.
1.3 EXECUTION AND INTENT
Contractor Representations: Contractor makes the following representations to Owner:
1. Contract Sum reasonable: The Contract Sum is reasonable compensation for the Work and the
Contract Time is adequate for the performance of the Work, as represented by the Contract
Documents;
2. Contractor familiar with project: Contractor has carefully reviewed the Contract Documents, visited
and examined the Project site, become familiar with the local conditions in which the Work is to be
performed, and satisfied itself as to the nature, location, character, quality and quantity of the
Work, the labor, materials, equipment, goods, supplies, work, services and other items to be
furnished and all other requirements of the Contract Documents, as well as the surface and
subsurface conditions and other matters that may be encountered at the Project site or affect
performance of the Work or the cost or difficulty thereof;
3. Contractor financially capable: Contractor is financially solvent, able to pay its debts as they
mature, and possesses sufficient working capital to complete the Work and perform Contractor's
obligations required by the Contract Documents;and
4. Contractor can complete Work: Contractor is able to furnish the plant, tools, materials, supplies,
equipment and labor required to complete the Work and perform the obligations required by the
Contract Documents and has sufficient experience and competence to do so.
PART 2 — INSURANCE AND BONDS
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
General insurance requirements: Prior to commencement of the Work, Contractor shall obtain all
the insurance required by the Contract Documents and provide evidence satisfactory to Owner
that such insurance has been procured. Review of the Contractor's insurance by Owner shall not
relieve or decrease the liability of Contractor. Companies writing the insurance to be obtained by
this part shall be licensed to do business under Chapter 48 RCW or comply with the Surplus Lines
Law of the City of Renton. Contractor shall include in its bid the cost of all insurance and bond
costs required to complete the base bid work and accepted alternates. Insurance carriers
providing insurance in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be acceptable to Owner.
A. Term of insurance coverage: Contractor shall maintain the following insurance coverage
during the Work and for one year after Final Acceptance, with the exception of Professional
Liability insurance, when required, which shall be maintained for a minimum of three years.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -5/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
Contractor shall also maintain the following insurance coverage during the performance of any
corrective Work required by Section 5.16.
1. Commercial General Liability Insurance: Commercial General Liability (CGL) on an
Occurrence Form. Coverage shall include, but not be limited to:
a. Completed operations/products liability;
b. Explosion, collapse, and underground, when applicable to the work being performed;
and
C. Stop loss coverage applicable to the State of Washington.
2. Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance: Required if a commercial vehicle will be used
in performance of work or delivery of products by the contractor, beyond normal commutes.
3. Professional Liability: Required if professional services (e.g. architect, engineering,
surveying, legal, or medical) are being provided to the Owner and if those professional
services are excluded from the CGL policy. Coverage may be on a Claims Made basis, if
coverage is maintain at least 3-years beyond the conclusion of work.
4. Excess Liability or Umbrella: Required if needed to reach minimum CGL or auto liability
coverage limits.
5. Builders Risk—When applicable to the work being performed, is required up to the amount
of the completed value of a new building or major construction project, with no coinsurance
provisions. See section 2.6.
6. Pollution Liability— Required if work involves a pollution risk to the environment. Coverage
may be included in other required policies.
B. Industrial Insurance compliance (Workers' Compensation): Contractor shall comply with the
Washington State Industrial Insurance Act and, if applicable, the Federal Longshoremen's and
Harbor Workers'Act and the Jones Act.
C. Insurance to protect for the following: All insurance coverages shall protect against claims for
damages for personal and bodily injury or death, as well as claims for property damage, which
may arise from operations in connection with the Work whether such operations are by
Contractor or any Subcontractor.
D. Owner as Additional Insured: Name the City of Renton as a Primary and Non-contributory
Additional Insured on the policy (only applies to Commercial General, Auto Liability,
Excess/Umbrella, when applicable).
E. Insurance certificate requirements and minimum limits may be waived or modified by the Risk
Manager or with Risk Manager approval.
2.2 COVERAGE LIMITS
Insurance amounts: The minimum coverage limits shall be as follows for applicable required
insurance:
A. Limits of General Liability shall not be less than $1,000,000 per each Occurrence; including
Personal Injury and Advertising Liability for Each Occurrence and $2,000,000 Annual
Aggregate
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 - 6/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit for Automobile Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability,
Each Accident or Loss.
C. $1,000,000 for Professional Liability.
D. $1,000,000 for Pollution Liability.
E. The Owner does not represent that the minimum required insurance coverage or limits are
adequate to protect the vendor/contractor/consultant from all liabilities.
2.3 INSURANCE COVERAGE CERTIFICATES
A. Certificate required: Prior to commencement of the Work, Contractor shall furnish to Owner a
completed and acceptable certificate of insurance coverage showing all required insurance
coverage.
B. List Project info: All insurance certificates shall name Owner as the certificate holder. The
certificate holder should read:
City of Renton
ATTN: Kelsey Ternes
1055 South Grady Way
Renton, WA. 98057
C. Cancellation provisions: The Owner shall be provided with written notice of any policy
cancellation within a minimum of two business days of receipt of such notice by the policy
holder.
2.4 PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BONDS
Conditions for bonds: Payment and performance bonds for 100% of the Contract Award Amount,
plus state sales tax, shall be furnished for the Work, using the City of Renton Contract Bond Form
provided. Prior to execution of a Change Order that, cumulatively with previous Change Orders,
increases the Contract Award Amount by 15% or more, the Contractor shall provide either new
payment and performance bonds for the revised Contract Sum, or riders to the existing payment
and performance bonds increasing the amount of the bonds. The Contractor shall likewise provide
additional bonds or riders when subsequent Change Orders increase the Contract Sum by 15% or
more. No payment or performance bond is required if the Contract Sum is $35,000 or less and
Contractor agrees that Owner may, in lieu of the bond, retain 50% of the Contract Sum for the
period allowed by RCW 39.08.010.
2.5 ALTERNATIVE SURETY
When alternative surety required: Contractor shall promptly furnish payment and performance
bonds from an alternative surety as required to protect Owner and persons supplying labor or
materials required by the Contract Documents if:
A. Owner has a reasonable objection to the surety;or
B. Any surety fails to furnish reports on its financial condition if required by Owner.
2.6 BUILDER'S RISK
A. Contractor to buy Builders Risk Insurance:, Contractor shall purchase and maintain Builders
Risk insurance in the amount of the Contract Sum including all Change Orders for the Work on
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 - 7/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
a replacement cost basis until Substantial Completion. The insurance shall cover the interest
of Owner, Contractor, and any Subcontractors, as their interests may appear.
B. Losses covered: Contractor property insurance shall be placed on an "all risk" basis and insure
against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including theft,
vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false work, temporary buildings, debris removal
including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and
shall cover reasonable compensation for A/E's services and expenses required as a result of
an insured loss.
C. Waiver of subrogation rights: Owner and Contractor waive all subrogation rights against each
other, any Subcontractors, A/E, A/E's sub-consultants, separate contractors described in
Section 5.20, if any, and any of their subcontractors, for damages caused by fire or other perils
to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this section or other property
insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such
insurance held by Owner as fiduciary. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation
by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective to a person or entity
even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual
or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the
person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged.
PART 3 - TIME AND SCHEDULE
3.1 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
Contractor to meet schedule: Contractor shall diligently prosecute the Work, with adequate forces,
achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time, and achieve Final Completion within a
reasonable period thereafter.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Preliminary Progress Schedule: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1, Contractor shall, within
14 Days after issuance of the Notice to Proceed, submit a preliminary Progress Schedule. The
Progress Schedule shall show the sequence in which Contractor proposes to perform the Work,
and the dates on which Contractor plans to start and finish major portions of the Work, including
dates for shop drawings and other submittals, and for acquiring materials and equipment.
1. The Schedule Duration shall be based on the Contract Time of Completion listed on the Bid
Form. The Owner shall not be obligated to accept any Early Completion Schedule suggested
by the Contractor. The Contract Time for Completion shall establish the Schedule Completion
Date.
2. If the Contractor feels that the work can be completed in less than the Specified Contract
Time, then the Surplus Time shall be considered Project Float. This Float time shall be
shown on the Project Schedule. It shall be available to accommodate changes in the work
and unforeseen conditions. Neither the Contractor nor the Owner have exclusive right to this
Float Time. It belongs to the project.
B. Form of Progress Schedule: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1, the Progress Schedule
shall be in the form of a bar chart, or a critical path method analysis, as specified by Owner. The
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -8/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
preliminary Progress Schedule may be general, showing the major portions of the Work, with a
more detailed Progress Schedule submitted as directed by Owner.
C. Owner comments on Progress Schedule: Owner shall return comments on the preliminary
Progress Schedule to Contractor within 14 Days of receipt. Review by Owner of Contractor's
schedule does not constitute an approval or acceptance of Contractor's construction means,
methods, or sequencing, or its ability to complete the Work within the Contract Time. Contractor
shall revise and resubmit its schedule, as necessary. Owner may withhold a portion of progress
payments until a Progress Schedule has been submitted which meets the requirements of this
section.
D. Monthly updates and compliance with Progress Schedule: Contractor shall utilize and comply
with the Progress Schedule. On a monthly basis, or as otherwise directed by Owner, Contractor
shall submit an updated Progress Schedule at its own expense to Owner indicating actual
progress. If, in the opinion of Owner, Contractor is not in conformance with the Progress
Schedule for reasons other than acts of Force Majeure as identified in Section 3.05, Contractor
shall take such steps as are necessary to bring the actual completion dates of its work activities
into conformance with the Progress Schedule, and if directed by Owner, Contractor shall submit a
corrective action plan or revise the Progress Schedule to reconcile with the actual progress of the
Work.
E. Contractor to notify Owner of delays: Contractor shall promptly notify Owner in writing of any
actual or anticipated event which is delaying or could delay achievement of any milestone or
performance of any critical path activity of the Work. Contractor shall indicate the expected
duration of the delay, the anticipated effect of the delay on the Progress Schedule, and the action
being or to be taken to correct the problem. Provision of such notice does not relieve Contractor
of its obligation to complete the Work within the Contract Time.
3.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK FOR CONVENIENCE
A. Owner may suspend Work: Owner may, at its sole discretion, order Contractor, in writing, to
suspend all or any part of the Work for up to 90 Days, or for such longer period as mutually
agreed.
B. Compliance with suspension; Owner's options: Upon receipt of a written notice suspending the
Work, Contractor shall immediately comply with its terms and take all reasonable steps to
minimize the incurrence of cost of performance directly attributable to such suspension. Within a
period up to 90 Days after the notice is delivered to Contractor, or within any extension of that
period to which the parties shall have agreed, Owner shall either:
1. Cancel the written notice suspending the Work; or
2. Terminate the Work covered by the notice as provided in the termination provisions of
Part 9.
C. Resumption of Work: If a written notice suspending the Work is cancelled or the period of the
notice or any extension thereof expires, Contractor shall resume Work.
D. Equitable Adjustment for suspensions: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in
the Contract Time, or Contract Sum, or both, for increases in the time or cost of performance
directly attributable to such suspension, provided Contractor complies with all requirements
set forth in Part 7.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -9/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK FOR CAUSE
A. Owner may stop Work for Contractor's failure to perform: If Contractor fails or refuses to perform
its obligations in accordance with the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor, in
writing, to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until satisfactory corrective action has been
taken.
B. No Equitable Adjustment for Contractor's failure to perform: Contractor shall not be entitled to an
equitable adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum for any increased cost or time of
performance attributable to Contractor's failure or refusal to perform or from any reasonable
remedial action taken by Owner based upon such failure.
3.5 DELAY
A. Force Majeure actions not a default; Force Majeure defined: Any delay in or failure of
performance by Owner or Contractor, other than the payment of money, shall not constitute a
default hereunder if and to the extent the cause for such delay or failure of performance was
unforeseeable and beyond the control of the party ("Force Majeure"). Acts of Force Majeure
include, but are not limited to:
1. Acts of God or the public enemy;
2. Acts or omissions of any government entity;
3. Fire or other casualty for which Contractor is not responsible;
4. Quarantine or epidemic;
5. Strike or defensive lockout;
6. Unusually severe weather conditions which could not have been reasonably anticipated;
and
7. Unusual delay in receipt of supplies or products which were ordered and expedited and
for which no substitute reasonably acceptable to Owner was available.
B. Contract Time adjustment for Force Majeure: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Time for changes in the time of performance directly attributable to an
act of Force Majeure, provided it makes a request for equitable adjustment according to Section
7.03. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum resulting from an act
of Force Majeure.
C. Contract Time or Contract Sum adjustment if Owner at fault: Contractor shall be entitled to an
equitable adjustment in Contract Time, and may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in
Contract Sum, if the cost or time of Contractor's performance is changed due to the fault or
negligence of Owner, provided the Contractor makes a request according to Sections 7.02 and
7.03.
D. No Contract Time or Contract Sum adjustment if Contractor at fault: Contractor shall not be
entitled to an adjustment in Contract Time or in the Contract Sum for any delay or failure of
performance to the extent such delay or failure was caused by Contractor or anyone for whose
acts Contractor is responsible.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 - 10/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
E. Contract Time adjustment only for concurrent fault: To the extent any delay or failure of
performance was concurrently caused by the Owner and Contractor, Contractor shall be entitled
to an adjustment in the Contract Time for that portion of the delay or failure of performance that
was concurrently caused, provided it makes a request for equitable adjustment according to
Section 7.03, but shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Sum.
F. Contractor to mitigate delay impacts: Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to prevent and
mitigate the effects of any delay, whether occasioned by an act of Force Majeure or otherwise.
3.6 NOTICE TO OWNER OF LABOR DISPUTES
A. Contractor to notify Owner of labor disputes: If Contractor has knowledge that any actual or
potential labor dispute is delaying or threatens to delay timely performance in accordance with the
Contract Documents, Contractor shall immediately give notice, including all relevant information,
to Owner.
B. Pass through notification provisions to Subcontractors: Contractor agrees to insert a provision in
its Subcontracts and to require insertion in all sub-subcontracts, that in the event timely
performance of any such contract is delayed or threatened by delay by any actual or potential
labor dispute, the Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor shall immediately notify the next higher tier
Subcontractor or Contractor, as the case may be, of all relevant information concerning the
dispute.
3.7 DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO ACHIEVE TIMELY COMPLETION
A. Liquidated Damages
1. Reason for Liquidated Damages: Timely performance and completion of the Work is
essential to Owner and time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence.
Owner will incur serious and substantial damages if Substantial Completion of the Work
does not occur within the Contract Time. However, it would be difficult if not impossible
to determine the exact amount of such damages. Consequently, provisions for liquidated
damages are included in the Contract Documents.
2. Calculation of Liquidated Damages amount: The liquidated damage amounts set forth in
the Contract Documents will be assessed not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for
breach of the Contract Documents. This amount is fixed and agreed upon by and
between the Contractor and Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty
of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain.
This amount shall be construed as the actual amount of damages sustained by the
Owner, and may be retained by the Owner and deducted from periodic payments to the
Contractor.
3. Contractor responsible even if Liquidated Damages assessed: Assessment of liquidated
damages shall not release Contractor from any further obligations or liabilities pursuant to
the Contract Documents.
B. Actual Damages
Calculation of Actual Damages: Actual damages will be assessed for failure to achieve Final
Completion within the time provided. Actual damages will be calculated on the basis of direct
architectural, administrative, and other related costs attributable to the Project from the date when
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 - 1 1/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
Final Completion should have been achieved, based on the date Substantial Completion is
actually achieved, to the date Final Completion is actually achieved. Owner may offset these
costs against any payment due Contractor.
PART 4 - SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS
4.1 DISCREPANCIES AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT REVIEW
A. Specifications and Drawings are basis of the Work: The intent of the Specifications and Drawings
is to describe a complete Project to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, transportation, permits, and
supplies, and perform the Work required in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and
other provisions of the Contract Documents.
B. Parts of the Contract Documents are complementary: The Contract Documents are
complementary. What is required by one part of the Contract Documents shall be binding as if
required by all. Anything mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or
shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown
or mentioned in both.
C. Contractor to report discrepancies in Contract Documents: Contractor shall carefully study and
compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by Owner. If,
during the performance of the Work, Contractor finds a conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission in
the Contract Documents, it shall promptly and before proceeding with the Work affected thereby,
report such conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission to Owner in writing.
D. Contractor knowledge of discrepancy in documents— responsibility: Contractor shall do no Work
without applicable Drawings, Specifications, or written modifications, or Shop Drawings where
required, unless instructed to do so in writing by Owner. If Contractor performs any construction
activity, and it knows or reasonably should have known that any of the Contract Documents
contain a conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission, Contractor shall be responsible for the
performance and shall bear the cost for its correction.
E. Contractor to perform Work implied by Contract Documents: Contractor shall provide any work or
materials the provision of which is clearly implied and is within the scope of the Contract
Documents even if the Contract Documents do not mention them specifically.
F. Interpretation questions referred to Owner: Questions regarding interpretation of the requirements
of the Contract Documents shall be referred to the Owner.
4.2 PROJECT RECORD
A. Contractor to maintain Project Record Drawings and Specifications: Contractor shall legibly mark
in ink on a separate set of the Drawings and Specifications all actual construction, including
horizontal and vertical locations of sub-structural materials referenced to permanent visible and
accessible surface improvements, field changes of dimensions and details, actual suppliers,
manufacturers and trade names, models of installed equipment, and Change Order Proposals
(COP). This separate set of Drawings and Specifications shall be the "Project Record."
B. Update Project Record weekly and keep on site: The Project Record shall be maintained on the
project site throughout the construction and shall be clearly labeled "PROJECT RECORD." The
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 - 12/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
Project Record shall be updated at least weekly noting all changes and shall be available to
Owner at all times.
C. Final Project Record to Owner before Final Acceptance: Contractor shall submit the completed
and finalized Project Record to Owner prior to Final Acceptance
4.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Definition of Shop Drawings: "Shop Drawings" means documents and other information required
to be submitted to Owner by Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents, showing in detail:
the proposed fabrication and assembly of structural elements; and the installation (i.e. form, fit,
and attachment details) of materials and equipment. Shop Drawings include, but are not limited
to, drawings, diagrams, layouts, schematics, descriptive literature, illustrations, schedules,
performance and test data, samples, and similar materials furnished by Contractor to explain in
detail specific portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents. For materials and
equipment to be incorporated into the Work, Contractor submittal shall include the name of the
manufacturer, the model number, and other information concerning the performance, capacity,
nature, and rating of the item. When directed, Contractor shall submit all samples at its own
expense. Owner may duplicate, use, and disclose Shop Drawings provided in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
B. Approval of Shop Drawings by Contractor and A/E: Contractor shall coordinate all Shop
Drawings, and review them for accuracy, completeness, and compliance with the Contract
Documents and shall indicate its approval thereon as evidence of such coordination and review.
Where required by law, Shop Drawings shall be stamped by an appropriate professional licensed
by the City of Renton. Shop Drawings submitted to A/E without evidence of Contractor's approval
shall be returned for resubmission. Contractor shall review, approve, and submit Shop Drawings
with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the
activities of Owner or separate contractors. Contractor's submittal schedule shall allow a
reasonable time for A/E review. A/E will review, approve, or take other appropriate action on the
Shop Drawings. Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of
Shop Drawings until the respective submittal has been reviewed and the A/E has approved or
taken other appropriate action. A/E shall respond to Shop Drawing submittals with reasonable
promptness. Any Work by Contractor shall be in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings.
Submittals made by Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be
returned without action.
C. Contractor not relieved of responsibility when Shop Drawings approved: Approval, or other
appropriate action with regard to Shop Drawings, A/E shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility
for any errors or omissions in such Shop Drawings, nor from responsibility for compliance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. Unless specified in the Contract Documents, review by
A/E shall not constitute an approval of the safety precautions employed by Contractor during
construction, or constitute an approval of Contractor's means or methods of construction. If
Contractor fails to obtain approval before installation and the item or work is subsequently
rejected, Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of correction.
D. Variations between Shop Drawings and Contract Documents: If Shop Drawings show variations
from the requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall describe such variations in
writing, separate from the Shop Drawings, at the time it submits the Shop Drawings containing
such variations. If A/E approves any such variation, an appropriate Change Order will be issued.
If the variation is minor and does not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,
a Change Order need not be issued; however, the modification shall be recorded upon the
Project Record.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 - 13/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
E. Contractor to submit electronic files of Shop Drawings: Unless otherwise provided in Division 1,
Contractor shall submit to Owner for approval electronic files of all Shop Drawings. Unless
otherwise indicated, a reviewed electronic file shall be returned to Contractor.
4.4 ORGANIZATION OF SPECIFICATIONS
Specification organization by trade: Specifications are prepared in sections which conform generally to
trade practices. These sections are for Owner and Contractor convenience and shall not control
Contractor in dividing the Work among the Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of the Work to be
performed by any trade.
4.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS
A. The City/Owner not Contractor, owns Copyright of Drawings and Specifications: The Drawings,
Specifications, and other documents prepared by A/E are instruments of A/E's contracted service
to the City through which the Work to be executed by Contractor is described. Neither Contractor
nor any Subcontractor shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications, and other
documents prepared by A/E, and A/E shall be deemed the author of them and will, along with any
rights of Owner, retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights, in addition to the
copyright. All copies of these documents, except Contractor's set, shall be returned or suitably
accounted for to A/E, on request, upon completion of the Work.
B. Drawings and Specifications to be used only for this Project: The Drawings, Specifications, and
other documents prepared by the A/E, and copies thereof furnished to Contractor, are for use
solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by Contractor or any Subcontractor on
other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific
written consent of Owner and A/E. Contractor and Subcontractors are granted a limited license
to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications, and other documents
prepared by A/E appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work.
C. Shop Drawing license granted to Owner: Contractor and all Subcontractors grant a non-exclusive
license to Owner, without additional cost or royalty, to use for its own purposes (including
reproduction) all Shop Drawings, together with the information and diagrams contained therein,
prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor. In providing Shop Drawings, Contractor and all
Subcontractors warrant that they have authority to grant to Owner a license to use the Shop
Drawings, and that such license is not in violation of any copyright or other intellectual property
right. Contractor agrees to defend and indemnify Owner pursuant to the indemnity provisions in
Section 5.03 and 5.22 from any violations of copyright or other intellectual property rights arising
out of Owner's use of the Shop Drawings hereunder, or to secure for Owner, at Contractor's own
cost, licenses in conformity with this section.
D. Shop Drawings to be used only for this Project: The Shop Drawings and other submittals
prepared by Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier, or its or their equipment or material suppliers,
and copies thereof furnished to Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They
are not to be used by Contractor or any Subcontractor of any tier, or material or equipment
supplier, on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without
the specific written consent of Owner. The Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier, and material or
equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the
Shop Drawings and other submittals appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work
under the Contract Documents.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 - 14/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PART 5 - PERFORMANCE
5.1 CONTRACTOR CONTROL AND SUPERVISION
A. Contractor responsible for Means and Methods of construction: Contractor shall supervise and
direct the Work, using its best skill and attention, and shall perform the Work in a skillful
manner. Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work,
unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters.
Contractor shall disclose its means and methods of construction when requested by Owner.
B. Competent Superintendent required: Performance of the Work shall be directly supervised by a
competent superintendent who has authority to act for Contractor. The superintendent must be
satisfactory to the Owner and shall not be changed without the prior written consent of Owner.
Owner may require Contractor to remove the superintendent from the Work or Project site, if
Owner reasonably deems the superintendent incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable,
provided Owner has first notified Contractor in writing and allowed a reasonable period for
transition.
C. Contractor responsible for acts and omissions of self and agents: Contractor shall be responsible
to Owner for acts and omissions of Contractor, Subcontractors, and their employees and agents.
D. Contractor to employ competent and disciplined workforce: Contractor shall enforce strict
discipline and good order among all of the Contractor's employees and other persons performing
the Work. Contractor shall not permit employment of persons not skilled in tasks assigned to
them. Contractor's employees shall at all times conduct business in a manner which assures fair,
equal, and nondiscriminatory treatment of all persons. Owner may, by written notice, request
Contractor to remove from the Work or Project site any employee Owner reasonably deems
incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable.
E. Contractor to keep project documents on site: Contractor shall keep on the Project site a copy of
the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, reviewed Shop Drawings, and permits and permit
drawings.
F. Contractor to comply with ethical standards: Contractor shall ensure that its owner(s) and
employees, and those of its Subcontractors, comply with the Ethics in Public Service Act RCW
42.52, which, among other things, prohibits state employees from having an economic interest in
any public works contract that was made by, or supervised by, that employee. Contractor shall
remove, at its sole cost and expense, any of its, or its Subcontractors' employees, if they are in
violation of this act.
5.2 PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES
A. Permits: Owner will obtain and pay for the Land Use Permit, General Building Permit, Civil
Construction Permit and Signage permit. All other permits and fees required to execute the work
shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. Prior to Final Acceptance, the approved, signed
permits shall be delivered to Owner.
B. Contractor to comply with all applicable laws: Contractor shall comply with and give notices
required by all federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of
public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 - 15/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
5.3 PATENTS AND ROYALTIES
Payment, indemnification, and notice: Contractor is responsible for, and shall pay, all royalties and license
fees. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold Owner harmless from any costs, expenses, and
liabilities arising out of the infringement by Contractor of any patent, copyright, or other intellectual
property right used in the Work; however, provided that Contractor gives prompt notice, Contractor shall
not be responsible for such defense or indemnity when a particular design, process, or product of a
particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. If Contractor has reason
to believe that use of the required design, process, or product constitutes an infringement of a patent or
copyright, it shall promptly notify Owner of such potential infringement
5.4 PREVAILING WAGES
A. Contractor to pay Prevailing Wages: Contractor shall pay the prevailing rate of wages to all
workers, laborers, or mechanics employed in the performance of any part of the Work in
accordance with RCW 39.12 and the rules and regulations of the Washington Department of
Labor and Industries or the federal Davis-Bacon Act Prevailing Wage Rates, as amended (40
U.SC 3141-3148); whichever is greater. The schedule of prevailing wage rates for the locality
of localities of the Work, is determined by the industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor
and Industries:
The State of Washington prevailing wage rates applicable for this public works project, which is in
King County, may be found at the following website address of the Department of Labor and
Industries: http://www.Ini.wa.qov/TradesLicensinq/PrevWageMageRates
Pursuant to WAC 296-127-011, the applicable effective date for prevailing wage rates paid for the
duration of this contract shall be submitted.
Upon request, the City will provide a copy of the applicable prevailing wages for this project.
Alternatively, the rates may be viewed at the City of Renton City Hall by making an appointment
with the contact person identified herein or prior to contract award with the contact person
identified in the solicitation for bids.
B. Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages: Before payment is made by the Owner to the
Contractor for any work performed by the Contractor and subcontractors whose work is included
in the application for payment, the Contractor shall submit, or shall have previously submitted to
the Owner for the Project, a Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages, approved by the
Department of Labor and Industries, certifying the rate of hourly wage paid and to be paid each
classification of laborers, workers, or mechanics employed upon the Work by Contractor and
Subcontractors. Such rates of hourly wage shall not be less than the prevailing wage rate.
C. Affidavit of Wages Paid: Prior to release of retainage, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner
an Affidavit of Wages Paid, approved by the Department of Labor and Industries, for the
Contractor and every subcontractor, of any tier, that performed work on the Project.
D. Disputes: Disputes regarding prevailing wage rates shall be referred for arbitration to the Director
of the Department of Labor and Industries. The arbitration decision shall be final and conclusive
and binding on all parties involved in the dispute as provided for by RCW 39.12.060.
E. Statement with pay application; Post Statements of Intent at mob site: Each Application for
Payment submitted by Contractor shall state that prevailing wages have been paid in accordance
with the pre-filed statement(s) of intent, as approved. Copies of the approved intent statement(s)
shall be posted on the job site with the address and telephone number of the Industrial
Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries where a complaint or inquiry concerning
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 - 1 6/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
prevailing wages may be made.
F. Contractor to pay for Statements of Intent and Affidavits: In compliance with chapter 296-127
WAC, Contractor shall pay to the Department of Labor and Industries the currently established
fee(s) for each statement of intent and/or affidavit of wages paid submitted to the Department of
Labor and Industries for certification.
G. Certified Payrolls: Consistent with WAC 296-127-320, the Contractor and any subcontractor shall
submit a certified copy of payroll records if requested.
5.5 HOURS OF LABOR
A. Overtime: Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of RCW 49.28 and they are
incorporated herein by reference. Pursuant to that statute, no laborer, worker, or mechanic
employed by Contractor, any Subcontractor, or any other person performing or contracting to do
the whole or any part of the Work, shall be permitted or required to work more than eight hours in
any one calendar day, provided, that in cases of extraordinary emergency, such as danger to life
or property, the hours of work may be extended, but in such cases the rate of pay for time
employed in excess of eight hours of each calendar day shall be not less than one and one-half
times the rate allowed for this same amount of time during eight hours of service.
B. 4-10 Agreements: Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, RCW 49.28 permits a contractor or
subcontractor in any public works contract subject to those provisions, to enter into an agreement
with its employees in which the employees work up to ten hours in a calendar day. No such
agreement may provide that the employees work ten-hour days for more than four calendar days
a week. Any such agreement is subject to approval by the employees. The overtime provisions
of RCW 49.28 shall not apply to the hours, up to forty hours per week,worked pursuant to any
such agreement.
5.6 NONDISCRIMINATION
A. Discrimination prohibited by applicable laws: The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall comply
with all applicable federal and state non-discrimination laws, regulations, and policies and the City
of Renton Summary of Fair Practices Policy Adopted by Resolution 4085. No person shall, on the
grounds of age, race, creed, color, sex, sexual orientation, religion, national origin, marital status,
honorably discharged veteran or military status, or disability (physical, mental, or sensory) be
denied the benefits of, or otherwise be subjected to discrimination under any project, program, or
activity, funded, in whole or in part, under this Agreement.
B. During performance of the Work:
1. Protected Classes: Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant
for employment because of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, marital status, or
the presence of any physical, sensory, or mental disability, Vietnam era veteran status, or
disabled veteran status, nor commit any other unfair practices as defined in RCW 49.60.
2. Advertisements to state nondiscrimination: Contractor shall, in all solicitations or
advertisements for employees placed by or for it, state that all qualified applicants will be
considered for employment, without regard to race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age,
marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory, or mental disability.
3. Contractor to notify unions and others of nondiscrimination: Contractor shall send to each
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 - 1 7/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
labor union, employment agency, or representative of workers with which it has a
collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising the
labor union, employment agency, or workers' representative of Contractor's obligations
according to the Contract Documents and RCW 49.60.
4. Owner and State access to Contractor records: Contractor shall permit access to its
books, records, and accounts, and to its premises by Owner, and by the Washington
State Human Rights Commission, for the purpose of investigation to ascertain
compliance with this section of the Contract Documents.
5. Pass through provisions to Subcontractors: Contractor shall include the provisions of this
section in every Subcontract.
5.7 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A. In performing this contract, the Contractor shall provide for protecting the lives and health of
employees and other persons; preventing damage to property, materials, supplies, and
equipment; and avoid work interruptions. For these purposes, the Contractor shall:
1. Follow Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA) regional directives and
provide a site-specific safety program that will require an accident prevention and hazard
analysis plan for the contractor and each subcontractor on the work site. The Contractor
shall submit a site-specific safety plan to the Owner's representative prior to the initial
scheduled construction meeting.
2. Provide adequate safety devices and measures including, but not limited to, the
appropriate safety literature, notice, training, permits, placement and use of barricades,
signs, signal lights, ladders, scaffolding, staging, runways, hoist, construction elevators,
shoring, temporary lighting, grounded outlets, wiring, hazardous materials, vehicles,
construction processes, and equipment required by all applicable state, federal, and local
laws and regulations.
3. Comply with the State Environmental Policy Act (SEPA), Clean Air Act, Shoreline
Management Act, and other applicable federal, state, and local statutes and regulations
dealing with the prevention of environmental pollution and the preservation of public
natural resources.
4. Post all permits, notices, and/or approvals in a conspicuous location at the construction
site.
B. Provide any additional measures that the Owner determines to be reasonable and necessary for
ensuring a safe environment in areas open to the public. Nothing in this part shall be construed
as imposing a duty upon the Owner or A/E to prescribe safety conditions relating to employees,
public, or agents of the Contractors.
C. Contractor safety responsibilities: In carrying out its responsibilities according to the Contract
Documents, Contractor shall protect the lives and health of employees performing the Work and
other persons who may be affected by the Work; prevent damage to materials, supplies, and
equipment whether on site or stored off-site; and prevent damage to other property at the site or
adjacent thereto. Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations,
and orders of any public body having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or
to protect them from damage, injury, or loss; shall erect and maintain all necessary
safeguards for such safety and protection; and shall notify owners of adjacent property
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 - 18/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
and utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect them.
D. Contractor to maintain safety records: Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of exposure
data on all incidents relating to the Work resulting in death, traumatic injury, occupational disease,
or damage to property, materials, supplies, or equipment. Contractor shall immediately report
any such incident to Owner. Owner shall, at all times, have a right of access to all records of
exposure.
E. Contractor to provide HazMat training: Contractor shall provide all persons working on the Project
site with information and training on hazardous chemicals in their work at the time of their initial
assignment, and whenever a new hazard is introduced into their work area.
1. Information. At a minimum, Contractor shall inform persons working on the Project site of:
a. WAC: The requirements of chapter 296-62 WAC, General Occupational Health
Standards;
b. Presence of hazardous chemicals: Any operations in their work area where
hazardous chemicals are present;and
C. Hazard communications program: The location and availability of written hazard
communication programs, including the required list(s) of hazardous chemicals
and material safety data sheets required by chapter 296-62 WAC.
2. Training. At a minimum, Contractor shall provide training for persons working on the
Project site which includes:
a. Detecting hazardous chemicals: Methods and observations that may be used to
detect the presence or release of a hazardous chemical in the work area (such
as monitoring conducted by the employer, continuous monitoring devices, visual
appearance or odor of hazardous chemicals when being released,etc.);
b. Hazards of chemicals: The physical and health hazards of the chemicals in the
work area;
C. Protection from hazards: The measures such persons can take to protect
themselves from these hazards, including specific procedures Contractor, or its
Subcontractors, or others have implemented to protect those on the Project site
from exposure to hazardous chemicals, such as appropriate work practices,
emergency procedures, and personal protective equipment to be used; and
d. Hazard communications program: The details of the hazard communications
program developed by Contractor, or its Subcontractors, including an explanation
of the labeling system and the material safety data sheet, and how employees
can obtain and use the appropriate hazard information.
F. Hazardous, toxic or harmful substances: Contractor's responsibility for hazardous, toxic, or
harmful substances shall include the following duties:
1. Illegal use of dangerous substances: Contractor shall not keep, use, dispose, transport,
generate, or sell on or about the Project site, any substances now or hereafter
designated as, or which are subject to regulation as, hazardous, toxic, dangerous, or
harmful by any federal, state or local law, regulation, statute or ordinance (hereinafter
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 - 19/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
collectively referred to as "hazardous substances"), in violation of any such law,
regulation, statute, or ordinance, but in no case shall any such hazardous substance be
stored more than 90 Days on the Project site.
2. Contractor notifications of spills, failures, inspections, and fines: Contractor shall promptly
notify Owner of all spills or releases of any hazardous substances which are otherwise
required to be reported to any regulatory agency and pay the cost of cleanup. Contractor
shall promptly notify Owner of all failures to comply with any federal, state, or local law,
regulation, or ordinance; all inspections of the Project site by any regulatory entity
concerning the same; all regulatory orders or fines; and all responses or interim cleanup
actions taken by or proposed to be taken by any government entity or private party on the
Project site.
G. Public safety and traffic: All Work shall be performed with due regard for the safety of the public.
Contractor shall perform the Work so as to cause a minimum of interruption of vehicular traffic or
inconvenience to pedestrians. All arrangements to care for such traffic shall be Contractor's
responsibilities. All expenses involved in the maintenance of traffic by way of detours shall be
borne by Contractor.
H. Contractor to act in an emergency: In an emergency affecting the safety of life or the Work or of
adjoining property, Contractor is permitted to act, at its discretion, to prevent such threatened loss
or injury, and Contractor shall so act if so authorized or instructed.
I. No duty of safety by Owner or A/E: Nothing provided in this section shall be construed as
imposing any duty upon Owner or A/E with regard to, or as constituting any express or implied
assumption of control or responsibility over, Project site safety, or over any other safety
conditions relating to employees or agents of Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, or the
public.
5.8 OPERATIONS, MATERIAL HANDLING, AND STORAGE AREAS
A. Limited storage areas: Contractor shall confine all operations, including storage of materials, to
Owner-approved areas.
B. Temporary buildings and utilities at Contractor expense: Temporary buildings (e.g., storage
sheds, shops, offices) and utilities may be provided by Contractor only with the consent of Owner
and without expense to Owner. The temporary buildings and utilities shall be removed by
Contractor at its expense upon completion of the Work.
C. Roads and vehicle loads: Contractor shall use only established roadways or temporary roadways
authorized by Owner. When materials are transported in prosecuting the Work, vehicles shall not
be loaded beyond the loading capacity recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or
prescribed by federal, state, or local law or regulation.
D. Ownership and reporting by Contractor of demolished materials: Ownership and control of all
materials or facility components to be demolished or removed from the Project site by Contractor
shall immediately vest in Contractor upon severance of the component from the facility or
severance of the material from the Project site. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance
with all laws governing the storage and ultimate disposal. Contractor shall provide Owner with a
copy of all manifests and receipts evidencing proper disposal when required by Owner or
applicable law.
E. Contractor responsible for care of materials and equipment on-site: Contractor shall be
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -20/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
responsible for the proper care and protection of its materials and equipment delivered to the
Project site. Materials and equipment may be stored on the premises subject to approval
of the Owner. When Contractor uses any portion of the Project site as a shop, Contractor shall
be responsible for any repairs, patching, or cleaning arising from such use.
F. Contractor responsible for loss of materials and equipment: Contractor shall protect and be
responsible for any damage or loss to the Work, or to the materials or equipment until the date of
Substantial Completion, and shall repair or replace without cost to Owner any damage or loss
that may occur, except damages or loss caused by the acts or omissions of Owner. Contractor
shall also protect and be responsible for any damage or loss to the Work, or to the materials or
equipment, after the date of Substantial Completion, and shall repair or replace without cost to
Owner any such damage or loss that might occur, to the extent such damages or loss are caused
by the acts or omissions of Contractor, or any Subcontractor.
5.9 UNFORESEEN PHYSICAL CONDITIONS
A. Notice requirement for concealed or unknown conditions: If Contractor encounters conditions at
the site which are subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially
from those indicated in the Contract Documents, or unknown physical conditions of an unusual
nature which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as
inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then
Contractor shall give written notice to Owner promptly and in no event later than 7 Days after the
first observance of the conditions. Conditions shall not be disturbed prior to such notice.
B. Adjustment in Contract Time and Contract Sum: If such conditions differ materially and cause a
change in Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, the
Contractor may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum, or
both, provided it makes a request therefore as provided in Part 7.
5.10 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT,VEGETATION, UTILITIES AND
IMPROVEMENTS
A. Contractor to protect and repair property: Contractor shall protect from damage all existing
structures, equipment, improvements, utilities, and vegetation: at or near the Project site.
Contractor shall repair any damage resulting from failure to comply with the requirements of the
Contract Documents or failure to exercise reasonable care in performing the Work. If Contractor
fails or refuses to repair the damage promptly, Owner may have the necessary work performed
and charge the cost to Contractor.
5.11 LAYOUT OF WORK
A. Advanced planning of the Work: Contractor shall plan and lay out the Work in advance of
operations so as to coordinate all work without delay or revision.
B. Layout responsibilities: Contractor shall lay out the Work from Owner-established baselines and
bench marks indicated on the Drawings, and shall be responsible for all field measurements
about the layout. Contractor shall furnish, at its own expense, all stakes, templates, platforms,
equipment, tools, materials, and labor required to lay out any part of the Work. Contractor shall
be responsible for executing the Work to the lines and grades that may be established.
Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining or restoring all stakes and other marks
established.
5.12 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -21/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
A. Contractor to provide new and equivalent equipment and materials: All equipment, material, and
articles incorporated into the Work shall be new and of the most suitable grade for the purpose
intended, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. References in the
Specifications to equipment, material, articles, or patented processes by trade name, make, or
catalog number, shall be regarded as establishing a standard quality and shall not be construed
as limiting competition. Contractor may, at its option, use any equipment, material, article, or
process that, in the judgment of A/E, is equal to that named in the specifications, unless
otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.
B. Contractor responsible for fitting parts together: Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, or patching
that may be required to make its several parts fit together properly, or receive or be received by
work of others set forth in, or reasonably implied by, the Contract Documents. Contractor shall
not endanger any work by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the Work and shall not cut or
alter the work of any other contractor unless approved in advance by Owner.
C. Owner may reject defective Work: Should any of the Work be found defective, or in any way not
in accordance with the Contract Documents, this work, in whatever stage of completion, may be
rejected by Owner.
5.13 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES
A. Owner to provide and charge for utilities: Owner shall make all reasonable utilities available to
Contractor from existing outlets and supplies, as specified in the Contract Documents, at no cost
to the Contractor.
5.14 TESTS AND INSPECTION
A. Contractor to provide for all testing and inspection of Work: Contractor shall maintain an
adequate testing and inspection program and perform such tests and inspections as are
necessary or required to ensure that the Work conforms to the requirements of the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall be responsible for inspection and quality surveillance of all its
Work and all Work performed by any Subcontractor. Unless otherwise provided, Contractor
shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and approvals with an independent
testing laboratory or entity acceptable to Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and
shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals. Contractor shall give Owner
timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made. Contractor shall
maintain complete inspection records and make them available to Owner.
B. Owner may conduct tests and inspections: Owner may, at any reasonable time, conduct such
inspections and tests as it deems necessary to ensure that the Work is in accordance with the
Contract Documents. Owner shall promptly notify Contractor if an inspection or test reveals that
the Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents. Unless the subject items are
expressly accepted by Owner, such Owner inspection and tests are for the sole benefit of Owner
and do not:
1. Constitute or imply acceptance;
2. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures;
3. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for risk of loss or damage to the Work, materials, or
equipment;
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -22/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
4. Relieve Contractor of its responsibility to comply with the requirements of the Contract
Documents; or
5. Impair Owner's right to reject defective or nonconforming items, or to avail itself of any
other remedy to which it may be entitled.
C. Inspections or inspectors do not modify Contract Documents: Neither observations by an
inspector retained by Owner, the presence or absence of such inspector on the site, nor
inspections, tests, or approvals by others, shall relieve Contractor from any requirement of the
Contract Documents, nor is any such inspector authorized to change any term or condition of the
Contract Documents.
D. Contractor responsibilities on inspections: Contractor shall promptly furnish, without additional
charge, all facilities, labor, material and equipment reasonably needed for performing such safe
and convenient inspections and tests as may be required by Owner. Owner may charge
Contractor any additional cost of inspection or testing when Work is not ready at the time
specified by Contractor for inspection or testing, or when prior rejection makes re-inspection or
retest necessary. Owner shall perform its inspections and tests in a manner that will cause no
undue delay in the Work.
5.15 CORRECTION OF NONCONFORMING WORK
A. Work covered by Contractor without inspection: If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the
requirements in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by Owner, be uncovered
for Owner's observation and be replaced at the Contractor's expense and without change in the
Contract Time.
B. Payment provisions for uncovering covered Work: If, at any time prior to Final Completion,
Owner desires to examine the Work, or any portion of it, which has been covered, Owner may
request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by Contractor. If such Work is in accordance
with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract
Sum for the costs of uncovering and replacement, and, if completion of the Work is thereby
delayed, an adjustment in the Contract Time, provided it makes such a request as provided in
Part 7. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay
the costs of examination and reconstruction.
C. Contractor to correct and pay for non-conforming Work: Contractor shall promptly correct Work
found by Owner not to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether
observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed,
or completed. Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such nonconforming Work, including
additional testing and inspections.
D. Contractor's compliance with warranty provisions: If, within one year after the date of Substantial
Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or within one year after the date for
commencement of any system warranties established under Section 6.08, or within the terms of
any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to
be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall correct it
promptly after receipt of written notice from Owner to do so. Owner shall give such notice
promptly after discovery of the condition. This period of one year shall be extended, with respect
to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion, by the period of time between
Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. Contractor's duty to correct with
respect to Work repaired or replaced shall run for one year from the date of repair or
replacement. Obligations under this paragraph shall survive Final Acceptance.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -23/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
E. Contractor to remove non-conforming Work: Contractor shall remove from the Project site
portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents and are neither corrected by Contractor nor accepted by Owner.
F. Owner may charge Contractor for non-conforming Work: If Contractor fails to correct
nonconforming Work within a reasonable time after written notice to do so, Owner may replace,
correct, or remove the nonconforming Work and charge the cost thereof to the Contractor.
G. Contractor to pay for damaged Work during correction: Contractor shall bear the cost of
correcting destroyed or damaged Work, whether completed or partially completed, caused by
Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of
the Contract Documents.
H. No Period of limitation on other requirements: Nothing contained in this section shall be construed
to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which Contractor might have
according to the Contract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year as described
in Section 5.16D relates only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct the Work, and has
no relationship to the time within which the Contractor's obligation to comply with the Contract
Documents may be sought to be enforced, including the time within which such proceedings may
be commenced.
I. Owner may accept non-conforming Work and charge Contractor: If Owner prefers to accept Work
which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Owner may do so
instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum may be reduced
as appropriate and equitable.
5.16 CLEAN UP
Contractor to keep site clean and leave it clean: Contractor shall at all times keep the Project site,
including hauling routes, infrastructures, utilities, and storage areas, free from accumulations of waste
materials. Before completing the Work, Contractor shall remove from the premises its rubbish, tools,
scaffolding, equipment, and materials. Upon completing the Work, Contractor shall leave the Project site
in a clean, neat, and orderly condition satisfactory to Owner. If Contractor fails to clean up as provided
herein, and after reasonable notice from Owner, Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged
to Contractor.
5.17 ACCESS TO WORK
Owner and A/E access to Work site: Contractor shall provide Owner and A/E access to the Work in
progress wherever located.
5.18 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS
A. Subcontractor Responsibility: The Contractor shall include the language of this paragraph in
each of its first-tier subcontracts, and shall require each of its subcontractors to include the same
language of this section in each of their subcontracts, adjusting only as necessary the terms used
for the contracting parties. Upon request of the Owner, the Contractor shall promptly provide
documentation to the Owner demonstrating that the subcontractor meets the subcontractor
responsibility criteria below. The requirements of this paragraph apply to all subcontractors
regardless of tier. At the time of subcontract execution, the Contractor shall verify that each of its
first-tier subcontractors meets the following bidder responsibility criteria:
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -24/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1. Have a current certificate of registration as a contractor in compliance with chapter 18.27
RCW, which must have been in effect at the time of subcontract bid submittal;
2. Have a current Washington Unified Business Identifier (UBI)number;
3. If applicable, have:
a. Industrial Insurance (workers' compensation) coverage for the subcontractor's
employees working in Washington, as required in Title 51 RCW;
b. A Washington Employment Security Department number, as required in Title 50
RCW;
C. A Washington Department of Revenue state excise tax registration number, as
required in Title 82 RCW;
d. An electrical contractor license, if required by Chapter 19.28 RCW;
4. Not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or
39.12.065 (3).
5. On a project subject to the apprenticeship utilization requirements in RCW 39.04.320, not
have been found out of compliance by the Washington state apprenticeship and training
council for working apprentices out of ratio, without appropriate supervision, or outside
their approved work processes as outlined in their standards of apprenticeship under
chapter 49.04 RCW for the one-year period immediately preceding the date of the
Owner's first advertisement of the project.
6. Within the three-year period immediately preceding the date of the bid solicitation, not
have been determined by a final and binding citation and notice of assessment issued by
the department of labor and industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of
limited or general jurisdiction to have willfully violated, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, any
provision of chapter 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW.
B. Provide names of Subcontractors and use qualified firms: Before submitting the first Application
for Payment, Contractor shall furnish in writing to Owner the names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of all Subcontractors, as well as suppliers providing materials in excess of$2,500.
Contractor shall utilize Subcontractors and suppliers which are experienced and qualified, and
meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, if any. Contractor shall not utilize any
Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Owner has a reasonable objection, and shall obtain
Owner's written consent before making any substitutions oradditions.
C. Subcontracts in writing and pass through provision: All Subcontracts must be in writing. By
appropriate written agreement, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, so far as applicable
to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to Contractor by terms of the
Contract Documents, and to assume toward Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities
which Contractor assumes toward Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents. Each
Subcontract shall preserve and protect the rights of Owner in accordance with the Contract
Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting
thereof will not prejudice such rights. Where appropriate, Contractor shall require each
Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. However, nothing in this
paragraph shall be construed to alter the contractual relations between Contractor and its
Subcontractors with respect to insurance or bonds.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -25/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
D. Coordination of Subcontractors; Contractor responsible for Work: Contractor shall schedule,
supervise, and coordinate the operations of all Subcontractors. No Subcontracting of any of the
Work shall relieve Contractor from its responsibility for the performance of the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents or any other obligations of the Contract Documents.
E. Automatic assignment of subcontracts: Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is
hereby assigned by Contractor to Owner provided that:
1. Effective only after termination and Owner approval: The assignment is effective only
after termination by Owner for cause pursuant to Section 9.01 and only for those
Subcontracts which Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor in writing;and
2. Owner assumes Contractor's responsibilities: After the assignment is effective, Owner
will assume all future duties and obligations toward the Subcontractor which Contractor
assumed in the Subcontract.
3. Impact of bond: The assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any,
obligated under any bond provided in accordance with the Contract Documents.
5.19 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION
A. Contractor warranty of Work: In addition to any special warranties provided elsewhere in the
Contract Documents, Contractor warrants that all Work conforms to the requirements of the
Contract Documents and is free of any defect in equipment, material, or design furnished, or
workmanship performed by Contractor.
B. Contractor responsibilities: With respect to all warranties, express or implied, for Work performed
or materials furnished according to the Contract Documents, Contractor shall:
1. Obtain warranties: Obtain all warranties that would be given in normal commercial
practice;
2. Warranties for benefit of Owner: Require all warranties to be executed, in writing, for the
benefit of Owner;
3. Enforcement of warranties: Enforce all warranties for the benefit of Owner, if directed by
Owner; and
4. Contractor responsibility for subcontractor warranties: Be responsible to enforce any
subcontractor's, manufacturer's, or supplier's warranties should they extend beyond the
period specified in the Contract Documents.
C. Warranties beyond Final Acceptance: The obligations under this section shall survive Final
Acceptance.
5.22 INDEMNIFICATION
Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless Renton, its elected officials, officers, agents,
employees and volunteers, from and against any and all claims, losses or liability, or any portion of the
same, including but not limited to reasonable attorneys' fees, legal expenses and litigation costs, arising
from injury or death to persons, including injuries, sickness, disease or death of Contractor's own
employees, agents and volunteers, or damage to property caused by Contractor's negligent act or omission,
except for those acts caused by or resulting from a negligent act or omission by Renton and its officers,
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -26/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
agents, employees and volunteers.
Including Patent infringement: The use of any design, process, or equipment which constitutes an
infringement of any United States patent presently issued, or violates any other proprietary interest,
including copyright, trademark, and trade secret.
Should a court of competent jurisdiction determine that this agreement is subject to RCW 4.24.115,
(Validity of agreement to indemnify against liability for negligence relative to construction, alteration,
improvement, etc., of structure or improvement attached to real estate...)then, in the event of liability for
damages arising out of bodily injury to persons or damages to property caused by or resulting from the
concurrent negligence of the contractor and Renton, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers,
Contractor's liability shall be only to the extent of Contractor's negligence.
It is further specifically and expressly understood that the indemnification provided in this Agreement
constitute Contractor's waiver of immunity under the Industrial Insurance Act, RCW Title 51, solely for the
purposes of this indemnification. The Parties have mutually negotiated and agreed to this waiver. The
provisions of this section shall survive the expiration or termination of this Agreement.
PART 6 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
6.1 CONTRACT SUM
Owner shall pay Contract Sum: Owner shall pay Contractor the Contract Sum plus state sales tax for
performance of the Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
6.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Contractor to submit Schedule of Values: Before submitting its first Application for Payment, Contractor
shall submit to Owner for approval a breakdown allocating the total Contract Sum to each principal
category of work, in such detail as requested by Owner ("Schedule of Values"). The approved Schedule
of Values shall include appropriate amounts for demobilization, record drawings, O&M manuals, and any
other requirements for Project closeout, and shall be used by Owner as the basis for progress payments.
Payment for Work shall be made only for and in accordance with those items included in the Schedule of
Values.
6.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Monthly Application for Payment with substantiation: At monthly intervals, unless determined
otherwise by Owner, Contractor shall submit to Owner an itemized Application for Payment for
Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the approved Schedule of
Values. Each application shall be supported by such substantiating data as Owner may require.
B. Contractor certifies Subcontractors paid: By submitting an Application for Payment, Contractor is
certifying that all Subcontractors have been paid, less earned retainage in accordance with RCW
60.28.011, as their interests appeared in the last preceding certificate of payment. By submitting
an Application for Payment, Contractor is recertifying that the representations set forth in Section
1.03, are true and correct, to the best of Contractor's knowledge, as of the date of the Application
for Payment.
C. Reconciliation of Work with Progress Schedule: At the time, it submits an Application for
Payment, Contractor shall analyze and reconcile, to the satisfaction of Owner, the actual progress
of the Work with the Progress Schedule.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -27/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
D. Payment for material delivered to site or stored off-site: If authorized by Owner, the Application
for Payment may include request for payment for material delivered to the Project site and
suitably stored, or for completed preparatory work. Payment may similarly be requested for
material stored off the Project site, provided Contractor complies with or furnishes satisfactory
evidence of the following:
1. Suitable facility or location: The material will be placed in a facility or location that is
structurally sound, dry, lighted and suitable for the materials to be stored;
2. Facility or location within 10 miles of Project: The facility or location is located within a 10-
mile radius of the Project. Other locations may be utilized, if approved in writing, by
Owner;
3. Facility or location exclusive to Proiect's materials: Only materials for the Project are
stored within the facility or location (or a secure portion of a facility or location set aside
for the Project);
4. Insurance provided on materials in facility or location: Contractor furnishes Owner a
certificate of insurance extending Contractor's insurance coverage for damage, fire, and
theft to cover the full value of all materials stored, or in transit;
5. Facility or location locked and secure: The facility or location (or secure portion thereof) is
continuously under lock and key, and only Contractor's authorized personnel shall have
access;
6. Owner right of access to facility or location: Owner shall have the right of access in
company of Contractor;
7. Contractor assumes total responsibility for stored materials: Contractor and its surety
assume total responsibility for the stored materials;and
8. Contractor provides documentation and Notice when materials moved to site: Contractor
furnishes to Owner certified lists of materials stored, bills of lading, invoices, and other
information as may be required, and shall also furnish Notice to Owner when materials
are moved from storage to the Project site.
6.4 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A. Owner to pay within 30 Days: Owner shall make progress payments, in such amounts as Owner
determines are properly due, within 30 Days after receipt of a properly executed Application for
Payment. Owner shall notify Contractor in accordance with chapter 39.76 RCW if the Application
for Payment does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Withholding retainage; Options for retainage: Owner shall retain 5% of the amount of each
progress payment until 45 Days after Final Acceptance and receipt of all documents required by
law or the Contract Documents, including, at Owner's request, consent of surety to release of the
retainage. In accordance with chapter 60.28 RCW, Contractor may request that monies reserved
be retained in a fund by Owner, deposited by Owner in a bank or savings and loan, or placed in
escrow with a bank or trust company to be converted into bonds and securities to be held in
escrow with interest to be paid to Contractor. Owner may permit Contractor to provide an
appropriate bond in lieu of the retained funds.
C. Title passes to Owner upon payment: Title to all Work and materials covered by a progress
payment shall pass to Owner at the time of such payment free and clear of all liens, claims,
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -28/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
security interests, and encumbrances. Passage of title shall not, however, relieve Contractor from
any of its duties and responsibilities for the Work or materials, or waive any rights of Owner to
insist on full compliance by Contractor with the Contract Documents.
D. Interest on unpaid balances: Payments due and unpaid in accordance with the Contract
Documents shall bear interest as specified in chapter 39.76 RCW.
6.5 PAYMENTS WITHHELD
A. Owner's right to withhold payment: Owner may withhold or, on account of subsequently
discovered evidence, nullify the whole or part of any payment to such extent as may be
necessary to protect Owner from loss or damage for reasons including but not limited to:
1. Non-compliant Work: Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents;
2. Remaining Work to cost more than unpaid balance: Reasonable evidence that the Work
required by the Contract Documents cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the
Contract Sum;
3. Owner correction or completion Work: Work by Owner to correct defective Work or
complete the Work in accordance with Section 5.16;
4. Contractor's failure to perform: Contractor's failure to perform in accordance with the
Contract Documents; or
5. Contractor's negligent acts or omissions: Cost or liability that may occur to Owner as the
result of Contractor's fault or negligent acts or omissions.
B. Owner to notify Contractor of withholding for unsatisfactory performance: In any case where part
or all of a payment is going to be withheld for unsatisfactory performance, Owner shall notify
Contractor in accordance with chapter 39.76 RCW.
6.6 RETAINAGE AND BOND CLAIM RIGHTS
Chapters 39.08 RCW and 60.28 RCW incorporated by reference: Chapters 39.08 RCW and 60.28 RCW,
concerning the rights and responsibilities of Contractor and Owner with regard to the performance and
payment bonds and retainage, are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference as though fully
set forth herein.
6.7 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Substantial Completion defined: Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work (or
portion thereof designated and approved by Owner) when the construction is sufficiently complete, in
accordance with the Contract Documents, so Owner has full and unrestricted use and benefit of the
facilities (or portion thereof designated and approved by Owner) for the use for which it is intended. All
Work other than incidental corrective or punch list work shall be completed. Substantial Completion shall
not have been achieved if all systems and parts are not functional, if utilities are not connected and
operating normally, if all required occupancy permits have not been issued, or if the Work is not
accessible by normal vehicular and pedestrian traffic routes. The date Substantial Completion is achieved
shall be established in writing by Owner. Contractor may request an early date of Substantial Completion
which must be approved by Change Order. Owner's occupancy of the Work or designated portion thereof
does not necessarily indicate that Substantial Completion has been achieved.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -29/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
6.8 PRIOR OCCUPANCY
A. Prior Occupancy defined; Restrictions: Owner may, upon written notice thereof to Contractor,
take possession of or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work ("Prior
Occupancy") at any time prior to Substantial Completion. Unless otherwise agreed in writing,
Prior Occupancy shall not: be deemed an acceptance of any portion of the Work; accelerate the
time for any payment to Contractor; prejudice any rights of Owner provided by any insurance,
bond, guaranty, or the Contract Documents; relieve Contractor of the risk of loss or any of the
obligations established by the Contract Documents; establish a date for termination or partial
termination of the assessment of liquidated damages; or constitute a waiver of claims.
B. Damage; Duty to repair and warranties: Notwithstanding anything in the preceding paragraph,
Owner shall be responsible for loss of or damage to the Work resulting from Prior Occupancy.
Contractor's one-year duty to repair any system warranties shall begin on building systems
activated and used by Owner as agreed in writing by Owner and Contractor.
6.9 FINAL COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE, AND PAYMENT
A. Final Completion defined: Final Completion shall be achieved when the Work is fully and finally
complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. The date Final Completion is achieved
shall be established by Owner in writing, but in no case, shall constitute Final Acceptance which
is a subsequent, separate, and distinct action.
B. Final Acceptance defined: Final Acceptance shall be achieved when the Contractor has
completed the requirements of the Contract Documents. The date Final Acceptance is achieved
shall be established by Owner in writing. Prior to Final Acceptance, Contractor shall, in addition
to all other requirements in the Contract Documents, submit to Owner a written notice of any
outstanding disputes or claims between Contractor and any of its Subcontractors, including the
amounts and other details thereof. Neither Final Acceptance, nor final payment, shall release
Contractor or its sureties from any obligations of these Contract Documents or the payment and
performance bonds, or constitute a waiver of any claims by Owner arising from Contractor's
failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
C. Final payment waives Claim rights: Acceptance of final payment by Contractor, or any
Subcontractor, shall constitute a waiver and release to Owner of all claims by Contractor, or any
such Subcontractor, for an increase in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, and for every act
or omission of Owner relating to or arising out of the Work, except for those Claims made in
accordance with the procedures, including the time limits, set forth in Part 8.
PART 7 - CHANGES
7.1 CHANGE IN THE WORK
A. Changes in Work, Contract Sum, and Contract Time by Change Order: Owner may, at any time
and without notice to Contractor's surety, order additions, deletions, revisions, or other changes in
the Work. These changes in the Work shall be incorporated into the Contract Documents through
the execution of Change Orders. If any change in the Work ordered by Owner causes an
increase or decrease in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, an equitable adjustment shall be
made as provided in Section 7.02 or 7.03, respectively, and such adjustment(s) shall be
incorporated into a Change Order.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -30/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Owner may request COP from Contractor: If Owner desires to order a change in the Work, it may
request a written Change Order Proposal (COP) from Contractor. Contractor shall submit a
Change Order Proposal within 14 Days of the request from Owner, or within such other period as
mutually agreed. Contractor's Change Order Proposal shall be full compensation for
implementing the proposed change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or
Contract Time, and including compensation for all delays in connection with such change in the
Work and for any expense or inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or
productivity occasioned by the change in the Work.
C. COP negotiations: Upon receipt of the Change Order Proposal, or a request for equitable
adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both, as provided in Sections 7.02 and 7.03,
Owner may accept or reject the proposal, request further documentation, or negotiate acceptable
terms with Contractor. Pending agreement on the terms of the Change Order, Owner may direct
Contractor to proceed immediately with the Change Order Work. Contractor shall not proceed
with any change in the Work until it has obtained Owner's approval. All Work done pursuant to
any Owner-directed change in the Work shall be executed in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
D. Change Order as full payment and final settlement: If Owner and Contractor reach agreement on
the terms of any change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract
Time, such agreement shall be incorporated in a Change Order. The Change Order shall
constitute full payment and final settlement of all claims for time and for direct, indirect, and
consequential costs, including costs of delays, inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of
efficiency or productivity, related to any Work either covered or affected by the Change Order, or
related to the events giving rise to the request for equitable adjustment.
E. Failure to agree upon terms of Change Order; Final offer and Claims: If Owner and Contractor
are unable to reach agreement on the terms of any change in the Work, including any adjustment
in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, Contractor may at any time in writing, request a final offer
from Owner. Owner shall provide Contractor with its written response within 30 Days of
Contractor's request. Owner may also provide Contractor with a final offer at any time. If
Contractor rejects Owner's final offer, or the parties are otherwise unable to reach agreement,
Contractor's only remedy shall be to file a Claim as provided in Part 8.
F. Field Authorizations: The Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed with a change in the work
through a written Field Authorization (also referred to as a Field Order) when the time required to
price and execute a Change Order would impact the Project.
The Field Authorization shall describe and include the following:
1. The scope of work
2. An agreed upon maximum not-to-exceed amount
3. Any estimated change to the Contract Time
4. The method of final cost determination in accordance with the requirements of Part 7 of
the General Conditions
5. The supporting cost data to be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Part 7
of the General Conditions
Upon satisfactory submittal by the Contractor and approval by the Owner of supporting cost data,
a Change Order will be executed. The Owner will not make payment to the Contractor for Field
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -31/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
Authorization work until that work has been incorporated into an executed Change Order.
7.2 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT SUM
A. General Application
1. Contract Sum changes only by Change Order: The Contract Sum shall only be changed
by a Change Order. Contractor shall include any request for a change in the Contract
Sum in its Change Order Proposal.
2. Owner fault or negligence as basis for change in Contract Sum: If the cost of Contractor's
performance is changed due to the fault or negligence of Owner, or anyone for whose
acts Owner is responsible, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Sum in accordance with the following procedure. No change
in the Contract Sum shall be allowed to the extent: Contractor's changed cost of
performance is due to the fault or negligence of Contractor, or anyone for whose acts
Contractor is responsible; the change is concurrently caused by Contractor and Owner;
or the change is caused by an act of Force Majeure as defined in Section 3.05.
(a) Notice and record keeping for equitable adjustment: A request for an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Sum shall be based on written notice delivered to Owner
within 7 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request. For purposes
of this part, "occurrence" means when Contractor knew, or in its diligent prosecution
of the Work should have known, of the event giving rise to the request. If Contractor
believes it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum, Contractor shall
immediately notify Owner and begin to keep and maintain complete, accurate, and
specific daily records. Contractor shall give Owner access to any such records and,
if requested shall promptly furnish copies of such records to Owner.
(b) Content of notice for equitable adjustment; Failure to comply: Contractor shall not
be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum for any occurrence of events or
costs that occurred more than 7 Days before Contractor's written notice to Owner.
The written notice shall set forth, at a minimum, a description of: the event giving
rise to the request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum; the nature of the
impacts to Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier, if any; and to the extent
possible the amount of the adjustment in Contract Sum requested. Failure to
properly give such written notice shall, to the extent Owner's interests are
prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor's right to an equitable adjustment.
(c) Contractor to provide supplemental information: Within 30 Days of the occurrence
of the event giving rise to the request, unless Owner agrees in writing to allow an
additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data, Contractor shall
supplement the written notice provided in accordance with subparagraph a. above
with additional supporting data. Such additional data shall include, at a minimum:
the amount of compensation requested, itemized in accordance with the procedure
set forth herein; specific facts, circumstances, and analysis that confirms not only
that Contractor suffered the damages claimed, but that the damages claimed were
actually a result of the act, event, or condition complained of and that the Contract
Documents provide entitlement to an equitable adjustment to Contractor for such
act, event, or condition; and documentation sufficiently detailed to permit an
informed analysis of the request by Owner. When the request for compensation
relates to a delay, or other change in Contract Time, Contractor shall demonstrate
the impact on the critical path, in accordance with Section 7.03C. Failure to provide
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -32/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
such additional information and documentation within the time allowed or within the
format required shall, to the extent Owner's interests are prejudiced, constitute a
waiver of Contractor's right to an equitable adjustment.
(d) Contractor to proceed with Work as directed: Pending final resolution of any request
made in accordance with this paragraph, unless otherwise agreed in writing,
Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Work.
(e) Contractor to combine requests for same event together: Any requests by
Contractor for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum and in the Contract Time
that arise out of the same event(s) shall be submitted together.
3. Methods for calculating Change Order amount: The value of any Work covered by a Change
Order, or of any request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum, shall be determined
by one of the following methods:
a. Fixed Price: On the basis of a fixed price as determined in paragraph 7.02B.
b. Unit Prices: By application of unit prices to the quantities of the items involved as
determined in paragraph 7.02C.
c. Time and Materials: On the basis of time and material as determined in paragraph
7.02D.
4. Fixed price method is default; Owner may direct otherwise: When Owner has requested
Contractor to submit a Change Order Proposal, Owner may direct Contractor as to which
method in subparagraph 3 above to use when submitting its proposal. Otherwise, Contractor
shall determine the value of the Work, or of a request for an equitable adjustment, on the
basis of the fixed price method.
B. Change Order Pricing —Fixed Price
Procedures: When the fixed price method is used to determine the value of any Work covered by
a Change Order, or of a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum, the following
procedures shall apply:
1. Breakdown and itemization of details on COP: Contractor's Change Order Proposal, or
request for adjustment in the Contract Sum, shall be accompanied by a complete
itemization of the costs, including labor, material, subcontractor costs, and overhead and
profit. The costs shall be itemized in the manner set forth below, and shall be submitted
on breakdown sheets in a form approved by Owner.
2. Use of industry standards in calculating costs: All costs shall be calculated based upon
appropriate industry standard methods of calculating labor, material quantities, and
equipment costs such as R.S. Means or other standards acceptable to the Owner and
Contractor.
3. Costs contingent on Owner's actions: If any of Contractor's pricing assumptions are
contingent upon anticipated actions of Owner, Contractor shall clearly state them in the
proposal or request for an equitable adjustment.
4. Markups on additive and deductive Work: The cost of any additive or deductive changes
in the Work shall be calculated as set forth below, except that overhead and profit shall
not be included on deductive changes in the Work. Where a change in the Work involves
additive and deductive work by the same Contractor or Subcontractor, small tools,
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -33/48 CAG-
19-196
City Attorney & Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
overhead, profit, bond and insurance markups will apply to the net difference.
5. Breakdown not required if change less than $1,000: If the total cost of the change in the
Work or request for equitable adjustment does not exceed $1,000, Contractor shall not
be required to submit a breakdown if the description of the change in the Work or request
for equitable adjustment is sufficiently definitive for Owner to determine fairvalue.
6. Breakdown required if change between $1,000 and $2,500: If the total cost of the change in
the Work or request for equitable adjustment is between $1,000 and $2,500, Contractor
may submit a breakdown in the following level of detail if the description of the change in
the Work or if the request for equitable adjustment is sufficiently definitive to permit the
Owner to determine fair value:
a. lump sum labor;
b. lump sum material;
C. lump sum equipment usage;
d. overhead and profit as set forth below; and
e. insurance and bond costs as set forth below.
7. Components of increased cost: Any request for adjustment of Contract Sum based upon the
fixed price method shall include only the following items:
a. Craft labor costs: These are the labor costs determined by multiplying the estimated
or actual additional number of craft hours needed to perform the change in the Work
by the hourly labor costs. Craft hours should cover direct labor, as well as indirect
labor due to trade inefficiencies. The hourly costs shall be based on the following:
(1) Basic wages and benefits: Hourly rates and benefits as stated on the
Department of Labor and Industries approved "statement of intent to pay
prevailing wages" or a higher amount if approved by the Owner. Direct
supervision shall be a reasonable percentage not to exceed 15% of the cost
of direct labor. No supervision markup shall be allowed for a working
supervisor's hours.
(2) Worker's insurance: Direct contributions to the City of Renton for industrial
insurance; medical aid; and supplemental pension, by the class and rates
established by the Department of Labor and Industries.
(3) Federal insurance: Direct contributions required by the Federal Insurance
Compensation Act; Federal Unemployment Tax Act; and the State
Unemployment Compensation Act.
(4) Travel allowance: Travel allowance and/or subsistence, if applicable, not
exceeding those allowances established by regional labor union agreements,
which are itemized and identified separately.
(5) Safety: Cost incurred due to the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act,
which shall be a reasonable percentage not to exceed 2% of the sum of the
amounts calculated in (1), (2), and (3)above.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -34/48 CAG-
19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -100% Documents 20 June 2019
b. Material costs: This is an itemization of the quantity and cost of materials needed to
perform the change in the Work. Material costs shall be developed first from actual
known costs, second from supplier quotations or if these are not available, from
standard industry pricing guides. Material costs shall consider all available discounts.
Freight costs, express charges, or special delivery charges, shall be itemized.
C. Equipment costs: This is an itemization of the type of equipment and the estimated or
actual length of time the construction equipment appropriate for the Work is or will be
used on the change in the Work. Costs will be allowed for construction equipment
only if used solely for the changed Work, or for additional rental costs actually
incurred by the Contractor. Equipment charges shall be computed on the basis of
actual invoice costs or if owned, from the current edition of one of the following
sources:
(1) The Equipment Watch Fleet Manager Estimator Package (digital). The maximum
rate for standby equipment shall not exceed that shown in the Associated
General Contractors Washington State Department of Transportation (AGC
WSDOT) Equipment Rental Agreement, current edition on the Contract
execution date.
(2) The National Electrical Contractors Association for equipment used on electrical
work.
(3) The Mechanical Contractors Association of America for equipment used on
mechanical work.
The Equipment Watch Rental Rate Blue Book shall be used as a basis for establishing rental
rates of equipment not listed in the above sources. The maximum rate for standby equipment
shall not exceed that shown in the AGC WSDOT Equipment Rental Agreement, current
edition on the Contract execution date.
d. Allowance for small tools, expendables & consumable supplies: Small tools consist of tools
which cost$250 or less and are normally furnished by the performing contractor. The
maximum rate for small tools shall not exceed the following:
(1) 3% for Contractor: For Contractor, 3% of direct labor costs.
(2) 5% for Subcontractors: For Subcontractors, 5% of direct labor costs.
Expendables and consumables supplies directly associated with the change in Work must be
itemized.
e. Subcontractor costs: This is defined as payments Contractor makes to Subcontractors for
changed Work performed by Subcontractors of any tier. The Subcontractors' cost of Work
shall be calculated and itemized in the same manner as prescribed herein for Contractor.
f. Allowance for overhead: This is defined as costs of any kind attributable to direct and indirect
delay, acceleration, or impact, added to the total cost to Owner of any change in the Contract
Sum. If the Contractor is compensated under Section 7.03D, the amount of such
compensation shall be reduced by the amount Contractor is otherwise entitled to under this
subsection (f). This allowance shall compensate Contractor for all non-craft labor, temporary
construction facilities, field engineering, schedule updating, as-built drawings, home office
cost, B&O taxes, office engineering, estimating costs, additional overhead because of
extended time, and any other cost incidental to the change in the Work. It shall be strictly
limited in all cases to a reasonable amount, mutually acceptable, or if none can be agreed
upon to an amount not to exceed the rates below:
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -35/48 CAG-
19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -100% Documents 20 June 2019
(1). Projects less than $3 million: For projects where the Contract Award Amount is under$3
million, the following shall apply:
(a) Contractor markup on Contractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work actually
performed by Contractor's own forces, 16% of the first$50,000 of the cost, and
4% of the remaining cost, if any.
(b) Subcontractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor (including
lower tier subcontractors), for any Work actually performed by its own forces,
16% of the first$50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any.
(c) Contractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For Contractor, for any work
performed by its Subcontractor(s) 6% of the first$50,000 of the amount due each
Subcontractor, and 4% of the remaining amount if any.
(d) Subcontractor markup for lower tier Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor,
for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s) of any lower tier, 4% of the first
$50,000 of the amount due the sub-Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining
amount if any.
(e) Basis of cost applicable for markup: The cost to which overhead is to be applied
shall be developed in accordance with Section 7.02B 7a. —e.
(2). Projects more than $3 million: For projects where the Contract Award Amount is equal to
or exceeds $3 million, the following shall apply:
(a) Contractor markup on Contractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work actually
performed by Contractor's own forces, 12% of the first$50,000 of the cost, and
4% of the remaining cost, if any.
(b) Subcontractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor (including
lower tier subcontractors), for any Work actually performed by its own forces,
12% of the first$50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any.
(c) Contractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work
performed by its Subcontractor(s), 4% of the first$50,000 of the amount due
each Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining amount if any.
(d) Subcontractor markup for lower tier Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor,
for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s) of any lower tier, 4% of the first
$50,000 of the amount due the sub-Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining
amount if any.
(e) Basis of cost applicable for markup: The cost to which overhead is to be applied
shall be developed in accordance with Section 7.02B 7a. —e.
g. Allowance for profit: Allowance for profit is an amount to be added to the cost of any
change in contract sum, but not to the cost of change in Contract Time for which
contractor has been compensated pursuant to the conditions set forth in Section 7.03. It
shall be limited to a reasonable amount, mutually acceptable, or if none can be agreed
upon, to an amount not to exceed the rates below:
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -36/48 CAG-
19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -100% Documents 20 June 2019
(1) Contractor/Subcontractor markup for self-performed Work: For Contractor or
Subcontractor of any tier for work performed by their forces, 6% of the cost
developed in accordance with Section 7.02B 7a. —e.
(2) Contractor/Subcontractor markup for Work performed at lower tier: For
Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier for work performed by a subcontractor of
a lower tier, 4% of the subcontract cost developed in accordance with Section
7.02B 7a. —h.
h. Insurance and bond premiums: Cost of change in insurance or bond premium: This is
defined as:
(1) Contractor's liability insurance: The cost of any changes in Contractor's liability
insurance arising directly from execution of the Change Order;and
(2) Payment and Performance Bond: The cost of the additional premium for
Contractor's bond arising directly from the changed Work.
The cost of any change in insurance or bond premium shall be added after overhead and
allowance for profit are calculated in accordance with subparagraph f. and g above.
C. Change Order Pricing —Unit Prices
1. Content of Owner authorization: Whenever Owner authorizes Contractor to perform Work on
a unit-price basis, Owner's authorization shall clearlystate:
a. Scope: Scope of work to be performed;
b. Reimbursement basis: Type of reimbursement including pre-agreed rates for material
quantities; and
C. Reimbursement limit: Cost limit of reimbursement.
2. Contractor responsibilities: Contractor shall:
a. Cooperate with Owner and assist in monitoring the Work being performed. As
requested by Owner, Contractor shall identify workers assigned to the Change Order
Work and areas in which they are working;
b. Leave access as appropriate for quantity measurement;and
C. Not exceed any cost limit(s)without Owner's prior written approval.
3. Cost breakdown consistent with Fixed Price requirements: Contractor shall submit costs in
accordance with paragraph 7.02B and satisfy the following requirements:
a. Unit prices must include overhead, profit, bond and insurance premiums: Unit prices
shall include reimbursement for all direct and indirect costs of the Work, including
overhead, profit, bond, and insurance costs;and
b. Owner verification of quantities: Quantities must be supported by field measurement
statements signed by Owner.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -37/48 CAG-
19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -100% Documents 20 June 2019
D. Change Order Pricing —Time-and-Material Prices
1. Content of Owner authorization: Whenever Owner authorizes Contractor to perform
Work on a time-and-material basis, Owner's authorization shall clearlystate:
a. Scope: Scope of Work to be performed;
b. Reimbursement basis: Type of reimbursement including pre-agreed rates, if any,
for material quantities or labor; and
C. Reimbursement limit: Cost limit of reimbursement.
2. Contractor responsibilities: Contractor shall:
a. Identify workers assigned: Cooperate with Owner and assist in monitoring the
Work being performed. As requested by Owner, identify workers assigned to the
Change Order Work and areas in which they are working;
b. Provide daily timesheets: Identify on daily time sheets all labor performed in
accordance with this authorization. Submit copies of daily time sheets within 2
working days for Owner's review.
C. Allow Owner to measure quantities: Leave access as appropriate for quantity
measurement;
d. Perform Work efficiently: Perform all Work in accordance with this section as
efficiently as possible; and
e. Not exceed Owner's cost limit: Not exceed any cost limit(s) without Owner's prior
written approval.
3. Cost breakdown consistent with Fixed Price requirements: Contractor shall submit costs
in accordance with paragraph 7.02B and additional verification supported by:
a. Timesheets: Labor detailed on daily time sheets;and
b. Invoices: Invoices for material.
7.3 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT TIME
A. COP requests for Contract Time: The Contract Time shall only be changed by a Change Order.
Contractor shall include any request for a change in the Contract Time in its Change Order
Proposal.
B. Time extension permitted if not Contractor's fault: If the time of Contractor's performance is
changed due to an act of Force Majeure, or due to the fault or negligence of Owner or anyone for
whose acts Owner is responsible, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Time in accordance with the following procedure. No adjustment in the
Contract Time shall be allowed to the extent Contractor's changed time of performance is due to
the fault or negligence of Contractor, or anyone for whose acts Contractor is responsible.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -38/48 CAG-
19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -100% Documents 20 June 2019
1. Notice and record keeping for Contract Time request: A request for an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered within 7 Days
of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request. If Contractor believes it is
entitled to adjustment of Contract Time, Contractor shall immediately notify Owner and
begin to keep and maintain complete, accurate, and specific daily records. Contractor
shall give Owner access to any such record and if requested, shall promptly furnish
copies of such record to Owner.
2. Timinq and content of Contractor's Notice: Contractor shall not be entitled to an
adjustment in the Contract Time for any events that occurred more than 7 Days before
Contractor's written notice to Owner. The written notice shall set forth, at a minimum, a
description of: the event giving rise to the request for an equitable adjustment in the
Contract Time; the nature of the impacts to Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier,
if any; and to the extent possible the amount of the adjustment in Contract Time
requested. Failure to properly give such written notice shall, to the extent Owner's
interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor's right to an equitable
adjustment.
3. Contractor to provide supplemental information: Within 30 Days of the occurrence of the
event giving rise to the request, unless Owner agrees in writing to allow an additional
period of time to ascertain more accurate data, Contractor shall supplement the written
notice provided in accordance with subparagraph 7.0313.2 with additional supporting data.
Such additional data shall include, at a minimum: the amount of delay claimed, itemized
in accordance with the procedure set forth herein; specific facts, circumstances, and
analysis that confirms not only that Contractor suffered the delay claimed, but that the
delay claimed was actually a result of the act, event, or condition complained of, and that
the Contract Documents provide entitlement to an equitable adjustment in Contract Time
for such act, event, or condition; and supporting documentation sufficiently detailed to
permit an informed analysis of the request by Owner. Failure to provide such additional
information and documentation within the time allowed or within the format required shall,
to the extent Owner's interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor's right to
an equitable adjustment.
4. Contractor to proceed with Work as directed: Pending final resolution of any request in
accordance with this paragraph, unless otherwise agreed in writing, Contractor shall
proceed diligently with performance of the Work.
C. Contractor to demonstrate impact on critical path of schedule: Any change in the Contract Time
covered by a Change Order, or based on a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract
Time, shall be limited to the change in the critical path of Contractor's schedule attributable to the
change of Work or event(s) giving rise to the request for equitable adjustment. Any Change
Order Proposal or request for an adjustment in the Contract Time shall demonstrate the impact
on the critical path of the schedule. Contractor shall be responsible for showing clearly on the
Progress Schedule that the change or event: had a specific impact on the critical path, and
except in case of concurrent delay, was the sole cause of such impact; and could not have been
avoided by resequencing of the Work or other reasonable alternatives.
D. Cost of change in Contract Time: Contractor may request compensation for the cost of a change
in Contract Time in accordance with this paragraph, 7.03D, subject to the following conditions:
1. Must be solely fault of Owner or A/E: The change in Contract Time shall solely be caused
by the fault or negligence of Owner orA/E;
2. Procedures: Contractor shall follow the procedure set forth in paragraph 7.0313;
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -39/48 CAG-
19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -100% Documents 20 June 2019
3. Demonstrate impact on critical path: Contractor shall establish the extent of the change in
Contract Time in accordance with paragraph 7.03C;and
4. Limitations on daily costs: The daily cost of any change in Contract Time shall be limited
to the items below, less the amount of any change in the Contract Sum the Contractor
may otherwise be entitled to pursuant to Section 7.02B 7f for any change in the Work that
contributed to this change in Contract Time:
a. Non-productive supervision or labor: cost of nonproductive field supervision or
labor extended because of delay;
b. Weekly meetings and indirect activities: cost of weekly meetings or similar
indirect activities extended because of the delay;
C. Temporary facilities or equipment rental: cost of temporary facilities or
equipment rental extended because of the delay;
d. Insurance premiums: cost of insurance extended because of the delay;
e. Overhead: general and administrative overhead in an amount to be agreed upon,
but not to exceed 3% of the Contract Award Amount divided by the originally
specified Contract Time for each Day of the delay.
PART 8 - CLAIMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION
8.1 CLAIMS PROCEDURE
A. Claim is Contractor's remedy: If the parties fail to reach agreement on the terms of any Change
Order for Owner-directed Work as provided in Section 7.01, or on the resolution of any request
for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum as provided in Section 7.02 or the Contract Time
as provided in Section 7.03, Contractor's only remedy shall be to file a Claim with Owner as
provided in this section.
B. Claim filing deadline for Contractor: Contractor shall file its Claim within 120 Days from Owner's
final offer made in accordance with paragraph 7.01 E, or by the date of Final Acceptance,
whichever occurs first.
C. Claim must cover all costs and be documented: The Claim shall be deemed to cover all changes
in cost and time (including direct, indirect, impact, and consequential) to which Contractor may be
entitled. It shall be fully substantiated and documented. At a minimum, the Claim shall contain
the following information:
1. Factual statement of Claim:A detailed factual statement of the Claim for additional
compensation and time, if any, providing all necessary dates, locations, and items of
Work affected by the Claim;
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -40/48 CAG-
19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -100% Documents 20 June 2019
2. Dates: The date on which facts arose which gave rise to the Claim;
3. Owner and A/E employee's knowledgeable about Claim: The name of each employee of
Owner or A/E knowledgeable about the Claim;
4. Support from Contract Documents: The specific provisions of the Contract Documents
which support the Claim;
5. Identification of other supporting information: The identification of any documents and
the substance of any oral communications that support the Claim;
6. Copies of supporting documentation: Copies of any identified documents, other than the
Contract Documents, that support the Claim;
7. Details on Claim for Contract Time: If an adjustment in the Contract Time is sought: the
specific days and dates for which it is sought; the specific reasons Contractor believes an
extension in the Contract Time should be granted; and Contractor's analysis of its
Progress Schedule to demonstrate the reason for the extension in Contract Time;
8. Details on Claim for adjustment of Contract Sum: If an adjustment in the Contract Sum is
sought, the exact amount sought and a breakdown of that amount into the categories set
forth in, and in the detail as required by Section 7.02; and
9. Statement certifying Claim: A statement certifying, under penalty of perjury, that the
Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting cost and pricing data are true and
accurate to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief, that the Claim is fully
supported by the accompanying data, and that the amount requested accurately reflects
the adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time for which Contractor believes
Owner is liable.
D. Owner's response to Claim filed: After Contractor has submitted a fully documented Claim that
complies with all applicable provisions of Parts 7 and 8, Owner shall respond, in writing, to
Contractor as follows:
1. Response time for Claim less than $50,000: If the Claim amount is less than $50,000,
with a decision within 60 Days from the date the Claim is received;or
2. Response time for Claim of$50,000 or more: If the Claim amount is $50,000 or more,
with a decision within 60 Days from the date the Claim is received, or with notice to
Contractor of the date by which it will render its decision. Owner will then respond with a
written decision in such additional time.
E. Owner's review of Claim and finality of decision: To assist in the review of Contractor's Claim,
Owner may visit the Project site, or request additional information, in order to fully evaluate the
issues raised by the Claim. Contractor shall proceed with performance of the Work pending final
resolution of any Claim. Owner's written decision as set forth above shall be final and conclusive
as to all matters set forth in the Claim, unless Contractor follows the procedure set forth in
Section 8.02.
F. Waiver of Contractor rights for failure to comply with this Section: Any Claim of the Contractor
against the Owner for damages, additional compensation, or additional time, shall be conclusively
deemed to have been waived by the Contractor unless made in accordance with the
requirements of this Section.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -41/48 CAG-
19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -100% Documents 20 June 2019
8.2 ARBITRATION
A. Timing of Contractor's demand for arbitration: If Contractor disagrees with Owner's decision
rendered in accordance with paragraph 8.01 D, Contractor shall provide Owner with a written
demand for arbitration. No demand for arbitration of any such Claim shall be made later than 30
Days after the date of Owner's decision on such Claim; failure to demand arbitration within said
30 Day period shall result in Owner's decision being final and binding upon Contractor and its
Subcontractors.
B. Filing of Notice for arbitration: Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed with the
American Arbitration Association (AAA), with a copy provided to Owner. The parties shall
negotiate or mediate under the Voluntary Construction Mediation Rules of the AAA, or mutually
acceptable service, before seeking arbitration in accordance with the Construction Industry
Arbitration Rules of AAA as follows:
1. Claims less than $30,000: Disputes involving $30,000 or less shall be conducted in
accordance with the Northwest Region Expedited Commercial Arbitration Rules;or
2. Claims greater than $30,000: Disputes over$30,000 shall be conducted in accordance
with the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules of the AAA, unless the parties agree to
use the expedited rules.
C. Arbitration is forum for resolving Claims: All Claims arising out of the Work shall be resolved by
arbitration. The judgment upon the arbitration award may be entered, or review of the award may
occur, in the superior court having jurisdiction thereof. No independent legal action
relating to or arising from the Work shall be maintained.
D. Settlement outside of arbitration to be documented in Change Order: If the parties resolve the
Claim prior to arbitration judgment, the terms of the resolution shall be incorporated in a Change
Order. The Change Order shall constitute full payment and final settlement of the Claim, including
all claims for time and for direct, indirect, or consequential costs, including costs of delays,
inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or productivity.
8.3 CLAIMS AUDITS
A. Owner may audit Claims: All Claims filed against Owner shall be subject to audit at any time
following the filing of the Claim. Failure of Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier, to maintain
and retain sufficient records to allow Owner to verify all or a portion of the Claim or to permit
Owner access to the books and records of Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier, shall
constitute a waiver of the Claim and shall bar any recovery.
B. Contractor to make documents available: In support of Owner audit of any Claim, Contractor
shall, upon request, promptly make available to Owner the following documents:
1. Daily time sheets and supervisor's daily reports;
2. Collective bargaining agreements;
3. Insurance, welfare, and benefits records;
4. Payroll registers;
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -42/48 CAG-
19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -100% Documents 20 June 2019
5. Earnings records;
6. Payroll tax forms;
7. Material invoices, requisitions, and delivery confirmations;
8. Material cost distribution worksheet;
9. Equipment records (list of company equipment, rates, etc.);
10. Vendors', rental agencies', Subcontractors', and agents'invoices;
11. Contracts between Contractor and each of its Subcontractors, and all lower-tier
Subcontractor contracts and supplier contracts;
12. Subcontractors' and agents' payment certificates;
13. Cancelled checks (payroll and vendors);
14. Job cost report, including monthly totals;
15. Job payroll ledger;
16. Planned resource loading schedules and summaries;
17. General ledger;
18. Cash disbursements journal;
19. Financial statements for all years reflecting the operations on the Work. In addition, the
Owner may require, if it deems it appropriate, additional financial statements for 3 years
preceding execution of the Work;
20. Depreciation records on all company equipment whether these records are maintained by
the company involved, its accountant, or others;
21. If a source other than depreciation records is used to develop costs for Contractor's
internal purposes in establishing the actual cost of owning and operating equipment, all
such other source documents;
22. All non-privileged documents which relate to each and every Claim together with all
documents which support the amount of any adjustment in Contract Sum or Contract
Time sought by each Claim;
23. Work sheets or software used to prepare the Claim establishing the cost components for
items of the Claim including but not limited to labor, benefits and insurance, materials,
equipment, Subcontractors, all documents which establish the time periods, individuals
involved, the hours for the individuals, and the rates for the individuals;and
24. Work sheets, software, and all other documents used by Contractor to prepare its bid.
C. Contractor to provide facilities for audit and shall cooperate: The audit may be performed by
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -43/48 CAG-
19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -100% Documents 20 June 2019
employees of Owner or a representative of Owner. Contractor, and its Subcontractors, shall
provide adequate facilities acceptable to Owner, for the audit during normal business hours.
Contractor, and all Subcontractors, shall make a good faith effort to cooperate with Owner's
auditors.
PART 9 - TERMINATION OF THE WORK
9.1 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE
A. 7 Day Notice to Terminate for Cause: Owner may, upon 7 Days written notice to Contractor and
to its surety, terminate (without prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) the Work, or any part
of it, for cause upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events:
1. Contractor fails to prosecute Work: Contractor fails to prosecute the Work or any portion
thereof with sufficient diligence to ensure Substantial Completion of the Work within the
Contract Time;
2. Contractor bankrupt: Contractor is adjudged bankrupt, makes a general assignment for
the benefit of its creditors, or a receiver is appointed on account of its insolvency;
3. Contractor fails to correct Work: Contractor fails in a material way to replace or correct
Work not in conformance with the Contract Documents;
4. Contractor fails to supply workers or materials: Contractor repeatedly fails to supply
skilled workers or proper materials or equipment;
5. Contractor failure to Day Subcontractors or labor: Contractor repeatedly fails to make
prompt payment due to Subcontractors or for labor;
6. Contractor violates laws: Contractor materially disregards or fails to comply with laws,
ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction;or
7. Contractor in material breach of Contract: Contractor is otherwise in material breach of
any provision of the Contract Documents.
B. Owner's actions upon termination: Upon termination, Owner may at its option:
1. Take possession of Project site: Take possession of the Project site and take possession
of or use all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery
thereon owned by Contractor to maintain the orderly progress of, and to finish, the Work;
2. Accept assignment of Subcontracts: Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to
Section 5.20; and
3. Finish the Work: Finish the Work by whatever other reasonable method it deems
expedient.
C. Surety's role: Owner's rights and duties upon termination are subject to the prior rights and duties
of the surety, if any, obligated under any bond provided in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number
2170712.00
00 72 00 -44/48 CAG-
19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -100% Documents 20 June 2019
D. Contractor's required actions: When Owner terminates the Work in accordance with this section,
Contractor shall take the actions set forth in paragraph 9.02B, and shall not be entitled to receive
further payment until the Work is accepted.
E. Contractor to pay for unfinished Work: If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the
cost of finishing the Work, including compensation for A/E's services and expenses made
necessary thereby and any other extra costs or damages incurred by Owner in completing the
Work, or as a result of Contractor's actions, such excess shall be paid to Contractor. If such
costs exceed the unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. These
obligations for payment shall survive termination.
F. Contractor and Surety still responsible for Work performed: Termination of the Work in
accordance with this section shall not relieve Contractor or its surety of any responsibilities for
Work performed.
G. Conversion of"Termination for Cause"to "Termination for Convenience": If Owner terminates
Contractor for cause and it is later determined that none of the circumstances set forth in
paragraph 9.01A exist, then such termination shall be deemed a termination for convenience
pursuant to Section 9.02.
9.2 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
A. Owner Notice of Termination for Convenience: Owner may, upon written notice, terminate
(without prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) the Work, or any part of it, for the
convenience of Owner.
B. Contractor response to termination Notice: Unless Owner directs otherwise, after receipt of a
written notice of termination for either cause or convenience, Contractor shall promptly:
1. Cease Work: Stop performing Work on the date and as specified in the notice of
termination;
2. No further orders or Subcontracts: Place no further orders or subcontracts for materials,
equipment, services or facilities, except as may be necessary for completion of such
portion of the Work as is not terminated;
3. Cancel orders and Subcontracts: Cancel all orders and subcontracts, upon terms
acceptable to Owner, to the extent that they relate to the performance of Work
terminated;
4. Assign orders and Subcontracts to Owner: Assign to Owner all of the right, title, and
interest of Contractor in all orders and subcontracts;
5. Take action to protect the Work: Take such action as may be necessary or as directed
by Owner to preserve and protect the Work, Project site, and any other property related
to this Project in the possession of Contractor in which Owner has an interest;and
6. Continue performance not terminated: Continue performance only to the extent not
terminated
C. Terms of adjustment in Contract Sum if Contract terminated: If Owner terminates the Work or
any portion thereof for convenience, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an
equitable adjustment for its reasonable direct costs incurred prior to the effective date of the
termination, plus reasonable allowance for overhead and profit on Work performed prior to
termination, plus the reasonable administrative costs of the termination, but shall not be entitled
to any other costs or damages, whatsoever, provided however, the total sum payable upon
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2170712.00
00 72 00 -45/48
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -100% Documents 20 June 2019
termination shall not exceed the Contract Sum reduced by prior payments. Contractor shall be
required to make its request in accordance with the provisions of Part 7.
D. Owner to determine whether to adjust Contract Time: If Owner terminates the Work or any
portion thereof for convenience, the Contract Time shall be adjusted as determined by Owner.
PART 10 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
10.1 GOVERNING LAW
Applicable law and venue: The Contract Documents and the rights of the parties herein shall be governed
by the laws of the State of Washington and the City of Renton. Venue shall be in King county.
10.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
Bound to successors; Assignment of Contract: Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their
partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners,
successors, assigns, and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements,
and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party shall assign the Work without written
consent of the other, except that Contractor may assign the Work for security purposes, to a bank or
lending institution authorized to do business in the City of Renton. If either party attempts to make such
an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all
obligations set forth in the Contract Documents.
10.3 MEANING OF WORDS
Meaning of words used in Specifications: Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words
which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents
in accordance with such recognized meanings. Reference to standard specifications, manuals, or codes
of any technical society, organization, or association, or to the code of any governmental authority,_
whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall be to the latest standard specification, manual,
or code in effect on the date for submission of bids, except as may be otherwise specifically stated.
Wherever in these Drawings and Specifications an article, device, or piece of equipment is referred to in
the singular manner, such reference shall apply to as many such articles as are shown on the drawings,
or required to complete the installation.
10.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
No waiver of rights: No action or failure to act by Owner or A/E shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty
afforded them under the Contract Documents, nor shall action or failure to act constitute approval or an
acquiescence in a breach therein, except as may be specifically agreed in writing.
10.5 CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION
Contractor must be registered or licensed: Pursuant to RCW 39.06, Contractor shall be registered or
licensed as required by the laws of the City of Renton, including but not limited to RCW 18.27.
10.6 TIME COMPUTATIONS
Computing time: When computing any period of time, the day of the event from which the period of time
begins shall not be counted. The last day is counted unless it falls on a weekend or legal holiday, in
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2170712.00
00 72 00 -46/48
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -100% Documents 20 June 2019
which event the period runs until the end of the next day that is not a weekend or holiday. When the
period of time allowed is less than 7 days, intermediate Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays are
excluded from the computation.
10.7 RECORDS RETENTION / PUBLIC RECORDS REQUESTS
A. Six-year records retention period: The wage, payroll, and cost records of Contractor, and its
Subcontractors, and all records subject to audit in accordance with Section 8.03, shall be retained
for a period of not less than 6 years after the date of Final Acceptance.
B. Record Keeping and Reporting: Contractor shall maintain accounts and records, which properly
reflect all direct and indirect costs expended and Services provided in the performance of this
Agreement. The Contractor agrees to provide access to and copies of any records related to this
Agreement as required by the City to audit expenditures and charges and/or to comply with the
Washington State Public Records Act (Chapter 42.56 RCW).
C. Public Records Compliance. To the full extent the City determines necessary to comply with the
Washington State Public Records Act, Contractor shall make a due diligent search of all records in
its possession, including, but not limited to, e-mail, correspondence, notes, saved telephone
messages, recordings, photos, or drawings and provide them to the City for production. In the
event Contractor believes said records need to be protected from disclosure, it shall, at
Contractor's own expense, seek judicial protection. Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold
harmless the City for all costs, including attorneys' fees, attendant to any claim or litigation related
to a Public Records Act request for which Contractor has responsive records and for which
Contractor has withheld records or information contained therein, or not provided them to the City
in a timely manner. Contractor shall produce for distribution any and all records responsive to the
Public Records Act request in a timely manner, unless those records are protected by court order.
10.8 THIRD-PARTY AGREEMENTS
No third-party relationships created: The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a
contractual relationship of any kind between: A/E and Contractor; Owner and any Subcontractor; or any
persons other than Owner and Contractor.
10.9 ANTITRUST ASSIGNMENT
Contractor assigns overcharge amounts to Owner: Owner and Contractor recognize that in actual
economic practice, overcharges resulting from antitrust violations are in fact usually borne by the
purchaser. Therefore, Contractor hereby assigns to Owner any and all claims for such overcharges as to
goods, materials, and equipment purchased in connection with the Work performed in accordance with
the Contract Documents, except as to overcharges which result from antitrust violations commencing
after the Contract Sum is established and which are not passed on to Owner under a Change Order.
Contractor shall put a similar clause in its Subcontracts, and require a similar clause in its sub-
Subcontracts, such that all claims for such overcharges on the Work are passed to Owner by Contractor.
10.10 HEADINGS AND CAPTIONS
Headings for convenience only: All headings and captions used in these General Conditions are only for
convenience of reference, and shall not be used in any way in connection with the meaning, effect,
interpretation, construction, or enforcement of the General Conditions, and do not define the limit or
describe the scope or intent of any provision of these General Conditions.
END OF DOCUMENT
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2170712.00
00 72 00 -47/48
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -100% Documents 20 June 2019
GENERAL CONDITIONS Job Number 2170712.00
00 72 00 -48/48
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
Proposal Bid Bond
is KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, [Contractor]
of[address] as Principal,
and [Surety]
a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of
and authorized to do business in the State of Washington, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the
City of Renton in the sum of five (5) percent of the total amount of the bid proposal of said Principal for the
work hereinafter described, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our
heirs, executors, administrators and assigns, and successors and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by
these presents.
The condition of this bond is such, that whereas the Principal herein is herewith submitting his/her or its
sealed proposal for the following construction, to wit:
said bid and proposal, by reference thereto, being made a part hereof.
NOW, THEREFORE, if the said proposal bid by said Principal be accepted, and the contract be
awarded to said Principal, and if said Principal shall duly make and enter into and execute said contract
and shall furnish performance bond as required by the City of Renton within a period of ten (10) days from
and after said award, exclusive of the day of such award, then this obligation shall be null and void,
otherwise it shall remain and be in full force and effect.
IN THE EVENT the Principal, following award, fails to execute an Agreement with the City of
Renton in accordance with the terms of the Proposal and furnish a performance bond with Surety or
Sureties approved by the City of Renton within ten (10) days from and after said award, then Principal
shall forfeit the Bid Bond/Bid Proposal Deposit or Surety shall immediately pay and forfeit to the City of
Renton the amount of the Proposal Bid Bond, as set forth in RCW 35A.40.200 and RCW 35.23.352.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have caused these presents to be signed and
sealed this day of
[Principal] [Surety]
[Signature of authorized official] [Signature of authorized official]
By:
[Title] [Attorney-in-Fact]
[Address]
[Telephone Number]
BID BOND FORM Job Number 2170712.00
00 80 00 01 - 1/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
BID BOND FORM Job Number 2170712.00
00 80 00 01 -2/2 CAG-19-196
CONTRACT BOND TO THE CITY OF RENTON
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, the undersigned
as principal, and corporation organized and
existing under the laws of the State of as a surety corporation, and
qualified under the laws of the State of Washington to become surety upon bonds of contractors
with municipal corporations, as surety are jointly and severally held and firmly bound to the City
of Renton in the penal sum of $ for the payment of which
sum on demand we bind ourselves and our successors, heirs, administrators or person
representatives, as the case may be.
This obligation is entered into pursuant to the statutes of the State of Washington, the Ordinance
of the City of Renton.
Dated at Washington, this day of , 20_
Nevertheless, the conditions of the above obligation are such that:
WHEREAS, under and pursuant to Contract No. providing for construction of the
City Attorney & Police Training Tenant Improvement ; the Principal has accepted, or is
about to accept, the contract, and undertake to perform the work therein provided for in the
manner and within the time set forth;
NOW, THEREFORE, this Performance and Payment Bond shall be satisfied and released only
upon the condition that Principal:
• Faithfully performs all provisions of the Contract and changes authorized by Owner in the
manner and within the time specified as may be extended under the Contract;
• Pays all laborers, mechanics, subcontractors, lower tier subcontractors, material persons,
and all other persons or agents who supply labor, equipment, or materials to the Project;
• Indemnifies and holds Owner, its officers, and agents harmless from and against all claims,
liabilities, causes of action, damages, and costs for such payments for labor, equipment,
and materials by satisfying all claims and demands incurred under the Contract, and
reimbursing and paying Owner all expenses that Owner may incur in making good any
default by Principal; and
• Indemnifies and holds Owner harmless from all claims, liabilities, causes of action, damages
and costs, including property damages and personal injuries, resulting from any defect
appearing or developing in the material provided or workmanship performed under the
Contract.
• Pays all taxes incurred on said contract under title 50 and 51 Revised Code of Washington
(RCW) and all taxes imposed on the Principle under Title 82 RCW.
The indemnities to Owner shall also inure to the benefit of the Consulting Engineers and other
design professionals retained by Owner in connection with the Project.
�
No change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the Contract or to the Work to
be performed under the Contract shall in any way affect Surety's obligation on the Performance
Bond. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the
terms of the Contract or the Work.
This Contract Bond shall be governed and construed by the laws of the State of Washington, and
venue shall be in King County, Washington.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this instrument in two (2) identical
counterparts this day of , 20
Principal Surety
Signature Signature
Title Title
Name and address of local office of
agent and/or Surety Company:
AGREEMENT
CONTRACT NO. [Enter Contract#]
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this [Enter Date] day of[Enter Month], [Enter Year] by and between
the CITY OF RENTON, Washington, a municipal corporation of the State of Washington, hereinafter referred to
as "City" and [Enter Contractor name], hereinafter referred to as "Contractor."
Now, therefore the parties agree as follows:
1. Agreement. This agreement incorporates the following documents as if fully set forth herein: the City's
Contract Bid Documents for the Project, including but not limited to Bid package, Instructions to Bidder,
General Conditions Addenda, Proposal Form, Supplemental Conditions, Special Provisions, Contract
Plans, and Amendments to the Standard Specifications; Contractor's Proposal and all documents
submitted therewith in response to the City's Call for Bids Documents; and any additional documents
referenced as comprising the Contract and Contract Documents as revised by the Amendments and
Special Provisions included with the City's Call for Bids and Contract Documents.
2. Project. Contractor shall complete all work and furnish all labor, tools, materials, and equipment for the
project entitled [Enter Project name], [Enter Project number], including all changes to the Work and force
account work, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
3. Payments. City shall pay Contractor at the unit and lump sum prices, and by force account as specified
in the Proposal according to the Contract Documents as to time, manner, and condition of payment in a
contract amount not to exceed $ , unless modified by an approved change order or
addendum. The payments to Contractor include the costs for all labor, tools, materials and equipment for
the Work.
4. Completion Date. Contract time shall commence upon City's Notice to Proceed to Contractor. The Work
under this Agreement shall be completed within the time specified in the Contract Bid Documents. If the
Physical Work under this Agreement is not completed within the time specified, Contractor shall pay
liquidated damages and all engineering inspection and supervision costs to City as specified in the Contract
Bid Documents.
5. Independent Contractor. Contractor's employees, while engaged in the performance of any of
Contractor's services under this Agreement, shall be considered employees of the Contractor and not
employees, agents, representatives of Renton and as a result, shall not be entitled to any coverage or
benefits from the City of Renton. Contractor's relation to Renton shall be at all times as an independent
contractor. Any and all Workman's Compensation Act claims on behalf of Contractor employees, and any
and all claims made by a third-party as a consequence of any negligent act or omission on the part of
Contractor's employees, while engaged in services provided to be rendered under this Agreement, shall
be the solely Contractor's obligation and responsibility.
6. Jurisdiction and Venue. Any lawsuit or legal action brought by any party to enforce or interpret this
Agreement or any of its terms or covenants shall be brought in the King County Superior Court for the State
of Washington at the Maleng Regional Justice Center in Kent, King County, Washington, or its replacement
or successor.
7. Severability. A court of competent jurisdiction's determination that any provision or part of this Agreement
is illegal or unenforceable shall not cancel or invalidate the remainder of this Agreement, which shall remain
in full force and effect.
8. Attorney's Fees. In the event litigation is commenced to enforce this Agreement, the prevailing party shall
be entitled to recover its costs, including reasonable attorney's and expert witness fees.
9. Disclaimer. No liability of Contractor shall attach to City by reason of entering into this Agreement, except
as expressly provided in this Agreement.
10. Counterparts. This Agreement is executed in two (2) identical counterparts, by the parties, each of which
shall for all purposes be deemed an original.
[Enter Project Name Line 1] [Enter Agreement Name]
[Enter Project Name Line 2(if needed)] [Enter Date] kzj
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the City has caused these presents to be signed by its Mayor and attested by its
City Clerk and the Contractor has hereunto set his hand and seal the day and year first above-written.
CONTRACTOR: CITY OF RENTON:
President/Partner/Owner Denis Law, Mayor
ATTEST
Secretary Jason Seth, City Clerk
FIRM INFORMATION
d/b/a [Enter Firm name]
CHECK ONE: ❑ Limited Liability Co. ❑ Partnership ❑ Corporation ❑ Other
STATE OF [Enter state of incorporation]
INCORPORATION:
CONTRACTOR CONTACT INFORMATION: CITY CONTACT INFORMATION:
[Address Line 1] City of Renton
[Address Line 2] 1055 South Grady Way
[City, State and Zip] Renton, WA 98057
[Enter Phone Number] [Enter Phone Number]
[Enter Fax Number or Email Address] [Enter Fax Number or Email Address]
Attention:
If business is a CORPORATION, the name of the corporation should be listed in full and both the President and Secretary
must sign the contract. OR, if one signature is permitted by corporation by-laws, a copy of the by-laws shall be furnished
to the City and made a part of the contract document.
If the business is a PARTNERSHIP, the full name of each partner should be listed followed by d/b/a (doing business as)
and firm or trade name. Any one partner may sign the contract.
If the business is an limited Liability Company, an authorized managing member or manager must sign followed by his/her
title.
[Enter Project Name Line 1] [Enter Agreement Name]
[Enter Project Name Line 2(if needed)] [Enter Date] tZi
[Enter Project Name Line 1] [Enter Agreement Name]
[Enter Project Name Line 2(if needed)] [Enter Date] ki
This form must be submitted with the Bid
Certification of Compliance with Wage Payment Statutes
The bidder hereby certifies that, within the three-year period immediately preceding the
bid solicitation date, the bidder is not a "willful" violator, as defined in RCW 49.48.082, of
any provision of chapters 49.46, 49.48, or 49.52 RCW, as determined by a final and
binding citation and notice of assessment issued by the Department of Labor and
Industries or through a civil judgment entered by a court of limited or general jurisdiction.
I certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of Washington that the
foregoing is true and correct.
Bidder's Business Name
Signature of Authorized Official*
Printed Name
Title
Date City State
Check One:
Sole Proprietorship ❑ Partnership ❑ Joint Venture ❑ Corporation ❑
State of Incorporation, or if not a corporation, State where business entity was formed:
If a co-partnership, give firm name under which business is transacted:
*If a corporation, proposal must be executed in the corporate name by the president or vice-
president (or any other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign). If a co-
partnership, proposal must be executed by a partner.
0
0.
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT
Being duly sworn, deposes and says, that he is the identical person who submitted the forgoing
proposal or bid, and that such bid is genuine and not sham or collusive or made in the interest
or on behalf of any person not therein named, and further, that the deponent has not directly
induced or solicited any other Bidder on the foregoing work or equipment to put in a sham bid,
or any other person or corporation to refrain from bidding, and that deponent has not in any
manner sought by collusion to secure to himself or to any other person any advantage over the
other Bidder or Bidders.
AND
CERTIFICATION RE: ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO PURCHASER
Vendor and purchaser recognize that in actual economic practice overcharges resulting from
anti-trust violations are in fact usually borne by the purchaser. Therefore, vendor hereby
assigns to purchaser any and all claims for such overcharges as to goods and materials
purchased in connection with this order or contract, except as to overcharges resulting from
anti-trust violations commencing after the date of the bid, quotation, or other event establishing
the price under this order or contract. In addition, vendor warrants and represents that such of
his suppliers and subcontractors shall assign any and all such claims to purchaser, subject to
the aforementioned exception.
AND
MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT FORM
I, the undersigned, having been duly sworn, deposed, say and certify that in connection with the
performance of the work of this project, I will pay each classification of laborer, workman, or
mechanic employed in the performance of such work; not less than the prevailing rate of wage
or not less than the minimum rate of wages as specified in the principal contract: that I have
read the above and foregoing statement and certificate, know the contents thereof and the
substance as set forth therein is true to my knowledge and belief.
FOR: NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT, ASSIGNMENT OF ANTI-TRUST CLAIMS TO
PURCHASER AND MINIMUM WAGE AFFIDAVIT
Name of Project
Name of Bidder's Firm
Signature of Authorized Representative of Bidder
Subscribed and sworn to before me on this day of 20_
City Attorney and Police Training Center—Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 01 1130 - HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for hazardous materials.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.03 NOT USED
1.04 CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION
A. Contractor to provide the Owner with a complete list of all hazardous chemicals and other materials intended
to be used during execution of the project, including storage locations.
1.05 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL
A. The Contractor shall bring to the attention of the Owner any material suspected of being hazardous which is
encountered during execution of the Work. The Owner will arrange for tests to determine if the material is
hazardous. If the material is found to be hazardous the Owner will initiate the construction modification
procedure for its abatement by the Contractor.
B. Compliance with Regulations: All work shall comply with the applicable laws, regulations and requirements.
The disposal of any hazardous materials encountered shall also comply with the requirements of applicable
state and municipal safety and health requirements. Where there is a conflict between applicable regulations,
the most stringent shall apply.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
HAZARDOUS MATERIALS Job Number 2170712.02
01 11 30 - 1/1 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 01 1400 - WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 USE OF PREMISES
A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas
in which the Work is indicated.
1. Roads and Parking Lots: Unless otherwise indicated, keep roadways, building entryways, pathways
and sidewalks clear and available to Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do
not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of roadways and to minimize space and time requirements
for storage of materials and equipment on-site.
b. Schedule work that will impact Owner and Lessee's access to hours that will not impede such
access.
1.03 NOISE CONTROL
A. Meet all requirements of WAC 173-60-040. Maintain the level of construction noise inside adjacent
buildings from exceeding a dB(A) 60 curve (with windows closed).
B. Meet all requirements of the City of Renton Municipal Code.
C. Outdoor Vehicle and Internal Combustion Engine Noise: The noise level of each piece of equipment shall
not be greater than 85 dB(A) at a distance of 50 feet as measured under noisier operating conditions.
Provide rubber-tired equipment whenever possible instead of metal-tracked equipment. Mufflers for
stationary engines shall provide hospital-area silencing quality.
D. Air Compressors: Equip air compressors with silencing packages. Electric-driven compressors are
preferred.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
WORK RESTRICTIONS Job Number 2170712.00
01 14 00 - 1/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
WORK RESTRICTIONS Job Number 2170712.00
O1 14 00 - 2/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 0123 00
ALTERNATES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Description of Alternates.
B. Procedures for pricing Alternates.
C. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum and Contract Time.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Document 00 00 01- Instruction to Bidders: Instructions for preparation of pricing for Alternates.
B. Document 00 00 03- Bid Form: Bid Alternates
1.03 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted
Alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement.
1.04 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1-Change in Contract Time:
1. Base Bid Item:Contract Time-Substantially Complete all the work under the Base Bid by
November 15,2019.
2. Alternative No. 1: Substantially complete all work by December 13,2019.Alternate No 1 will be
added or subtracted from the Total Base Bid by the owner. Refer to the Bid Form for calendar
days for both Base Bid and Alternate No. 1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS-NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION-NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 ALTERNATES
CAG-19-196 01 23 00 - 1/2
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
ALTERNATES Job Number 2170712.00
01 23 00-2/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 0125 00
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Procedural requirements for proposed substitutions.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 00 2113- Instructions to Bidders: Restrictions on timing of substitution requests.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes from Contract Documents requirements proposed by Contractor to materials,
products,assemblies,and equipment.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Proposed due to changed Project circumstances beyond Contractor's
control.
a. Unavailability.
b. Regulatory changes.
C. Reduction in contract time.
d. Reduction in contract sum.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. CSI/CSC Form 1.5C-Substitution Request(During the Bidding Stage);Current Edition.
B. CSI/CSC Form 13.1A-Substitution Request(After the Bidding Phase);Current Edition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS-NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. A Substitution Request for products,assemblies, materials,and equipment constitutes a representation
that the submitter:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of
the specified product,equipment,assembly,or system.
2. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
3. Agrees to provide same or equivalent maintenance service and source of replacement parts,as
applicable.
4. Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other work that may be required for the
work to be complete,with no additional cost to Owner.
5. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent.
6. Agrees to reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with
re-approval by authorities.
B. A Substitution Request for specified installer constitutes a representation that the submitter:
1. Has acted in good faith to obtain services of specified installer, but was unable to come to
commercial,or other terms.
C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with
Contract Documents. Burden of proof is on proposer.
1. Note explicitly any non-compliant characteristics.
D. Content: Include information necessary for tracking the status of each Substitution Request,and
information necessary to provide an actionable response.
Job Number 2170712.00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
CAG-19-196 01 25 00 - 1/2
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1. Forms indicated in the Project Manual are adequate for this purpose,and must be used.
E. Limit each request to a single proposed substitution item.
1. Submit an electronic document,combining the request form with supporting data into single
document.
3.02 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING PROCUREMENT
A. Instructions to Bidders specifies time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the
bidding period,and the documents required.
B. Submittal Form (before award of contract):
1. Submit substitution requests by completing CSI/CSC Form 1.5C-Substitution Request(During the
Bidding Stage). See this form for additional information and instructions. Use only this form;
other forms of submission are unacceptable.
3.03 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Submittal Form (after award of contract):
1. Submit substitution requests by completing CSI/CSC Form 13.1A-Substitution Request. See this
form for additional information and instructions. Use only this form; other forms of submission
are unacceptable.
B. Submit request for Substitution for Cause within 14 days of discovery of need for substitution, but not
later than 14 days prior to time required for review and approval by Architect, in order to stay on
approved project schedule.
C. Substitutions will not be considered under one or more of the following circumstances:
1. When they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals,without having
received prior approval.
2. Without a separate written request.
3.04 RESOLUTION
A. Architect may request additional information and documentation prior to rendering a decision. Provide
this data in an expeditious manner.
B. Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.
1. Architect's decision following review of proposed substitution will be noted on the submitted
form.
3.05 ACCEPTANCE
A. Accepted substitutions change the work of the Project. They will be documented and incorporated into
work of the project by Change Order,Construction Change Directive,Architectural Supplementary
Instructions,or similar instruments provided for in the Conditions of the Contract.
3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 0178 00-Closeout Submittals,for closeout submittals.
B. Include completed Substitution Request Forms as part of the Project record. Include both approved
and rejected Requests.
END OF SECTION
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Job Number 2170712.00
01 25 00-2/2 CAG-19-196
VCS1 SUBSTITUTION
REQUEST
(During the Bidding Stage)
Proj ect Substitution Request Number:
From:
To: Date:
A/E Project Number:
Re: Contract For:
Specification Title: Description:
Article/Paragraph:
Section: Page:
Proposed Substitution:
Manufacturer: Address: Phone:
Trade Name: Model No.:
Attached data includes product description,specifications,drawings,photographs,and performance and test data adequate for evaluation of
the request;applicable portions of the data are clearly identified.
Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper
installation.
The Undersigned certifies:
• Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.
• Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.
• Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts,as applicable,is available.
• Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule.
• Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.
• Payment will be made for changes to building design,including A/E design,detailing,and construction costs caused by the substitution.
Submitted by:
Signed by:
Firm:
Address:
Telephone:
A/E's REVIEW AND ACTION
❑ Substitution approved-Make submittals in accordance with Specification Submittal Procedures.
❑ Substitution approved as noted-Make submittals in accordance with Specification Submittal Procedures.
❑ Substitution rejected-Use specified materials.
❑ Substitution Request received too late-Use specified materials.
Signed by: Date:
Supporting Data Attached: ❑ Drawings ❑ Product Data ❑ Samples ❑ Tests ❑ Reports ❑
C Copyright 2013,CSI, Page of Form Version:September 2013
110 South Union St.,Suite 100,Alexandria,VA 22314 CSI Form 1.5C
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 01 3000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Administration and supervisory personnel.
B. Communication procedures.
C. Project meetings.
D. Preconstruction meeting.
E. Site mobilization meeting.
F. Progress meetings.
G. Coordination procedures.
H. Submittal Types.
I. Submittals for review and information.
J. Number of copies of submittals.
K. Submittal procedures.
L. Daily Progress reports.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and
Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 01 1000 -Summary of Work: Work sequence and Owner occupancy.
C. Section 01 4000 -Quality Requirements: Procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
D. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements.
E. Section 01 7800 -Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Personnel list: For principal staff assignments. Include areas of responsibility, addresses, and phone
numbers for 24-hour-contact. Include back-up personnel.
B. Coordination drawings.
C. Superintendent Daily Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A. Provide designated Project Manager, Superintendent and other administrative and supervisory
personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
01 30 00 - 1/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.02 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURES
A. General
1. Address all Project correspondence through Owner. Do not contact Owner subconsultants
directly, unless directed otherwise. Contractor's subcontractors will not directly contact the
Owner, Engineer, or Engineer's subconsultants.
2. Owner will issue all instructions, whether verbal or written. No other instructions will be
recognized. Owner will confirm verbal instructions in writing to Contractor.
a. Exception: Minor clarifications may be confirmed in site reports or meeting minutes.
3. Format: Number correspondence sequentially beginning with Serial Letter No. 1. Include project
title and number on all correspondence.
B. Requests for Information
1. When field conditions or Contract Documents require clarification or verification by the Engineer or
Engineer's subconsultants, submit a written Request for Information (RFI)to the Owner.
2. Format: Number RFI's sequentially using a consistent form approved by Owner, containing the
following information:
a. Project name and number.
b. RFI number(three digits, beginning with 001).
c. Date of request.
d. Date of required response.
e. Subject title.
f. Initiator of request.
g. Contract Document reference (drawing and/or specification).
h. Location on site.
i. Description of issue.
J. Contractor's proposed solution, if known.
k. Cost impacts, if known.
I. Space adequate for Architect's review acknowledgement and reply.
3. Provide only one question per RFI.
4. Route RFI's in same manner as Project correspondence.
5. Allow 10 working days for Owner to issue response.
6. Owner reserves the right to void any RFI whose resolution is already contained within the Contract
Documents.
3.03 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. Preconstruction Meeting
1. Owner will schedule a meeting to take place before or on the date for Notice to Proceed.
2. Attendance Required:
a. Owner.
b. Engineer and selected consultants.
c. Contractor, including Project Manager, Superintendent, QAM, and major site related
subcontractors.
d. City Parks, Facilities, and Development Services staff.
e. Lessee's representatives.
3. Agenda:
a. Distribution of Contract Documents.
b. Designation of project personnel.
c. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for
payments, proposal request, Change Orders, Record drawings and Contract closeout.
d. Scheduling, early occupancy.
e. Working hours.
f. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
g. Construction related air quality control procedures.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
O1 30 00 - 2/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
h. Safety.
i. Security.
j. Site access, traffic control, parking availability.
4. Engineer will record minutes and provide copies to Owner and Contractor for their distribution to all
parties affected by decisions or actions resulting from the meeting.
B. Progress Meetings
1. Attend progress meetings at bi-weekly intervals. Coordinate meeting schedule with preparation of
applications for payment.
2. Owner will prepare agenda and preside at meetings.
3. Attendance Required:
a. Owner.
b. Architect
c. Contractor, including Project Manager, Superintendent.
d. Others as appropriate, such as but not limited to; Major Subcontractors, Suppliers,
Manufacturers Representatives, Consultants.
4. Agenda:
a. Safety Report.
b. Review minutes of previous meetings for any discrepancies and correct or approve.
c. Review of Work progress since previous meeting.
d. Look Ahead Schedule: Provide three (3) week look ahead simplified bar chart schedule
coordinated and interfaced with project CPM schedule.
e. Coordination issues, field observations, problems, and decisions.
f. Identification of problems that impede, will impede, or present the potential for impeding
planned progress. Identify corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
g. Review Non-conforming work and status of correction.
h. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
i. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
J. Review Requests for Information status.
k. Review issuance of Supplemental Instructions.
I. Review Contract Modifications status, including any effect on coordination and progress
schedule.
m. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
n. Other business relating to Work.
5. Owner will record minutes and provide copies to Architect and Contractor for their distribution to all
parties affected by decisions or actions resulting from the meeting.
o. Required performance results.
p. Protection of construction and personnel.
3.04 COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordinate construction operations to ensure orderly and efficient installation of each part of the Work,
with due consideration of those features of the Work dependent on each other for proper installation,
connection, and operation. Ensure full accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate accommodations for items scheduled for installation by others.
B. When necessary to assure coordination, provide memoranda for distribution to each party involved,
describing special coordination procedures. Include such items as required notices, reports, and
meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their work is
required.
C. Coordination Meetings: Superintendent will conduct coordination meetings at appropriate intervals.
Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as
progress and pre-installation meetings.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
O1 30 00 - 3/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1. Required Attendees:
a. Superintendent
b. Subcontractors
c. Suppliers
d. Other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or
performance of future activities.
2. Agenda:
a. Scheduling.
b. Interface requirements.
c. Off-site fabrication.
d. Access requirements.
e. Site utilization.
f. Temporary facilities and controls.
g. Quality standards.
3.05 SUBMITTAL TYPES
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard published data. Product data includes, as applicable,
manufacturer's catalog cuts, written recommendations, specifications, and installation instructions;
factory installed wiring diagrams; printed performance curves; operational range diagrams; compliance
with recognized standards; testing agency labels, and other standard information. Mark each copy to
identify applicable products, models, options, and other data.
B. Shop Drawings: Project-specific information as depicted through fabrication and installation drawings,
dimensions (field and factory), roughing-in and setting diagrams, design calculations, coordination
requirements, and other project-specific information.
C. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's accurately printed or actual samples showing full range of
available features, options, colors, textures, and patterns.
D. Samples for Verification: Project-specific samples of actual products, illustrating functional and
aesthetic characteristics and including all integral parts and attachment devices. Provide actual
finishes in selected colors, textures, and patterns.
E. Schedules: A form of shop drawing, typically presented in tabular form and summarizing key features
of the Work. Not to be confused with construction progress schedule specified in Section 01 3216.
H. Qualification Data: Written information demonstrating the capabilities and experience of a firm or
person.
I. Certificates: Written statements certifying compliance with requirements. Submit product, installer,
manufacturer, and material certificates on manufacturer's letterhead. Submit welding certificates on
AWS or WABO forms or as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
J. Test Reports: Reports written by a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results of
materials or products for compliance with requirements.
K. Inspection Reports: Reports written by a qualified inspection agency, indicating and interpreting
inspection results of materials, products, or assemblies for compliance with requirements.
L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code(s) in effect for Project.
M. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Written information documenting factory-authorized service
representative's tests and inspections.
N. Project Record Documents, Operation &Maintenance Data, and Warranties and Bonds: Combination of
submittal types, submitted at project closeout. See Section 01 7800.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
O1 30 00 - 4/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
O. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit directly to Owner.
P. Others as indicated.
3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR OWNER'S REVIEW
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:
1. Product data.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Samples for selection.
4. Samples for verification.
5. Schedules.
6. Qualification Data.
7. Division 1 submittals (plans, construction progress schedules, lists, reports, closeout submittals,
etc.) specified in individual Division 1 sections.
B. Submit to Owner for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given
and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.
C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.
D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article
below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800- CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.
3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:
1. Project record documents.
2. Operation and maintenance data.
3. Warranties.
4. Bonds.
5. Permits.
6. Other types as indicated.
B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.
3.08 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals may be submitted electronically in a format or system acceptable to the Owner.Access to the
document shall not require special programming, software, or other proprietary systems. Shop
Drawings may be submitted electronically but will also require submission of one full-size printed copy.
At the completion of the project, the contractor shall provide a complied digital record on a storage
device acceptable to the Owner. Additionally, they shall provide and one physical copy of all project
submittals, organized by specification sections and contained in 3-ring binders with tabs,titles, and edge
identification.
B. Superintendents Daily Report
1. For each Project calendar day beginning with the date of Notice to Proceed, prepare a report
concerning events at the Project site as follows:
a. List of subcontractors on site.
b. Number of personnel on site, and general responsibilities.
c. Equipment on site.
d. Material deliveries.
e. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
f. Accidents.
g. Meetings and significant decisions.
h. Unusual events, as described under Special Reports below.
i. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
O1 30 00 - 5/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
j. Emergency procedures.
k. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
I. Supplemental Instructions received and implemented.
m. Change Orders received and implemented.
n. Field Authorizations received, and documentation of activities covered under same.
o. Services connected and disconnected.
p. Equipment or system tests and startups.
Electronically transmit the daily reports to the Owner on every-other week basis.
2. Special Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site,
whether or not directly related to the Work, prepare and submit a special report directly to the
Owner within one day of the occurrence. List chain of events, persons participating, and response
by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar information. Advise Owner
in advance when these events are known or predictable.
END OF SECTION
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
01 30 00 - 6/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 01 3000 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Administration and supervisory personnel.
B. Communication procedures.
C. Project meetings.
D. Preconstruction meeting.
E. Site mobilization meeting.
F. Progress meetings.
G. Coordination procedures.
H. Submittal Types.
I. Submittals for review and information.
J. Number of copies of submittals.
K. Submittal procedures.
L. Daily Progress reports.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and
Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 01 1000 -Summary of Work: Work sequence and Owner occupancy.
C. Section 01 4000 -Quality Requirements: Procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality
control.
D. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements.
E. Section 01 7800 -Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Personnel list: For principal staff assignments. Include areas of responsibility, addresses, and phone
numbers for 24-hour-contact. Include back-up personnel.
B. Coordination drawings.
C. Superintendent Daily Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A. Provide designated Project Manager, Superintendent and other administrative and supervisory
personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
01 30 00 - 1/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.02 COMMUNICATION PROCEDURES
A. General
1. Address all Project correspondence through Owner. Do not contact Owner subconsultants
directly, unless directed otherwise. Contractor's subcontractors will not directly contact the
Owner, Engineer, or Engineer's subconsultants.
2. Owner will issue all instructions, whether verbal or written. No other instructions will be
recognized. Owner will confirm verbal instructions in writing to Contractor.
a. Exception: Minor clarifications may be confirmed in site reports or meeting minutes.
3. Format: Number correspondence sequentially beginning with Serial Letter No. 1. Include project
title and number on all correspondence.
B. Requests for Information
1. When field conditions or Contract Documents require clarification or verification by the Engineer or
Engineer's subconsultants, submit a written Request for Information (RFI)to the Owner.
2. Format: Number RFI's sequentially using a consistent form approved by Owner, containing the
following information:
a. Project name and number.
b. RFI number(three digits, beginning with 001).
c. Date of request.
d. Date of required response.
e. Subject title.
f. Initiator of request.
g. Contract Document reference (drawing and/or specification).
h. Location on site.
i. Description of issue.
J. Contractor's proposed solution, if known.
k. Cost impacts, if known.
I. Space adequate for Architect's review acknowledgement and reply.
3. Provide only one question per RFI.
4. Route RFI's in same manner as Project correspondence.
5. Allow 10 working days for Owner to issue response.
6. Owner reserves the right to void any RFI whose resolution is already contained within the Contract
Documents.
3.03 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. Preconstruction Meeting
1. Owner will schedule a meeting to take place before or on the date for Notice to Proceed.
2. Attendance Required:
a. Owner.
b. Engineer and selected consultants.
c. Contractor, including Project Manager, Superintendent, QAM, and major site related
subcontractors.
d. City Parks, Facilities, and Development Services staff.
e. Lessee's representatives.
3. Agenda:
a. Distribution of Contract Documents.
b. Designation of project personnel.
c. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for
payments, proposal request, Change Orders, Record drawings and Contract closeout.
d. Scheduling, early occupancy.
e. Working hours.
f. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
g. Construction related air quality control procedures.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
O1 30 00 - 2/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
h. Safety.
i. Security.
j. Site access, traffic control, parking availability.
4. Engineer will record minutes and provide copies to Owner and Contractor for their distribution to all
parties affected by decisions or actions resulting from the meeting.
B. Progress Meetings
1. Attend progress meetings at bi-weekly intervals. Coordinate meeting schedule with preparation of
applications for payment.
2. Owner will prepare agenda and preside at meetings.
3. Attendance Required:
a. Owner.
b. Architect
c. Contractor, including Project Manager, Superintendent.
d. Others as appropriate, such as but not limited to; Major Subcontractors, Suppliers,
Manufacturers Representatives, Consultants.
4. Agenda:
a. Safety Report.
b. Review minutes of previous meetings for any discrepancies and correct or approve.
c. Review of Work progress since previous meeting.
d. Look Ahead Schedule: Provide three (3) week look ahead simplified bar chart schedule
coordinated and interfaced with project CPM schedule.
e. Coordination issues, field observations, problems, and decisions.
f. Identification of problems that impede, will impede, or present the potential for impeding
planned progress. Identify corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
g. Review Non-conforming work and status of correction.
h. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
i. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
J. Review Requests for Information status.
k. Review issuance of Supplemental Instructions.
I. Review Contract Modifications status, including any effect on coordination and progress
schedule.
m. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
n. Other business relating to Work.
5. Owner will record minutes and provide copies to Architect and Contractor for their distribution to all
parties affected by decisions or actions resulting from the meeting.
o. Required performance results.
p. Protection of construction and personnel.
3.04 COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordinate construction operations to ensure orderly and efficient installation of each part of the Work,
with due consideration of those features of the Work dependent on each other for proper installation,
connection, and operation. Ensure full accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate accommodations for items scheduled for installation by others.
B. When necessary to assure coordination, provide memoranda for distribution to each party involved,
describing special coordination procedures. Include such items as required notices, reports, and
meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their work is
required.
C. Coordination Meetings: Superintendent will conduct coordination meetings at appropriate intervals.
Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as
progress and pre-installation meetings.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
O1 30 00 - 3/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1. Required Attendees:
a. Superintendent
b. Subcontractors
c. Suppliers
d. Other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or
performance of future activities.
2. Agenda:
a. Scheduling.
b. Interface requirements.
c. Off-site fabrication.
d. Access requirements.
e. Site utilization.
f. Temporary facilities and controls.
g. Quality standards.
3.05 SUBMITTAL TYPES
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard published data. Product data includes, as applicable,
manufacturer's catalog cuts, written recommendations, specifications, and installation instructions;
factory installed wiring diagrams; printed performance curves; operational range diagrams; compliance
with recognized standards; testing agency labels, and other standard information. Mark each copy to
identify applicable products, models, options, and other data.
B. Shop Drawings: Project-specific information as depicted through fabrication and installation drawings,
dimensions (field and factory), roughing-in and setting diagrams, design calculations, coordination
requirements, and other project-specific information.
C. Samples for Selection: Manufacturer's accurately printed or actual samples showing full range of
available features, options, colors, textures, and patterns.
D. Samples for Verification: Project-specific samples of actual products, illustrating functional and
aesthetic characteristics and including all integral parts and attachment devices. Provide actual
finishes in selected colors, textures, and patterns.
E. Schedules: A form of shop drawing, typically presented in tabular form and summarizing key features
of the Work. Not to be confused with construction progress schedule specified in Section 01 3216.
H. Qualification Data: Written information demonstrating the capabilities and experience of a firm or
person.
I. Certificates: Written statements certifying compliance with requirements. Submit product, installer,
manufacturer, and material certificates on manufacturer's letterhead. Submit welding certificates on
AWS or WABO forms or as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
J. Test Reports: Reports written by a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results of
materials or products for compliance with requirements.
K. Inspection Reports: Reports written by a qualified inspection agency, indicating and interpreting
inspection results of materials, products, or assemblies for compliance with requirements.
L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code(s) in effect for Project.
M. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Written information documenting factory-authorized service
representative's tests and inspections.
N. Project Record Documents, Operation &Maintenance Data, and Warranties and Bonds: Combination of
submittal types, submitted at project closeout. See Section 01 7800.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
O1 30 00 - 4/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
O. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit directly to Owner.
P. Others as indicated.
3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR OWNER'S REVIEW
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:
1. Product data.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Samples for selection.
4. Samples for verification.
5. Schedules.
6. Qualification Data.
7. Division 1 submittals (plans, construction progress schedules, lists, reports, closeout submittals,
etc.) specified in individual Division 1 sections.
B. Submit to Owner for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given
and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.
C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.
D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article
below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800- CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.
3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:
1. Project record documents.
2. Operation and maintenance data.
3. Warranties.
4. Bonds.
5. Permits.
6. Other types as indicated.
B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.
3.08 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals may be submitted electronically in a format or system acceptable to the Owner.Access to the
document shall not require special programming, software, or other proprietary systems. Shop
Drawings may be submitted electronically but will also require submission of one full-size printed copy.
At the completion of the project, the contractor shall provide a complied digital record on a storage
device acceptable to the Owner. Additionally, they shall provide and one physical copy of all project
submittals, organized by specification sections and contained in 3-ring binders with tabs,titles, and edge
identification.
B. Superintendents Daily Report
1. For each Project calendar day beginning with the date of Notice to Proceed, prepare a report
concerning events at the Project site as follows:
a. List of subcontractors on site.
b. Number of personnel on site, and general responsibilities.
c. Equipment on site.
d. Material deliveries.
e. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
f. Accidents.
g. Meetings and significant decisions.
h. Unusual events, as described under Special Reports below.
i. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
O1 30 00 - 5/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
j. Emergency procedures.
k. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
I. Supplemental Instructions received and implemented.
m. Change Orders received and implemented.
n. Field Authorizations received, and documentation of activities covered under same.
o. Services connected and disconnected.
p. Equipment or system tests and startups.
Electronically transmit the daily reports to the Owner on every-other week basis.
2. Special Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site,
whether or not directly related to the Work, prepare and submit a special report directly to the
Owner within one day of the occurrence. List chain of events, persons participating, and response
by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar information. Advise Owner
in advance when these events are known or predictable.
END OF SECTION
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
01 30 00 - 6/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Administrative and procedural requirements for Quality assurance and Quality control.
B. Mock-ups.
C. Control of installation.
D. Tolerances.
E. Testing and inspection agencies and services.
F. Control of installation.
G. Tolerances.
H. Manufacturers'field services.
I. Defect Assessment.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section.
B. Section 01 4000—Quality Requirements.
C. Section 01 4216 - Definitions.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01 4000—Quality Requirements.
A. NRTL:A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
B. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation
Program.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and to ensure that proposed
construction complies with requirements.
B. Quality Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work used to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work comply with
requirements. Services do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 -ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS, for submittal procedures.
B. Project Quality Plan (PQP): Submit within 14 days of the Notice to Proceed a written plan detailing the
organization and procedures proposed to achieve quality assurance and quality control so that
materials, products, workmanship, on-site and off-site fabrication, construction, and operations are in
compliance with the Contract Documents and within generally accepted quality standards for similar
work. Demonstrate a thorough knowledge of Contract requirements. The PQP is intended to function
as a "living document," anticipating requirements and documenting results. At minimum, the PQP will
include the following:
1. Qualification Data: For Contractor-provided testing agencies, to demonstrate their capabilities
and experience, include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent agency inspection report
performed by a recognized authority.
2. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: For all required tests and inspections. Prepare in tabular
form and include the following:
a. Specification Section number and title.
b. Description of test or inspection.
c. Identification of applicable standards.
d. Identification of test and inspection methods.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
01 4000 - 1/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
e. Number/frequency of tests and inspections required.
f. Time schedule (or time span) for tests and inspections.
g. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
h. Requirements for obtaining samples.
i. Unique characteristics of each quality control service.
3. Test and Inspection Log: For use in Part 3 of this Section.
C. Superintendent Daily Reports: Submit at bi-weekly intervals.
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases,jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments,judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance
with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Delegated Design: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are
specifically required of Contractor, provide products and systems complying with indicated
performance and design criteria, or where not indicated, with performance and design criteria of
authorities having jurisdiction. In addition to shop drawings, product data, and other required
submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each
product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design
professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design
criteria indicated. Include the list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional legally qualified to practice in the State of
Washington and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.
B. Basic Quality Assurance Qualifications: Wherever the Specifications refer to installers, manufacturers,
fabricators, specialists, or factory-authorized service representatives, provide entities with the
following qualifications:
1. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted
in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
2. Manufacturer Qualifications:A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
3. Fabricator Qualifications:A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for
this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
4. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities be
performed by recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification
requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.
a. Requirements for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing
the Work.
5. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
1.07 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent Testing Agency to perform construction
materials testing and inspections services as indicated under the Structural General Notes in the
drawings.
B. It is the Contractor's responsibility to schedule any tests required to show contract and permit
compliance. Provide adequate notification to the testing agency so testing does not delay the
schedule. Confirm with the testing agency the definition of adequate time.
C. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with
requirements of Contract Documents.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
O1 40 00 -2/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
D. Preconstruction Testing: Where approval of materials, products, or equipment depends on existing
test results or preconstruction testing not specifically assigned to the Owner's Testing Agency,
Contractor shall provide evidence of test results or, if necessary, shall arrange and pay for testing
agency services.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications:An NRTL-recognized, NVLAP-accredited, or independent agency
with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented
according to ASTM E 548, and with additional qualifications specified in individual sections and
as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step-in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Owner
before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent
tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.
E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the
manufacturer.
G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,
vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
3.02 MOCK-UPS
A. Before installing portions of the Work where mock-ups are required, construct mock-ups in location
and size indicated for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following
requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work. The purpose of mock-up is to
demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
B. Provide supervisory personnel who will oversee mock-up construction. Provide workers that will be
employed during the construction at Project.
C. Assemble and erect Mock-ups with specified materials, components, attachments, anchorage
devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.
D. Obtain Owner's approval of mock-ups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
1. Owner will issue written comments within seven (7) working days of initial review and each
subsequent follow up review of each mock-up.
2. Make corrections as necessary until Owner's approval is issued.
E. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.
F. Mock-ups will be removed at completion of construction unless specified to remain. Where allowed to
remain, protect from all damage.
G. Where possible salvage and recycle the demolished mock-up materials.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work.
Tolerances will not be cumulative.
B. Comply with manufacturers'tolerances. Should manufacturers'tolerances conflict with Contract
Documents, request clarification from Owner before proceeding.
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
O1 40 00 -3/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.04 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Prepare and maintain a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1. Date of test or inspection.
2. Description of Work tested or inspected.
3. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
4. Test or inspection results.
5. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Owner.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post additions and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and
inspection log for Owner's reference during normal working hours and prior to each Application for
Payment.
3.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Testing Agency Duties:
1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Owner and Contractor in performance of
services.
2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards.
3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
4. Promptly notify Owner and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or
products.
5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Owner.
6. Attend preconstruction meetings.
7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.
B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:
1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.
4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.
C. Contractor Responsibilities:
1. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work.
2. Provide incidental labor and facilities:
a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.
b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected.
c. To facilitate tests/inspections.
d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.
3. Schedule tests and inspections with Testing Agency. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours
prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services.
4. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples,
tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
5. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by
Contractor beyond specified requirements.
D. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the
same agency on instructions by Owner.
E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by
Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Sum.
3.06 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or
manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces
and installation, quality of workmanship, as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.
B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are
supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
O1 40 00 -4/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.07 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to contract document requirements.
B. If, in the opinion of Owner, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Owner will direct an
appropriate remedy or adjust payment.
C. Maintain a Log of Non-conforming work, tracking items from instance of identification to resolution.
3.08 SUPERINDENDENT DAILY REPORTS
A. Write daily reports for each calendar day, beginning with date of Notice to Proceed, on form(s)
approved by Owner. Daily Reports will be factual records containing numerical data of the Work and
quality assurance and control activities. Identify deficiencies in daily reports and in Non-Conforming
Work Log as they occur and as they are resolved. Do not address production issues unless they
impact quality assurance or quality control.
B. Superintendent shall sign and date all reports.Verification shall include a statement that all materials
and products incorporated into the Work are in compliance with the terms of the Contract except as
noted.
C. Submit copies of daily reports at each Progress Meeting.
END OF SECTION
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
01 40 00 -5/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
01 40 00 - 6/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 01 4216 - DEFINITIONS
PART GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and
other Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This section supplements the definitions contained in the General Conditions. In case of conflict, the
General Conditions will take precedence.
B. Other definitions are included in individual specification sections.
1.03 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT
A. Specifications Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the
Construction Specifications Institute's 2016 Master Format.
B. Specification Content:
1. Language: This specification uses certain conventions in the use of language and the intended
meaning of certain terms, words and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances.
These conventions are explained as follows:
a. Wording of the contract documents is abbreviated or streamlined and frequently includes
incomplete sentences.
1) Abbreviated word and terms shall be interpolated as sense requires. Singular words shall be
interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable to the context
indicated.
b. These specifications are written in imperative mood. This imperative phraseology is directed to
the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise.
c. The terms "Shall", "Shall be", "Will", and "Will be" and similar words and phrases are defined to
have compulsory meaning.
2. Assignment of Specialists:
a. The specification requires that certain specific construction activities shall be performed by
specialists who are recognized experts in the operations to be performed. The specialist must be
engaged for those activities, and their assignments are requirements over which the Contractor
has no choice or option. However, the responsibility for fulfilling Contract requirements remains
with the Contractor.
b. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcement of building codes and
similar regulations governing the work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade union
jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.
c. Use of titles such as "carpentry" in not intended to imply that certain construction activities must
be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as
"carpenter". It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons
of the corresponding generic name.
d. The term "Installer"shall be used to refer to all specialists.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.
B. Terminology- Certain terms used more generally throughout the contract documents are defined as
follows:
1. Addenda:Additions made to the contract documents during the bidding period. Used to revise, delete,
or add to any of the bidding requirements or contract documents.
2. Approve: Where used in conjunction with the Owner's response or submittals, requests, applications,
inquiries, reports, and claims by the Contractor, the meaning will be held to the limitations of the
Owner's responsibilities and duties as specified in Section 00 7200, General Conditions of the
Contract.
DEFINITIONS Job Number 2170712.00
01 42 16 - 1/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3. Confirm: Confirm or verify dimension or condition and notify Owner of findings prior to proceeding with
the work.
4. Construction Documents: All of the written and graphic documents prepared and assembled by the
Owner for communicating the design and administering the construction contract. They include the
following categories: bidding requirements, contract forms, conditions of the contract, specifications,
drawings, addenda and contract modifications. This term is interchangeable with "contract
documents".
5. Contract Documents: The legally enforceable requirements which become part of the contract when
the agreement is signed. Including the bid package, project manual and all related documents
including construction documents. See "construction documents" above.
6. Contract Modifications-After agreement has been signed, any additions,deletions,or modifications to
the work are accomplished by supplemental instructions or change order.
7. Directed: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed", "requested", "authorized",
"selected", "approved", "permitted", "required", and "accepted" mean "directed by the Owner",
"requested by the Owner", etc. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend the
Architect's responsibility into the Contractor's area of construction supervision.
8. Drawings: Graphic representations of the work.
9. Furnish: To supply and deliver to project site, unload, and inspect for damage.
10. Install: To unpack,assemble, erect, apply, place, anchor,finish,cure, protect, clean,startup, protect,
and similar operations and make ready for use.
11. Installer: The person or entity engaged by the Contractor or its subcontractor or sub-subcontractor for
the performance of a particular unit of work at the project site, including installations, erections,
applications, and similar required operations. It is a general requirement that installers be recognized
experts in the work they are engaged to perform.
12. Product: Material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the work
result. Not materials or equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, or erection and not
incorporated into the work result. Products may be new, never before used, or re-used materials or
equipment.
13. Project Manual: The book-sized (8 1/2 by 11-inch format and bound) volume that includes the
procurement requirements (if any), the contracting requirements, and the specifications.
14. Project Site: The space available to the Contractor for the performance of the work, either exclusively
or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the project. The extent of the project site
is shown on the drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land upon which
the project is built.
15. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.
16. Record Drawings: Drawings prepared by the Contractor to indicate construction changes, including
nature and location of concealed work.
17. Shop Drawings: Drawings, schedules, and other information prepared by the Contractor to describe
fabrication and installation of elements of the work.
18. Specifications: Define the qualitative requirements for products, materials and workmanship upon
which the contract is based.
19. Supply: Same as Furnish.
20. Testing Agency: An independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests of the work,
both at the project site or elsewhere, and to report and, if required, to interpret the results of those
inspections or tests.
PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
DEFINITIONS Job Number 2170712.00
01 42 16 - 2/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Temporary utilities.
B. Temporary telecommunications services.
C. Temporary sanitary facilities.
D. Temporary Controls: barriers, enclosures, fencing, etc.
E. Security requirements.
F. Vehicular access and parking.
G. Waste removal facilities and services.
H. Field offices.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and
Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other
entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including but not limited to, Owner's
construction forces, Engineer, consultants, occupants of the project, testing agencies and authorities
having jurisdiction.
B. All costs associated with preparing utilities for use is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
C. Usage costs for temporary site utilities will be provided the Contractor.
1.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES
A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to project site at time of project mobilization.
1.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities for use during construction operations. Do not use public facilities.
1.06 BARRIERS
A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction and staging/storage areas, to prevent
access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the public and to protect existing facilities and
adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition.
C. Protect stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
1.07 FENCING
A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence. No orange roll-up type fencing is allowed.
B. Provide 6 foot (1.8 m) high fence around each construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian
gates with locks. Install fencing around Ivar's deck Phases I and II as designated for both portions of
project when under construction. Provide fence as needed to maintain safe access for visitors and
Lessee employees on the perimeter of Ivar's deck.
1.09 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Provide, operate, and maintain a complete plant for fabricating, handling, conveying, installing and
erecting all Work required under the Contract. Maintain plant and equipment in safe and efficient
operating condition. Contractor shall be responsible for damages due to defective plant and equipment
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Job Number 2170712.00
01 50 00 - 1/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
and uses made thereof.
B. Furnish, install, and maintain for the duration of construction all required barricades, canopies, warning
signs, steps, bridges, platforms and other temporary construction necessary for proper completion of the
work. Maintain in compliance with all pertinent safety and other regulations.
1.10 SECURITY
A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry,
vandalism, or theft.
1.11 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
A. Comply with regulations relating to use of park roads and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and
access for emergency vehicles.
B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering pedestrian walkways, parking
areas, park roads, and city streets.
D. Comply with City traffic and parking regulations.
E. Delivery and Storage: Conduct operations in such a manner as to avoid unnecessary interference to
existing pedestrian and vehicle traffic. Minimize heavy vehicle traffic to and from site during peak traffic
hours (11:00 a.m. to 3:00 p.m.). Do not park vehicles in traffic lanes. Provide flag persons, and traffic
control signs and devices as required. Notify Owner in advance of any unusually long or large deliveries.
Storage of materials adjacent to the Project site outside of the construction fence is not permitted unless
authorized by the Owner.
1.12 WASTE REMOVAL
A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly
condition.
B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site on a regular basis as needed.
C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-
combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless
otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.
1.13 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide project identification sign of design and construction per Section 01 5813
1.15 EQUIPMENT
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL-rated, with extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of
fire exposure.
1.16 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.
D. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
1.17 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction, including but not limited to:
1. Building code requirements
2. Health and safety regulations
3. Utility company regulations
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Job Number 2170712.00
01 50 00 - 2/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
4. Police, Fire department and rescue squad rules
5. Environmental protection regulations
B. Standards:
1. General: Comply with the following:
a. NFPA Code 241, "Building Construction and Demolition Operations".
b. ANSI-Al 0 Series standards for"Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition".
2. Recommendations: Refer to "Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services"
prepared jointly by AGC and ASC for industry recommendations.
3. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electrical service. Install service in compliance with NEC (NFPA 70).
C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before
use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.18 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditions of Use:
1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient
manner.
2. Take necessary fire prevention measures.
3. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with Owner's and Lessee's operations.
4. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions or public nuisances to develop or
persist on the site.
1.19 SUBMITTALS
A. Temporary Facilities Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility connections, staging areas and parking
areas for construction personnel.
B. Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule for Owner's approval indicating dates for implementation and
termination of each temporary utility provision.
PART 2 PRODUCTS -NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Job Number 2170712.00
01 50 00 - 3/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Job Number 2170712.00
O1 50 00 - 4/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI—Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 01 7000 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.
B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/or
remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances.
C. Pre-installation meetings.
D. Cutting and patching.
E. Surveying for laying out the work.
F. Cleaning and protection.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and
Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 01 5000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures.
C. Section 01 7419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Additional procedures for trash/waste
removal, recycling, salvage, and reuse.
D. Section 01 7800—Closeout Submittals: O & M, Record Drawings and other documents due at
completion.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2009.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Land Surveyor (if used)
B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work.
1. Submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.
2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of the
work are in conformance with Contract Documents.
3. Submit digital record survey for the project record in AutoCAD format. Note final location of building,
site improvements, benchmarks, and utilities.
C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.
6. Include in request:
a. Identification of Project.
b. Location and description of affected work.
c. Necessity for cutting or alteration.
d. Description of proposed work and products to be used.
e. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor.
f. Written permission of affected separate Contractor.
g. Date and time work will be executed.
D. Project Record Documents: Per Section 01 7800
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
01 70 00 - 1/8 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI—Bid Documents 15 July 2019
A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in State of Washington and acceptable to Owner.
Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance
Certificate.
B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on
Project, licensed in Washington.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Hydraulic Project Approval: Follow all provisions and requirements of HPA Permit Number 2017-4-
898+01.
C. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide
positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property.
D. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction
operations.
G. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and
atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction
operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. See Section 01 1000 for occupancy-related requirements.
B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure
efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for
accommodating items installed later.
C. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing site conditions and substructure surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start
of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify that existing substructure is capable of structural support or attachment of the work being applied
or attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication,to minimize waste
due to over-ordering or mis-fabrication.
E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.
F. Prior to Demolition: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject
to damage or movement during demolition. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting
performance of work. Beginning of demolition means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying
any new material or substance in contact or bond.
3.03 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a pre-installation meeting at the site prior to
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
01 70 00 - 2/8 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI—Bid Documents 15 July 2019
commencing work of the section.
B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.
C. Notify Owner four days in advance of meeting date.
D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:
1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures.
2. Review coordination with related work.
E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to
Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK
A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
B. Promptly notify Owner of any discrepancies discovered.
C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points.
D. Control datum for survey is that indicated on Drawings.
E. Promptly report to Owner the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of
changes in grades or other reasons.
F. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without
prior written notice to Owner.
G. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.
H. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control points.
Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents.
I. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate
means:
1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility
locations, slopes, and invert elevations.
2. Grid or axis for structures.
J. Periodically verify layouts by same means.
K. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.
B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines,
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.
B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:
1. Complete the work.
2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.
3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.
4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
01 70 00 - 3/8 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI—Bid Documents 15 July 2019
5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.
6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.
7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.
C. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill:
1. To complete the work.
2. To uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work.
3. To remove and replace defective or non-conforming work.
4. To remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.
5. To provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical, and other services.
6. To execute patching to complement adjacent work.
7. To fit materials and products to integrate with other work.
D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to
receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.
E. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and
sight exposed surfaces.
F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
G. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
H. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire
rated material in accordance with Section 07 8400, to full thickness of the penetrated element or as
otherwise required.
I. Cutting:
1. Cut work by methods that will not damage work to be retained and work adjoining. Review proposed
procedure(s) with original installer where possible and comply with its recommendations.
2. Where cutting is required, cut work with sawing, drilling, coring and grinding tools. Pneumatic
hammering and chopping tools not allowed without prior approval.
J. Patching:
1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. Patch with seams which are
durable and invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances of the work. On continuous
surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and, where necessary, extend finish restoration onto
retained work adjoining in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching.
3. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of work.
4. Match color, texture, and appearance.
5. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to
patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish.
3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly
condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote
spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to
eliminate dust.
D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site;
do not burn or bury.
3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
01 70 00 - 4/8 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI—Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work
area to prevent damage.
D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
E. Protect cast concrete to remain exposed in the finished building, finished floors, stairs, roofing and other
surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet
materials.
F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain
recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.
G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.
H. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible.
3.09 CLOSE-OUT COORDINATION
A. See Section 01 1000 for occupancy-related requirements.
B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure
efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for
accommodating items installed later.
C. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.
D. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with
building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing,
connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
E. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are
indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow Coordination Drawings routing shown for pipes, ducts,
and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to
maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction.
Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
G. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
3.10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Substantial Completion is defined in the General Conditions
B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion,
complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request, provide detailed work plan to
complete each item and anticipated dates of completion.
1. Submit Contractor's Punch List. For each item, include the dollar value of Work remaining, and
reasons why the Work is not complete.
2. Submit substantial completion checklist.
3. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services
and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
5. Prepare and submit initial Operation and Maintenance Manuals, damage or settlement surveys,
property surveys, and similar final record information.
6. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel
of changeover in security provisions.
7. Participate in commissioning in accordance with Division 1 Section "Commissioning
Requirements."
8. Submit test/adjust/balance records.
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
01 70 00 - 5/8 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI—Bid Documents 15 July 2019
9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction
tools, and similar elements.
10. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
11. Complete final cleaning requirements.
12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request,
Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. During
inspection, Engineer will verify submitted Contractor's Punch List and will add or deduct items as
necessary to form the Engineer's Substantial Completion Punch List. The Engineer's Substantial
Completion Punch List will subsequently be provided to the Contractor for resolution. Engineer will
prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either
on the Contractor's Punch List or the Engineer's Substantial Completion Punch List that must be
completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Re-inspection: If, following Engineer's inspection, Certificate of Substantial Completion is not
granted, request re-inspection when the Work identified as incomplete is completed or corrected.
Unless waived by Owner, a deductive Change Order for A/E costs will be executed for all
Substantial Completion re-inspections.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
D. Checklist: In order to certify, Substantial Completion, all elements on the Substantial Completion
Checklist (attached to this section) MUST be complete.
3.11 FINAL COMPLETION
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion,
complete the following:
1. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
2. Submit copy of Engineer's Substantial Completion Punch List, with signed and dated certification
by the QAM stating that every item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
4. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, final Operation and Maintenance Manuals,
damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
5. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, accessory keys, and similar items to location designated
by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. Except where
impractical, provide parts and materials in original unopened packaging. Permanently label all
accessory keys.
6. Complete any deferred testing as defined in Division 1 Section "Commissioning Requirements."
7. Submit pest-control final inspection report and certification.
8. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and
systems.
9. Submit Application for Final Payment and required support documentation and certifications
according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Engineer will
certify Application for Final Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be
completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected. Unless waived by Owner, a deductive Change Order for
A/E costs will be executed for Final Completion re-inspections greater than one in number.
C. Checklist: In order to certify, Final Completion, all elements on the Final Completion Checklist (attached
to this section) MUST be complete.
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
01 70 00 - 6/8 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI—Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3,12 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (CONTRACTOR'S PUNCH LIST)
A. General: The QAM shall prepare a single list of items to be completed and corrected. Include name
and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and
items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits
of construction. Use layout provided in electronic format by Engineer. Submit three copies of list.
3.13 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to Substantial Completion.
B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.
C. Clean surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances.
D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface
and material being cleaned.
E. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
F. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in
legal manner; do not burn or bury.
END OF SECTION
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
01 70 00 - 7/8 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Job Number 2170712.00
O1 70 00 - 8/8 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 01 7419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1GENERAL
1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible.
B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning,
breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors.
C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically
feasible.
D. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills or by
incineration:
1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers.
2. Corrugated cardboard.
3. Wood pallets.
4. Treated wood.
5. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping, reinforcing
bars, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc,
lead, brass, and bronze.
6. Glass.
7. Plastic sheeting.
E. Contractor shall develop and follow a Waste Management Plan designed to implement these requirements.
F. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are:
1. Burning on the project site.
2. Burying on the project site.
3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private.
4. Other illegal dumping or burying.
G. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory
requirements, including but not limited to Federal, State, and King County requirements, Ordinance 18166
codified in King County Code Chapter 10.30, Construction and Demolition Waste, pertaining to legal
disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and
Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for project meetings, reports,
submittal procedures, and project documentation.
C. Section 01 5000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Additional requirements related to trash/waste
collection and removal facilities and services.
E. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Trash/waste prevention procedures related to
demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, adhesives, glues, or the like.
B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials, packaging, trash,
debris, and rubble resulting from construction, repair and demolition operations.
C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitability, corrosively,toxicity or
reactivity.
D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitability,
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Job Number 2170712.00
01 74 19 - 1/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
corrosively, toxicity, or reactivity.
E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure.
F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and
remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others.
G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new
product for reuse by others.
H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded
materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or
thermally destroying waste.
I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.
J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site.
K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others.
L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off
water.
M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first
time they become waste.
N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure.
O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged.
P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste
includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B. Waste Management Plan: Include the following information:
1. Analysis of the trash and waste projected to be generated during the entire project construction cycle,
including types and quantities.
2. Landfill Options: The name, address, and telephone number of the landfill(s)where trash/waste will be
disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and the projected cost of disposing of all project
trash/waste in the landfill(s).
3. Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials that will be diverted from landfills by reuse, salvage, or
recycling.
4. Meetings: Describe regular meetings to be held to address waste prevention, reduction, recycling,
salvage, reuse, and disposal.
5. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be diverted from landfills
will be protected from contamination and prepared for acceptance by designated facilities; include
separation procedures for recyclables, storage, and packaging.
6. Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of materials to be recycled; i.e.
whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed
materials will be collected by a waste hauler.
C. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals,with details of quantities of trash and waste, means
of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report.
1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment;failure to submit Report will delay
payment.
2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner.
3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information:
a. Identification of material.
b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters), of trash/waste material from the project disposed
of in landfills.
c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total disposal cost.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Job Number 2170712.00
01 74 19 - 2/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost.
4. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each:
a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects.
b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters), date removed from the project site, and receiving
party.
c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings of
salvage or recycling each material.
d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost.
e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration.
5. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each:
a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project.
b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters).
c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity.
6. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as appropriate to
disposal method.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES
A. See Section 01 3000 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and
project documentation.
B. See Section 01 5000 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and
services.
C. See Section 01 7000 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching,
installation, protection, and cleaning.
3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and
documenting results of the Waste Management Plan.
B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each
subcontractor, Owner, and Engineer.
C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse,
and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project.
D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings.
1. Pre-construction meeting.
2. Regularjob-site meetings.
E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse,
return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers.
1. Provide containers as required.
2. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors.
3. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid
contamination of materials.
F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable
regulations.
G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to
prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely
pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable
materials.
H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse.
I. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Job Number 2170712.00
01 74 19 - 3/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
END OF SECTION
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Job Number 2170712.00
01 74 19 - 4/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Project Record Documents.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data.
C. Warranties and bonds.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental Conditions and
Division 1 specification sections, apply to this section.
B. Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data,
and samples.
C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures. Substantial
Completion and Final Completions Checklists.
D. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.
E. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Owner via Architect with claim for final Application for
Payment.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit PDF preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents at least 10 days before
requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Owner/Engineer will review draft and return one
copy with comments.
2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and operated
by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance.
3. Submit completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This will be reviewed and returned
after final inspection, with Owner/Engineer comments. Revise content of all document sets as
required prior to final submission.
4. Submit revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection.
C. Warranties and Bonds:
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's
permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.
2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application
for Payment. Provide original hardcopy in binder and digital copy as PDF, provide tabs for all future
items.
3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit
within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty
period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. Record Prints: Maintain one full-size set of full size hard copy black and white prints of the Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Job Number 2170712.00
01 78 00 - 1/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1. Identification: In red ink and block letters, label each Record Drawing, including cover sheets,
"PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location on title block. Show all addenda
changes on the applicable drawing sheet or specification section.
2. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or
entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to
identify or measure and record later.
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before
enclosing concealed installations.
3. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.
C. Changes made by Change Order.
d. Changes made by Supplemental Instruction.
e. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.
f. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
g. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
4. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual
physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-
reference on the Contract Drawings.
5. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other reproducible colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
6. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original
Drawings.
7. Note alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, Supplemental Instruction numbers, and similar
identification, where applicable.
B. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record Drawings where
Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show
actual installation.
1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an
alternate, substitution, or other modification.
2. Consult Owner for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual
physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared Record
Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying,
binding, and submitting. Include title blocks matching original drawings and assign appropriate
sheet numbers.
C. Binding: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets and create
organized, tabbed PDFs at full scale. Include identification on cover sheets and tabs.
3.02 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A. General: Annotate by striking out products/manufacturers not included in the work to provide a record of
selections made.
1. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable.
B. Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated
in Specifications. Include addenda and contract modifications.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
2. Create a PDF copy with each section tabbed.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Job Number 2170712.00
01 78 00 - 2/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.03 RECORD PRODUCT DATA
A. Where the actual product or installation varies substantially from that indicated in previously submitted
and approved Product Data, submit Record Product Data marked to indicate actual condition.
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's
written instructions for installation.
3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable.
4. Where Record Product Data is required as part of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, submit
marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data.
3.04 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record
keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Provide full size PDFs in an
organized and tabbed file for miscellaneous records and identify each.
3.05 O&M MANUALS, GENERAL
A. Provide PDF files that are organized by section and file and fully tabbed and labeled. Provide files in
original size, oriented and rotated in the document to read from top to bottom or screen. Scan or save
files at a resolution suitable to clearly read all information at original size. Do not use overly large file
sizes. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information furnished by multiple
sources, assemble and coordinate information into a comprehensive whole. Eliminate all redundant,
inapplicable, or unnecessary information so that submitted documentation reflects only actual installation.
The QAM is responsible for final assembly of manuals.
B. Identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract
Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4,
"Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."
C. Directory: Provide a separate directory PDF file summarizing the contents of all O&M Manuals. Include
a section in the directory for each of the following:
1. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each O&M Manual.
2. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to O&M
Manuals that contain information about each system, and separate references to Specification
Sections in which each system or subsystem is addressed.
3. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For
pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each
manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1. Title page.
2. Table of contents.
3. Manual contents.
E. Title Page: Tab and label the title page. Include the following information:
1. Subject matter included in manual.
2. Name and address of Project.
3. Name and address of Owner.
4. Date of submittal.
5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
6. Name and address of Architect.
7. Cross-reference to related systems in other O&M Manuals.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Job Number 2170712.00
01 78 00 - 3/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
F. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the
content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data,
include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.
G. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system,
subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and
components of one system into a single binder.
1. Files: File type and format as approved by Owner. Documents shall be PDFs in 8-1/2-by-1 1-inch
format.
a. If two or more files are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each
into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other files if
necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of
equipment or system.
b. Identify each file," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume
number for multiple-volume sets. Use layout supplied by Owner in electronic format
approved by Owner.
2. Dividers: Reinforced heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each
tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment
included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title
of Project Manual.
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software
media for computerized electronic equipment.
4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-1 1-inch white bond paper.
5. Drawings: Scan at original size at resolution suitable to read all documentation on the drawing
sheet. Do not use higher than necessary resolution resulting in overly large files.
3.07 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE COMPONENT OF O&M MANUALS
A. Content: Organize digital PDF manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources,
and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to
match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of
Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number
and title in Project Manual.
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
1. Product name and model number.
2. Manufacturer's name.
3. Color, pattern, and texture.
4. Material and chemical composition.
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1. Inspection procedures.
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
5. Repair instructions.
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related
services.
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Job Number 2170712.00
01 78 00 - 4/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
3.08 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE COMPONENT OF O&M MANUALS
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source
information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and
service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty
and bond information, as described below.
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified
by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name,
address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-
reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
3.09 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and
manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into
use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial
completion is determined.
B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
C. Co-execute submittals when required.
D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 by 11 inch (216 by 279 mm) three D side ring binders with
durable plastic no-print-transfer-type covers.
F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project;
name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible
company principal.
G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with
each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name
of product or work item.
H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full
information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer,
with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.
END OF SECTION
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Job Number 2170712.00
01 78 00 - 5/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center& City Attorney TI - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Job Number 2170712.00
O1 78 00 - 6/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 02 4100
DEMOLITION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 29 CFR 1926-U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards;current edition.
B. NFPA 241-Standard for Safeguarding Construction,Alteration,and Demolition Operations; 2013.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required.
1. Minimum of 3 years of documented experience.
PART 3 EXECUTION
2.01 SCOPE
A. Remove portions of existing buildings in the following sequence:
1. Interior walls,doors,frames,sidelites and ceiling as described on demolition plans.
2.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent
structures and the public.
1. Obtain required permits.
2. Provide,erect,and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.
3. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and
occupants.
4. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not
obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal
operations.
B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.
C. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.
D. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations,stop work and notify Architect and
Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCBs,and mercury.
E. Perform demolition in a manner that maximizes salvage and recycling of materials.
1. Dismantle existing construction and separate materials.
2. Set aside reusable, recyclable,and salvageable materials;store and deliver to collection point or
point of reuse.
2.03 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS
A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and existing
record documents only.
1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as indicated.
2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.
Job Number 2170712.00 DEMOLITION
CAG-19-196 0241 00 - 1/2
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be
apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition.
B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
1. Remove items indicated on drawings.
C. Services(Including but not limited to HVAC, Fire Protection, Electrical,and Telecommunications):
Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated.
1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to equipment
and operational components.
2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services,
maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service.
3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal.
4. Remove abandoned pipe,ducts,conduits,and equipment, including those above accessible
ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible,otherwise cap stub and tag with
identification.
D. Protect existing work to remain.
1. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.
2. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
3. Patch as specified for patching new work.
2.04 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL
A. Remove debris,junk,and trash from site.
B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.
END OF SECTION
DEMOLITION Job Number 2170712.00
0241 00-2/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 06 20 00
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wood door frames,glazed sidelite frames.
B. Wood casings and moldings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 08 14 16- Flush Wood Doors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI Z97.1-American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings,Safety
Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2010.
B. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.
C. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS)- North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S.Version 3.0; 2016.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials,component profiles,fastening methods,jointing details,and
accessories.
1. Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot, minimum.
C. Samples: Submit two samples of wood trim 3 inch long.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated,Custom
Grade
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with
minimum five years of documented experience.
1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store finish carpentry items under cover,elevated above grade,and in a dry,well-ventilated area not
exposed to heat or sunlight.
B. Protect work from moisture damage.
C. Handle materials and products to prevent damage to edges,ends,or surfaces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FINISH CARPENTRY ITEMS
A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS),
unless noted otherwise.
B. Interior Woodwork Items:
1. Door Frames, Moldings, Miscellaneous Trim: Clear white pine; prepare for paint finish to match
existing conditions.
Job Number 2170712.00 FINISH CARPENTRY
CAG-19-196 06 20 00 - 1/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. Glazed Sidelite: White birch; prepare for stain finish to match existing conditions.
2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.03 FASTENINGS
A. Adhesive for Purposes Other Than Laminate Installation: Suitable for the purpose; not containing
formaldehyde or other volatile organic compounds.
B. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application.
B. Wood Filler: Solvent base,tinted to match surface finish color.
2.05 WOOD TREATMENT/FINISH
A. Stain,Varnish,and Finishing Materials: In compliance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI
(NAAWS),for sidelite frames unless noted otherwise.
B. Color as selected by Architect. Intent is to match existing conditions.
C. Finishing: Field finished as specified in Section 09 90 00.
D. Color as selected by Architect.
2.06 FABRICATION
A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim
for scribing and site cutting.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
B. Verify mechanical,electrical,and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to
receive this work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirements for
grade indicated.
B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components,with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use
additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.
3.03 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHING
A. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations.Sand work smooth.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.
FINISH CARPENTRY Job Number 2170712.00
06 20 00-2/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 FINISH CARPENTRY
CAG-19-196 06 20 00 -3/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
FINISH CARPENTRY Job Number 2170712.00
06 20 00-4/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 06 4100
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Specially fabricated cabinet units.
B. Hardware.
C. Preparation for installing utilities.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 12 36 00-Countertops.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.
B. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS)- North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S.Version 3.0; 2016.
C. BHMA A156.9-American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials,component profiles,fastening methods,jointing details,and
accessories.
1. Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot, minimum.
C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.
D. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches square,
illustrating proposed cabinet,countertop,and shelf unit substrate and finish.
E. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges,shelf standards,and locksets,
demonstrating hardware design,quality,and finish.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with
minimum five years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect units from moisture damage.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in
building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Genothen;www.genothen.com.
B. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
Job Number 2170712.00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
CAG-19-196 0641 00 - 1/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.02 CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS),
unless noted otherwise.
B. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade.
C. Cabinets:
1. Adjustable Shelf Loading: 50 lbs. per sq.ft.
a. Deflection: L/144.
2. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay.
3. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style.
2.03 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS
A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
2.04 LAMINATE MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Formica Corporation: www.formica.com/#sle.
2. Wilsonart LLC: www.wilsonart.com/#sle.
3. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application.
B. Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC,flat shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated tongue; of width to
match component thickness.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.06 HARDWARE
A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9,types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified.
B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards or
multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish,for nominal 1 inch
spacing adjustments.
C. Drawer and Door Pulls: Berenson Wire Pull 4". Finish,satin nickel..
D. Catches: Magnetic.
E. Drawer Slides:
1. Type: Full extension.
2. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade.
3. Mounting: Side mounted.
4. Stops: Integral type.
5. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Accuride International, Inc: www.accuride.com/#sle.
b. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com/#sle.
C. Knape&Vogt Manufacturing Company; Heavy-Duty Drawer Slides:
www.knapeandvogt.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
F. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type,stainless,steel with satin finish.
1. Manufacturers:
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Job Number 2170712.00
0641 00-2/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
a. Grass America Inc: www.grassusa.com/#sle.
b. Hardware Resources: www.hardwareresources.com/#sle.
C. Blum, Inc: www.blum.com/#sle.
d. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
2.07 FABRICATION
A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage
through building openings.
B. Edging: Fit shelves,doors,and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one piece
for any single length.
C. Fitting:When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.
Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.
D. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with
manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline;secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel
arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.
E. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops as recommended by laminate manufacturer at 16
inches on center.
F. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint
cut edges.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place,assuring that they are rigid, plumb,and level.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK
CAG-19-196 0641 00 -3/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Job Number 2170712.00
0641 00-4/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 0812 13
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire-rated hollow metal frames for non-hollow metal doors.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 08 14 16- Flush Wood Doors: Non-hollow metal door for hollow metal frames.
B. Section 08 80 00-Glazing: Glazed borrowed lites.
C. Section 09 9123- Interior Painting: Field painting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI/SDI A250.3-Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory Applied Finish Coatings for Steel
Doors and Frames;2007 (R2011).
B. ANSI/SDI A250.8-Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames(SDI-100); 2014.
C. ANSI/SDI A250.10-Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel
Doors and Frames;2011.
D. BHMA A156.115-American National Standard for Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel
Frames;2014.
E. NAAMM HMMA 840-Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and
Frames; 2007.
F. NFPA 80-Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2016.
G. UL 10B-Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies;Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type
and locations,anchorage and fastening methods,and finishes;and one copy of referenced grade
standard.
C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening,showing elevations,glazing,frame profiles,and identifying
location of different finishes, if any.
D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation
instructions relating to this project.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section,
with not less than three years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least
three years of documented experience.
C. Maintain at project site copies of reference standards relating to installation of products specified.
Job Number2170712.00 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
CAG-19-196 08 12 13 - 1/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store in accordance with applicable requirements and in compliance with standards and/or custom
guidelines as indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Hollow Metal Frames with Integral Casings:
1. Curries,an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle.
2. Republic Doors,an Allegion brand: www.republicdoor.com/#sle.
3. Steelcraft,an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/#sle.
4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings for frame sizes,fire ratings,sound ratings,finishing,
door hardware to be installed,and other variations, if any.
B. Door Frame Type: Provide hollow metal door frames with integral casings.
C. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one
type of requirement,comply with the specified requirements for each type;for instance,an exterior
frame that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for
exterior frames and for sound-rated frames;where two requirements conflict,comply with the most
stringent.
D. Hardware Preparations,Selections and Locations: Comply with BHMA A156.115, NAAMM HMMA 830,
NAAMM HMMA 831 or ANSI/SDI A250.8(SDI-100) in accordance with specified requirements.
2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMES WITH INTEGRAL CASINGS
A. Fire-Rated Door Frames: Slip-on type.
1. Based on SDI Standards: ANSI/SDI A250.8(SDI-100).
a. Level 2- Heavy-duty.
b. Physical Performance Level B,500,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI A250.4.
C. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gage,0.053 inch, minimum.
d. Zinc Coating: Manufacturer's standard coating thickness;ASTM A653/A653M.
2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule,tested in accordance with UL 10C or NFPA
252("positive pressure fire tests").
3. Provide units listed and labeled by ITS(DIR)or UL(DIR).
a. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.
4. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished.
2.04 FINISHES
A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting,complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10,door manufacturer's standard.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Silencers: Resilient rubber,fitted into drilled hole;3 on strike side of single door,3 on center mullion of
pairs,and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES Job Number2170712.00
0812 13-2/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related requirements of specified
frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.
B. Install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.
C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
D. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 7100.
3.02 TOLERANCES
A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: Comply with related requirements of specified frame standards
or custom guidelines indicated in accordance with SDI 117 or NAAMM HMMA 861.
B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edges,crossed corner to corner.
END OF SECTION
Job Number2170712.00 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
CAG-19-196 08 12 13 -3/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
HOLLOW METAL FRAMES Job Number2170712.00
0812 13-4/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 0814 16
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Flush wood doors;flush configuration;fire-rated and non-rated.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 20 00- Finish Carpentry: Wood door frames.
B. Section 08 12 13- Hollow Metal Frames.
C. Section 08 80 00-Glazing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.
B. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS)- North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S.Version 3.0; 2016.
C. UL 10B-Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
D. UL 10C-Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies;Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction;veneer species,type and characteristics.
C. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames,elevations,sizes,types,swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking
for hardware,factory machining,factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details.
D. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer,8 1/2 x11 inch in size illustrating wood grain,stain color,
and sheen.
E. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement.
F. Installer's Qualification Statement.
G. Warranty,executed in Owner's name.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and
finishing.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section,with not less than three years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section,
with not less than three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Package,deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet
areas;or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if
stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.
Job Number 2170712.00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
CAG-19-196 08 14 16 - 1/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.07 WARRANTY
A. See Section 0178 00-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements.
B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.
C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer,warping beyond specified installation tolerances,defective
materials,and telegraphing core construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors:
1. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com/#sle.
2. Graham Wood Doors: www.grahamdoors.com/#sle.
3. Substitutions:See Section 0125 00-Substitution Procedures.
2.02 DOORS AND PANELS
A. Doors: Refer to drawings for locations and additional requirements.
1. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI
(AWS), unless noted otherwise.
2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.
B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated;flush construction.
1. Provide solid core doors at each location.
2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with UL 10C-Positive
Pressure; Underwriters Laboratories Inc(UL)or Intertek/Warnock Hersey(WHI) labeled without
any visible seals when door is open.
2.03 DOOR AND PANEL CORES
A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core(PC), plies and faces as
indicated.
B. Fire-Rated Doors: Mineral core type,with fire resistant composite core(FD), plies and faces as indicated
above;with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without
through-bolting.
2.04 DOOR FACINGS
A. Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: White birch,veneer grade in accordance with quality standard
indicated, plain sliced (flat cut),with book match between leaves of veneer, running match of spliced
veneer leaves assembled on door or panel face.
2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:
C. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with
hardware requirements and dimensions.
D. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings,with edge clearances in
accordance with specified quality standard.
E. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the quality standard specified.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS Job Number 2170712.00
08 14 16-2/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.06 FACTORY FINISHING-WOOD VENEER DOORS
A. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS),Section 5- Finishing
for grade specified and as follows:
1. Transparent:
a. System-4, Latex Acrylic,Water-based.
b. Stain: As selected by Architect.
C. Sheen: Satin.
B. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.
C. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Hollow Metal Door Frames: As specified in Section 08 1113.
B. Glazing Stops: Wood,of same species as door facing, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style
tamper proof screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.
1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.
B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.
C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.
D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
E. Coordinate installation of glazing.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Comply with specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.
B. Comply with specified quality standard for telegraphing,warp,and squareness.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B. Adjust closers for full closure.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
CAG-19-196 08 14 16 -3/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
FLUSH WOOD DOORS Job Number 2170712.00
08 14 16-4/4 CAG-19-196
Renton City Attorney and Police Training Center- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work under this section includes the complete finish hardware requirements for the project.
Quantities listed are for the contractor's convenience only and are not guaranteed. Items not
specifically mentioned, but necessary to complete the work shall be furnished, matching the items
specified in quality and finish.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
2. Section 08 Wood Doors
3. Section 08 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
4. Section 28 Electronic Security and Safety
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Qualification:
1. To assure a uniform high quality of materials for the project, it is intended that only specified
items be furnished. Comparable products may be accepted upon prior approval of architect.
2. Hardware to be new, free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain each kind of
hardware (Mechanical latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges and closers) from one
manufacturer except where specified.
3. Fire-Rated opening in compliance with NFPA80. Hardware UL10C/UBC-7-2 (positive pressure)
compliant for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware,
non-flaming door closers, approved bearing hinges and smoke seal. Furnish openings
complete.
B. Supplier Qualifications:
1. Hardware supplier will be a direct factory contract supplier who employs a certified Architectural
Hardware Consultant (AHC) available at all reasonable times during the course of the work for
project hardware consultation to owner, architect and contractor.
2. Supplier will be responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware.
3. Conduct pre-installation conference atjobsite. Initiate and conduct with supplier, installer and
related trades. Coordinate materials and techniques and sequence complex hardware items
and systems installation.
4. Key Conference shall be initiated and conducted with owner to determine system, keyway(s)
and structure.
C. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer to have not less than 3 years' experience specializing in installation of work in this
section. Company must maintain qualified personnel trained and experienced in installing
hardware.
DOOR HARDWARE Job Number 2170712.00
08 71 00- 1/12 CAG-19-196
Renton City Attorney and Police Training Center- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NFPA80— Fire Doors and Windows
B. NFPA101 — Life Safety Code
C. NFPA105—Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies
D. ANSI A117.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities
E. BHMA— Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
F. DHI — Door Hardware Institute
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Hardware schedule: Submit digital copies of schedule. Organize vertically formatted schedule into
Hardware Sets with index of doors and headings, indicate complete designations of every item
required for each door or opening. Include the following:
1. Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items.
2. Name, part number and manufacture of each item.
3. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
4. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedule.
5. Door and frame sizes, materials and degrees of swing.
B. Product Data: Submit digital copies for each product indicated.
C. Templates: Obtain and distribute templates for doors, frames, and other works specified to be
prepared for installing door hardware.
D. Wiring/Riser diagrams:As required for electric hardware indicated.
E. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 1.
F. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, after receipt of the approved
finish hardware schedule, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks.
G. Samples: Upon request submit material samples.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, handle and protect products to project site under provisions of Division 1 and as
specified herein.
B. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to the final Door Hardware
Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.
C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail.
DOOR HARDWARE Job Number 2170712.00
08 71 00-2/12 CAG-19-196
Renton City Attorney and Police Training Center- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Years from date of Substantial Completion, for durations indicated.
a. Closers: Thirty years
b. Exit Devices: Three years
c. Locksets: Limited Lifetime
1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance tools:
1. Furnish complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware,
including changing of cylinders.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL AND FABRICATION
A. Provide all door hardware for complete work, in accordance with the drawings and as specified
herein.
B. Provide items and quantities not specifically mentioned to ensure a proper and complete operational
installation.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approval of products from manufacturers indicated as "Acceptable Manufacturer" is contingent upon
those products providing all functions and features and meeting all requirements of scheduled
manufacturer's product.
ITEM SCHEDULED ACCEPTABLE
MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER
Hinges Ives IVE Hager, Bommer
Flush Bolts & Coordinators Ives IVE Burns, Rockwood
Locksets & Deadlocks Best (BES) None
Exit Devices & Mullions Von Du rin ON Precision, Sargent
Electric Strikes Von Du rin ON Trine, SDC
Power Supplies Von Du rin ON Precision, Sargent
Cylinders & Keying Best (BES) None
Door Closers LCN LCN Best, Sargent
Door Trim Ives IVE Trimco, Burns
Protection Plates Ives IVE Trimco, Burns
Overhead Stops Glynn-Johnson GLY Rixson, Sargent
Thresholds &Weatherstrip Zero (ZER) NGP, Reese,
Pemko
DOOR HARDWARE Job Number 2170712.00
08 71 00-3/12 CAG-19-196
Renton City Attorney and Police Training Center- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.3 HANGING
A. Conventional Hinges: Hinge open width minimum, but of sufficient throw to permit maximum door
swing. Steel or stainless steel pins:
1. Three hinges per leaf to 7 feet, 6-inch height.Add one for each additional 30 inches in height or
any fraction thereof.
2. Provide standard-weight 4 '/x 4 1/for 1 1/"thick doors up to 3'5". Provide heavy-weight 5 x 4
'/ on doors 36" and over.
3. Exterior outswing doors to have non removable (NRP) pins.
4. Pin tips, flat button, finish to match leaves.
5. Interior doors over 36"— Heavy weight.
6. Interior doors up to 36"—Standard weight.
2.4 LOCKSETS, LATCHSETS, DEADBOLTS
A. Heavy Duty Mortise Locks and Latches: Best 40H Series
1. Provide mortise locks certified as ANSI Al56.13, Grade 1 Operational, Grade 1 Security.
2. Provide lock case that is multi-function and field reversible for handing without opening case.
3. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with full 3/4 inch (19 mm)throw
stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt with full 1 inch (25 mm)
throw, constructed of stainless steel.
4. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim.
5. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets.
6. Lever Trim: Solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in design specified, with
wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Provide thru-bolted levers with 2-piece
spindles.
a. Lever Design: Best 16H
2.5 EXIT DEVICES
A. Panic and Fire Rated Exit Devices: Von Duprin 98/99 Series
1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1, and UL listed for Panic Exit or Fire
Exit Hardware.
2. Provide touchpad type exit devices, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or aluminum,
plated to standard architectural finishes to match balance of door hardware.
3. Touchpad: Extend minimum of one half of door width. Provide compression springs in devices,
latches, and outside trims or controls; tension springs also acceptable.
4. Provide exit devices with deadlatching feature for security and for future addition of alarm kits
and/or other electrified requirements.
5. Provide exit devices with manufacturer's approved strikes.
6. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Locate exit devices at height recommended
by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by Architect.
7. Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors, or provide spacers to fill gaps behind devices.
Where glass trim or molding projects off face of door, provide glass bead kits.
8. Removable Mullions: 2 inches (51 mm)x 3 inches (76 mm) steel tube. Where scheduled as
keyed removable mullion that is removed by use of a keyed cylinder, which is self-locking when
re-installed.
9. Provide UL labeled fire exit hardware for fire rated openings.
10. Provide factory drilled weep holes for exit devices used in full exterior application, highly
corrosive areas, and where noted in hardware sets.
DOOR HARDWARE Job Number 2170712.00
08 71 00-4/12 CAG-19-196
Renton City Attorney and Police Training Center- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
11. Provide electrified options as scheduled.
12. Where lever handles are specified as outside trim for exit devices, provide heavy-duty lever
trims with forged or cast escutcheon plates. Provide vandal-resistant levers that will travel to
90-degree down position when more than 35 pounds of torque are applied, and which can
easily be re-set.
a. Lever Style: Match lever style of locksets.
2.6 ELECTRIC STRIKES
A. Manufacturers and Products: Von Duprin 6000 Series
1. Provide electric strikes designed for use with type of locks shown at each opening.
2. Provide electric strikes UL Listed as burglary-resistant.
3. Where required, provide electric strikes UL Listed for fire doors and frames.
4. Provide fail-secure type electric strikes, unless specified otherwise.
5. Coordinate voltage and provide transformers and rectifiers for each strike as required.
2.7 KEYS, KEYING,AND KEY CONTROL
A. See Keying Requirements in this section
2.8 CLOSERS
A. Surface Closers: LCN 4040XP Series
1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA
certified independent testing laboratory. ISO 9000 certify closers. Stamp units with date of
manufacture code.
2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with high strength cast iron
cylinder, and full complement bearings at shaft.
3. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal closer
adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to-30 degrees F.
4. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and providing reduced
opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards.
5. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch
speed, general speed, and backcheck.
6. Provide closers with solid forged steel main arms and factory assembled heavy-duty forged
forearms for parallel arm closers.
7. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted.
8. Finish for Closer Cylinders, Arms, Adapter Plates, and Metal Covers: Powder coating finish
which has been certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing as described in ANSI Standard
A156.4 and ASTM B117, or has special rust inhibitor (SRI).
9. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for
details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting.
2.9 OTHER HARDWARE
A. Door stops: Provide stops to protect walls, casework or other hardware.
1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide stops (wall, floor or overhead) at each leaf of every
swinging door leaf.
DOOR HARDWARE Job Number 2170712.00
08 71 00-5/12 CAG-19-196
Renton City Attorney and Police Training Center- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. Where wall or floor stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders.
B. Weatherstrip and Gasket
1. Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound
gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled.
2. Provide non-corrosive fasteners as recommended by the manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Thresholds
1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size and profile as
detailed or scheduled.
D. Silencers
1. Interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs of doors.
E. Kickplates
1. Four beveled edges, .050 inches minimum thickness, height and width as scheduled. Sheet-
metal screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other hardware.
2.10 HARDWARE FINISH
A. Provide the following finishes unless noted differently in hardware groups:
Hinges 630 Stainless Steel Exterior, 652 Dull Chrome Interior
Locksets 626 Dull Chrome
Exit Devices 626 Dull Chrome
Closers 689 Aluminum
Kickplates 630 Stainless Steel
Other Hardware 626 Dull Chrome
Thresholds Aluminum
Weatherstrip/Sweeps Aluminum
2.11 KEYING REQUIREMENTS
A. All keyed cylinders shall be subject to the existing Best Masterkey system.
B. Furnish cylinders with construction cores. Following construction supply permanent keyed cores.
C. Cylinders to be furnished with visual key control with key code. Stamped on the face of the keys and
marked on the back or side of the cylinders.
D. Key Quantities
3 EA Master Keys
2 EA Control Keys
2 EA Construction Control Keys
5 EA Construction Keys
3 EA Change Keys per keyed alike group
DOOR HARDWARE Job Number 2170712.00
08 71 00- 6/12 CAG-19-196
Renton City Attorney and Police Training Center- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PART 3- EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ensure that walls and frames are square and plumb before hardware installation.
B. Locate hardware per SDI-100 and applicable building, fire, life-safety, accessibility, and security
codes. Notify Architect of any code conflicts before ordering materials.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrate. Set units
level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate for proper
installation and operation.
B. Locate floor stops not more than 4 inches from the wall.
C. Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment:Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure
proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as
intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating
equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
B. Occupancy Adjustment:Approximately three to six months after date of Substantial Completion,
Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant must examine and readjust each item of door
hardware, including adjusting operating forces, as necessary to ensure function of doors and door
hardware.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate electrical, electronic and pneumatic hardware system including adjustment and
maintenance procedures.
3.5 PROTECTION/CLEANING
A. Cover installed hardware, protect from paint, cleaning agents, weathering, carts/barrows, etc.
Remove covering materials and clean hardware just prior to substantial completion. Clean adjacent
wall, frame and door surfaces soiled from installation/reinstallation process.
DOOR HARDWARE Job Number 2170712.00
08 71 00- 7/12 CAG-19-196
Renton City Attorney and Police Training Center- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.6 DOOR HARDWARE GROUPS
HW SET: 01
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 EA DOUBLE STOREROOM 451-17W 16H 626 BES
LOCK
1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6210 FSE 24VDC 630 VON
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CVX 626 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
1 CARD READER-WORK OF DIVISION 28
1 POWER SUPPLY-WORK OF DIVISION
28
NON EGRESS DOOR. DOOR NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED ON BOTH SIDES. VALID CREDENTIAL
EITHER SIDE WILL MOMENTARILY UNLOCK DOOR. DOOR WILL REMAIN LOCKED BOTH DIRECTIONS
IN LOSS OF POWER.
HW SET: 02
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA PASSAGE SET 45HON 16H 626 BES
1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CVX 626 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
HW SET: 03
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 451-17D 16H 626 BES
1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CVX 626 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
DOOR HARDWARE Job Number 2170712.00
08 71 00-8/12 CAG-19-196
Renton City Attorney and Police Training Center- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
HW SET: 04
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 451-17D 16H 626 BES
1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6210 FSE 24VDC 630 VON
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CVX 626 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
1 CARD READER-WORK OF DIVISION 28
1 POWER SUPPLY-WORK OF DIVISION
28
DOOR(S) NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED. VALID CREDENTIAL WILL MOMENTARILY UNLOCK.
DOOR(S). DOOR(S) WILL REMAIN LOCKED ON LOSS OF POWER. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.
HW SET: 05
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 451-17D 16H 626 BES
1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6210 FSE 24VDC 630 VON
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CVX 626 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
1 CARD READER-WORK OF DIVISION 28
1 POWER SUPPLY-WORK OF DIVISION
28
DOOR(S) NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED. VALID CREDENTIAL WILL MOMENTARILY UNLOCK.
DOOR(S). DOOR(S) WILL REMAIN LOCKED ON LOSS OF POWER. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.
HW SET: 06
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 451-17D 16H 626 BES
1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6210 FSE 24VDC 630 VON
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
1 POWER SUPPLY-WORK OF DIVISION
28
1 CARD READER-WORK OF DIVISION 28
DOOR(S) NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED. VALID CREDENTIAL WILL MOMENTARILY UNLOCK.
DOOR(S). DOOR(S)WILL REMAIN LOCKED ON LOSS OF POWER. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.
DOOR HARDWARE Job Number 2170712.00
08 71 00-9/12 CAG-19-196
Renton City Attorney and Police Training Center- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
HW SET: 07
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA SELF-CLOSING BARN CC-CFT-202/CFT-200 BLK KNC
TRACK
1 EA DOOR PULL, 1" ROUND PR 8103EZHD 12" N 630 IVE
HW SET: 08
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 98-NL-F 626 VON
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 1 E72 626 BES
1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6111 FSE 24VDC 630 VON
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CVX 626 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA BK ZER
1 POWER SUPPLY-WORK OF DIVISION
28
1 CARD READER-WORK OF DIVISION 28
DOOR(S) NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED. VALID CREDENTIAL WILL MOMENTARILY UNLOCK.
DOOR(S). DOOR(S)WILL REMAIN LOCKED ON LOSS OF POWER. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.
HW SET: 09
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 45117D 16H 626 BES
1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6210 FSE 24VDC 630 VON
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CVX 626 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 870AA-S AA ZER
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 360AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 545A A ZER
1 CARD READER-WORK OF DIVISION 28
1 POWER SUPPLY-WORK OF DIVISION
28
DOOR(S) NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED. VALID CREDENTIAL WILL MOMENTARILY UNLOCK.
DOOR(S). DOOR(S) WILL REMAIN LOCKED ON LOSS OF POWER. FREE EGRESS AT ALL TIMES.
DOOR HARDWARE Job Number 2170712.00
08 71 00- 10/12 CAG-19-196
Renton City Attorney and Police Training Center- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
HW SET: 10
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA OFFICE LOCK 451-17AT 16H 626 BES
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CVX 626 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 870AA-S AA ZER
1 EA DOOR BOTTOM 360AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 545A A ZER
HW SET: 11
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK 451-17D 16H 626 BES
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10"X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CVX 626 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
DOOR HARDWARE Job Number 2170712.00
08 71 00- 1 1/12 CAG-19-196
Renton City Attorney and Police Training Center- Bid Documents 15 July 2019
END OF SECTION
DOOR HARDWARE Job Number 2170712.00
08 71 00- 12/12 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 08 80 00
GLAZING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Glazing units.
B. Glazing compounds and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 20 00- Finish Carpentry: sidelite components with requirement for glass.
B. Section 08 14 16- Flush Wood Doors: Glazed lites in doors.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 16 CFR 1201-Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.
B. ASTM C864-Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,Setting Blocks,
and Spacers; 2005(Reapproved 2011).
C. ASTM C1036-Standard Specification for Flat Glass;2011.
D. ASTM C1048-Standard Specification for Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Flat Glass; 2012.
E. GANA(GM)-GANA Glazing Manual;2009.
F. GANA(SM)-GANA Sealant Manual;2008.
G. UL(DIR)-Online Certifications Directory; current listings at database.uLcom.
H. UL 9-Standard for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
I. UL 10B-Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies;Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
J. UL 10C-Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data on Glazing Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical,functional,and environmental
characteristics, limitations,special application requirements,and identify available colors.
C. Samples: Submit two samples 4 by 4 inch in size of glass units.
D. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed
in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA(GM)and GANA(SM)for glazing installation methods.
Maintain one copy on site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and with at least
three years documented experience.
Job Number 2170712.00 GLAZING
CAG-19-196 08 80 00 - 1/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Glass Manufactures:
1. PPG Industries, Inc.:www.ppg.com.
2. Guardian:www.guardian.com.
3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 0125 00-Substitution Procedures.
2.02 GLAZING UNITS
A. Safety Glass(Type T)- Monolithic Interior Vision Glazing:
1. Applications: Door and side lite glazing unless noted otherwise.
2. Glass Type: Fully tempered float glass.
3. Tint: Clear.
4. Thickness: 1/4 inch, nominal.
B. Rated Doors- Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing: Type,thickness,and configuration of glazing that contains
flame,smoke,and does not block radiant heat,as required to achieve fire-doors indicated fire-rating
period of 90 minutes or less.
1. Applications:
a. Glazing in fire-rated door assembly.
2. Provide products listed by ITS(DIR)or UL(DIR)and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Safety Glazing Certification: 16 CFR 1201 Category II.
4. Glazing Method: As required for fire rating.
5. Fire-Rating Period: As indicated on drawings.
6. Markings for Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Assemblies: Provide permanent markings on
fire-protection-rated glazing in compliance with ICC(IBC), local building code,and authorities
having jurisdiction
a. "D"-meets fire door assembly criteria of NFPA 252, UL 1013,or UL 10C fire test standards.
b. "OH"-meets fire window assembly criteria including hose stream test of NFPA 257,or UL 9
fire test standards.
C. "H"-meets fire door assembly hose stream test of NFPA 252, UL 1013,or UL 10C fire tests
standards.
d. "XXX"-placeholder that represents fire-rating period, in minutes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerances, including those for size,
squareness,and offsets at corners.
3.02 INSTALLATION,GENERAL
A. Install glazing in compliance with written instructions of glass,gaskets,and other glazing material
manufacturers, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in glazing referenced
standards.
B. Install glazing sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193,GANA(SM),and manufacturer's instructions.
C. Do not exceed edge pressures around perimeter of glass lites as stipulated by glass manufacturer.
D. Set glass lites of system with uniform pattern,draw, bow,and similar characteristics.
E. Prevent glass from contact with any contaminating substances that may be the result of construction
operations such as,and not limited to the following;weld splatter,fire-safing, plastering, mortar
droppings,etc.
GLAZING Job Number 2170712.00
08 80 00-2/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove excess glazing materials from finish surfaces immediately after application using solvents or
cleaners recommended by manufacturers.
B. Remove non-permanent labels immediately after glazing installation is complete.
C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces after sealants are fully cured.
D. Clean glass on both exposed surfaces not more than 4 days prior to Date of Substantial Completion in
accordance with glass manufacturer's written recommendations.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste.
B. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period prior to Date of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 GLAZING
CAG-19-196 08 80 00 -3/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
GLAZING Job Number 2170712.00
08 80 00-4/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 09 05 61
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section applies to floors identified in Contract Documents that are receiving the following types of
floor coverings:
1. Carpet tile.
2. Resilient Tile.
B. Preparation of existing concrete floor slabs for installation of floor coverings.
C. Testing of concrete floor slabs for moisture and alkalinity(pH).
D. Patching compound.
E. Remedial floor coatings.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C109/C109M-Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
(Using 2-in. or(50-mm)Cube Specimens);2013.
B. ASTM C472-Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum,Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum
Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2014).
C. ASTM F710-Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;2011.
D. ASTM F1869-Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor
Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride;2011.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate scheduling of cleaning and testing,so that preliminary cleaning has been completed for at
least 24 hours prior to testing.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers' Product Literature: For each specific combination of
substrate,floor covering,and adhesive to be used; showing:
1. Moisture and alkalinity(pH) limits and test methods.
2. Manufacturer's required bond/compatibility test procedure.
B. Testing Agency's Report:
1. Description of areas tested; include floor plans and photographs if helpful.
2. Summary of conditions encountered.
3. Moisture and alkalinity(pH)test reports.
4. Copies of specified test methods.
5. Recommendations for remediation of unsatisfactory surfaces.
6. Product data for recommended remedial coating.
7. Submit report to Architect.
8. Submit report not more than two business days after conclusion of testing.
C. Adhesive Bond and Compatibility Test Report.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Moisture and alkalinity(pH)testing shall be performed by an independent testing agency employed and
paid by Contractor.
Job Number 2170712.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
CAG-19-196 09 05 61 - 1/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent testing agency experienced in the types of testing specified.
1. Submit evidence of experience consisting of at least 3 test reports of the type required,with
project Owner's project contact information.
C. Contractor's Responsibility Relating to Independent Agency Testing:
1. Provide access for and cooperate with testing agency.
2. Confirm date of start of testing at least 10 days prior to actual start.
3. Allow at least 4 business days on site for testing agency activities.
4. Achieve and maintain specified ambient conditions.
5. Notify Architect when specified ambient conditions have been achieved and when testing will
start.
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver,store, handle,and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations.
B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging; include installation instructions.
C. Keep materials from freezing.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperature in spaces where concrete testing is being performed,and for at least 48
hours prior to testing,at not less than 65 degrees F or more than 85 degrees F.
B. Maintain relative humidity in spaces where concrete testing is being performed,and for at least 48
hours prior to testing,at not less than 40 percent and not more than 60 percent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Patching Compound: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product,suitable for conditions,
and compatible with adhesive and floor covering. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring
manufacturer, provide a product with the following characteristics:
1. Cementitious moisture-, mildew-,and alkali-resistant compound,compatible with floor,floor
covering,and floor covering adhesive,and capable of being feathered to nothing at edges.
2. Compressive Strength: 3000 psi, minimum,after 28 days,when tested in accordance with ASTM
C109/C109M or ASTM C472,whichever is appropriate.
B. Alternate Flooring Adhesive: Floor covering manufacturer's recommended product,suitable for the
moisture and pH conditions present; low-VOC. In the absence of any recommendation from flooring
manufacturer, provide a product recommended by adhesive manufacturer as suitable for substrate and
floor covering and for conditions present.
C. Remedial Floor Coating: Single-or multi-layer coating or coating/overlay combination intended by its
manufacturer to resist water vapor transmission to degree sufficient to meet flooring manufacturer's
emission limits, resistant to the level of alkalinity(pH)found,and suitable for adhesion of flooring
without further treatment.
1. Use product recommended by testing agency.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE SLAB PREPARATION
A. Perform following operations in the order indicated:
1. Preliminary cleaning.
2. Moisture vapor emission tests;3 tests in the first 1000 square feet and one test in each additional
1000 square feet, unless otherwise indicated or required by flooring manufacturer.
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION Job Number 2170712.00
09 05 61 -2/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3. Internal relative humidity tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless
otherwise indicated.
4. Alkalinity(pH)tests; in same locations as moisture vapor emission tests, unless otherwise
indicated.
5. Specified remediation, if required.
6. Patching,smoothing,and leveling,as required.
7. Other preparation specified.
8. Adhesive bond and compatibility test.
9. Protection.
B. Remediations:
1. Active Water Leaks or Continuing Moisture Migration to Surface of Slab: Correct this condition
before doing any other remediation; re-test after correction.
2. Excessive Moisture Emission or Relative Humidity: If an adhesive that is resistant to the level of
moisture present is available and acceptable to flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for
installation of the flooring; if not,apply remedial floor coating or remedial sheet membrane over
entire suspect floor area.
3. Excessive Alkalinity(pH): If remedial floor coating is necessary to address excessive moisture, no
additional remediation is required; if not, if an adhesive that is resistant to the level present is
available and acceptable to the flooring manufacturer, use that adhesive for installation of the
flooring;otherwise,apply a skim coat of specified patching compound over entire suspect floor
area.
3.02 PRELIMINARY CLEANING
A. Clean floors of dust,solvents, paint,wax,oil,grease,asphalt, residual adhesive,adhesive removers,
film-forming curing compounds,sealing compounds,alkaline salts,excessive laitance, mold, mildew,
and other materials that might prevent adhesive bond.
B. Do not use solvents or other chemicals for cleaning.
3.03 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION TESTING
A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method
or this specification,comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
B. Where this specification conflicts with the referenced test method,comply with the requirements of
this section.
C. Test in accordance with ASTM F1869 and as follows.
D. Plastic sheet test and mat bond test may not be substituted for the specified ASTM test method,as
those methods do not quantify the moisture content sufficiently.
E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as
indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if test values exceed 3 pounds
per 1000 square feet per 24 hours.
F. Report: Report the information required by the test method.
3.04 ALKALINITY TESTING
A. Where the floor covering manufacturer's requirements conflict with either the referenced test method
or this specification,comply with the manufacturer's requirements.
B. The following procedure is the equivalent of that described in ASTM F710, repeated here for the
Contractor's convenience.
C. Use a wide range alkalinity(pH)test paper, its associated chart,and distilled or deionized water.
Job Number 2170712.00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION
CAG-19-196 09 05 61 -3/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
D. Place several drops of water on a clean surface of concrete,forming a puddle approximately 1 inch in
diameter. Allow the puddle to set for approximately 60 seconds,then dip the alkalinity(pH)test paper
into the water, remove it,and compare immediately to chart to determine alkalinity(pH) reading.
E. In the event that test values exceed floor covering manufacturer's limits, perform remediation as
indicated. In the absence of manufacturer limits, perform remediation if alkalinity(pH)test value is
over 10.
3.05 PREPARATION
A. See individual floor covering section(s)for additional requirements.
B. Comply with recommendations of testing agency.
C. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.
D. Fill and smooth surface cracks,grooves,depressions,control joints and other non-moving joints,and
other irregularities with patching compound.
E. Do not fill expansion joints, isolation joints,or other movingjoints.
3.06 ADHESIVE BOND AND COMPATIBILITY TESTING
A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of floor covering manufacturer.
3.07 APPLICATION OF REMEDIAL FLOOR COATING
A. Comply with requirements and recommendations of coating manufacturer.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Cover prepared floors with building paper or other durable covering.
END OF SECTION
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FLOORING PREPARATION Job Number 2170712.00
09 05 61 -4/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 09 2116
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.
B. Metal stud wall framing.
C. Acoustic insulation.
D. Gypsum wallboard.
E. Joint treatment and accessories.
F. Bullet resistant sheathing and wallboard.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C475/C475M-Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum
Board;2015.
B. ASTM C 630/C 630M-Standard Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board;2000.
C. ASTM C645-Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2014.
D. ASTM C754-Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products;2015.
E. ASTM C840-Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board;2013.
F. ASTM C1002-Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for Application of Gypsum
Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2014.
G. ASTM C1047-Standard Specification for Accessories For Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base;
2014a.
H. ASTM C1280-Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing Board;2013.
I. ASTM C1396/C1396M-Standard Specification for Gypsum Board;2014.
J. ASTM C1629/C1629M-Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior Gypsum
Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels; 2015.
K. ASTM D3273-Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior
Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.
L. ASTM E413-Classification for Rating Sound Insulation;2010.
M. UL(FRD)- Fire Resistance Directory;current edition.
N. UL 752-Standard for Bullet-Resisting Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
0. UL(FRD)- Fire Resistance Directory;current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing,gypsum board,accessories,and joint finishing system.
C. Test Reports: For stud framing products that do not comply with ASTM C645 or ASTM C754, provide
independent laboratory reports showing maximum stud heights at required spacings and deflections.
D. Test Reports: Bullet resistant sheathing and wallboard.
Job Number2170712.00 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
CAG-19-196 0921 16 - 1/6
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840. Comply with requirements of GA-600 for fire-rated assemblies.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board installation and finishing,
with minimum 3 years of experience.
C. Apprentice workers may be employed only under constant supervision from experienced installers or
applicators.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies as indicated on drawings.
1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Protection
1. Store materials in dry,ventilated space, under cover and 4 inches above concrete floor slabs.
2. Protect members from excessive stress during erection.
3. Distribute gypsum panels throughout the building to prevent overstressing the floor structural
systems during construction.
4. Store gypsum panels on flat surface and protect panels from warp and edge damage.
1.08 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Temperature and Humidity Requirements:
1. Maintain ambient air temperature above 55 degrees F.
2. Maintain 70 percent maximum relative humidity.
3. Maintain air temperature and humidity within the above limits in each work area for 48 hours
prior to,during,and after installation of gypsum board systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
B. Interior Partitions, Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following
characteristics:
1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests
conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.
C. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:
1. Fire Rated Partitions: UL listed assembly No. U419; 1 hour rating.
2. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular assembly
in the current UL(FRD).
2.02 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers- Metal Framing,Connectors,and Accessories:
1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems: www.clarkdietrich.com/#sle.
2. Jaimes Industries:www.jaimesind.com/#sle.
3. Marino: www.marinoware.com/#sle.
4. SCAFCO Corporation: www.scafco.com/#sle.
5. Steel Construction Systems: www.steeIconsystems.com/#sle.
6. Substitutions:See Section 0125 00-Substitution Procedures.
B. Metal Framing Connectors and Accessories:
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Job Number 2170712.00
0921 16-2/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1. Same manufacturer as framing.
2. Simpson Strong-Tie Company, Inc.:wwwstrongtie.com
C. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645;galvanized sheet steel,of size and
properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated,with maximum deflection of
wall framing of L/120 at 5 psf.
1. Exception: The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of ASTM C 645 are
waived provided steel of 40 ksi minimum yield strength is used,the metal is continuously dimpled,
the effective thickness is at least twice the base metal thickness,and maximum stud heights are
determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 72 using assemblies specified by ASTM C 754.
2. Studs: "C"shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.
3. Runners: U shaped,sized to match studs.
4. Ceiling Channels: C-shaped.
5. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.
D. Ceiling Hangers:Type and size as specified in ASTM C754 for spacing required.
E. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate
deflection using slotted holes,screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while
maintaining structural performance of partition.
1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity required
by applicable code,when evaluated in accordance with AISI S100-12.
2. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet,SS Grade 50/340,with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized
coating.
3. Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint systems
indicated on drawings.
2.03 BOARD MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers-Gypsum-Based Board:
1. American Gypsum Company: www.americangypsum.com/#sle.
2. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com/#sle.
3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum: www.gpgypsum.com/#sle.
4. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com/#sle.
5. USG Corporation: www.usg.com/#sle.
6. Substitutions:See Section 0125 00-Substitution Procedures.
B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize
joints in place;ends square cut.
1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10,when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
a. Mold resistant board is required At Sink Walls.
3. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no
tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.
4. Thickness:
a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch.
b. Ceilings: 5/8 inch.
5. Paper-Faced Products:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum;Tough Rock.
b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum;Tough Rock Fireguard X.
C. Substitutions:See Section 0125 00-Substitution Procedures.
6. Mold Resistant Paper Faced Products:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum;Tough Rock Mold-Guard.
b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum;Tough Rock Fireguard X Mold-Guard.
C. Substitutions:See Section 0125 00-Substitution Procedures.
Job Number2170712.00 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
CAG-19-196 0921 16 -3/6
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Impact Resistant Wallboard:
1. Application: new walls at Defensive Tactics 401.
2. Surface Abrasion: Level 3, minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM C1629/C1629M.
3. Indentation: Level 1, minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM C1629/C1629M.
4. Soft Body Impact: Level 3, minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM C1629/C1629M.
5. Hard Body Impact: Level 3, minimum,when tested in accordance with ASTM C1629/C1629M.
6. Type: Fire resistance rated Type X, UL or WH listed.
7. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
8. Edges: Tapered.
9. Paper-Faced Products:
a. American Gypsum Company; M-Bloc I Type X.
b. CertainTeed Corporation; Extreme Impact Resistant Drywall with M2Tech.
C. National Gypsum Company;Gold Bond HI-Impact XP Gypsum Board.
d. Substitutions:See Section 0125 00-Substitution Procedures.
D. Bullet Resistant Fiberglass Panels: UL 752.
1. Security Level: UL Listed Level Three bullet resistant.
2. Material:Woven roving. multi-ply, ballistic grade fiberglass cloth with thermoset polyester resin.
3. Thickness: 1/2" Nom. inch.
4. Acceptable Manufacurers:
a. Armortex Bullet Resistant Fiberglass Composite Panel:www.armortex.com
b. Sureboard 20OB: sureboard.com
C. ArmorCore:www.armorcore.com
E. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M;ends square cut.
1. Application:Sink Areas.
2. Core Type: Regular&Type X.
3. Thickness: 5/8 inch,as indicated.
4. Edges:Tapered.
2.04 GYPSUM WALLBOARD ACCESSORIES
A. Acoustic Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed glass fiber,friction fit type, unfaced. Thickness: Full Stud
inch.
B. Acoustic Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex or water-based elastomeric sealant;do not use solvent-based
non-curing butyl sealant.
1. Products:
a. Franklin International, Inc;Titebond GREENchoice Professional Acoustical Smoke and Sound
Sealant: www.titebond.com/#sle.
b. Liquid Nails,a brand of PPG Architectural Coatings;AS-825 Acoustical Sound Sealant:
www.liquidnails.com/#sle.
C. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
C. Acoustical Caulking,CK-3: ASTM C 919, non-hardening polyisobutylene rubber.
D. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047,galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless noted otherwise.
1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.
E. Beads,Joint Accessories,and Other Trim: ASTM C1047, rigid plastic,galvanized steel,or rolled zinc,
unless noted otherwise.
1. Corner Beads: Low profile,for 90 degree outside corners.
F. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project
conditions.
1. Fiberglass Tape:2 inch wide,coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners,except as otherwise
indicated.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Job Number 2170712.00
0921 16-4/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. Paper Tape:2 inch wide,creased paper tape for joints and corners,except as otherwise indicated.
3. Joint Compound: Drying type,vinyl-based, ready-mixed.
a. Products:
1) CertainTeed Corporation; Extreme All-Purpose Joint Compound:
www.certainteed.com/#sle.
2) Substitutions:See Section 0125 00-Substitution Procedures.
G. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Cold-Formed Steel Studs Less than 0.033 inch in
Thickness and Wood Members: ASTM C1002;self-piercing tapping screws,corrosion resistant.
H. Screws for Fastening of Gypsum Panel Products to Steel Members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness:
ASTM C954;steel drill screws,corrosion resistant.
I. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type.
J. Adhesive for Attachment to Wood,ASTM C557 and Metal:
1. Products:
a. Franklin International, Inc;Titebond PROvantage Professional Drywall Adhesive:
www.titebond.com/#sle.
b. Liquid Nails,a brand of PPG Architectural Coatings; DWP-24 Drywall Construction Adhesive:
www.liquidnails.com/#sle.
C. Substitution:See Section 0125 00-Substitution Procedures
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PERFORMANCE
A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.
1. Examine structural framing and conditions under which wall and ceiling systems are to be
installed.
2. Start of wall and ceiling system Work will indicate acceptance of surfaces and conditions within
each area.
B. Protection: Provide temporary covering to eliminate splattering of joint compound on adjacent finished
surfaces.
3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center.
1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations.
2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to to ceiling framing in
accordance with details.
C. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain clearance
between top of studs and structure.
D. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not less than
double studs at jambs.
E. Blocking: Install blocking for support of wall cabinets. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs.
3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces,around cut openings, behind and around electrical and
mechanical items within partitions,and tight to items passing through partitions.
B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing members.
2. Place continuous bead at perimeter of each layer of gypsum board.
Job Number2170712.00 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
CAG-19-196 0921 16 -5/6
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3. Seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe,ducts,and rough-in boxes,except where
firestopping is provided.
3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ASTM C840,GA-216,and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints,
especially in highly visible locations.
B. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly
listing.
C. Exposed Gypsum Board in Interior Wet Areas: Seal joints,cut edges,and holes with water-resistant
sealant.
D. Bullet Resistant Panels:
1. Install bullet resistant sheathing according to manufacturer's written recommendations and with
manufacturer approved fasteners.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.
B. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
3.06 JOINTTREATMENT
A. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint
compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.
B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840,as follows:
1. Level 5: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish.
2. Level 2: In utility areas, behind cabinetry,and on backing board to receive tile finish.
3. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings,whether or not accessible in the completed
construction.
C. Tape,fill,and sand exposed joints,edges,and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive
finishes.
1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
2. Taping,filling,and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile and
fixed cabinetry.
3. Taping,filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications.
3.07 TOLERANCES
A. Do not exceed 3/16 inch variation in 8'-0"from plumb, level,and true lines.
B. Do not exceed 1/8 inch variation in 8'-0"from level surface in areas scheduled to receive thin set
ceramic tile and fiberglass reinforced polyester resin panels.
C. Do not exceed 1/16 inch offset at joints between panels within the same plane.
END OF SECTION
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Job Number 2170712.00
0921 16- 6/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 09 30 00
TILING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tile for wall applications.
B. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate.
C. Ceramic trim.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI A108/A118/A136-American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile
(Compendium); 2017.
B. ANSI A108.1a-American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set
Method,with Portland Cement Mortar;2014.
C. ANSI A108.1b-American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured
Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999(Reaffirmed
2010).
D. ANSI A108.1c-Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set Method
with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Bed
with Dry-Set or Latex-Portland Cement; 1999(Reaffirmed 2010).
E. ANSI A108.5-American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set
Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar; 1999(Reaffirmed 2010).
F. ANSI A108.10-American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework; 1999
(Reaffirmed 2010).
G. ANSI A108.11-American National Standard Specifications for Interior Installation of Cementitious
Backer Units;2010(Reaffirmed 2016).
H. ANSI A118.4-American National Standard Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar; 2012
(Revised).
I. ANSI A118.7-American National Standard Specifications for High Performance Cement Grouts for Tile
Installation; 2010(Revised).
J. ANSI A118.9-American National Standard Specifications for Test Methods and Specifications for
Cementitious Backer Units; 1999(Reaffirmed 2016).
K. TCNA(HB)- Handbook for Ceramic,Glass,and Stone Tile Installation;2015.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers'data sheets on tile, mortar,grout,and accessories. Include
instructions for using grouts and adhesives.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns,color arrangement, perimeter conditions,junctions with
dissimilar materials,control and expansion joints,thresholds,ceramic accessories,and setting details.
D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 by 18 inches in size
illustrating pattern,color variations,and grout joint size variations.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Installer's Qualification Statement:
Job Number 2170712.00 TILING
CAG-19-196 09 30 00 - 1/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1. Submit documentation of National Tile Contractors Association (NTCA)or Tile Contractors'
Association of America (TCAA)accreditation.
G. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods,cleaning materials,and stain removal
methods.
H. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements,for additional provisions.
2. Extra Tile: 1 percent of each size,color,and surface finish combination.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Maintain one copy of and ANSI A108/A118/A136 and TCNA(HB)on site.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in
this section,with minimum five years of documented experience.
C. Installer Qualifications:
1. Company specializing in performing tile installation,with minimum of five years of documented
experience.
1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment.
B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE
A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer.
1. American Olean Corporation: www.americanolean.com
2. Dal-Tile Corporation: www.daltile.com
3. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
B. Glass Tile: Daltile-Glass Horizons Decorative Glass Tile.
1. Large Format Tiles:
a. Size: 3 x 8 inch, nominal.
b. Thickness: 3/8 inch.
2.02 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. Ceramic Trim: Matching bullnose,double bullnose,cove base,and cove ceramic shapes in sizes
coordinated with field tile.
1. Applications:
a. Open Edges: Bullnose.
2. Manufacturers: Same as for tile.
2.03 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4.
1. Products:
a. ARDEX Engineered Cements;ARDEX N 23 MICROTEC: www.ardexamericas.com
b. Custom Building Products; ProLite Premium Rapid Setting Large Format Tile Mortar,with
Multi-Surface Bonding Primer: www.custombuildingproducts.com
TILING Job Number 2170712.00
09 30 00-2/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete 735 Premium Flex: www.merkrete.com
d. TEC,an H.B. Fuller Construction Products Brand;TEC Ultimate Large Tile Mortar:
www.tecspecialty.com
e. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
2.04 GROUTS
A. High Performance Polymer Modified Grout: ANSI A118.7 polymer modified cement grout.
1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is
indicated.
2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less than 1/8
inch wide.
3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line.
4. Products:
a. ARDEX Engineered Cements;ARDEX FL: www.ardexamericas.com
b. Custom Building Products; Fusion Pro Single Component Grout:
www.custombuildingproducts.com
C. LATICRETE International, Inc; LATICRETE PERMACOLOR Grout: www.laticrete.com
d. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Pro Grout: www.merkrete.com
e. TEC,an H.B. Fuller Construction Products Brand;TEC AccuColor Plus Grout:
www.tecspecialty.com
f. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
2.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Grout Sealer: Liquid-applied, moisture and stain protection for existing or new Portland cement grout.
1. Composition: Water-based colorless silicone.
2. Products:
a. Merkrete, by Parex USA, Inc; Merkrete Grout Sealer: www.merkrete.com
b. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
2.06 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Backer Board: Cementitious type complying with ANSI A118.9; high density,glass fiber reinforced, 1/2
inch thick;2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners.
1. Products:
a. Custom Building Products;WonderBoard Lite Backerboard:
www.custombuildingproducts.com
b. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are
dust-free,and are ready to receive tile.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding work from damage.
B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.
C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness
tolerances.
Job Number 2170712.00 TILING
CAG-19-196 09 30 00 -3/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
D. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape
joints and corners,cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge.
3.03 INSTALLATION-GENERAL
A. Install tile,thresholds,and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI
A108.1a through ANSI A108.13, manufacturer's instructions,and TCNA(HB) recommendations.
B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.
C. Place tile joints uniform in width,subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints
without voids,cracks,excess mortar or excess grout,or too little grout.
D. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.
E. Prior to grouting,allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours.
F. Grout tile joints unless otherwise indicated.
G. At changes in plane and tile-to-tile control joints, use tile sealant instead of grout,with either bond
breaker tape or backer rod as appropriate to prevent three-sided bonding.
3.04 INSTALLATION-WALL TILE
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.
END OF SECTION
TILING Job Number 2170712.00
09 30 00-4/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 09 5100
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 2113 00- Fire-Suppression Sprinkler Systems: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system.
B. Section 23 37 00-Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling.
C. Section 26 5100- Interior Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system.
D. Section 28 46 00- Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm components in ceiling system.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C635/C635M-Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance,and Testing of Metal
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2013a.
B. ASTM C636/C636M-Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels; 2013.
C. ASTM E580/E580M-Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions;2014.
D. ASTM E1264-Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products;2014.
E. UL(FRD)- Fire Resistance Directory;current edition.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,sufficient heat is
provided,dust generating activities have terminated,and overhead work is completed,tested,and
approved.
B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning.
C. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components.
D. Samples: Submit two samples each,4 inches long,of suspension system main runner.
E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. Extra Acoustical Units: Quantity equal to 5 percent of total installed.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
CAG-19-196 0951 00 - 1/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F,and maximum humidity of 40 percent prior
to,during,and after acoustical unit installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Suspension Systems:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com/#sle.
2. USG: www.usg.com/#sle.
3. Match Existing System Where Indicated.
4. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
2.02 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Acoustical Units-General: ASTM E1264,Class A.
B. Acoustical Tile Type 1: Painted mineral fiber,ASTM E1264 Type III,with the following characteristics:
1. Size: 24 by 48 inches.
2. Products:
a. Match Existing Tiles.
b. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
C. Acoustical Panels Type 2: Painted mineral fiber,ASTM E1264 Type III,with the following characteristics:
1. Size: 24 by 48 inches.
2. Thickness: 3/4 inches.
3. Composition: Wet felted.
4. Edge: Reveal edge.
5. Surface Color: White.
6. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured.
7. Suspension System: Exposed grid Type 15/16 PRELUDE.
8. Products:
a. Dune Second Look-24x24 Inch Pattern.
b. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)
A. Metal Suspension Systems-General: Complying with ASTM C635/C635M;die cut and interlocking
components,with stabilizer bars,clips,splices, perimeter moldings,and hold down clips as required.
B. Exposed Steel Suspension System Type 1: Formed steel,commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty.
1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face.
2. Products:
a. Match Existing Suspension System.
b. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
C. Exposed Steel Suspension System Type 2: Formed steel,commercial quality cold rolled; heavy-duty.
1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face.
2. Finish: White painted.
3. Products:
a. 15/16 PRELUDE.
b. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Job Number 2170712.00
0951 00-2/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application,seismic
requirements,and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.
B. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.
1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid.
C. Acoustical Sealant For Perimeter Moldings: Non-hardening, non-skinning,for use in conjunction with
suspended ceiling system.
D. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
3.02 INSTALLATION-SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M,ASTM E580/E580M,and
manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section.
B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components,for maximum deflection
of 1:360.
C. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work.
D. Hang suspension system independent of walls,columns,ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying
members are spliced,avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
E. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected
hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to
exceed deflection capability.
G. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner,or support
components independently.
H. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
I. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with other
interruptions.
1. Use longest practical lengths.
2. Overlap and rivet corners.
3.03 INSTALLATION-ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Fit acoustical units in place,free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and
function.
C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.
E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane,and free from twist,warp,and dents.
F. Cutting Acoustical Units:
1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
CAG-19-196 0951 00 -3/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
G. Install hold-down clips on each panel to retain panels tight to grid system; comply with fire rating
requirements.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
END OF SECTION
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS Job Number 2170712.00
0951 00-4/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 09 65 00
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Resilient tile flooring.
B. Resilient base.
C. Installation accessories.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM F710-Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2011.
B. ASTM F1066-Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile; 2004(Reapproved 2014).
C. ASTM F1861-Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base;2008(Reapproved 2012).
D. RFCI (RWP)- Recommended Work Practices for Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings; Resilient Floor
Covering Institute; October 2011.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics;
including sizes, patterns and colors available;and installation instructions.
C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial selection.
D. Verification Samples: Submit two samples,4 by 4 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each
resilient flooring product specified.
E. Concrete Testing Standard: Submit a copy of ASTM F710.
F. Concrete Sub-floor Test Report: Submit a copy of the moisture and alkalinity(pH)test reports.
G. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring,submit written certification by flooring manufacturer and
adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable.
H. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,and
suggested schedule for cleaning,stripping,and re-waxing.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified flooring with minimum
three years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing specified flooring with minimum three years
documented experience.
1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Upon receipt, immediately remove any shrink-wrap and check materials for damage and the correct
style,color,quantity and run numbers.
B. Store all materials off of the floor in an acclimatized,weather-tight space.
C. Maintain temperature in storage area between 65 degrees F and 85 degrees F.
D. Do not double stack pallets.
Job Number 2170712.00 RESILIENT FLOORING
CAG-19-196 09 65 00 - 1/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a temperature of
70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions above 55 degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TILE FLOORING
A. Vinyl Composition Tile: Homogeneous,with color extending throughout thickness.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Johnsonite,a Tarkett Company: www.johnsonite.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions:See Section 0125 00-Substitution Procedures
2. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1066,of Class corresponding to type specified.
3. Size: 12 by 12 inch.
4. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
5. Color: Refere to schedule of interior finishes located on drawings.
2.02 RESILIENT BASE
A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861,Type TS rubber,vulcanized thermoset;top set Style B,Cove.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Johnsonite,a Tarkett Company: www.johnsonite.com/#sle.
b. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com/#sle.
C. Substitution:See Section 0125 00-Substitution Procedures
2. Height: 4 inch.
3. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
4. Finish: Satin.
5. Length: Roll.
6. Color: Refer to schedule of interior finishes located on drawings.
7. Accessories: Premolded external corners and internal corners.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Primers,Adhesives,and Seam Sealer: Waterproof;types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
B. Moldings,Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.
C. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer,free of cracks that might
telegraph through flooring,clean,dry,and free of curing compounds,surface hardeners,and other
chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.
B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,are
dust-free,and are ready to receive resilient base.
C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient flooring
installation by testing for moisture and pH.
1. Test in accordance with ASTM F710.
2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring
manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
RESILIENT FLOORING Job Number 2170712.00
09 65 00-2/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove existing resilient flooring and flooring adhesives;follow the recommendations of RFCI (RWP).
B. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.
C. Clean substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION-GENERAL
A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of wall conditions.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Adhesive-Applied Installation:
1. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
2. Fit joints and butt seams tightly.
3. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
D. Where type of floor finish, pattern,or color are different on opposite sides of door,terminate flooring
under centerline of door.
E. Scribe flooring to walls,columns,cabinets,floor outlets,and other appurtenances to produce tight
joints.
3.04 INSTALLATION-TILE FLOORING
A. Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent when tile is placed, unless otherwise
indicated in manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattern.
3.05 INSTALLATION-RESILIENT BASE
A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.
B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded
units.
C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.
D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 RESILIENT FLOORING
CAG-19-196 09 65 00 -3/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
RESILIENT FLOORING Job Number 2170712.00
09 65 00-4/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 09 68 13
TILE CARPETING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 05 61-Common Work Results for Flooring Preparation: Independent agency testing of
concrete slabs, removal of existing floor coverings,cleaning,and preparation.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D2859-Standard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished Textile Floor Covering
Materials; 2006(Reapproved 2011).
B. ASTM E648-Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant
Heat Energy Source;2014c.
C. CRI 104-Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet;2015.
D. CRI (GLP)-Green Label Plus Testing Program-Certified Products;www.carpet-rug.org;current edition.
E. NFPA 253-Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant
Heat Energy Source;2015.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products,describing physical and performance characteristics;
sizes, patterns,colors available,and method of installation.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of joints.
D. Samples: Submit two carpet tiles illustrating color and pattern design for each carpet color selected.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring
special attention.
F. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,and
suggested schedule for cleaning.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet tile with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet tile with minimum three years
documented experience and approved by carpet tile manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Tile Carpeting:
1. Mohawk Group:www.mohawkgroup.com
2. Shaw Floors:www.shawfloors.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Tile Carpeting,Type 1: Multi-level pattern loop, manufactured in one color dye lot.
1. Product:As shown on drawings.
Job Number 2170712.00 TILE CARPETING
CAG-19-196 0968 13 - 1/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. Tile Size: 24 x 24 inch, nominal.
3. Thickness:.085" inch.
4. Color: As indicated on drawings.
5. Pattern: As indicated on drawings.
6. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm,when tested in accordance with ASTM E648
or NFPA 253.
7. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D2859(the"pill test").
8. VOC Content: Provide CRI (GLP)certified product; in lieu of labeling, independent test report
showing compliance is acceptable.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A. Sub-Floor Filler: White premix latex;type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.
B. Edge Strips: Rubber,to match rubber base color.
C. Adhesives:
1. Compatible with materials being adhered; maximum VOC content of 50 g/L; CRI (GLP)certified; in
lieu of labeled product, independent test report showing compliance is acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified for that type of work and
are ready to receive carpet tile.
B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of adhesive
materials to sub-floor surfaces.
C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring
installation by testing for moisture and pH.
1. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material
manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.
D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Remove existing carpet.
B. Prepare floor substrates for installation of flooring in accordance with Section 09 05 61.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.
B. Install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Blend carpet from different cartons to ensure minimal variation in color match.
D. Cut carpet tile clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps.
E. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.
F. Adhere carpet tile to substrate along centerline of rooms,at perimeter of rooms,where tiles are cut,
and at 15 foot intervals throughout rooms. Lay remainder of tile dry over substrate.
G. Trim carpet tile neatly at walls and around interruptions.
H. Complete installation of edge strips,concealing exposed edges.
TILE CARPETING Job Number 2170712.00
0968 13-2/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.04 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive without damage,from floor, base,and wall surfaces.
B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 TILE CARPETING
CAG-19-196 0968 13 -3/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
TILE CARPETING Job Number 2170712.00
0968 13-4/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 09 90 00
PAINTING AND COATING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation.
B. Field application of paints.
C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having
factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels,equipment serial number and capacity labels,and operating parts of equipment.
5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.
6. Glass.
7. Concealed pipes,ducts,and conduits.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. 40 CFR 59,Subpart D- National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural
Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
B. ASTM D16-Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials,and Applications;2014.
C. ASTM D4442-Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and
Wood-Base Materials; 2007.
D. GreenSeal GS-11- Paints and Coatings; 2013.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used,with the following information for each:
1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number,and general product category(e.g.
"alkyd enamel").
2. MPI product number(e.g. MPI#47).
3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each
system.
C. Samples: Submit three paper"draw down"samples,8-1/2 by 11 inches in size, illustrating range of
colors available for each finishing product specified.
1. Where sheen is specified,submit samples in only that sheen.
D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures.
F. Maintenance Data: Submit data including care and cleaning instructions,touch-up procedures,and
repair of painted and coated surfaces.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified,with
minimum three years documented experience.
Job Number 2170712.00 PAINTING AND COATING
CAG-19-196 09 90 00 - 1/6
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name,type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code,
coverage,surface preparation,drying time,cleanup requirements,color designation,and instructions
for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees
F, in ventilated area,and as required by manufacturer's instructions.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges
required by the paint product manufacturer.
B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates,and humidity and temperature limitations.
C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for
exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no
exceptions.
B. Provide all paint and coating products from the same manufacturer to the greatest extent possible.
1. In the event that a single manufacturer cannot provide all specified products, minor exceptions
will be permitted provided approval by Architect is obtained using the specified procedures for
substitutions.
C. Paints:
1. Benjamin Moore&Co: www.benjaminmoore.com/#sle.
2. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com/#sle.
3. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.
4. Substitutions:See Section 0125 00- Product Requirements..
2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS-GENERAL
A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency,capable of being readily and uniformly
dispersed to a homogeneous coating,with good flow and brushing properties,and capable of
drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Provide materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application,as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
3. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single
production run.
4. Do not reduce,thin,or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is
specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B. Primers: As follows unless other primer is required or recommended by manufacturer of top coats;
where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as
"best" by the manufacturer.
1. Gypsum Board: Interior Institutional Low Odor/VOC Primer Sealer; MPI#149.
PAINTING AND COATING Job Number 2170712.00
09 90 00-2/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. Wood: Latex Primer for Interior Wood; MPI#39.
3. Steel, Uncoated: Anti-Corrosive Alkyd Primer for Metal; MPI#79.
4. Steel--Shop Primer: Interior/Exterior Quick Dry Alkyd Primer for Metal; MPI#76.
5. Products:
C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:
a. 40 CFR 59,Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of Washington.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,Subpart D
(EPA Method 24),exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site;or
other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:
1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds
(hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).
2. Acrolein,acrylonitrile,antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate,cadmium,di (2-ethylhexyl)
phthalate,di-n-butyl phthalate,di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene,diethyl phthalate,
dimethyl phthalate,ethylbenzene,formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead,
mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene,toluene
(methyl benzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane,vinyl chloride.
E. Colors: As indicated on drawings
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS-INTERIOR
A. Typical All Interior Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum
board and wood.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Top Coat(s): Institutional Low Odor/VOC Interior Latex; MPI#143-148.
3. Top Coat Product(s):
a. Sherwin-Williams Harmony Interior Acrylic Latex. (MPI#44,53,54, 143, 144)
b. Substitution:See Section 0125 00- Product Requirements..
4. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats.
B. Door Frames Medium Duty Door/Trim: For surfaces subject to frequent contact by occupants, including
metals:
1. Medium duty applications include door frames.
2. Two top coats and one coat primer.
3. Top Coat Product(s):
a. Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Acrylic Coating. (MPI#153, 154)
b. Substitution:See Section 0125 00- Product Requirements..
4. Primer(s): As recommended by manufacturer of top coats.
2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers,sealers,cleaning agents,cleaning cloths,sanding materials,
and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not;
commercial quality.
B. Patching Material: Latex filler.
C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
Job Number 2170712.00 PAINTING AND COATING
CAG-19-196 09 90 00 -3/6
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that
may potentially affect proper application.
D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless
moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for
the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons,and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and
bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
F. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after
repair.
G. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust.
Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel
surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Remove unfinished louvers,grilles,covers,and access panels on mechanical and electrical components
and paint separately.
B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.
D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to
applying next coat.
G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim,escutcheons,and fittings removed prior to
finishing.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers,and remove
daily from site.
PAINTING AND COATING Job Number 2170712.00
09 90 00-4/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project.
B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.
3.06 SCHEDULE-PAINT SYSTEMS
A. As indicated on drawings. .
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 PAINTING AND COATING
CAG-19-196 09 90 00 -5/6
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PAINTING AND COATING Job Number 2170712.00
09 90 00- 6/6 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 10 26 01
WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Corner guards.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ADA Standards-Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA)Standards for Accessible Design;2010.
B. ICC A117.1-Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2009.
C. ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a.
D. ASTM E119-Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;2015.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Indicate physical dimensions,features,anchorage details,and rough-in measurements.
C. Samples: Submit two sections of corner guard,6" inch long, illustrating component design,
configuration,color and finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Wall and Corner Guards:
1. Inpro; 160 High Impact: www.inprocorp.com
2. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A. Corner Guards-Surface Mounted:
1. Material: Type 304 stainless steel, No.4 finish, 16 gage, .051 inch thick.
2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide assemblies with flame spread index of 10 or less and
smoke developed index of 450 or less,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3. Height:4 feet
4. Width of Wings: 2 inches.
5. Corner: Square.
6. Color: refer to schedule of interior finishes located on drawings.
7. Length: One piece.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate components with tight joints,corners and seams.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that rough openings,concealed blocking,and anchors are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb,secured rigidly in
position to wall framing members only.
Job Number 2170712.00 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
CAG-19-196 10 26 01 - 1/2
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.03 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Required Height: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
WALL AND CORNER GUARDS Job Number 2170712.00
10 26 01 -2/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 10 28 00
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Commercial toilet accessories.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ADA Standards-Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA)Standards for Accessible Design;2010.
B. ASME A112.18.9- Protectors/Insulators for Exposed Waste and Supplies on Accessible Fixtures; 2011.
C. ASTM A269/A269M-Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing
for General Service;2015.
D. ASTM A666-Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,Strip,
Plate,and Flat Bar;2015.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor attachments.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size,finish,details of function,and attachment
methods.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special
attention.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Commercial Toilet,Shower,and Bath Accessories:
1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment Inc.;www.bobrick.com.
2. Substitutions:Section 0125 00-Substitution Procedures.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Accessories-General: Shop assembled,free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with
anchors and fittings,steel anchor plates,adapters,and anchor components for installation.
B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666,Type 304.
C. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269/A269M,Grade TP304 or TP316.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Stainless Steel: Satin finish, unless otherwise noted.
2.04 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES
A. Paper Towel Dispenser: Folded paper type,stainless steel,surface-mounted,with viewing slots on sides
as refill indicator and tumbler lock.
1. Products:
a. Contura Series B-4262.
Job Number 2170712.00 TOILET ACCESSORIES
CAG-19-196 10 28 00 - 1/2
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
b. Locations as shown on drawings.
B. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser,wall-mounted,surface,with stainless steel cover and horizontal
stainless steel tank and working parts; push type soap valve,check valve,and window gauge refill
indicator,tumbler lock.
1. Products:
a. Contura Series 818615.
b. Locations as shown on drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
C. Provide solid blocking as required by manufacturer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.
B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on drawings.
B. Install plumb and level,securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed accessories from damage due to subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION
TOILET ACCESSORIES Job Number 2170712.00
10 28 00-2/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 10 5100
SPECIALTY LOCKERS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Metal lockers.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A653/A653M-Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process;2015.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's published data on locker construction,sizes and accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locker plan layout, numbering plan and combination lock code.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate component installation assembly.
1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Metal Lockers:
1. Republic Storage Systems, LLC;www.republicstorage.com
2. Substitutions:See Section 0125 00-Substitution Procedures
2.02 LOCKER APPLICATIONS
A. Lockers at Weapons Download-405: Three tier metal lockers,wall mounted with matching closed
base.
1. Basis of Design: Republic Quiet Lockers
2. Width: 18 inches.
3. Depth: 21 inches.
4. Base:4 inches high.
5. Height: 72 inches.
6. Fittings: Hat shelf,2 coat hooks.
7. Locking: Built-in key locks with spring bolt action.
2.03 METAL LOCKERS
A. Lockers: Factory assembled, made of formed sheet steel,ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 33/230,with
G60/Z180 coating,stretcher leveled; metal edges finished smooth without burrs; baked enamel finished
inside and out.
1. Where ends or sides are exposed, provide flush panel closures.
2. Color: To be selected by Architect refer to schedule of interior finishes located on drawings.
B. Locker Body: Formed and flanged;with steel stiffener ribs; electric spot welded.
1. Body and Shelves: 24 gage,0.0239 inch.
2. Base: 20 gage,0.036 inch.
3. Metal Base Height: 4 inch.
Job Number 2170712.00 SPECIALTY LOCKERS
CAG-19-196 1051 00 - 1/2
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Frames: Formed channel shape,welded and ground flush,welded to body, resilient gaskets and
latching for quiet operation.
1. Door Frame: 16 gage,0.0598 inch, minimum.
D. Doors: Hollow double pan,sandwich construction, 1-3/16 inch thick;welded construction,channel
reinforced top and bottom with intermediate stiffener ribs,grind and finish edges smooth.
1. Door Outer Face: 18 gage,0.0478 inch, minimum.
2. Door Inner Face: 20 gage,0.0359 inch, minimum.
3. Form recess for operating handle and locking device.
E. Hinges: Two for doors under 42 inches high;three for doors over 42 inches high;weld securely to
locker body and door.
1. Hinge Thickness: 14 gage,0.0747 inch.
F. Number Plates: Provide oval shaped aluminum plates. Form numbers 1/2 inch high of block font style
with ADA designation, in contrasting color.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that prepared bases are in correct position and configuration.
B. Verify bases are properly sized.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install lockers plumb and square.
C. Place and secure on prepared base.
D. Secure lockers with anchor devices to suit substrate materials. Minimum Pullout Force: 100 lb.
E. Bolt adjoining locker units together to provide rigid installation.
F. Install end panels and filler panels.
G. Install accessories.
H. Replace components that do not operate smoothly.
3.03 CLEANING
A. Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces.
END OF SECTION
SPECIALTY LOCKERS Job Number 2170712.00
1051 00-2/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 1115 01
SECURITY BARRIER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. The security screens shown on the plans and herein specified are the products of Kane Architectural
Innovations, Erie, Pennsylvania. This manufacturer's name and products have been used to establish
the standards of construction and quality of workmanship required for this project. Manufacturers
bidding on this project must be actively engaged in the fabrication of specified items for a minimum of
five(5)years prior to the bid date.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. A. Manufacturer shall submit shop drawings,showing details of attachment to surround materials and
elevations showing scope of the project.
B. B. Samples of materials as may be requested without cost to owner: frame sections,wire cloth,
fasteners,corner section,etc.
1.03 WARRANTY
A. The operation of the security screen supplied by Kane Architectural Innovations on the designated
project is warranted for one(1)year against any proven defective material or parts,as called for in the
specifications and approved shop drawings. This warranty does not cover abuse by others.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Kane Architectural Innovations, Erie, PA;www.kaneinnovations.com
B. Substitutinos: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements
2.02 MAIN FRAME
A. The main frame rails shall be of not less than 13/16"[30.163mm]x 1 3/8"[34.925mm] extruded from
6063-T6 aluminum alloy. All thickness shall be.080-inch. The corners of the main frame shall be
mitered,fitted with an internal corner assembly then welded.
B. Removable barrier back rail,extruded from 6063-T6 aluminum alloy, .030-inch thick, .088 lbs./ft,shall
be attached to the main frame using square drive TEK screws.
C. Level
2.03 TESTING AND PERFORMANCE
2.04 CERTIFICATIONS-PERFORMANCE AND TESTING MUST COMPLY WITH IMPACT TEST,SAG TEST AND
FORCED ENTRY RESISTANCE TEST OF SMA 6001-02. MANUFACTURER MUST SUBMIT THE AAMA NOTICE
OF PRODUCT CERTIFICATION IN COMPLIANCE WITH CFR 200.935 AS"SECURITY SCREEN-HEAVY".
2.05 FINISH
A. The mainframe shall be thoroughly cleaned in a 5-step bonderizing process. An electrostatically applied
thermoplastic, polyester powder coating shall be applied and baked to a hard mar resistant finish.
1. Black
Job Number2170712.00 SECURITY BARRIER
CAG-19-196 11 1501 - 1/2
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. The concealment plates and infill shall be thoroughly cleaned in a 5-step bonderizing process. An
electrostatically applied black,thermoplastic, polyester powder coating(2.5 mil min.thickness)shall be
applied and baked to a hard mar-resistant finish.
2.06 INFILL
A. 12-gauge mill-galvannized steel with 51%open area
2.07 PERFORATED PANEL ATTACHMENT
A. A. The perforated panel shall be retained by a removable concealment plate with square drive TEK
screws.
B. B. Square drive TEK screws shall penetrate the concealment plate, perforated panel and Main Frame
approximately 6"on center.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that openings fit allowable tolerance,are plumb, level, provide a solid anchoring surface and
comply with approved shop drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with approved shop drawings and specifications.
B. Plumb and align faces in a single plane and erect screens square and true,adequately anchored to
structure.
C. After completion of installation,screens shall be adjusted, in working order and cleaned.
END OF SECTION
SECURITY BARRIER Job Number 2170712.00
11 1501 -2/2 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 12 24 00
WINDOW SHADES-MECHOSHADE SYSTEMS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manual roller shades and accessories.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NFPA 701-Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films;2015.
B. UL(GGG)-GREENGUARD Gold Certified Products;current listings at
http://http:Hproductguide.ulenvironment.com/QuickSearch.aspx.
C. WCMA A100.1-Safety of Corded Window Covering Products; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Sequencing:
1. Do not fabricate shades until field dimensions for each opening have been taken with finished
conditions in place. "Hold to"dimensions are not acceptable.
2. Do not install shades until final surface finishes and painting are complete.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product to be
used including materials,finishes,fabrication details,dimensions, profiles, mounting requirements,and
accessories.
C. Shop Drawings: Include shade schedule indicating size, location and keys to details.
D. Source Quality Control Submittals: Provide test reports indicating compliance with specified fabric
properties.
E. Selection Samples: Include fabric samples in full range of available colors and patterns.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: List of all components with part numbers,and operation and
maintenance instructions; include copy of shop drawings.
G. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's warranty and documentation of final executed warranty
completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section,
with not less than ten years of documented experience.
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this type with minimum ten years
of documented experience with shading systems of similar size,type,and complexity; manufacturer's
authorized representative.
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Deliver shades in manufacturer's unopened packaging, labeled to identify each shade for each opening.
B. Handle and store shades in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
Job Number 2170712.00 WINDOW SHADES- MECHOSHADE SYSTEMS
CAG-19-196 12 24 00 - 1/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: MechoShade Systems LLC; www.mechoshade.com/#sle.
B. Substitutions:See Section 0125 00-Substitution Procedures
2.02 ROLLER SHADES
A. General:
1. Provide shade system components that are designed to remove or adjust without removal of
mounted shade brackets.
2. Provide shade system that operates smoothly when shades are raised or lowered.
B. Roller Shades MechoShade Systems LLC; Mecho/5 System;www.mechoshade.com/#sle.
1. Description: Single roller, manually operated fabric window shades.
a. Size: As indicated on drawings.
2. Brackets and Mounting Hardware: As recommended by manufacturer for mounting indicated and
to accommodate shade fabric roll-up size and weight.
a. Material: Steel, 1/8 inch thick.
3. Roller Tubes:
a. Material: Extruded aluminum.
b. Size: As recommended by manufacturer;selected for suitability for installation conditions,
span,and weight of shades.
C. Fabric Attachment: Utilize extruded channel in tube to accept vinyl spline welded to fabric
edge. Shade band to be removable and replaceable without removing roller tube from
brackets or inserting spline from the side of the roller tube.
d. Roller tubes to be capable of being removed and reinstalled without affecting roller shade
limit adjustments.
4. Hembars: Designed to maintain bottom of shade straight and flat.
a. Style: Exposed aluminum bottom bar with matching finials, rectangular profile.
1) Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color selection.
5. Clutch Operator: Manufacturer's standard material and design integrated with bracket/brake
assembly.
a. Provide a permanently lubricated brake assembly mounted on a oil-impregnated hub with
wrapped spring clutch.
b. Brake must withstand minimum pull force of 50 pounds in the stopped position.
C. Mount clutch/brake assembly on the support brackets,fully independent of the roller tube
components.
6. Drive Chain: Continuous loop stainless steel beaded ball chain,95 pound minimum breaking
strength. Provide upper and lower limit stops.
a. Chain Retainer: Chain tensioning device complying with WCMA A100.1.
7. Accessories:
a. Fascia: Removable extruded aluminum fascia,size as required to conceal shade mounting,
attachable to brackets without exposed fasteners;As selected from manufacturer's standard
colors..
1) Fascia to be capable of installation across two or more shade bands in one piece.
2) Color: refer to schedule of interior finishes located on drawings.
3) Profile: Square.
WINDOW SHADES-MECHOSHADE SYSTEMS Job Number 2170712.00
12 24 00-2/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.03 SHADE FABRIC
A. Fabric-Type 1: Non-flammable,color-fast, impervious to heat and moisture,and able to retain its
shape under normal operation.
1. Material Certificates and Product Disclosures:
a. Low-Emitting Material Certification: Greenguard Gold certified and listed in UL(GGG).
2. Performance Requirements:
a. Flammability: Pass NFPA 701 large or small scale test.
3. Products:
a. MechoShade Systems LLC Inc; EcoVeil Screens-0950 Series(1%open):
www.mechoshade.com/#sle.
b. Substitutions:See Section 0125 00-Substitution Procedures
2.04 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION
A. Field measure finished openings prior to ordering or fabrication.
B. Dimensional Tolerances: Fabricate shades to fit openings within specified tolerances.
1. Vertical Dimensions: Fill openings from head to sill with 1/4 inch space between bottom bar and
window stool.
2. Horizontal Dimensions- Inside Mounting: Fill openings from jamb to jamb.
3. Horizontal Dimensions-Outside Mounting: Cover window frames,trim,and casings completely.
C. At openings requiring continuous multiple shade units with separate rollers, locate roller joints at
window mullion centers; butt rollers end-to-end.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine finished openings for deficiencies that may preclude satisfactory installation.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
C. Start of installation shall be considered acceptance of substrates.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving best result for substrate
under the project conditions.
B. Coordinate with window installation and placement of concealed blocking to support shades.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings, using mounting
devices as indicated.
B. Replace shades that exceed specified dimensional tolerances at no extra cost to Owner.
C. Adjust level, projection,and shade centering from mounting bracket. Verify there is no telescoping of
shade fabric. Ensure smooth shade operation.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean soiled shades and exposed components as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Replace shades that cannot be cleaned to"like new"condition.
Job Number 2170712.00 WINDOW SHADES- MECHOSHADE SYSTEMS
CAG-19-196 12 24 00 -3/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
WINDOW SHADES-MECHOSHADE SYSTEMS Job Number 2170712.00
12 24 00-4/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 12 36 00
COUNTERTOPS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Countertops for manufactured casework.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 4100-Architectural Wood Casework.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS)-Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.
B. ISFA 3-01-Classification and Standards for Quartz Surfacing Material; 2013.
C. MIA(DSDM)- Dimensional Stone Design Manual;VII,2007.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Specimen warranty.
C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation;combine with shop drawings of cabinets
and casework specified in other sections.
D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified,color chips representing manufacturer's full range
of available colors and patterns.
E. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing,showing compliance with specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section,
with not less than three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials,and materials used with solvent-based materials, in
accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions(temperature, humidity,and ventilation)within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental
conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COUNTERTOPS
A. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Countertops: Sheet or slab of natural quartz and plastic resin over
continuous substrate.
Job Number 2170712.00 COUNTERTOPS
CAG-19-196 12 36 00 - 1/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1-1/4 inch, minimum.
2. Natural Quartz and Resin Composite Sheets,Slabs and Castings: Complying with ISFA 3-01 and
NEMA LID 3;orthophthalic polyester resin, mineral filler,and pigments; homogenous, non-porous
and capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface coating;
color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Cambria;www.cambriausa.com.
2) Pental Quartz;www.pentalquartz.com.
3) Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements.
b. Factory fabricate components to the greatest extent practical in sizes and shapes indicated;
comply with the MIA Dimension Stone Design Manual.
C. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Honed.
3. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch thick;square edge.
4. Fabricate in accordance with manufacturer's standard requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Plywood for Supporting Substrate: PS 1 Exterior Grade,A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply; minimum
3/4 inch thick;join lengths using metal splines.
B. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials
being joined.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable,with top surface of joints flush.
1. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or
wall.
2. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary
cutouts or fixture holes.
B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated.
1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue.
2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece;join pieces with adhesive sealant in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are
installed in proper locations.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for
the substrate under the project conditions.
COUNTERTOPS Job Number 2170712.00
12 36 00-2/4 CAG-19-196
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where
required.
B. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Variation From Horizontal: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, maximum.
B. Offset From Wall,Countertops: 1/8 inch maximum; 1/16 inch minimum.
C. Field Joints: 1/8 inch wide, maximum.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 COUNTERTOPS
CAG-19-196 12 36 00 -3/4
Police Training Center&City Attorney Ti - Bid Documents 15 July 2019
COUNTERTOPS Job Number 2170712.00
12 36 00-4/4 CAG-19-196
TACOMA OFFICE
6021 121h Street East, Suite 200
Tacoma,WA 98424
�,®® Phone (253) 922-0446
Fax (253) 922-0896
RENTON CITY ATTORNEY&POLICE TRAINING CENTER
BCE PROJECT NO.218-295.00
JULY 15,2019
Notice:
The following list of specifications and drawings represents those documents that were prepared under the
provisions of the Revised Code of Washington RCW 18.43, by BCE Engineers, Inc. of Tacoma, Washington. The
sealing of this specification and drawings list is provided in accordance with Washington Administrative Code
WAC196-23-020.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Description No.of Pages
DIVISION 20—MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
20 00 00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15
DIVISION 22—PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS
22 05 17 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 3
22 05 23 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 6
22 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT 6
22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 4
22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 6
221005 PLUMBING PIPING 13
221006 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 3
223000 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 2
224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 3
DIVISION 23—HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING(HVAC)SPECIFICATIONS
23 05 13 MOTORS, ECMs,AND VARIABLE DRIVES 2
23 05 23 VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 5
23 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 5
23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 5
Job Number 2170712.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC- 1/2
TACOMA OFFICE
6021 121h Street East, Suite 200
Tacoma,WA 98424
E)z Phone (253) 922-0446
Fax (253) 922-0896
Section Description No.of Pages
DIVISION 23—HEATING,VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING(HVAC)SPECIFICATIONS(CONTINUED)
23 05 53 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT 4
23 05 93 AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING 3
23 05 95 WATER SYSTEM BALANCING 3
23 07 13 EQUIPMENT/DUCTWORK INSULATION 3
23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATIONS 4
23 09 00 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS 7
23 11 19 HVAC PIPING SPECIALTIES 2
23 20 00 HYDRONIC SYSTEM 4
232100 SLEEVES AND SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3
23 31 13 STEEL DUCTWORK 7
23 33 00 HVAC SPECIALTIES 3
23 36 00 VAV TERMINAL BOX UNITS 2
23 37 00 AIR TERMINALS 2
238146 WATER TO HEAT PUMPS 3
23 90 00 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION 1
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
Job Number 2170712.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC- 2/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 20 00 00
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes, but not limited to,furnishing labor,materials,and equipment for completion of work unless
indicated or noted otherwise. See Division 1 for sequence of work.
B. Work indicated on the mechanical plans and in the specifications that will not be performed by this
Mechanical Contractor(i.e.duct and pipe block-outs,penetrations through walls,floors,and attic,wall
patching,work indicated to be performed by other Contractors,etc)shall be coordinated with the
General Contractor prior to bid.The Mechanical Contractor is responsible for identifying quantity,size,
and type of work with the General Contractor.Work not coordinated will be the responsibility of the
Mechanical Contractor and shall not be charged as additional cost to the Owner.
C. All work included in Division 22 and 23 shall be the responsibility of a single Mechanical Subcontractor.
D. This Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits required by State and local authorities governing the
installation of the mechanical work. It is the Contractor's responsibility to contact all utility
organizations serving the building, prior to bid,and to include all charges for inspections, installation of
materials,equipment and connection of all required utilities.
E. Furnish exact location of electrical connections and complete information on motor controls to Division
26, prior to bid.
F. Putting heating,ventilating,cooling,and exhaust systems into full operation and continuing their
operation during each working day of testing and balancing.
G. Making changes in mechanical drive systems(pulleys, belts,VFD's,motor speed,etc)and dampers or
adding dampers as required for correct balance as recommended by Section 23 05 93 and at no
additional cost to Owner. All equipment shall be provided with a single point electrical connection,
unless otherwise indicated.
H. The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is binding as if called
for in both.
I. The ductwork and accessibility to HVAC equipment shall take precedence over all other equipment in
the ceiling interstitial spaces or other mechanical areas including, but not limited to,sprinkler piping,
heating piping,domestic water piping and electrical conduit(except fire pump rooms where as fire
sprinkler equipment takes precedence).
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 apply to this Section.
1.03 SUBMITTALS REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Access doors.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. Perform work in accordance with applicable Codes.
2. In case of differences between building codes,state laws, local ordinances, utility company
regulations,and Contract Documents,the most stringent shall govern.
B. Product Approvals: See paragraphs elsewhere in this specification.
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00- 1/15
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Warranties:
1. In addition to guarantee specified in General Conditions,guarantee heating,cooling,and
plumbing systems to be free from noise in operation that may develop from failure to construct
system in accordance with Contract Documents.
2. In order to be protected,secure proper guarantees from suppliers and Subcontractors.
3. Provide certificates of warranty for each piece of equipment. Clearly record "start-up"date of
each piece of equipment on certificate. Include certificates as part of Operation & Maintenance
Manual.
D. Manufacture: Use domestic made pipe, pipe fittings,and motors on Project.
E. Identification: Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL and AGA labels shall be in
place when Project is turned over to Owner.
1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Codes and agencies having jurisdictional authority over mechanical installation.
1. Washington State Energy Code--Latest Approved Edition
2. International Building Code--Latest Approved Edition
3. International Fire Code- Latest Approved Edition
4. International Mechanical Code--Latest Approved Edition
S. Uniform Plumbing Code--Latest Approved Edition
6. Local Sewer and Water District Requirements
7. State and County Department of Health
8. Local Fire Marshal
9. Puget Sound Air Pollution Control
10. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
11. Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act(WISHA)
12. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
B. ASME code stamp required on all pressure vessels and relief valves. Certificate required from the State
Boiler Inspector showing approval of the equipment and its installation.
1.06 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
A. Site Inspection:
1. Examine premises and understand the conditions which may affect performance of work of this
Division before submitting proposals for this work.
2. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to
failure to examine site conditions.
1.07 DESIGN DRAWINGS
A. Mechanical drawings are not shop drawings and are intended to show general arrangement of piping,
ductwork,equipment,etc. Follow as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades
will permit.
B. Consider architectural,structural and electrical drawings part of this work in so far as these drawings
furnish information relating to design and construction of building. Architectural drawings take
precedence over mechanical drawings.
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00- 2/1 5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Because of small scale of mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,fittings,and
accessories which may be required.The Mechanical Contractor shall include in the bid a sufficient
quantity of offsets,fittings,and accessories for the size of the project, based upon the contractor's
experience, necessary to facilitate mechanical utility installation. No additional costs shall be charged
for additional offsets,fittings,and accessories required for installation of the mechanical utilities shown
on the design drawings. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work and arrange
work accordingly, providing such fittings,valves,and accessories required in meeting the design
conditions.
1.08 PRE-CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION MEETING
A. This Contractor is responsible to participate in coordination meetings with the General Contractor, Fire
Protection Contractor and other subcontractors needing to coordinate special requirements(such as
electrical contractor, HVAC contractor, plumbing contractor,etc.)
B. Coordination meetings shall consider elevations, required clearances,and routings of all trades to
assure that all trades can be installed without conflict.
C. The outcome of this coordination shall allow each system (Mechanical, Fire Protection, Plumbing,
Electrical,etc)to be installed without further conflicts for space or locations.
D. Failure to coordinate with other trades and/or existing conditions that result in the removal and re-
installation of systems shall not be charged as additional costs.
1.09 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Develop coordination drawings,and other pre-installation coordination methods as necessary to
coordinate layouts prior to installation. Coordination drawings shall consist of overlay drawings,or
other similar methods to graphically indicate plumbing,fire protection, HVAC,electrical,and other
similar elements in a single location in order to identify conflicts. All elements shall be drawn to scale.
Coordination drawings are not required to be submitted for approval,except where indicated otherwise
in the specification. However,a minimum of one hard copy of coordination drawings shall be present
on site at all times and made available to the Architect/Engineer(A/E) Representative upon request. If
coordination drawings are not on file,or if systems are not installed per coordination drawings,costs
and delays of required reengineering, replacement and other work required to correct conflicts shall be
solely the Contractor's.
1. Contractor shall have the aboveground coordination drawings available upon request by A/E
Representative within 90 days after Notice to Proceed.
B. Coordination drawings shall consist of one of the following:
1. Drawing sheets developed sequentially by each trade with all components drawn to scale and
color coded to represent each trade.
C. Where coordination drawings,or other preinstallation coordination methods show that available space
is inadequate or that modifications will affect architectural elements, request information from the
Architect before proceeding with work. No additional payment will be made for installation conflicts
which could have been identified by coordination drawings or other pre-installation coordination
methods.
D. Make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other
installations,for maintenance,and for repairs.
E. Each subcontractor shall:
1. Indicate the exact name, location and dimension of each element to be provided by that
subcontractor.
2. Arrange components as necessary to avoid conflict with new and existing conditions and the work
of other subcontractors as directed by the General Contractor.
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00- 3/1 5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3. Note requirements for sleeves, block-outs,cutting, patching,access doors, blocking,supports,
inserts and other similar items.
4. Notify the General Contractor of conflicts.
5. Approve the coordination drawings when all conflicts are resolved and an acceptable layout is
obtained.
F. The General Contractor shall coordinate the layouts indicated on the coordination drawings and resolve
any conflicts prior to commencement of subject portions of the work.
1.10 ELECTRICAL
A. All electrical work,conduit, boxes and devices in connection with control wiring as required to install
the control equipment as specified herein or shown on the drawings shall be furnished and installed
complete by the Division 26 Contractor.
B. All electrical work performed under this Section of the Specifications shall conform to all applicable
portions of the Division 26 specifications and shall conform to all governing codes.
C. All equipment shall be factory wired to a junction box for connection to electrical service.
D. Where a piece of equipment specified includes an electric motor,the motor shall be furnished and
mounted by this Contractor. Motor starter,disconnect switches and wiring from the electrical panel to
the motor control devices and to the motor shall be provided by the Division 26 Contractor unless
stated otherwise in the mechanical specification and/or on the mechanical drawings.
E. All motor controllers and equipment panels(including but not limited to packaged equipment,custom
control panels,custom air handler panels)shall comply with NEC(including, but not limited to, marking
on controllers and labeling requirements).
1.11 TEMPORARY HEATING
A. Temporary heating for facility during construction phase shall not be supplied by the permanent system
installed under these specifications, unless all of the following are satisfied:
1. Product warranties shall be extended to account for construction use. Contractor shall furnish
certified document stating such extended warranties.
2. Contractor shall obtain letter of approval from the Owner stating that they understand equipment
expected life may be shortened due to severe usage.
3. Contractor shall be responsible for pressure cleaning all coils and vacuum cleaning all ductwork
prior to occupancy.
1.12 PRODUCT HANDLING AND PROTECTION
A. Contractor is responsible for protection of all material,equipment and apparatus provided under this
Section from damage,water,corrosion,freezing and dust, both in storage and when installed, until final
project acceptance.
B. Provide temporary heated and sheltered storage facilities for material and equipment.
C. Completely cover motors and other moving machinery to protect from dirt and water during
construction.
D. Handle and protect equipment and/or material in manner precluding unnecessary fire hazard.
E. Equipment requiring rotation and/or lubrication during storage shall have records maintained and
witnessed on a monthly basis and forwarded to the Architect/Engineer prior to acceptance. Provide
recorded maintenance for the O&M Manual.
F. Material or equipment damaged because of improper storage or protection will be rejected.
G. Equipment finish that is damaged by handling,storage,etc.shall be corrected by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner.
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00-4/1 5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.13 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces used for habitation or occupancy where rough surfaces are plastered, paneled,
or otherwise treated to provide a pleasing appearance.
B. Unfinished Spaces: Spaces used for storage or work areas,such as fan rooms, mechanical and boiler
rooms,etc.,where appearance is not a factor.
C. Concealed Spaces: Spaces out of sight. For example,above ceilings; below floors; between double
walls;furred-in areas; pipe and duct shafts; and similar spaces.
D. Exposed: Open to view. For example,pipe running through a room and not covered by other
construction.
E. Outside: Open to view up to 5 feet beyond the exterior side of walls,above the roof,and unexcavated
or crawl spaces.
F. Conditioned Space:An area,room or space normally occupied and being heated or cooled for human
habitation by any equipment as defined by the extent of the building envelope insulation.
G. Replace: Existing mechanical equipment and components shall be demolished and discarded from the
project site or as directed otherwise. New mechanical equipment and components shall be installed in
the area where the existing mechanical equipment and components were demolished or as indicated
on the contract documents.
H. Removed: Existing mechanical equipment and components identified on the contract documents shall
be taken apart,taken down,and discarded from the project site unless directed otherwise on plan.
Removed items shall not be brought back to the project site for use or reinstallation.
I. Reinstall: Existing mechanical equipment and components identified on the contract documents that
need to be taken down and installed in the same or new location.
1.14 ABBREVIATIONS
A. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
B. A/E Architect/Engineer
C. AFF Above Finish Floor
D. AGA American Gas Association
E. AMCA Air Moving&Conditioning Association
F. ANSI American National Standards Institute
G. APWA American Public Works Association
H. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
I. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
J. ASTM American Society of Testing& Materials
K. AWWA American Water Works Association
L. BFF Below Finish Floor
M. BHP Brake Horsepower
N. BTU British Thermal Unit
0. CFM Cubic Feet per Minute
P. CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
Q. fpm feet per minute
R. FS Federal Specifications
S. FDC Fire Department Connection
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00- 5/1 5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
T. FCO Flush Cleanout
U. FD Floor Drain
V. PWH Freeze Proof Wall Hydrant
W. GPM Gallons per Minute
X. HP Horsepower
Y. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
Z. IAQ Indoor Air Quality
AA. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
AB. KW Kilowatt
AC. LPG Liquefied Petroleum Gas
AD. MBH One Thousand British Thermal Units per Hour
AE. MS Military Specifications
AF. MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society
AG. NEC National Electrical Code
AH. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
Al. NFPA National Fire Protection Association
AJ. NP Non-Potable Water
AK. NPSH Net Positive Suction Head
AL. OS&Y Outside Screw and Yoke
AM. PIV Post Indicator Valve
AN. PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
AO. per in accordance with
AP. POC Point of Connection
AQ. PSI Pounds per Square Inch Gauge Pressure
AR. PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
AS. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
AT. SP Static Pressure
AU. SWP Steam Working Pressure
AV. UL Underwriter's Laboratories
AW. VFD Variable Frequency Drive
AX. VTR Vent Thru Roof
AY. wg Water Gauge(inches of water)
AZ. WP Working Pressure
BA. WPL Weatherproof Louver
BB. WQA Water Quality Association
BC. Additional abbreviations are as listed on the drawings or elsewhere in these specifications.
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00- 6/15
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.15 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. General: Provide schedule of values per Division 1 and related project requirements:
1. Division 22 and 23 Breakdown: Provide schedule of values for each building, broken down into
labor and materials per specification section at a minimum. Further breakdown into
subcategories is at the option of the Contractor,except as noted below:
a. Section 20 00 00-General Mechanical Requirements: Provide a subcategory for
"Mechanical Punchlist,Closeout and Owner Training". The dollar value for this subcategory
shall be no less than 2.25%of the total dollar value of the Division 22 and 23 work(or as
indicated in Division 1,whichever is higher.The contractor shall receive payment upon
completion of all Mechanical Punchlist and Closeout items and Owner Training.
b. Section 20 00 00-General Mechanical Requirements: Provide a subcategory for"Pre-
Construction Coordination Meeting." The dollar value for this subcategory shall be no less
than 1%of the total dollar value of the Division 22 and 23 work.Contractor shall submit the
meetings sign in sheet to the Engineer for review.The sign in sheet shall include the printed
and signed names of the General and all subcontractors who attended the meeting.The
contractor shall receive payment once the sign-in sheet has been verified to meet the Pre-
Instruction Coordination requirements of this Section.
C. Section 20 00 00-General Mechanical Requirements: Provide a subcategory for
"Coordination Drawings". The dollar value for this subcategory shall be no less than 1%of
the total dollar value of the Division 22 and 23 work.The contractor shall receive payment
upon Engineer's verification of Coordination Drawing completion, in accordance with the
requirements of this Section
d. Section 23 09 00-Addition to Existing Controls: Provide a subcategory for"Trend Logs". The
dollar value for this subcategory shall be no less than 1%of the total dollar value of the
Division 23 work.The contractor shall receive payment upon completion of the trend logs in
accordance with the requirements of this Section and Section 23 09 00.
B. The Contractor is advised that in addition to payments held out for retainage and project final
completion (i.e. "Mechanical Punchlist,Closeout,and Owner Training"),as specified above and in
Division 1,the Owner reserves the right to withhold 10%of the funds for any of the above categories
until the systems(of that category) have been proven to operate as specified and have been completely
tested,adjusted,and balanced.
1.16 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. All material used on the project shall be new and free of defects. The Architect and/or Engineer reserve
the right to reject any material,the appearance of which has been damaged on the site or in shipment.
The material shall be of pre-approved equal quality to that which is specified. Should the make and
type of material differ from that specified,the Contractor may be required to submit catalog and
engineering data (samples if requested) necessary to make a comparison and determine its suitability.
The Contractor shall also bear the cost of all changes to any aspect of the project(electrical,
mechanical, building,etc.) made necessary by any approved substitutions. Approved substitutions
include those listed as approved manufacturers or approved substitutions.Tentative approval of
substitute material and equipment will be made prior to bid only.Such request for approval shall be
made two weeks in advance of the bid opening to allow time to assess its suitability. Failure to obtain
approval prior to bid shall require the successful bidder to furnish materials and equipment only as
specified herein (see paragraph 2.01,this specification).
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00- 7/15
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Equipment submittals shall be submitted per one of the following processes as selected by the
Architect/Engineer Representative and/or Owner:
1. Electronic Submittal Process:
a. The Contractor shall upload one complete PDF file of the Electronic Submittal Package to the
Architect's SharePoint Site for approval. The Electronic Submittal package shall include the
following:
1) All required submittals(i.e.equipment cut sheets,shop drawings,etc.) per each
specification section.
2) Table of contents identifying each specification section,submittal requirement of each
specification,and the manufacturer name and model number of each item submitted.
3) Index sheet for each specification section.
4) Submission of PDF files of individual specifications or equipment cuts will be
automatically rejected.
5) The Contractor shall complete and upload a Submittal Information Form,in Microsoft
WORD format,for the A/E team to review. The equipment submittal will not be
considered "Received" nor will a review be provided until both the Electronic
Submittal Package and Submittal information Form have been uploaded.
6) If the Electronic Submittal Process is not feasible for a particular submittal section (i.e.
samples,certain shop drawings, recorded videos,CD's,etc.),the Contractor shall
submit a request in writing to the A/E Representative to deviate from the Electronic
Submittal Process. If acceptable by the A/E Representative the Contractor shall follow
the Hard Copy Submittal Process for the submission.
2. Review of submittal data by the Engineer or Architect does not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for quantities, measurements,and compliance with the intent of all contract
documents.
3. Furnish submittals generally according to the list below. Individual sections may contain more
specific submittal listing of the particular section labeled "Submittal Requirements." Furnish on
each particular section and the following equipment:
a. Pipe
b. Pipe Insulation
C. Duct Insulation and Lining
d. Hot Water Tanks
e. Plumbing Fixtures
f. Valves
g. Pipe Hangers
h. Piping Specialties
i. HVAC Equipment
j. Temperature Control Equipment and Shop Drawings
k. Air Balance Contractor
I. Hydronic Equipment
m. Fire Marshal Stamped and Approved Shop Drawings for Fire Sprinkler System
n. Any material found to be installed without prior approval will be required to be removed and
replaced with only specified material at Contractor's cost.
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00- 8/1 5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
o. Mechanical Drawings for the project have been developed by the Engineer using AutoCADTM
Revision 2015 software.These drawing files will be made available to the Contractor for
development of shop drawings and/or"As-Builts"for a fee of$30.00 per sheet. Full payment
to be made prior to release of drawing files.
1.17 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
A. Bind Operation& Maintenance Manual for Mechanical Systems in three-ring, hard-backed binder with
clear plastic pocket on spine. Spine of each binder shall have following typewritten lettering inserted:
OPERATION
AND
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
B. Provide master index at beginning of Manual showing items included. Use plastic permanent tab
indexes for Sections of Manual.
C. First Section shall consist of name,address,and phone number of Architect,General Contractor,and
Mechanical, Plumbing,Sheet Metal, Refrigeration,Temperature control,and Electrical Subcontractors.
Also include complete list of equipment installed with name,address,and phone number of each
vendor.
D. Provide Section for each type of item of equipment.
E. Submit copies as specified by Division 1 and at a minimum provide three(3)copies of Operation&
Maintenance Manual to Architect for his approval.
F. Include descriptive literature(Manufacturer's catalog data)of each manufactured item. Literature shall
show capacities and size of equipment used and be marked indicating each specific item with applicable
data underlined.
G. Include all warranties/guarantees including extended warranties.
H. Include all start-up logs.
I. Operating Instructions shall include:
1. General description of each mechanical system.
2. Step-by-step procedure to follow in putting each piece of mechanical equipment into operation.
3. Provide schematic control diagrams for all systems. Each diagram shall show locations of start-
stop switches, insertion thermostats, room thermostats,thermometers,firestats,pressure
gauges,automatic valves, refrigeration accessories. Mark correct operating settings for each
control instrument on these diagrams.
4. Provide diagram for electrical control system showing wiring of related electrical control items
such as firestats,fuses,interlocks,electrical switches,and relays.
5. Provide drawing of each temperature control panel identifying components on panels and their
function.
J. Maintenance Instructions shall include:
1. Manufacturer's maintenance instructions for each piece of mechanical equipment installed in
Project. Instructions shall include name of vendor, installation instructions, parts numbers and
lists operation instructions of equipment,and maintenance and lubrication instructions.
2. Summary list of mechanical equipment requiring lubrication showing name of equipment,
location,and type and frequency of lubrication.
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00- 9/1 5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3. List of mechanical equipment used indicating name, model,serial number,and name plate data of
each item together with number and name associated with each system item.
4. For hydronic systems, include gallons in system,amounts and types of each chemical,etc. Also,
include step-by-step procedure to recharge the system.
1.18 COMMISSIONING
A. General Requirements: The building's systems shall be tested to ensure that control devices,
components,equipment,and systems are calibrated,adjusted,and operate in accordance with the
approved plans and specifications. This shall include the following:
1. Commissioning Plan
2. Systems Testing and Balancing
3. Controls Functional Performance Testing
4. Preliminary Commissioning Report
S. Post Construction Documentation
6. Final Commissioning Report
B. Commissioning Plan: A commissioning plan shall be developed by a registered design professional or
approved agency and shall include at a minimum the following:
1. A detailed explanation of the design intent.
2. Equipment and systems to be tested.
3. Functions to be tested (for example,economizer control,discharge air temperature control,etc.)
4. Conditions under which the test shall be performed.
5. Measureable criteria for acceptable performance.
C. System Testing and Balancing: Provide testing and balancing as specified in Sections 23 05 93 and 23 05
95.
D. Controls Functional Performance Testing: Functional testing shall demonstrate the correct installation
and operation of each component,system,and system to system intertie relationship in accordance
with the plans and specifications. This demonstration is to prove operation,function,and maintenance
serviceability for each of the commissioned systems. Testing shall include all modes of operation,
including:
1. All modes as described in the sequence of operation.
2. Performance of alarms.
3. Mode of operation upon a loss of power and restored power.
4. The HVAC control system shall be tested to ensure that control devices,components,equipment,
and systems are calibrated,adjusted,and operate in accordance with the plans and specifications.
E. Preliminary Commissioning Report: The preliminary commissioning report,completed and certified by
the registered design professional or approved agency,shall be provided to the Owner. The preliminary
commissioning report shall include test procedures and results,and shall identify the following:
1. Deficiencies found during testing which have not been corrected at the time of report preparation
and the anticipated date of correction.
2. Deferred tests which cannot be performed at the time of report preparation due to climatic
conditions. Include the climatic conditions required for testing and the anticipated date of each
deferred test.
3. Record of progress and completion of operator training.
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00- 10/15
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
F. Post Construction Documentation: Provide Operation and Maintenance(O&M)data,as-built record
drawings,final commissioning report and test and balance report,as specified in this section,within 90
days of the date of receipt of the Certificate of Occupancy.
G. Final Commissioning Report: Provide a complete report of test procedures and results and submitted to
the Engineer and the Owner. The report shall identify the following:
1. Procedures and results of all functional performance tests.
2. Disposition of all deficiencies found during testing,including details of corrective measures used
or proposed.
H. The Contractor is responsible to submit to the code official a commissioning compliance checklist,
Figure C408.1.2.1 of the WSEC,signed by the building owner.
1.19 WARRANTY
A. All warranty information shall be submitted as part of the"Operation and Maintenance Manual for
Mechanical Systems" in this section.
B. All warranties for mechanical and plumbing equipment shall start upon completion of commissioning.
1.20 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall maintain, in addition to coordination drawings,an as-built set of prints that clearly
identify all deviations from the original design. The As-Built drawings shall be drafted per one of the
following methods:
1. Draft all revisions on a separate dark layer,on the coordination drawing set. The Contractor shall
maintain a copy of the original coordination drawing set.
2. Draft all revisions on the design drawings with a red color pencil.
B. This red lined set shall identify all drawing revisions including addenda items,change orders,and
Contractor revisions.
C. Drawings shall show locations of all underground pipe and duct installed by this Contractor.
Underground pipes and ducts shall be shown with cross section elevations. All pipe, raceway, manholes
or lines of other trades shall be included.
D. The Contractor shall update all references to specific products to indicate products actually installed on
project. This shall include, but not be limited to,air handlers,heat pumps etc.
1. Upon completion of the Division 22 and 23 Work,the Contractor shall deliver the red lined
drawings and one set of neatly drafted as-built drawings on electronic media in ACAD 2015 format
and PDF files to the Engineer for transmittal through the Engineer to the Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Any reference to the specifications or on the drawings to any article,device, product,material,fixture,
form or type of construction by manufacturer, name, make,or catalog number shall be interpreted as
establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition.
B. The manufacturer listed as Approved Manufacturers are approved to bid the project for the items
indicated without obtaining prior approval.Other manufacturers desiring to bid the project require
prior approval.
C. The listing of a manufacturer as an Approved Manufacturer does not necessarily mean that the
products of that manufacturer are equal to those specified. The listing is only an indication of those
manufacturers which may be capable of manufacturing,or have in the past manufactured,items equal
to those specified,and is intended to aid the Contractor in identifying manufacturers.
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00- 11/15
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
D. Products provided by Approved Manufacturers shall be equal to or superior to the specified
manufacturer's item in function,appearance,and quality,and shall fulfill all requirements of the plans
and specifications. The Architect/Engineer shall be the final judge as to whether an item meets these
requirements or not. If a manufacturer is not certain that his product meets these requirements or not,
then the manufacturer shall submit data as required to obtain the Design Consultant's approval prior to
bid opening.
E. The approval of a manufacturer applies to the manufacturer only and does not relieve the Contractor
from the responsibility of meeting all applicable requirements of the plans and specifications.
F. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs to other trades and all revisions required in accommodating
any products which are different from those specified or shown.
G. In reviewing a manufacturer for acceptance,factors considered include the following:engineering data
showing item's performance, proper local representation of manufacturer, likelihood of future
manufacturer's local support of product,service availability, previous installation, previous use by
Owner/Engineer/Architect and record, product quality,availability/quality of maintenance and
operation data,capacity/performance compared to specified items,acoustics, items geometry/access
utility needs,and similar concerns.
H. If approval is received to use other than specified items,responsibility for specified capacities and
ensuring that items to be furnished will fit space available lies with this Division.
I. If non-specified equipment is used and it will not fit job site conditions,this Division assumes
responsibility for replacement with items named in Specification.
2.02 ACCESS DOORS
A. This Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing flush mounted access doors in walls,
ceiling and floors and chases where the following equipment is concealed and is not accessible through
same.
1. Valves(shut off, balancing,control,trap primers,etc).
2. Dampers(control, balancing,fire,smoke,etc.).
B. Doors shall be UL listed 20 ga.cold rolled steel with concealed hinge,screwdriver operated lock and
prime coated. Furnish suitable for area mounted. Provide stainless steel access doors for non-painted
surfaces(i.e.tile, MDF)
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Milcor
2. Acudor
3. Greenheck
4. Nystrom
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
A. This Contractor shall provide completed systems with a neat and finished appearance. If, in the
judgment of the Engineer,any portion of the work has not been performed in a workmanlike manner or
is left in a rough, unfinished state,this Contractor will be required to remove, reinstall or replace same
and patch and paint surrounding surfaces in a manner acceptable to the Engineer,without increase in
cost to the Owner.
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00- 12/15
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.02 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Final Inspection:
1. Prior to acceptance of the mechanical work,the Contractor shall put all mechanical systems into
operation for a period of not less than 5 working days so that they may be inspected by the
Architect/Engineer and the Owner's representatives.
2. The time of the final inspection shall be mutually agreed to by the Owner, Engineer,and
Contractor.
3. The Contractor shall furnish adequate staff to operate the mechanical systems during inspection.
3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING
A. Upon completion of the work,and after all tests and final inspection of the work by the Authority(s)
having jurisdiction,the Contractor shall demonstrate and instruct the Owner's designated operation
and maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the various mechanical systems. The
Contractor shall arrange scheduled instruction periods with the Owner. The Contractor's
representatives shall be Superintendents or Foremen knowledgeable in each system and Supplier's
Representative when so specified.
B. Scheduled instruction periods shall be:
1. HVAC System Controls 1 Hour
2. HVAC Equipment Maintenance 1 Hour
C. The contractor shall,at a minimum, include an Owner Training sign-in sheet in the O&M Manual that
indicates the start and end times of the training and the type of training provided.Owner shall sign off
on the Owner training sign-in sheet to be considered complete and satisfactory to Owner.
D. Costs for time involved by Contractor shall be included in the bid.
3.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Requirements: Final approval of mechanical installation will be recommended upon completion of the
following:
1. Completion of all punchlist items
2. Owner Training Sign-In sheet with Owner's signature
3. Permit Submittal
4. Valve Diagrams
S. Reproducible As-Built drawings delivered to Architect
6. Air and/or Water Balance Report
7. Asbestos Free Statement
8. Guarantees
9. Equipment Manufacturer of all HVAC compressor units shall provide start-up logs.
10. EMCS Trend Logs.
3.05 PREPARATION
A. Existing Buildings:
1. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to existing work. Do not cut beams,columns,or
trusses.
2. Patch and repair walls,floors,ceilings,and roofs with materials of same quality and appearance as
adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface finishes by General Contractor.
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00- 13/15
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3. Cutting, patching, repairing,and replacing pavements,sidewalks,roads,and curbs to permit
installation of work of this Division is responsibility of Section installing work.
4. This work shall be scheduled such that utility services and/or existing systems for the facility are
not interrupted during normal operating hours,without prior written permission of the Owner's
representative. Work that is performed during normal operational hours shall not interfere with
the normal function of the facility's daily operation.
5. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all existing mechanical
equipment and utilities indicated to be removed on the drawings.The Mechanical Contractor
shall also be responsible for the removal and reinstallation of all existing mechanical equipment
and utilities that will interfere with installation and operation of any new construction indicated
or required and shall be responsible for the removal of all existing mechanical equipment and
utilities indicated to be abandoned that will interfere with installation and operation of any new
construction indicated or required. All mechanical equipment(other than piping)to be removed
shall remain the property of the Owner,and shall be transported-stored-or disposed of,as
directed by the Owner. This will be at no cost to the Owner.
3.06 INSTALLATION
A. Install mechanical equipment to permit easy access for normal maintenance,and so that parts requiring
periodic replacement or maintenance, (e.g.,coils,heat exchanger bundles,sheaves,filters,motors,
bearings,etc.)can be removed. Relocate items,which interfere with access.
B. Provide access doors in equipment,ducts,and walls/ceilings as required to allow for inspection and
proper maintenance.
C. Valves,damper operators,and other devices which are manually adjusted or operated shall be located
so as to be easily accessible by a person standing on the floor.Any such items which are not in the open
shall be made accessible through access openings in the building construction.
D. Gauges,thermometers,instrumentation and other components which are installed to monitor
equipment performance,operating conditions,etc.,shall be oriented so as to be easily read by a person
standing on the floor. Provide necessary brackets and hangers as needed.
E. If circumstances at a particular location make the accessible installation of an item difficult or
inconvenient,the situation shall be discussed with the Architect/Engineer before installing the item in a
poor access location.
F. Belts, pulleys,couplings, projecting set screws,keys and other rotating parts which may pose a danger
to personnel,shall be fully enclosed or guarded in accordance with OSHA regulations.
G. Dissimilar Metals: Provide separations between all dissimilar metals. Where not specified in another
way,use 10 mil black plastic tape wrapped at point of contact or plastic centering inserts.
H. Provide offsets around all electrical panels(and similar electrical equipment)to maintain space clear
above and below panel to structure and clearance of 3.5 feet directly in front of panel,except where
indicated otherwise or required by NEC to be more. Such offsets are typically not shown on the
drawings,but are required per this paragraph.
I. Piping Through Framing: Piping through framing shall be installed in the approximate center of the
member. Where located such that nails or screws are likely to damage the pipe,a steel plate at least
1/16-inch thick shall be installed to provide protection. At metal framing,wrap piping to prevent
contact of dissimilar metals. At metal and wood framing, provide plastic pipe insulators at piping
penetrations through framing nearest each fixture and on at least 48-inch centers.
J. Safety Protection: All ductwork, piping and related items installed by this Contractor that present a
safety hazard (i.e., items installed at/near head height, items projecting into maintenance access paths,
etc.)shall be covered (at hazardous area)with 3/4"thick elastomeric insulation and 2"wide reflective
red/white striped self-sticking safety tape.
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00- 14/15
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
K. Equipment Access: Access to equipment is of utmost importance.Contractor shall apply extra attention
to the laying out of pipe and duct routings,and in coordinating all work. Poor access to equipment will
not be accepted. Contractor shall note that in essentially all areas,piping routed in ceiling space needs
to run in joist space,necessitating elbows/fittings/transitions at crosses with other trades,at structural
beams,and at all connections to mains and branches. Hatched areas at HVAC units indicate equipment
access areas.These(and all other)access areas shall be clear of obstructions.The Mechanical
Contractor is responsible to coordinate and ensure that all trades stay clear of access areas for any
Division 22 and 23 furnished equipment.
L. Ensure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to ascertain
space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment of size and shape
so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents.
M. Pipe Installation: Install piping in longest reasonable lengths. The use of short lengths of pipe with
multiple couplings where a single length of pipe could have been used is not acceptable.
3.07 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Properly lubricate equipment before Owner's acceptance.
B. Clean exposed piping,ductwork,equipment,and fixtures, remove debris from site. Repair all damaged
finishes and leave everything in working order.
C. Remove stickers from fixtures and adjust flush valves.
3.08 PAINTING
A. Paint all exposed pieces of equipment if not factory finished or painted under the Architectural Section
of these specifications. Paint shall be one coat primer and two coats enamel color as directed by the
Architect.
3.09 REBATES
A. Furnish vendor invoices on heat pumps to Owner after installation for power company rebates.
3.10 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION(RFI)
A. It is our intent to provide a timely response for RFIs regarding Division 22 and 23 Work. To further
expedite this process, if a suggestion can be determined or derived at by the initiator of the RFI, it is
required this suggestion be supplied with the submitted RFI. If no suggestion is given where one is
possible,the RFI will be returned as incomplete. RFI's will be returned to the Contractor within seven
(7) business days from the time received by the Architect/Engineer Representative. All Mechanical RFIs
shall be written on the form provided at the back of this Section.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
20 00 00- 15/15
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 22 05 17
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe sleeves.
B. Manufactured sleeve-seal systems.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 84 00- Firestopping.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C592-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-Type Pipe
Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type);2016.
B. ASTM E814-Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Penetration Firestop Systems; 2013a (Reapproved
2017).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Seals
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Clean equipment,pipes,valves,and fittings of grease, metal cuttings,and sludge that may have
accumulated from the installation and testing of the system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Vertical Piping:
1. Sleeve Length: 1 inch above finished floor.
2. Provide sealant for watertight joint.
3. Blocked Out Floor Openings: Provide 1-1/2 inch angle set in silicon adhesive around opening.
4. Drilled Penetrations: Provide 1-1/2 inch angle ring or square set in silicone adhesive around
penetration.
B. Sheet Metal: Pipe passing through interior walls, partitions,and floors, unless steel or brass sleeves are
specified below.
C. Pipe Passing Through Concrete Beam Flanges,except where Brass Pipe Sleeves are Specified:
1. Galvanized steel pipe or black iron pipe with asphalt coating.
2. Connect sleeve with floor plate except in mechanical rooms.
D. Pipe Passing Through Mechanical above Basement:
1. Galvanized steel pipe or black iron pipe with asphalt coating.
2. Connect sleeve with floor plate except in mechanical rooms.
E. Penetrations in concrete beam flanges are permitted but are prohibited through ribs or beams without
prior approval from the Architect.
F. Clearances:
1. Provide allowance for insulated piping.
Job Number 2170712.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
20 05 1 7- 1/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. Wall, Floor, Floor, Partitions,and Beam Flanges: 0.5 inch greater than external; pipe diameter.
3. All Rated Openings: Caulked tight with fire stopping material conforming to ASTM E814 in
accordance with Section 07 84 00 to prevent the spread of fire,smoke,and gases.
2.02 MANUFACTURED SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Flexicraft Industries; PipeSeal
2. Thunderline; Link-Seal.
B. Modular/Mechanical Seal:
1. Synthetic rubber interlocking links continuously fill annular space between pipe and wall/casing
opening.
2. Provide watertight seal between pipe and wall/casing opening.
3. Elastomer element size and material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Glass reinforced plastic pressure end plates.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and foreign material,from inside and outside, before assembly.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient.
B. Install piping to conserve building space,to not interfere with use of space and other work.
C. Install piping and pipe sleeves to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints,or
connected equipment.
D. Structural Considerations:
1. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated.
E. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings,floors,walls, partitions,and similar elements. Seal pipe
including sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required.
1. Aboveground Piping:
a. Pack solid using mineral fiber conforming to ASTM C592.
b. Fill space with an elastomer caulk to a depth of 0.50 inch where penetrations occur between
conditioned and unconditioned spaces.
2. All Rated Openings:Caulk tight with fire stopping material conforming to ASTM E814 in
accordance with Section 07 84 00 to prevent the spread of fire,smoke,and gases.
3. Caulk exterior wall sleeves watertight with mechanically expandable chloroprene inserts with
mastic-sealed components.
F. Manufactured Sleeve-Seal Systems:
1. Install manufactured sleeve-seal systems in sleeves located in grade slabs and exterior concrete
walls at piping entrances into building.
2. Provide sealing elements of the size,quantity,and type required for the piping and sleeve inner
diameter or penetration diameter.
3. Locate piping in center of sleeve or penetration.
Job Number 2170712.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
20 05 1 7- 2/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
4. Install field assembled sleeve-seal system components in annular space between sleeve and
piping.
5. Tighten bolting for a water-tight seal.
6. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
G. When installing more than one piping system material,ensure system components are compatible and
joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges,union,
and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.
H. Insulation shall run continuous through sleeves in non-fire rated elements. Insulation shall not run
continuous through sleeves in fire rated elements unless the fire sealant system used is UL accepted for
use with insulated pipes.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
20 05 1 7- 3/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 22 05 23
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Applications.
B. General requirements.
C. Angle valves.
D. Ball valves.
E. Butterfly valves.
F. Gate valves.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 20 00 00-General Mechanical Requirements
B. Section 22 05 48-Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
C. Section 22 05 53- Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
D. Section 22 07 19- Plumbing Piping Insulation.
E. Section 22 10 05-Plumbing Piping.
1.03 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
A. CWP: Cold working pressure.
B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.
C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N,or nitrile rubber.
D. NRS: Non-rising stem.
E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.
F. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
G. RS: Rising stem.
H. SWP: Steam working pressure.
I. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASME B1.20.1- Pipe Threads,General Purpose(Inch);2013.
B. ASME B16.1-Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125,and 250; 2015.
C. ASME B16.5-Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 Through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard; 2017.
D. ASME B16.10-Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves;2017.
E. ASME B16.18-Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012.
F. ASME B16.34-Valves- Flanged,Threaded and Welding End;2017.
G. ASME B31.9-Building Services Piping;2014.
H. ASTM A126-Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges,and Pipe Fittings; 2004
(Reapproved 2014).
I. ASTM A536-Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings; 1984(Reapproved 2014).
J. ASTM B62-Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings; 2017.
K. AWWA C606-Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2015.
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
23 05 23- 1/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
L. MSS SP-45-Bypass and Drain Connections; 2003 (Reaffirmed 2008).
M. MSS SP-67-Butterfly Valves; 2017.
N. MSS SP-80-Bronze Gate,Globe,Angle and Check Valves; 2013.
O. MSS SP-110-Ball Valves Threaded,Socket-Welding,Solder Joint,Grooved and Flared Ends;2010.
P. NSF 61- Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects; 2017.
Q. NSF 372- Drinking Water System Components- Lead Content; 2016.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on valves including manufacturers catalog information. Submit
performance ratings, rough-in details,weights,support requirements,and piping connections.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,operating instructions,
maintenance and repair data,and parts listings.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer:
1. Obtain valves for each valve type from single manufacturer.
2. Company must specialize in manufacturing products specified in this section,with not less than
three years of documented experience.
B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX.
C. Domestic water fittings,joining materials,and all other appurtenances in contact with potable water
shall be lead-free except those specifically exempted in Section 3874 of the Safe Water Drinking Act.
1. Lead-free shall mean:
a. Not containing more than 0.2%lead when used with respect to solder and flux; and
b. Not more than a weighted average of 0.25%when used with respect to the wetted surfaces
of pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings,and fixtures.
1.07 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Minimize exposure of operable surfaces by setting plug and ball valves to open position.
2. Protect valve parts exposed to piped medium against rust and corrosion.
3. Protect valve piping connections such as grooves,weld ends,threads,and flange faces.
4. Adjust gate and angle valves to the closed position to avoid clattering.
5. Adjust butterfly valves to closed or partially closed position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection and protect flanges and specialties from dirt.
a. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps.
b. Maintain caps in place until installation.
2. Store valves in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation.
a. Store valves indoors in dry environment.
b. Store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures when indoor storage is not an option.
C. Exercise the following precautions for handling:
1. Handle large valves with sling, modified to avoid damage to exposed parts.
2. Avoid the use of operating handles or stems as rigging or lifting points.
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
23 05 23- 2/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPLICATIONS
A. See drawings for specific valve locations.
B. Provide the following valves for the applications if not indicated on drawings:
1. Shutoff: Ball, butterfly,gate
2. Dead-End: Single-flange butterfly(lug)type.
C. Required Valve End Connections for Non-Wafer Types:
1. Steel Pipe:
a. 2 NPS and Smaller: Threaded ends.
b. 2-1/2 NPS to 4 NPS: Grooved or flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is
indicated in valve schedules below.
C. 5 NPS and Larger: Grooved or flanged ends.
d. Grooved-End Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Grooved.
2. Copper Tube:
a. 2 NPS and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in
valve schedules below.
b. 2-1/2 NPS to 4 NPS: Grooved or flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is
indicated in valve schedules below.
C. 5 NPS and Larger: Grooved or flanged ends.
D. Domestic, Hot and Cold Water Valves:
1. 2 NPS and Smaller:
a. Ball: One piece,full port, bronze with bronze trim.
b. Bronze Gate: Class 125, NRS.
2. 2-1/2 NPS and Larger:
a. Iron,2-1/2 NPS to 4 NPS: Provide with threaded or flanged ends.
b. Iron Ball: Class 150.
C. Iron Single-Flange Butterfly: 200 CWP, EPDM seat,aluminum-bronze disc.
d. Iron Grooved-End Butterfly: 175 CWP.
e. Iron Gate: Class 125, NRS.
2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: No less than rating indicated;as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
B. Valve Sizes: Match upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
C. Valve Actuator Types:
1. Handwheel: Valves other than quarter-turn types.
2. Hand Lever: Quarter-turn valves 6 NPS and smaller.
D. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2 NPS stem extensions and the following features:
1. Gate Valves: Rising stem.
2. Ball Valves: Extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material,and protective
sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
23 05 23- 3/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3. Butterfly Valves: Extended neck.
4. Memory Stops: Fully adjustable after insulation is installed.
E. Valve-End Connections:
1. Threaded End Valves: ASME B1.20.1.
2. Flanges on Iron Valves: ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves.
3. Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 1/2 NPS through 24 NPS: ASME B16.5.
4. Solder Joint Connections: ASME B16.18.
5. Grooved End Connections: AWWA C606.
F. General ASME Compliance:
1. Ferrous Valve Dimensions and Design Criteria: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34.
2. Solder-joint Connections: ASME B16.18.
3. Building Services Piping Valves: ASME B31.9.
G. Valve Materials for Potable Water: NSF 61 and NSF 372.
H. Bronze Valves:
1. Fabricate from dezincification resistant material.
2. Copper alloys containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.
I. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
J. Source Limitations: Obtain each valve type from a single manufacturer.
2.03 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES
A. Class 125: CWP Rating:200 psig:.
1. Comply with MSS SP-80,Type 1.
2. Body: Bronze;ASTM B62,with integral seat and screw in bonnet.
3. Ends: Threaded.
4. Stem: Bronze.
5. Disc: Bronze.
6. Packing: Asbestos free.
7. Handwheel: Bronze or aluminum.
8. Manufacturers:
a. Nibco.
b. Stockham
C. Apollo
2.04 BRONZE BALL VALVES
A. Two Piece, Full Port with Stainless Steel Trim:
1. Comply with MSS SP-110.
2. SWP Rating: 150 psig.
3. CWP Rating: 600 psig.
4. Body: Bronze.
5. Ends: Threaded.
6. Seats: PTFE or TFE.
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
23 05 23-4/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
7. Stem: Stainless steel.
8. Ball: Stainless steel,vented.
9. Manufacturers:
a. Nibco
b. Stockham
C. Apollo
d. Jomar
B. Three Piece, Full Port with Stainless Steel Trim:
1. Comply with MSS SP-110.
2. SWP Rating: 150 psig.
3. CWP Rating: 600 psig.
4. Body: Bronze.
5. Ends: Threaded.
6. Seats: PTFE or TFE
7. Stem: Stainless steel.
8. Ball: Stainless steel,vented.
9. Manufacturers:
a. Nibco.
b. Stockham
C. Apollo
d. Jomar
2.05 IRON,SINGLE FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Lug type: Bi-directional dead-end service without use of downstream flange.
1. Comply with MSS SP-67,Type I.
2. CWP Rating: 200 psig.
3. Body: ASTM A126,cast iron or ASTM A536,ductile iron.
4. Stem: One or two-piece stainless steel.
5. Seat: EPDM.
6. Disc: Coated ductile iron.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Nibco.
b. Stockham
C. Apollo
2.06 IRON,GROOVED-END BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. CWP Rating: 175 psig(1200 kPa).
1. Comply with MSS SP-67,Type I.
2. Body: Coated ductile iron.
3. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel.
4. Disc: Coated ductile iron.
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
23 05 23- 5/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
5. Disc Seal: EPDM.
6. Manufacturers:
2.07 BRONZE GATE VALVES
A. Non-Rising Stem (NRS):
1. Comply with MSS SP-80,Type I.
2. Class 125: CWP Rating: 200 psig:.
3. Body: ASTM B62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
4. Ends: Threaded or solder joint joint.
5. Stem: Bronze.
6. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.
7. Packing: Asbestos free.
8. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze,or aluminum.
9. Manufacturers:
a. Nibco.
b. Stockham
C. Apollo
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Discard all packing materials and verify that valve interior,including threads and flanges are completely
clean without signs of damage or degradation that could result in leakage.
B. Verify valve parts to be fully operational in all positions from closed to fully open.
C. Confirm gasket material to be suitable for the service,to be of correct size,and without defects that
could compromise effectiveness.
D. Should valve is determined to be defective, replace with new valve.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Provide unions or flanges with valves to facilitate equipment removal and maintenance while
maintaining system operation and full accessibility for servicing.
B. Provide separate valve support as required and locate valve with stem at or above center of piping,
maintaining unimpeded stem movement.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
23 05 23- 6/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 22 05 48
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Restraints shall be bidder-designed. Seismic Design Criteria are to be established per the
International Building Code and ASCE along with Project Structural drawings.
B. Items not included in this specification shall not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of providing
seismic bracing that meets all the criteria required by the referenced codes and in accordance with the
seismic design guidelines and the project structural drawings.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Vibration isolators.
B. Seismic restraints for suspended components and equipment.
1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASCE 7-Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures; 2016.
B. ICC(IBC) -International Building Code; 2018.
C. SMACNA(SRM)-Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems;2008.
D. Applicable Project Structural Drawings for Seismic Design Criteria.
E. Applicable Manufacturer's Seismic Design Guides for Proprietary listed seismic braces and mounting
hareware.
1.05 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Occupancy Category of Structure(I-IV) per ICC(IBC) or ASCE 7
B. Component Importance Factor(Ip) per ASCE 7
C. Mapped Acceleration Parameters(S1 and (Ss) per ICC(IBC)and Project Structural Drawings
D. Site Class(A-F) per ICC(IBC)and Project Structural Drawings
E. Site Coefficient(Fa) per ICC(IBC)and Project Structural Drawings
F. Site Coefficient(Fv) per ICC(IBC)and Project Structural Drawings
G. Seismic Design Category(A-D) based on Short Period Response Accelerations per ICC(IBC)and Project
Structural Drawings
H. Seismic Design Category(A-D) based on 1-Second Period Response Acceleration per ICC(IBC)and
Project Structural Drawings
I. Amplification Factor ap per ASCE 7
J. Response Modification Factor Rp per ASCE 7
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Provide manufacturer's product literature documenting compliance with PART 2 PRODUCTS.
2. Include seismic rating documentation for each isolator and restraint component accounting for
horizontal,vertical,and combined loads.
Job Number 2170712.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 48- 1/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Fully dimensioned fabrication drawings and installation details for vibration isolation bases,
member sizes,attachments to isolators,and supported equipment.
2. Include auxiliary motor slide bases and rails, base weights, inertia bases,concrete weights,
equipment static loads,support points,vibration isolators,and detailed layout of isolator location
and orientation with static and dynamic load on each isolator.
3. Include selections from prescriptive design tables that indicate compliance with the applicable
building code and the vibration isolator manufacturer's requirements.
4. Clearly indicate the load and capacity assumptions selected. Include copies of any calculations.
5. Include the calculations that indicate compliance with the applicable building code for seismic
controls and the vibration isolator manufacturer's requirements.
6. Include the seal of the Professional Engineer registered in the State of Washington in which the
Project is located,on drawings and calculations which at a minimum include the following:
a. Seismic Restraint Details: Detailed drawings of seismic restraints and snubbers including
anchorage details that indicate quantity,diameter,and depth of penetration,edge distance,
and spacing of anchors.
b. Equipment Seismic Qualification Certification: Certification by the manufacturer or
responsible party that each piece of equipment provided will withstand seismic force levels
as specified in the applicable building code for seismic controls.
1) Basis for Certification: Indicate whether the withstand certification is based on actual
testing of assembled components,on calculations,or on historic data.
2) Indicate equipment to be sufficiently durable to resist design forces and or remain
functional after the seismic event.
C. Dimensioned outline drawings of equipment identifying center of gravity, locations,and
provisions for mounting and anchorage.
d. Detailed description of the equipment anchorage devices on which the certifications are
based.
e. Statement of Special Inspections: Prepared by the registered design professional in
responsible charge.
C. Periodic Special Inspections: The mechanical contractor shall provide a list of components/systems
requiring periodic special inspections per ICC(IBC).
D. Special Certification Requirements: Each contractor responsible for the construction of a "Designated
Seismic System"for active plumbing equipment that must remain operable following the design
earthquake,or components with hazardous contents certified by the manufacturer to maintain
containment following the design earthquake shall submit a Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance
for review and approval by the Registered Design Professional responsible for the design of the system.
This information shall then be submitted to the AHJ.
E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions with special procedures and setting
dimensions.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform design and installation in accordance with applicable codes.
B. Designer Qualifications: Perform design of seismic controls under direct supervision of a Professional
Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and registered and licensed in the State in which the
Project is located.
Job Number 2170712.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 48- 2/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Independent firm specializing in performing testing and inspections of
the type specified in this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc
B. Mason Industries
C. Vibration Eliminator Company, Inc
2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General:
1. All vibration isolators, base frames and inertia bases to conform to all uniform deflection and
stability requirements under all operating loads.
2. Steel springs to operate in the linear portion of the load versus deflection curve over deflection
range of not less than 50 percent above specified deflection.
3. All equipment mounted on vibration isolated bases to have minimum operating clearance of 2
inches between the base and floor or support beneath unless noted otherwise.
2.03 VIBRATION ISOLATORS
A. Non-Seismic Type:
1. Steel Springs:
a. Assembly: Freestanding, laterally stable without housing.
b. Leveling Device: Rigidly connected to equipment or frame.
2. Restrained Steel Springs:
a. Housing: Rigid blocking during rigging prevents equipment installed and operating height
from changing during temporary weight reduction.
b. Equipment Wind Loading: Adequate means for fastening isolator top to equipment and
isolator base plate to supporting structure.
3. Elastomeric Hangers:
a. Housing: Steel construction containing elastomeric isolation element to prevent rod contact
with housing and short-circuiting of isolating function.
b. Incorporate steel load distribution plate sandwiching elastomeric element to housing.
4. Spring Hanger:
a. Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring and integral elastomeric element
preventing metal to metal contact.
b. Bottom Opening: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment.
5. Thrust Restraints:
a. Housing: Steel construction containing stable steel spring and integral elastomeric element
installed in pairs to resist air pressure thrusts.
b. Bottom Openings: Sized to allow plus/minus 15 degrees rod misalignment.
B. Seismic Type:
1. Coil Springs Consisting of Single Elements:
a. Housing: Manufactured from cast iron material.
b. Ductile Material: Designed and rated for seismic applications.
Job Number 2170712.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 48- 3/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Spring: Restrained by housing without significant degradation of vibration isolation
capabilities during normal equipment operating conditions.
d. Resilient Snubbing Grommet System: Incorporated and designed with clearances of no more
than 0.25 inch in any direction preventing direct metal-to-metal contact between supported
member and fixed restraint housing.
e. Resilient Pad: Located in series with spring.
f. Coil Springs: Color coded elements to have a lateral stiffness greater than 0.8 times the
rated vertical stiffness with 50 percent overload capacity.
g. Finish: Suitable for the application.
2. All Directional Elastomeric:
a. Material: Molded from oil,ozone,and oxidant resistant compounds.
b. Operating Parameters: Designed to operate within the isolator strain limits providing
maximum performance and service life.
C. Attachment Method: Encapsulated load transfer plate bolted to equipment and base plate
with anchor hole bolted to supporting structure.
d. Rating: Cast iron and aluminum housings rated for seismic restraint applications.
e. Minimum Operating Static Deflections: Deflections indicated in project documents are not
to exceed published load capacities.
2.04 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS FOR SUSPENDED COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Comply with:
1. SMACNA(SRM).
B. Cable Restraints:
1. Wire Rope: Steel wire strand cables sized to resist seismic loads in all lateral directions.
2. Protective Thimbles: Eliminates potential for dynamic cable wear and strand breakage.
3. Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into account bracket geometry.
4. Connections:
a. Use overlapping wire rope U clips,cable clamping bolts,swaged sleeves or seismically rated
tool-less wedge insert lock connectors.
b. Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent deformation.
5. Vertical Suspension Rods: Attach required bracing of sufficient strength to prevent rod buckling
from vertical compression forces utilizing series of attachment clips.
C. Rigid Restraints:
1. Structural Element: Sized to resist seismic loads in all lateral directions and carry both
compressive and tensile loading.
2. Size: Based on the lesser of cable capacity or anchor load taking into account bracket geometry.
3. Connections: Internally brace clevis hanger bracket cross bolt to prevent deformation.
4. Static Support System: Anchorage capable of carrying additional tension loads generated by the
vertical component of the rigid brace compression which is additive to any static load
requirements on the system.
5. Vertical Suspension Rods: Attached required bracing of sufficient strength to prevent rod buckling
from vertical compression forces utilizing series of attachment clips.
Job Number 2170712.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 48-4/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION-GENERAL
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. On closed spring isolators,adjust so side stabilizers are clear under normal operating conditions.
C. Prior to making piping connections to equipment with operating weights substantially different from
installed weights,block up equipment with temporary shims to final height. When full load is applied,
adjust isolators to load to allow shim removal.
D. Support piping connections to equipment mounted on isolators using isolators or resilient hangers for
scheduled distance.
1. Up to 4 Inches Pipe Size: First three points of support.
2. Select three hangers closest to vibration source for minimum 1.0 inch static deflection or static
deflection of isolated equipment. Select remaining isolators for minimum 1.0 inch static
deflection or 1/2 static deflection of isolated equipment.
3.02 INSTALLATION-SEISMIC
A. Wall mounted Mechanical Equipment:
1. Provide support and bracing to resist seismic design force in any direction.
2. Install backing plates or blocking as required to deliver load to primary wall framing members.
3. Anchoring to gypsum wallboard, plaster or other wall finish that has not been engineered to resist
imposed loads is not permitted.
B. Piping:
1. Provide seismic bracing in accordance ASCE 7.
2. Provide supports, braces,and anchors to resist gravity and seismic design forces.
3. Provide flexible connections between floor mounted equipment and suspended piping; between
unbraced piping and restrained suspended items; as required for thermal movement; at building
separations and seismic joints; and wherever relative differential movements could damage pipe
in an earthquake.
4. Brace resiliently supported pipe with cable bracing or alternate means designed to prevent
transmission of vibrations and noise to the structure.
5. Brace every run 5.0 feet or more in length with two transverse and one longitudinal bracing
locations.
6. Pipes and Connections Constructed of Ductile Materials(copper,ductile iron,steel or aluminum
and brazed,welded or screwed connections)and is 2.5 inches and larger and all fuel piping 1 inch
and larger:
a. Provide transverse bracing at spacing not more than 40.0 feet on center.
b. For fuel liquid and gas piping, provide transverse bracing at spacing not more than 20.0 feet
(6.1 m)on center.
C. Provide longitudinal bracing at spacing not more than 80.0 feet on center.
d. For fuel liquid and gas piping, provide longitudinal bracing at spacing not more than 40.0 feet
(12.2 m)on center.
e. Transverse bracing for one pipe section may also act as a longitudinal bracing for a pipe
section connected perpendicular to it, if the bracing is installed within 2 feet of the elbow or
tee of similar size.
Job Number 2170712.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 48- 5/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
f. Piping conveying fluids at 100°F.and higher shall have expansion devices provided in
between longitudinal braces to allow for thermal expansion.
g. Bracing may be omitted when the top of the pipe is suspended 12 inches or less from the
supporting structural member and the pipe is suspended by an individual hanger.
7. Pipes and Connections Constructed of Non Ductile Materials(cast iron,no-hub,plastic or non-UL
listed grooved coupling pipe)and is 2.S inches and larger:
a. Provide transverse bracing at spacing not more than 20.0 feet on center.
b. Provide longitudinal bracing at spacing not more than 40.0 feet on center.
C. Transverse bracing for one pipe section may also act as a longitudinal bracing for a pipe
section connected perpendicular to it, if the bracing is installed within 2 feet of the elbow or
tee of similar size.
d. Piping conveying fluids at 100°F.and higher shall have expansion devices provided in
between longitudinal braces to allow for thermal expansion.
e. Bracing may be omitted when the top of the pipe is suspended 12 inches or less from the
supporting structural member and the pipe is suspended by an individual hanger.
8. Provide lateral restraint for risers at not more than 30 feet on center or as required for horizontal
runs,whichever is less.
9. Piping Explicitly Exempt from Seismic Bracing Requirements:
a. Provide flexible connections between piping and connected equipment, including in-line
devices such as VAV boxes and reheat coils.
b. Install piping consistent with ASCE 7,such that swinging of the pipes will not cause damaging
impact with adjacent components,finishes,or structural framing while maintaining clear
horizontal distance of 67 percent of the hanger length between subject components.
10. Use of proprietary restraint systems with a certificate of compliance,verified and listed by an
accredited inspection body is acceptable(pending shop drawing approval),as an alternative to
project specific seismic bracing design.
11. Re-use of Existing Hangers:
a. Re-using existing hangers at locations of seismic bracing are to be judged on a case-by-case
basis by the registered project design professional.
b. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, it is assumed all hangers supporting new piping,
located at a seismic brace,will be new.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 48- 6/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 22 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates.
B. Tags.
C. Stencils.
D. Pipe markers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 09 9123- Interior Painting: Identification painting.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASME A13.1-Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 2015.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. List: Submit list of wording,symbols,letter size,and color coding for mechanical identification.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Valve Diagram: Provide an unlaminated copy of the valve diagram.
2. Valve Tag Schedule: Provide an unlaminated copy of the valve tag schedule.
3. Concealed Items Legend: Provide a color legend listing the colors used to label equipment above
the ceiling.
D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NAMEPLATES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Brimar Industries, Inc
2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co
3. Seton Identification Products
B. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.
1. Letter Color: White.
2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch.
3. Background Color: Black.
4. Plastic: Conform to ASTM D709.
2.02 TAGS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Advanced Graphic Engraving
2. Brady Corporation
3. Brimar Industries, Inc
4. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co
Job Number 2170712.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 53- 1/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
5. Seton Identification Products
6. Or equal.
B. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background
color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.
C. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters;tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.
D. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list hard laminated.
2.03 STENCILS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Brady Corporation
2. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.
3. Seton Identification Products
4. Or equal.
B. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:
1. 3/4 to 1-1/4 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field, 1/2 inch high
letters.
2. 1-1/2 to 2 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 8 inch long color field,3/4 inch high
letters.
3. 2-1/2 to 6 inch Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 12 inch long color field, 1-1/4 inch high
letters.
C. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 9123,semi-gloss enamel,colors conforming to ASME A13.1.
2.04 PIPE MARKERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Brady Corporation
2. Brimar Industries, Inc.
3. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co.
4. Seton Identification Products.
5. Or equal.
B. Comply with ASME A13.1.
C. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated,flexible,semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or
pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being
conveyed.
D. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible,vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed
markings.
E. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape,minimum 6
inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
F. Color code assignments shall be verifed with the Owner prior to ordering. Color code as follows:
1. Potable Domestic Cold, Hot,and Hot Recirculation Water: Green with white letters.
2. Fire Quenching Fluids: Red with white letters.
3. Non-Potable Cold, Hot,and Hot Recirculation Water: Orange with black letters with added words
stating"CAUTION: NON—POTABLE, DO NOT DRINK"
4. Flammable Fluids: Yellow with black letters.
Job Number 2170712.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 53- 2/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
5. Compressed Air: Blue with white letters.
2.05 VALVE TAG SCHEDULES
A. Provide a Valve Tag Schedule for each piping system,typewritten,and reproduced on 8-1/2"x 11" bond
paper, hard laminated. Tabulate valve number, piping system,system abbreviation (as shown on tag),
location of valve(room or space),and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are
intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule.
2.06 VALVE DIAGRAM
A. Provide a Valve Diagram showing the location of all valves relative to the floor plan of the building.
Each Valve Diagram shall be 11x17,hard laminated sheets. Each piping system shall be in a unique
color and a legend noting the system colors shall be placed on the first page.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners,or adhesive. Apply with
sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.
B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.
C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade,directly above buried pipe.
F. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel
closest to equipment.
3.03 PIPE MARKERS AND COLOR BANDS
A. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied space,
machine rooms,accessible maintenance spaces and exterior non-concealed locations or in accessible
ceiling spaces.
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch,excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at
branch where there could be question of flow pattern.
3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floor/ceilings,or enter non-accessible
enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes,and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
3.04 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install engraved plastic laminate sign on or near each major item of plumbing equipment and each
operation device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational
devices. Provide signs or suspended ceiling tile below mechanical equipment located above ceiling.
1. Pumps and similar motor-driven units.
2. Tanks and pressure vessels.
Job Number 2170712.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 53- 3/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.05 NON POTABLE DOMESTIC SYSTEMS
A. Furnish and install label reading"CAUTION: NON-POTABLE WATER, DO NOT DRINK"at each fixture
served by a non-potable system.
3.06 CONCEALED ITEMS
A. Items concealed above accessible ceilings requiring access,shall have the ceiling marked to indicate
such items location. The marking system shall consist of colored phenolic plates with%"tall engraved
lettering specifying the item concealed; plate shall be applied to ceiling T-bar framing with rivets or
other owner approved method below the concealed item. Colors used shall be verified with Owner,
and unless directed otherwise,shall be:
1. Fire Protection System Components: Red
2. Domestic Plumbing System Component: Green
3.07 VALVE TAG SCHEDULE
A. Provide the hard laminated Valve Tag Schedule in the mechanical/janitors room.
3.08 VALVE DIAGRAM
A. Provide the hard laminated Valve Diagram in the mechanical/janitors room.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
22 05 53-4/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 22 0719
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping insulation.
B. Jackets and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 84 00- Firestopping.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM A666-Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,Strip,
Plate,and Flat Bar;2015.
B. ASTM B209-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate;2014.
C. ASTM B209M-Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate(Metric);
2014.
D. ASTM C177-Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus; 2013.
E. ASTM C195-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007 (Reapproved
2013).
F. ASTM C449-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing
Cement;2007(Reapproved 2013).
G. ASTM C534/C534M-Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal
Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2016.
H. ASTM C547-Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation;2017.
I. ASTM C552-Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation; 2016a.
J. ASTM C795-Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless
Steel; 2008(Reapproved 2013).
K. ASTM E84-Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2017.
L. ASTM E96/E96M-Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials;2016.
M. UL 723-Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide product description,thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for
each service,and locations.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section
with minimum 5 years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density,and thickness.
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
23 07 19- 1/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.
B. Maintain temperature before,during,and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index/Smoke developed index of 25/50,maximum,when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.
2.02 GLASS FIBER
A. Manufacturers:
1. CertainTeed Corporation
2. Johns Manville Corporation
3. Knauf Insulation
4. Owens Corning Corporation; Fiberglass Pipe Inulation ASJ:
5. Manson Insulation.
B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'K'Value: ASTM C177,0.24 at 75 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F.
3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
4. Maximum flame/smoke spread developed: 25/50.
C. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture
vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm-inches.
D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
E. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
F. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish:
G. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic,compatible with insulation,black
color.
H. Outdoor Breather Mastic: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic,compatible with insulation,black color.
I. Insulating Cement: ASTM C449.
2.03 CELLULAR GLASS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation
B. Insulation: ASTM C552,Type II.
1. Apparent Thermal Conductivity; 'K'Value: Grade 6,0.35 at 100 degrees F.
2. Service Temperature: Up to 800 degrees F.
3. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.005 perm inch.
4. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent by volume, maximum.
2.04 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION
A. Manufacturer:
1. Aeroflex USA, Inc;
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
23 07 1 9- 2/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. Armacell LLC;AP Armaflex
3. K-Flex USA LLC; Insul-Tube
4. Durkflex.
B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534/C534M
Grade 1; use molded tubular material wherever possible.
1. Minimum Service Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F.
3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.
4. K"Value: 0.25 Btu-in per hour per square foot°F at 75 degrees F.
5. Maximum flame/smoke spread developed: 25/50.
6. Maximum water vapor permeability,wet cup, perm-in 0.10.
7. Fiber free,formaldehyde-free,and low VOC's.
C. Elastomeric Foam Adhesive: Air dried,contact adhesive,compatible with insulation.
2.05 JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Johns Manville Corporation;Zeston 2000
2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material,gloss white color.
a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.
b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.
C. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum,when tested in accordance with
ASTM E96/E96M.
d. Thickness: 10 mil.
e. Connections: Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.
B. Canvas Jacket: UL listed 6 oz/sq yd plain weave cotton fabric treated with dilute fire retardant lagging
adhesive.
1. Lagging Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M)formed aluminum sheet.
1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.
2. Finish: Embossed.
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.
D. Stainless Steel Jacket: ASTM A666,Type 304 stainless steel.
1. Thickness: 0.010 inch.
2. Finish: Smooth.
3. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel.
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
23 07 1 9- 3/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry,with foreign material removed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
C. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions,and interruptions.
D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings,
valves, unions,flanges,strainers,flexible connections, pump bodies,and expansion joints.
E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
1. Provide vapor barrier jackets,factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing
longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch
expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
2. Insulate fittings,joints,and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as
adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less,do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment,
but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
G. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Provide standard jackets,with or without vapor barrier,factory-applied or field-applied. Secure
with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive.
2. Insulate fittings,joints,and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe.
Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
H. Insulated Pipe Supports and Shields:
1. Install in place at each hanger and support as required be Section 22 10 05 Plumbing Piping prior
to insulating.
2. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger.
3. Shields: Galvanized steel or PVC as follows:
a. 20 gauge(18 gauge for pipe larger than 3 inches)galvanized steel between pipe hangers or
pipe hanger rolls and insulated pipe supports. Shield shall cover a minimum of 40%of the
insulation where the pipe is supported from the bottom and 100%of the insulation where
the pipe is clamped.
b. PVC shield the full diameter of the pipe insulation with 20 gauge galvanized steel shield
rivited to the PVC.
4. Insulated Pipe Supports Location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
5. Insulated Pipe Support Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long,of same thickness and contour as
adjoining insulation. Provide 9 inches(230 mm) long insulated pipe support and 18 gauge
galvanized steel shield for pipes larger than 3 inches.
6. Insert Material: See Section 22 10 05 Plumbing Piping.
I. Continue insulation through walls,sleeves, pipe hangers,and other pipe penetrations except where
prohibited by code. Finish at supports, protrusions,and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Fire
Stop Specification Section 07 84 00.
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
23 07 1 9-4/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
J. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces(less than 10 feet above finished
floor): Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers.
K. Exposed Work: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers applied after pipe insulation is installed. A pre-
cut"Hi-Lo Temp" insulation insert,conforming to the UL 25/50 rating,shall be snugly tucked around the
fitting making sure the fitting is covered with the full thickness of insulation.
1. All others provide covering in pad form,constructed as follows: Use 1-inch thick Owens-Corning
Fiberglas TIW Glass Wool,Type I, non-oiled,fully enclosed on all sides and edges within tight-
weave canvas jacket.Attach Bergen hooks around edges of pad. Fit pad to device with edges
tightly butted and secure with copper wire laced between hooks. Provide vapor seal where vapor
seal is required for adjacent insulation.
L. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings,joints,and valves with insulation of
like material and thickness as adjoining pipe,and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier
cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.
M. Installation of below ground domestic hot water piping insulation: All piping shall be insulated with
cellular glass with heat sealed "pittwrap"or pre-insulated pipe system with Type K copper carrier(See
Section 23 07 19-HVAC Piping Insulation)with schedule 80 PVC or HDPE jacket.
N. Gauge Lines: Insulate to the gauge shutoff valve.
O. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings,joints,and valves with insulation of like material,thickness,and
finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. Cover with aluminum jacket
with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping.
P. Elastomeric Insulation Installation:
1. For PEX piping installation,elastomeric insulation shall be installed continuous through stud
framing and all penetration locations through walls,floors,and ceilings.
2. Elastomeric insulation with wall thicknesses greater than 1"shall not be installed in air plenums.
3. All elastomeric foam and sheet seams shall be sealed with adhesive per the insulation
manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Install elastomeric insulation on all PEX domestic hot water and recirculation water piping.
3.03 PIPE HANGERS
A. Do not allow pipes to come in contact with hangers.
3.04 SCHEDULES
A. Plumbing Systems:
1. Domestic Hot Water Supply(including Recirculation):
a. Glass Fiber Insulation:
1) Pipe Size Range: 1/2-1.25 inch.
2) Thickness: 1 inch.
3) Thickness: 1 1/2 inch.
b. Cellular Glass Insulation and Pre-insulated Piping Systems for underground applications: All
Sizes: 1 1/2 inch (38 mm):
C. Expanded Polystyrene Insulation (PEX only): All Sizes: 1 inch (25 mm)
2. Domestic Cold Water:
a. Glass Fiber: All Sizes on metal pipes: 1 inch (25 mm).
b. Expanded Polystyrene Insulation (PEX only): Not Required.
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
23 07 1 9- 5/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Other Systems:
1. Piping Exposed to Freezing or Semi-Heated Spaces(less than 50 degrees F.)with or without Heat
Tracing:
a. Glass Fiber: All Sizes on metal pipes: 1 1/2 inch (38 mm).
2. Copper Condensate Piping:
a. Glass Fiber: All Sizes: 1 inch (25 mm).
b. Expanded Polystyrene Insulation: 1 inch (25 mm).
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
23 07 1 9- 6/6
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 2210 05
PLUMBING PIPING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe, pipe fittings,specialties,and connections for piping systems.
1. Sanitary sewer.
2. Domestic water.
3. Flanges, unions,and couplings.
4. Pipe hangers and supports.
5. Manufactured sleeve-seal systems.
6. Strainers.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 22 05 48-Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
B. Section 22 05 53- Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASME B16.18-Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; 2012.
B. ASME B16.22-Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings;2013.
C. ASME B31.9-Building Services Piping; 2014.
D. ASME BPVC-IX-Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section IX-Welding, Brazing,and Fusing Procedures;
Welders; Brazers;and Welding, Brazing and Fusing Operators;2017.
E. ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.
F. ASTM A47/A47M -Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999(Reapproved 2014).
G. ASTM A123/A123M-Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel
Products;2017.
H. ASTM A269/A269M-Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing
for General Service;2015a.
I. ASTM B32-Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008(Reapproved 2014).
J. ASTM B88-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube;2016.
K. ASTM B88M-Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2016.
L. ASTM B813-Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper
Alloy Tube; 2016.
M. ASTM B828-Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy
Tube and Fittings; 2016.
N. ASTM D2564-Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping
Systems;2012.
O. ASTM D2665-Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain,Waste,and Vent Pipe
and Fittings; 2014.
P. ASTM D2855-Standard Practice for the Two-Step (Primer&Solvent Cement) Method of Joining Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)or Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Pipe and Piping Components with
Tapered Sockets; 2015.
Q. ASTM F876-Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene(PEX)Tubing; 2017.
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05- 1/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
R. ASTM F877-Standard Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene(PEX) Plastic Hot-and Cold-Water
Distribution Systems;2011a.
S. ASTM F1960-Standard Specification for Cold Expansion Fittings with PEX Reinforcing Rings for Use with
Cross-linked Polyethylene(PEX)Tubing; 2015.
T. AWWA C606-Grooved and Shouldered Joints; 2015.
U. AWWA C651-Disinfecting Water Mains;2014.
V. CISPI 301-Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm
Drain,Waste and Vent Piping Applications; 2009 (Revised 2012).
W. CISPI 310-Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
for Sanitary and Storm Drain,Waste,and Vent Piping Applications; 2011 (Revised 2012).
X. ICC-ES AC01-Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements;2015.
Y. ICC-ES AC106-Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners(Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements; 2015.
Z. ICC-ES AC193-Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2015.
AA. ICC-ES AC308-Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements;2016.
AB. MSS SP-58-Pipe Hangers and Supports- Materials, Design, Manufacture,Selection,Application,and
Installation; 2009.
AC. NSF 61- Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects; 2017.
AD. NSF 372- Drinking Water System Components-Lead Content;2016.
AE. PPI TR-4-PPI Listing of Hydrostatic Design Basis(HDB), Hydrostatic Design Stress(HDS),Strength Design
Basis(SDB), Pressure Design Basis(PDB),and Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings For
Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe;2017.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials,pipe fittings,valves,and accessories. Provide
manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
B. Welder Certificate: Include welders certification of compliance with ASME BPVC-IX.
C. Shop Drawings: For non-penetrating rooftop supports,submit detailed layout developed for this
project,with design calculations for loadings and spacings.
D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
1. See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements,for additional provisions.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data
1. Domestic water sterilization test.
2. Domestic water pressure tests.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes.
B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX and applicable state labor regulations.
D. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME BPVC-IX.
E. Identify pipe with marking including size,ASTM material classification,ASTM specification,potable
water certification,water pressure rating.
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05- 2/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
F. Domestic water fittings,joining materials,and all other appurtenances in contact with potable water
shall be lead-free except those specifically exempted in Section 3874 of the Safe Water Drinking Act.
1. Lead-free shall mean:
a. Not containing more than 0.2%lead when used with respect to solder and flux; and
b. Not more than a weighted average of 0.25%when used with respect to the vetted surfaces
of pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings,and fixtures.
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.
B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers,completing sections of the
work,and isolating parts of completed system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings,and solder and flux(if used),that comply
with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.
2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE
A. Cast Iron Pipe: Conform to CISPI 301, hubless pipe and fittings.
1. Manufacturers:
a. AB&I
b. Charlotte
C. Tyler
B. Joints: CISPI 310,neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. Couplings shall be
constructed of 300 Series type stainless steel. There shall be 2 bands for pipe sizes up to 4"and a
minimum of 4 bands for pipe sizes 5"and larger. Sealing bands shall require a minimum of 60-inch lbs.
torque per band. Neoprene gasket shall meet ASTM C 564.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Thermafit Regular Duty
b. Tyler Standard No-Hub
C. Clamp-All HI-TORQ 80
C. Flashing: Lead flashing,4 lbs. per sq.ft.of sheet lead flashing. Flashing skirt radius from the inserted
pipe of at least 8 inches or 2 foot square.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Elmdor Stoneman
D. Vent Cap: Vandal Resistant. Cast Iron. Minimum of 2 to 1 open area compared to the cross-sectional
area of the vent pipe.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Elmdor Stoneman
E. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665,schedule 40, DWV,solid core pipe.
1. Fittings: PVC.
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05- 3/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. Joints: ASTM D2564
a. Mechanical Joints: Mechanical joints on drainage pipe shall be made with an elastomeric
seal conforming to ASTM C 1173,ASTM D 3212 or CSA CAN/CSA-6602. Mechanical joints
shall not be installed in above-ground systems, unless otherwise approved. Joints shall be
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
b. Solvent Cementing: Joint surfaces shall be clean and free from moisture. A purple primer
that conforms to ASTM F 656 shall be applied. Solvent cement not purple in color and
conforming to ASTM D 2564,CSA CAN/CSA-6137.3,CSA CAN/CSA-13181.2 or CSA CAN/CSA-
13182.1 shall be applied to all joint surfaces. The joint shall be made while the cement is wet
and shall be in accordance with ASTM D 2855. Solvent-cement joints shall be permitted
above or below ground.
C. Threaded Joints: Threads shall conform to ASME 61.20.1. Schedule 80 or heavier pipe shall
be permitted to be threaded with dies specifically designed for plastic pipe. Approved
thread lubricant or tape shall be applied on the male threads only.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Charlotte
b. Mueller Industries
C. Cresline
2.03 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING,ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88(ASTM 688M),Type L(B), hard drawn
1. Fittings: ASME 616.18,cast copper alloy or ASME 1316.22,wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM 1332,alloy Sn95 solder, lead free conforming to UPC standards for solder and all
local code requirements.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Canfield
2) J.W. Harris
3) Aqua-Clean
3. Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double pressed type, NSF 61 and NSF 372 approved or certified,
utilizing EPDM,non toxic synthetic rubber sealing elements.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Grinnell Products
2) Viega LLC
3) Nibco.
4. Mechanical Couplings on pipe 2.5"and larger: NSF 61
a. Manufacturers:
1) Victualic
2) Gruvlok
B. Cross-Linked Polyethylene(PEX) Pipe: ASTM F876 or ASTM F877. Pipe shall be NSF 61 and NSF 14
certified.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Uponor, Inc
b. Viega LLC
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05- 4/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Zurn Industries, LLC
d. Watts.
e. Rehau
2. PPI TR-4 Pressure Design Basis:
a. 100 psig at maximum 180 degrees F.
3. Fittings: Brass and engineered polymer(EP)ASTM F1960.
4. Joints: Mechanical compression fittings.
5. Joints: ASTM F1960 cold-expansion fittings.
C. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A269/A269M,Grade TP304 alloy welded and seamless.
1. Mechanical Press Sealed Fittings: Double pressed type, NSF 61 and NSF 372 approved or certified,
utilizing EPDM,non toxic synthetic rubber sealing elements.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Grinnell Products
2) Viega LLC
3) Victaulic.
4) Nibco
2. Mechanical Couplings on pipe 2.5"and larger: NSF 61
a. Manufacturers:
1) Victualic
2) Gruvlok
2.04 CONDENSATE PIPING
A. Schedule 40 PVC,solid core.
B. Type L copper for use in air plenum, penetrating a fire wall,or used with gas-fired equipment.
C. Insulate per Section 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation.
2.05 FLANGES,UNIONS,AND COUPLINGS
A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under:
1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.
2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.
B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch:
1. Ferrous Pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed
neoprene gaskets.
2. Copper Tube and Pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets.
C. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curved housing segments with
continuous key to engage pipe groove,circular C-profile gasket,and bolts to secure and compress
gasket.
1. Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606.
2. Housing Material: Provide ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron or ductile iron,galvanized.
3. Gasket Material: Nitrile rubber suitable for operating temperature range from minus 20 degrees F
to 180 degrees F.
4. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel.
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05- 5/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
5. When pipe is field grooved, provide coupling manufacturer's grooving tools.
6. Manufacturers:
a. Grinnell Products,a Tyco Business: www.grinnell.com/#sle.
b. Victaulic.
C. Gruvlok.
D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end,copper solder end,water
impervious isolation barrier.
2.06 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.
1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated,select appropriate type
using MSS SP-58 recommendations.
2. Hanger Rods:Threaded hot rolled steel,electro-galvanized or cadmium plated. Hanger rods shall
be sized so that the total load (including pipe or duct, insulation,hangers,and fluid)does not
exceed the following:
a. 610 pounds for 3/8"diameter rods.
b. 1130 pounds for 1/2"diameter rods.
3. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers.
a. Cold and Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Double hangers.
4. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.
S. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp,epoxy coated.
6. Steel: Provide structural steel per ASTM A36/A36M.
7. Wood: Shall be fire treated.
8. Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with bases that rest on top of roofing
membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not penetrating the roofing
assembly,with support fixtures as specified; and as follows:
a. Bases: High density polypropylene.
b. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing
assembly.
C. Steel Components: Stainless steel,or carbon steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in
accordance with ASTM A123/A123M.
d. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer,same type as indicated
for equivalent indoor hangers and supports; corrosion resistant material.
e. Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under pipe to top of roofing.
f. Manufacturers:
1) PDH.
2) Elcen.
3) Grinnel
4) B-line
5) Unistrut
6) Caddy
7) Tolco
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05- 6/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Plumbing Piping-Drain,Waste,and Vent:
1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron,adjustable swivel,split ring.
2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel,adjustable,clevis.
3. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
5. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring,adjustable,copper plated.
C. Plumbing Piping-Water:
1. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron,adjustable swivel,split ring.
2. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel,adjustable,clevis.
3. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches to 4 Inches: Carbon steel,adjustable,clevis.
4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.
5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.
6. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring,adjustable,copper plated.
D. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners,as follows:
1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.
3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.
4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.
5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308.
6. Other Types: As required.
7. Manufacturers:
a. Powers Fasteners, Inc;
b. Rawplug.
C. Phillips.
d. Hilti
e. Caddy
E. Insulated Pipe Inserts and Insulation Shields:
1. Insulated pipe insert shall have no more than 5%deformation at 100 psi and a thermal
conductivity no more than 0.38 Btu/hr./sq.ft./degree F/1-inch thick at 75°F.
2. Insulated pipe insert shall be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and sized to match pipe
in which it is used on. See Section 22 07 19 for insulation sizes.
3. Provide shield per Section 22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation.
4. Manufacturers:
a. TPS Thermal Pipe Shields
b. B-Line
C. Clement Support Services
d. Snappitz
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05- 7/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
F. PEX Pipe Hangers and supports
1. Provide continuous steel channel pipe supports at all horizontal PEX pipe runs greater than 6'-0"
in length.
a. Steel Channel Pipe Supports:
1) 23-gauge,galvanized steel channel with a copper tube size controlled outside
diameter.
2) Steel channel pipe supports shall be available in lengths up to 9'-0"for pipe sizes%"-3
".
3) Secure pipe to channel support with stainless steel straps rated for 300-pound tensile
strength.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Uponor PEX-a Pipe,or approved equivalent.
3. All horizontal PEX pipe shall utilize steel brackets,clevis,J-hangers,or trapeze style hangers.
2.07 MANUFACTURED SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers:
1. The Metraflex Company; MetraSeal
2. Link Seal.
B. Modular/Mechanical Seal:
1. Synthetic rubber interlocking links continuously fill annular space between pipe and wall/casing
opening.
2. Provide watertight seal between pipe and wall/casing opening.
3. Elastomer element size and material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
4. Glass reinforced plastic pressure end plates.
2.08 STRAINERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong International, Inc
2. Bell and Gossett
3. Apollo Conbraco
4. Hoffman
5. Wheatley
6. Nibco
B. Size 2 inch and Under:
1. Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP,Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen.
2. Class 150,threaded bronze body 300 psi CWP,Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated
screen.
C. Size 1-1/2 inch to 4 inch:
1. Class 125,flanged iron body,Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated screen.
D. Size 5 inch and Larger:
1. Class 125,flanged iron body, basket pattern with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen.
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05- 8/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt,on inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install complete system of piping,valved as indicated or as necessary to completely control
entire apparatus. Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general location and connections.
Piping may have to be offset,lowered,or raised as required or directed at site.This does not relieve this
Division from responsibility for proper erection of systems of piping in every respect.lnstall in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.
D. Consult all drawings for location of pipe spaces,ducts,electrical equipment,ceiling heights,door
openings,window openings,and other details and report discrepancies or possible conflicts to
Architect/Engineer before installing pipe.
E. Allow sufficient clearances for installation of pipe insulation in thickness specified. If interferences
occur,reroute piping to accommodate insulation.
F. Install piping to maintain headroom,conserve space,and not interfere with use of space, removal of
other equipment,ducts,or devices,or block access to doors,windows,or access openings.
G. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints,or connected
equipment.
I. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and
access to valves and fittings.
J. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.
K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing,scrape, brush clean,and apply
one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
L. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Refer to Section 22 05 23.
M. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.
N. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions,walls and floors.
O. Do not use reducing bushings,street elbows,or close nipples.
P. T-drill procedure for connecting pipes will not be allowed.
Q. All piping in finished areas shall be installed concealed unless specifically noted otherwise.
R. Provide escutcheons where pipe passes through walls,floors,or ceilings.
S. Install all exposed piping parallel to the closest wall and in a neat,workmanlike manner.
T. Strainers: Install strainers as indicated. Provide plugged gate or ball valve in blow-off connection on
strainers,valve shall be same size as blow-off tapping. Final blow-off shall have a hose connection
fitting.
U. Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified solder,and
flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372.
V. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855.
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05- 9/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
W. Inserts:
1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.
2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced
concrete beams.
3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.
4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.
X. Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.
2. Support horizontal piping as indicated.
3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.
4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement
without disengagement of supported pipe.
6. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected
horizontal piping.
7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze
hangers.
8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
9. Provide hangers adjacent to motor driven equipment with vibration isolation; refer to Section 22
0548.
10. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.
Y. When installing more than one piping system material,ensure system components are compatible and
joined to ensure the integrity of the system. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges,union,
and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.
3.03 SOIL,WASTE,AND VENT
A. Place cleanouts as follows:
1. Where shown on plans and near bottom of each stack and riser.
2. At every 135 degree change of direction for horizontal lines.
3. Every 100 feet of horizontal run.
4. Extended cleanout to accessible surface. Do not place cleanouts in carpeted floors. In such
locations, use wall type cleanouts.
B. Vent entire waste system to atmosphere. Discharge vent pipe minimum 14 inches above roof. Join
lines together in least practicable number before projecting above roof.Set back vent lines so they will
not pierce roof near edge or valley. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of
roof assembly.
C. Use torque wrench to obtain proper tension in cinch bands on above ground hubless cast iron pipe.
Butt ends of pipe against centering flange of coupling.
D. Flash pipes passing through roof(or as shown on the plan)fitted snugly around pipes and caulk
between flashing and pipe with flexible waterproof compound. Provide counterflashing fitting with
vandal resistant screws. Extend lead up and turn in a minimum of 1" into the pipe. Flashing base shall
be at least 24 inches square(or 8 inch radius).
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05- 10/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
E. Install an expansion joint in each vertical straight run of PVC or polypropylene soil,waste,vent,and
drain pipe at intervals in excess of 30 feet. Install and anchor pipe per expansion joint manufacturer's
instructions. Provide access panel as required for servicing the expansion joint.
F. Install vertical waste pipe to comply with standard installation practices for suds control.
G. Reducing size of pipe in the direction of flow is prohibited.
H. Install drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:
1. Building soil and waste drain: 2 percent downward in the direction of flow unless indicated
otherwise on the plans.
I. Field Quality Control
1. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or,in absence of
published procedures,as follows:
a. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new,altered,extended,or replaced force-main piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it
was tested.
b. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,without
exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand
for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.
C. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping,or portion thereof,until
satisfactory results are obtained.
d. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
J. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to
prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
3.04 CROSS-LINKED POLYETHYLENE(PEX)PIPE
A. Provide stainless steel inserts at compression stop valves.
B. All couplings,elbows,tees,reducing tees adapters and any other connecting devices shall be of the
same manufacturer as the PEX piping.
C. Kinked tubing shall be reformed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation or cut out and
replaced.
D. 90 degree direction turns and wall penetrations shall be provided with a bend support or elbow fitting.
E. Copper sweated and threaded connections are to be made prior to PEX connections.
F. Transition PEX to copper at fire walls. Provide fire stop sealants at fire rated walls.
G. PEX tubing shall be fully seated against shoulder of fitting.
H. Horizontal piping shall be supported every 32".
I. Vertical piping shall be supported every 4'.
J. Allow 1/8"to 3/16"of slack per foot of run for expansion and contraction.
K. PEX tubing shall be installed to allow for expansion and contraction. Do not rigidly attach to structure.
L. Provide sleeves where PEX piping passes through masonry walls.
M. Protect tubing from nail/screw damage with suitable steel plate protectors.
N. The minimum bend radius of PEX tubing is six times its diameter. Smaller radius turns shall be provided
with an elbow.
O. Provide insulators where PEX piping passes through metal studs.
P. Supply stops shall be provided with a pipe bracket support from adjacent structure,a pipe clamp,tube
talon,and a plastic or metal bend support. (Sioux Chief Universal Slider Bracket or approved equal).
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05- 1 1/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
Q. Insulation does not have to be continuous at hanging brackets and clamps.
R. Plastic speed clips may be used for connection to structure. Speed clips shall be listed for use on PEX
piping.
3.05 APPLICATION
A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
B. Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and slope to
drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope.
B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points.
3.07 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING TESTS
A. Tests: As the work progresses each section of the water system shall be tested under a 100psi
hydrostatic test held for 2 hours without reduction of pressure(a pressure fluctuation of+/-1 psi is
acceptable). If any leaks occur or piping or valves are found to be defective,same shall be removed and
new material installed,and the test made on that section again until all material is found to be
satisfactory. Such test shall be made in the presence of the Owner's Representative.
B. Provide written test documentation in the operation and maintenance manual.
3.08 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Prior to starting work,verify system is complete,flushed and clean.
B. Ensure acidity(pH) of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda
ash)or acid (hydrochloric).
C. Inject disinfectant,free chlorine in liquid,powder,tablet or gas form,throughout system to obtain 50 to
80 mg/L residual.
D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15
percent of outlets.
E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing,from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry,
and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
I. Provide test results in the operation and maintenance manual.
3.09 SCHEDULES
A. Pipe Hanger Spacing:
1. Metal Piping:
a. Pipe Size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches:
1) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 6.5 ft.
2) Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inches.
b. Pipe Size: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches:
1) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inch.
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05- 12/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Pipe Size: 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches:
1) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger Rod Diameter: 1/2 inch.
d. Pipe Size: 4 inches to 6 inches:
1) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 10 ft.
2) Hanger Rod Diameter: S/8 inch.
2. Plastic Piping:
a. All Sizes:
1) Maximum Hanger Spacing: 6 ft.
2) Hanger Rod Diameter: 3/8 inch.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING
22 10 05- 13/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 2210 06
PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Unions
B. Flexible Connectors
C. Cleanouts.
D. Refrigerator valve and recessed box.
E. Water hammer arrestors.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. NSF 61- Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects; 2017.
B. NSF 372- Drinking Water System Components-Lead Content;2016.
C. PDI-WH 201-Water Hammer Arresters; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements,service sizes,and finishes.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and
support requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this
section with not less than three years documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372
for maximum lead content.
2.02 UNIONS
A. Dielectric Waterways: Inert, non-corrosive thermoplastic lining with zinc electroplated casing,rated at
300 psi at 225 deg. F.,conforming to NSF 61 Type and size to match piping.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Walter Vallett Company V-line
b. Clear Flow
B. Unions on Copper Pipe:
1. In 2" Pipe and Smaller:Wrought copper solder joint copper to copper union.
2. In 2.5" Pipe and Larger: Brass flange unions.
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 06- 1/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3. Manufacturers:
a. Watts
b. Nibco
C. Mueller
2.03 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Water Pump Flexible Connectors: Flexible bronze braid, bronze hose,and copper ends rated to a
working pressure of 470 psi at 70°F for a 1"flexible connector.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Metraflex
b. Minnesota Flex
C. Resistoflex
2.04 CLEANOUTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Jay R.Smith Manufacturing Company
2. Josam Company
3. Zurn Industries, LLC
B. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas:
1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar,threaded top assembly,
and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept
floor finish in finished floor areas.
C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas:
1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover,and round
stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.
2.05 REFRIGERATOR VALVE AND RECESSED BOX
A. Box Manufacturers:
1. Guy Gray
2. Oatey Supply Chain Services, Inc
2.06 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Jay R.Smith Manufacturing Company
2. Sioux Chief; [650 Series]
3. Wade; [WP5-100]
4. Zurn Industries, LLC; 1250 XL
B. Water Hammer Arrestors:
1. Stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI-WH 2O1, precharged
suitable for operation in temperature range minus 100 to 300 degrees F and maximum 250 psi
working pressure.
2. Piston-type with sufficient volume of air to dissipate the calculated kinetic energy generated in
the piping system.
3. Arrestors shall be effective when installed at any angle.
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 06- 2/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
4. Provide isolation valve for service.
5. Maximum working temperature of 250 degrees F.
6. Maximum working pressure 350 PSIG.
7. Performance per ANSI/ASSE 1010-2004 Standard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Unions: Install unions in pipe connections to control valves,coils, regulators, reducers,all equipment,
and where it may be necessary to disconnect the equipment or piping for repairs or maintenance; and
as indicated.
C. Install (1) piston type water hammer arrester at each quick acting valve for branch supply lines up to 20'
in length serving plumbing fixture groups. Install water hammer arrester between last two fixtures,for
branch supply lines exceeding 20' in length,serving plumbing fixture groups install water hammer
arrester between middle two fixtures and last two fixtures. Size per manufacturers instructions.
D. Extend cleanouts to finished wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite
and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
E. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply
piping to on fast acting valves such as water closet flush valves,washer machines,etc..
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
22 10 06- 3/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 22 30 00
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Water Heaters:
1. Commercial electric.
B. Cooling condensate removal pumps.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 22 05 48-Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.
B. Section 23 05 13-Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. UL 174-Standard for Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters;Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
B. UL 778-Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Provide dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other
equipment and piping.
2. Indicate pump type,capacity,power requirements.
3. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system
operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.
4. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance,and inspection data, replacement
part numbers and availability,and service depot location and telephone number. Include pump
performance curves with pump.
D. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed
in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Certifications:
1. Water Heaters: NSF approved.
2. Electric Water Heaters: UL listed and labeled to UL 174.
3. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.,
as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
B. Identification: Provide pumps with manufacturer's name, model number,and rating/capacity identified
by permanently attached label.
C. Performance: Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and
cavitation,are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation,operate within 25 percent of
midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
22 30 00- 1/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TANKLESS WATER HEATERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eemax
2. Or approved equal.
B. Electric:
1. Type: Factory-assembled and wired,electric[]
2. Performance:
a. Maximum Working Pressure: 150 psig.
3. Controls: Automatic immersion water thermostat;flanged or screw-in nichrome elements,high
temperature limit thermostat.
2.02 COOLING CONDENSATE REMOVAL PUMPS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Little Giant
2. Or approved equal.
B. Construction: Commercial grade,nonferrous pump with stainless steel shaft, integral discharge check
valve, integral float switch,safety switch,thermoplastic reservoir,motor assembly,and power cord
with ground.
C. Safety: UL 778.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,as required by code,and
complying with conditions of certification, if any.
B. Provide and install brass fittings between water heater and piping connections. Dielectric fitting
connections are not acceptable.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
22 30 00- 2/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 22 40 00
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sinks.
B. Electric water coolers.
C. Drinking fountains.
D. Hot Water Dispenser
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ADA Standards-Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA)Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.
B. ASTM D3222-Standard Specification for Unmodified Poly(Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding
Extrusion and Coating Materials;2005(Reapproved 2015).
C. NSF 61- Drinking Water System Components- Health Effects; 2017.
D. NSF 372- Drinking Water System Components-Lead Content;2016.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures,sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes,trim,and
finishes.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures.
C. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.
D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name
and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in
this section,with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to
protect fixtures and prevent use.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Potable Water Systems: Provide plumbing fittings and faucets that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for
maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.
2.02 SINKS
A. Sink Manufacturers:
1. Just
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00- 1/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. Elkay
B. Single Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; 18 gage,0.0359 inch (0.91 mm)thick,Type 304 stainless
steel,self rimming and undercoated,with ledge back drilled for trim.
1. Drain: 3-1/2 inch crumb cup and tailpiece.
2. Verify amount of hole punches required for each sink prior to ordering.
C. Double Compartment Bowl: ASME A112.19.3; 18 gage,0.0359 inch (0.91 mm)thick,Type 304 stainless
steel,self rimming and undercoated,with ledge back drilled for trim.
1. Drain: 3-1/2 inch crumb cup and tailpiece.
2. Verify amount of hole punches required for each sink prior to ordering.
2.03 DRINKING FOUNTAINS
A. Drinking Fountain Manufacturers:
1. Elkay Manufacturing Company
2. Haws Corporation
B. Fountain: brushed Stainless Steel,surface mounted,with elevated anti-squirt bubbler with stream
guard,automatic stream regulator, bar handle,access cover plate, mounting bracket,screwdriver stop.
C. If labeled 'Vandel Resistant' on Equipment Schedule, provide heavy duty, 14 gauge stainless steel
cabinet with vandel resistant screw hardware.
2.04 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS
A. Electric Water Cooler Manufacturers:
1. Elkay Manufacturing Company
2. Haws Corporation
B. Water Cooler: Electric,mechanically refrigerated;surface ADA mounted; stainless steel top,stainless
steel body,elevated anti-squirt bubbler with stream guard,automatic stream regulator, push button,
mounting bracket; integral air cooled condenser and stainless steel grille.
C. If labeled 'Vandel Resistant' on Equipment Schedule, provide heavy duty, 14 gauge stainless steel
cabinet with vandel resistant screw hardware. Provide stainless steel louver screening to prevent
objects from being inserted into cabinet.
2.05 BOTTLE FILLER(WALL MOUNTED)
A. See Plumbing Fixture Schedule for manufacturer and model number.
B. Bottle filler shall be electronic sensor operated for touch free operation. Provide antimicrobial
protection of water stream parts.
C. Provide water filter to meet NSF/ANSI 42 and 53 for taste and odor, particulate and lead reduction.
D. Waterway to be certified to meet lead-free as defined by the Safe Drinking Water Act.
E. Provide each bottle filler with a water supply,stop, p-trap waste and electrical connection.
2.06 HOT WATER DISPENSER
A. Hot water dispenser shall be U.L. listed,750 watts,6.5 amps, 115 volts,factory mounted 3 wire cord
and 3 prong plug,adjustable thermostat with range of 140°F to 200°F. %gallon storage capacity with
faucet having chrome plated finish. Refer to manufacturer's installation manual for proper installation.
Provide shut-off valve in supply line to unit, install in back left or back right corner of sink.
B. Manufacturers:
1. In-sink-erator(ISE)
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00- 2/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. Or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter top
lavatories and sinks.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough-in
schedule for particular fixtures.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install each fixture with a removable trap to be easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
B. Provide chrome plated rigid supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers,and escutcheons.
C. Install components level and plumb.
D. Caulk between fixtures and wall and floor with white butyl rubber non-absorbent caulking compound.
Point edges.
E. All exposed metal shall be chrome-plated brass.
3.04 INTERFACE WITH WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS
A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough-in and
installation.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise,or overflow.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
B. Polish chrome finish at completion of Project.
C. Remove all manufacturers' labels tags,and protective plastic.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage due to subsequent construction operations.
B. Repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.
3.08 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A. Fixture Heights: Install fixtures to heights above finished floor as indicated on the architectural
elevation drawings. Architectural elevation dimensions take precedent over the following heights:
1. Drinking Fountain:
a. Standard: 40 inches from floor to bubbler height.
b. ADA: 36 inches from floor to bubbler height with 27 inches clearance under fixture.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 PLUMBING FIXTURES
22 40 00- 3/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 05 13
MOTORS AND VARIABLE DRIVES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes, but not limited to, motors 1/12 HP or larger used in Division 23.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions, Division 1
B. Section 20 00 00—General Mechanical Requirements
1.03 SUBMITTALS REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. All variable drives.
B. Total harmonic voltage distortion calculation.
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Check out sheet for each variable drive showing all programmed parameters. Date of check out,and
name and company address of employee responsible for checkout.
B. Programming manual explaining how to access and change all programmable points.
C. International wiring diagram for each different unit.
D. Parts diagram with replacement parts listed.
E. Trouble shooting guide.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MOTORS
A. Motors located indoors shall be open frame,drip-proof type, unless indicated otherwise. Motors
located outdoors exposed to weather shall have corrosion resistant finish and shall be totally enclosed
fan cooled (TEFC)or totally enclosed non-ventilated (TENV)type, unless indicated otherwise. Motors
used in fans serving dishwashing hoods shall be TEFC type.
B. All motors shall be UL listed.
C. All motors used with variable frequency drives shall be premium efficiency inverter ready and shall be
capable of running at least 8S Hz.
D. All motors 1 HP and larger shall be energy efficient type and shall meet the 201S Washington State
Energy Code requirements.
E. All fan motors 1/12 HP or greater and less than 1 HP shall be Electronically Commutated Motors(ECM)
or shall have a minimum motor efficiency of 70 percent when rated in accordance with DOE 10 C.F.R.
431. These motor speeds shall be adjustable.
F. Motors shall not be smaller than indicated on drawings; however, motors shall be of adequate size to
drive the respective equipment when handling the quantities specified without exceeding the
nameplate full load current at any conditions encountered in actual operation. If it becomes evident
that a motor furnished is too small to meet these requirements as a result of the Contractor using
substituted equipment or having revised the system arrangement,the Contractor shall replace it with a
motor of adequate size at no additional cost to the Owner. This Contractor shall also arrange with the
Electrical Contractor to increase the size of the wiring,motor starter and other accessories as required
to serve the larger motor at no additional cost to the Owner.
Job Number 2170712.00 MOTORS AND VARIABLE DRIVES
23 05 13- 1/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
G. ECM (Electrically Commutated Motors)shall conform to the motor requirements listed above. In
addition,the Contractor purchasing the HVAC equipment that includes the ECM is responsible for
ensuring the ECM motor control speed control is set to match the required component operation. The
ECM motor control speed control may be preset by the HVAC equipment manufacturer. The Contractor
purchasing the HVAC equipment shall provide documentation showing the appropriate ECM motor
control board jumper pins,dip switches and/or multi-pin plugs settings for correct HVAC equipment
component operation.
H. Approved Manufacturers:
1. General Electric
2. Westinghouse
3. Reliance
4. Allis-Chalmers
5. Gould
6. Century
7. Wagner
8. Baldor
9. U.S. Motors Marathon
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not Applicable
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 MOTORS AND VARIABLE DRIVES
23 05 13- 2/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 05 23
VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes, but not limited to,valve installation for all hydronic water systems.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 1 applies to this section
B. Section 20 00 00—General Mechanical Requirements
C. Section 23 09 00—Energy Management and Controls(DDC)
D. Section 23 1119—HVAC Piping Specialties
E. Section 23 20 00—Hydronic System
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with MSS SP-25.
1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. All valve types
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Valve Diagram
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated. Provide
valves of types and pressure rating indicated; provide proper selection as determined by installer to
comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated,and connections which properly
mate with pipe,tube,and equipment connections.Where more than one type is indicated,selection is
Installer's option. Valves shall be of same make for all these services.
2.02 BALL VALVES
A. General-Select with FULL port opening or Standard port opening[*], blow-out proof stem, hard chrome
plated bronze ball, rated not less than 600#W.O.G. (Where Cv factor is critical use FULL port opening.)
B. Comply with the following standards:
1. MSS SP-110 Ball Valves-THREADED,SOLDER JOINT
C. For HVAC Hydronic Water Service:
1. Threaded Ends 4" and Smaller: 600# W.O.G., bronze two piece body, hard chrome plated bronze
ball, true adjustable packing nut ("O"-ring only type stem seal not acceptable), blow-out proof
stem: Nibco T-585-70,Apollo 70-Series[*], Milwaukee BA-100,or equal.
2. Soldered Ends 3" and Smaller: 600# W.O.G., bronze two piece body, hard chrome plated bronze
ball, true adjustable packing nut ("O"-ring only type stem seal not acceptable), blow-out proof
stem: Nibco S-585-70,Apollo 70-Series [*], Milwaukee BA-150,or equal.
D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ball valves of one of the following:
1. Milwaukee Valve Company
Job Number 2170712.00 VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 23- 1/5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. Apollo (by Conbraco Industries)
3. Nibco
2.03 BALANCING VALVES
A. Each valve shall have two%" NPT brass metering ports with Nordel check valves and gasketed caps
located on both sides of valve seat. Two additional''/" NPT connections with brass plugs are to be
provided on the opposite side of the metering ports for use as drain connections. Drain connections
and metering ports are to be interchangeable to allow for measurement flexibility when valves are
installed in tight locations.
B. Valves are to be of the"Y" pattern,modified,equal percentage globe style and provides three
functions:
1. Precise flow measurement
2. Precision flow balancing
3. Positive drip tight shut off
C. Valves shall provide multi-turn,360'adjustable with a micrometer type indicator located on valve
handwheel. Valve handwheel shall have a memory feature,which will provide a means for locking the
valve position after the system is balanced. 90'turn adjustable valves are not acceptable.
D. Valve Sizes%"—2": Valve body shall be bronze with ultra-high strength engineered resin plug. The plug
shall have precision-contoured channels to distribute flow uniformly across valve seat. Bronze stem
and high strength resin handwheel and sleeve. Valves shall have a minimum of four full 360'
handwheel turns.
E. Single Turn Mini Sweat Size(1/2"to 3/4"):
1. Valve shall be globe style design with bronze body, solder end connection, bronze trim with EPDM
plug, high strength resin handwheel with valve position locking inserts, and two %" NPT brass
metering ports with Nordel check valves and gasketed caps located on both sides of the valve seat.
2. Valve shall be providing three functions:
a. Precision flow measurement
b. Precision flow balancing
C. Positive drip tight shut-off
3. Valve shall provide 360'single turn adjustment range with indicating scale on valve handwheel.
4. The valve shall be installed with flow in the direction of the arrow on the valve body and installed
at least five pipe diameters downstream from any fitting, and at least ten pipe diameters
downstream from any pump, with two pipe diameters downstream from the valve should be free
of any fittings. When installed easy unobstructed access to the valve handwheel and metering
ports for adjustment and measurements are to be provided. Mounting of valve in piping must
prevent sediment build-up in metering ports.
F. Insulation (1/2"to 6"):
1. Each valve shall be furnished with a pre-formed removable PVC insulation jacket to meet ASTM D
1784/class 14253-C, MEA#7-87,ASTM-E-84 and ASTM-136 with a flame spread rating of 50 or less.
There will be provided sufficient mineral fiberglass insulation to meet ASHRAE 90.1-1989
specifications in operating conditions with maximum Fluid Design Operating Temperature Range of
141-200°F and Mean Rating Temperature of 125°F.
G. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong
2. Griswold
3. Victaulic(Tour and Anderson)
4. Nexus
5. Hays
Job Number 2170712.00 VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 23- 2/5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.04 PRESSURE INDEPENDENT PIPING PACKAGES
A. General:
1. The Contractor shall install Pressure Independent Hydronic Piping Packages where indicated on
drawings.
2. Hydronic Piping Packages shall be factory assembled and leak tested.
3. The Hydronic Piping Packages may include, but are not limited to, ball valves, strainers, flow
control valves, unions, 2-way temperature control valves, air vents, pressure/temperature ports,
drain valves,tees,fire rated hoses,and other components.
B. Isolation Valve with Y-Strainer:
1. Strainer shall be Y-type configuration made of brass. Maximum pressure rating of 365 PSI. Strainer
shall include a union end which will accept various end pieces.
2. The body design shall allow inspection or removal of 20 mesh stainless steel strainer without
disturbing piping connections.
3. The body design shall allow inspection or repair of handle operated stem without disturbing piping
connections. The repairable stem shall include two Teflon seals and one EPDM o-ring for
protection against chemicals and modulating temperature.
4. A pressure/temperature test valve and manual air vent shall be standard.
C. Pressure Independent Actuated Ball Valves and Cartridge:
1. The modulating control valves shall be pressure independent and shall include a Pressure
Compensating Cartridge,Actuated Ball Valve and Manual Isolation Ball in a single valve housing.
2. Valve housing shall consist of forged brass, rated at no less than 360 PSI at 250° F.
3. Valve shall have a fixed end or union end connection with factory installed air vent to allow for
venting of the coil or heat pump.
4. Dual pressure/temperature test valves for verifying the pressure differential across the cartridge
and flow limiting ball shall be standard.
5. A flow tag shall be furnished with each valve.
D. Pressure Compensating Cartridge:
1. PCC shall automatically compensate for pressure changes in valve and shall maintain a constant
pressure drop across the flow limiting actuated ball.
2. The operating pressure range shall be available with the minimum range requiring 5.8 PSID to
actuate the mechanism.
3. Valve internal control mechanism includes a diaphragm and full travel linear coil spring.
4. Valves shall include an accessible/replaceable cartridge.
E. Actuated Flow Limiting Ball Valve:
1. Valve ball shall consist of chemically plated nickel brass or stainless steel.
2. Actuated stem shall be removable/replaceable without removing valve from line.
3. Manufacturer shall be able to provide ball insert to limit flow to maximum flow rate with ±5%
accuracy.
4. Valve shall have EPDM o-rings behind the seals to allow for a minimum close—off pressure of 100
PSI with 35 in-lbs of torque for''/"—3"sizes.
5. The actuator and plate can be rotated after mounting.
6. A universal mounting plate shall allow installation of actuators meeting the system electrical
requirements and valve torque requirements as provided by Belimo, ELO Drive, Honeywell,
Invensys, Johnson Controls, KMC, Neptronics or Siemens, The control valve actuator may be
furnished by the controls contractor or by the Pressure Independent Control Valve manufacturer.
F. The flex hose shall be flame retardant hoses stainless steel braided over synthetic polymer liner. Length
not to exceed 24 inches maximum length. Hoses meet or exceed flame retardant testing per UL#723,
NFPA#225,ANSI 2.5, UBC 42-1,ASTM-E84A and meet or exceed ASTM-D380-83 with working pressure
300 PSI %inch,225 psi 1 inch, 175 psi 1-1/2, 150 psi 2 inch at 200°F.
Job Number 2170712.00 VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 23- 3/5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
G. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Griswold
2. Victaulic/Tour&Andersson
3. Nexus
2.05 VALVE FEATURES
A. General-Provide valves with features indicated and where not otherwise indicated,provide proper
valve features as outlined in this specification. Comply with ANSI B31.1.
1. Flanged: Valve flanged complying to ANSI B16.1 (cast iron), ANSI B16.5 (steel), or ANSI B16.24
(bronze).
2. Threaded: Valve ends complying with ANSI B2.1.
3. Butt-Weld: Valve ends complying with ANSI B16.25.
4. Solder Joint: Valve ends complying with ANSI B16.18.
5. Flangeless: Valve bodies manufactured to fit between flanges complying with ANSI B16.1 (cast
iron),ANSI B16.5(steel),or ANSI B16.24(bronze).
6. Wafer: Flangeless valves.
7. Trim: Fabricate pressure-containing components of valves, including stems and seats from brass or
bronze materials,of standard alloy recognized in valve manufacturing that resists de-zincification.
8. Non-Metallic Disc: Non-metallic material selected for service indicated in accordance with
manufacturer's published literature.
9. Renewable Seat: Design seat of valve with removable disc, and assemble valve so disc can be
replaced when worn.
10. Bonnet: Part of gate or globe valve through which stem passes to valve body, and attached to
valve body by threads, bolts, union,or welding.
11. Solid Wedge: One-piece tapered disc in gate valve,designed for contact with both sides.
12. Outside Screw and Yoke (OS&Y): Stem and handwheel designed to rotate without rising when
valve is operated from closed to open position.
13. Tight Shutoff: Butterfly valve designed for flow regulation, and manufactured to be tight in closed
position. Test pressures in accordance with MSS SP-67 as follows: Seat 2-12" 220 psi. No leakage
permitted under test.
14. Low Leakage: Butterfly valve designed for flow regulation and manufactured with minimum
leakage tolerance in closed position.
15. Grooved: Ductile iron body complying to ASTM A536 with a PPS coating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated,comply with the following requirements.
B. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in branch
lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as to be accessible and so that
separate support can be provided when necessary.
C. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems
pointed downward for horizontal plane unless unavoidable.
1. Applications Subject to Shock: Install valves with bodies of metal other than cast iron where
thermal or mechanical shock is indicated or can be expected to occur.
2. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select and install valves
with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
a. Tube Size 2"and Smaller:Soldered-joint valves.
b. Pipe Size 2"and Smaller:One of the following at installer's option:
1. Threaded Valves
2. Grooved-end Valves
Job Number 2170712.00 VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 23-4/5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Pipe Size 2-1/2"and Larger: One of the following at installer's option:
1. Threaded end Valves
2. Butt-weld end Valves
3. Flanged end Valves
4. Wafer Type Valves
5. Mechanical joint end Valves
6. Grooved end Valves
D. Install Pressure Independent piping packages on all hydronic equipment with 2-way control valves and
coil flows greater than 5.0 GPM.
3.02 VALVE DIAGRAM
A. Provide(2)Valve Diagrams showing the location of all valves relative to the floor plan of the building.
Each Valve Diagram shall be 11x17,hard laminated sheets. Each piping system shall be in a unique
color and a legend noting the system colors shall be placed on the first page. Provide a non-laminated
copy for the O&M Manual.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
23 05 23- 5/5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes:
1. Pipe Hangers and Supports
2. Duct Hangers and Supports
3. Mechanical Equipment Anchors and Supports
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions, Division 1
B. Section 20 00 00—General Mechanical Requirements
C. Section 22 20 00—Excavation &Backfill for Mechanical Underground Utilities
D. Section 23 05 48—Vibration and Seismic Control
E. Section 23 07 19—HVAC Piping Insulations
F. Section 23 1119—HVAC Piping Specialties
G. Section 23 20 00—Hydronic System
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pipe Hanger Standards: (MSS) Manufacturers Standardization Society Standards SP-58-2002,SP-89-
2003,and SP-69-2003.
B. All methods, materials,and workmanship shall conform to the International Building Code(IBC)and
International Mechanical Code(I MC),as amended and adopted by the authority having jurisdiction.
1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Hangers.
B. Struts.
C. Anchors.
D. Shop drawings are required for all equipment supports and fabricated supports or assemblies.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Hangers and Supports: Elcen,Grinnell, B-Line Systems, Unistrut,Caddy,Tolco, PHD.
B. Anchors: Rawplug, Phillips, Hilti,Caddy.
Job Number 2170712.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29- 1/5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.02 GENERAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods:Threaded hot rolled steel,electro-galvanized or cadmium plated. Hanger rods shall be
sized so that the total load (including pipe or duct, insulation,hangers,and fluid)does not exceed the
following:
Nominal Rod Diameter Maximum Load
3/8 Inch 610 Pounds
1/2Inch 1130 Pounds
B. Hanger Straps: Galvanized steel. Straps shall be sized so that the total load does not exceed the
following:
Strap Size Maximum Load
1"x 22 Gauge 230 Pounds
1"x 20 Gauge 290 Pounds
1"x 18 Gauge 380 Pounds
1"x 16 Gauge 630 Pounds
C. Beam Attachments: Shall be of the following type:
MSS Type Elcen Figure No. Grinnel Figure No.
21 33,34 131
22 67 66
23 29A 87
28 95 292,228
30 95 229
D. Anchors: Masonry anchors shall be Phillips wedge anchors, Phillips"Red Head"or Rawl "Saber-Tooth".
E. Steel: Structural steel per ASTM A36.
F. Wood: Shall be fire treated.
2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. All hangers used directly on copper pipe shall be copper plated or have a factory applied 1/16-inch thick
(minimum) plastic coating on all contact surfaces.
B. Riser clamps shall be epoxy coated.
C. All other hangers,supports,and hardware shall be cadmium plated or galvanized.
D. Fire sprinkler supports shall comply with NFPA-13.
E. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Shall be of the following type(numbers are 'MSS'):
Maximum System Temperature Insulated Pipe Type
120 to 450 Degrees 1,3,7,9, 10,41,42,43,44,45,46, E
60 to 120 Degrees 1,3,7,9, 10
33 to 59 Degrees 1,3,5,7,9, 10,41,42,43,44,45,46, E
F. Vertical Pipe Supports: MSS Type 8 riser clamp(Elcen Fig.39 and 339;Grinnel Fig.261 and 261C).
G. Trapeze Hangers: Shall be constructed of carbon steel angles,channels,or other structural shapes with
flat surface for point of support.Trapeze hangers shall be supported with hanger rods suspended from
concrete inserts or approved structural clips. Provide a steel washer plate(Elcen Fig.84 or equal)
where hanger rod nuts bear on trapeze hanger.
H. Insulated Pipe Inserts and Insulation Shields:
1. Insulation material at pipe insert shall be calcium silicate with jacket of nylon reinforced kraft paper
bonded to aluminum foil cover on insulation. Insulated pipe insert shall have no more than 5%
deformation at 100 psi and a thermal conductivity no more than 0.38 Btu/hr./sq. ft./degree F/1-
inch thick at 75°F.
Job Number 2170712.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29- 2/5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. Insulated pipe insert shall be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and sized to match pipe in
which it is used on. See Section 23 07 19 for insulation sizes.
3. Provide shield per Section 23 1119 HVAC Piping Specialties.
4. Manufacturers:
a. TPS Thermal Pipe Shields
b. B-Line
c. Clement Support Services
2.04 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Hangers: As shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
B. Vertical Duct Supports at Floor: 1-1/2"x 1-1/2"x 1/8" (minimum)galvanized steel angle and to support
ducts,as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Figure 4-6. For ducts over 30 inches
wide, provide riser reinforcing with hanger rods between the riser support and riser reinforcing.
C. Vertical Duct Supports at Wall: 1-1/2"x 1/8" (minimum)strap or 1-1/2"x 1-1/2"x 1/8" (minimum)
angle bracket and as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Figure 4-7.
D. Hanger Attachments to Structure: As shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standard Figures 4-1,
4-2,4-3 to suit building construction and as allowed on structural drawings. Where C-clamps are
provided, retainer clips shall be used. Friction beam clamps shall not be used.
E. Hanger Attachments to Ducts: As shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards Figure 4-4.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION-GENERAL
A. Provide all necessary bolts,nuts,washers,turnbuckles, rod connectors,and any other miscellaneous
accessories required for the support and anchoring of all pipes,ducts,and mechanical equipment.
B. Install steel or wood backing in walls(anchored to studs)as required to provide support for items hung
from walls.
C. Install concrete inserts and anchors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D. All welded steel support assemblies shall have a power wire brush and primer paint finish.
E. Maximum spans between piping supports may be significantly less than the maximum spans allowed
herein due to structural limitations of allowable loads on hangers. The most restrictive criteria shall
govern. Reference structural drawings.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Use of zip ties or plastic straps is strictly prohibited.
B. Insulation shall be continuous at pipe hangers and supports. Insulation may only be broken at vertical
pipe supports where insulated cushion clamps are utilized.
C. Above ground pipe shall be adequately anchored to the structure to prevent sagging and to keep pipe
in alignment.
D. All pipe supports shall be provided with a means of adjustment for the aligning and leveling of the pipe
after installation.
E. Installation and sizing of pipe supports and accessories shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and standard MSS SP-89 and MSS SP-69, NFPA#13 for fire protection piping, UPC,
and IMC.
F. Provide supports at each change in direction of piping.
Job Number 2170712.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29- 3/5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
G. Where mechanically coupled piping is used,a hanger shall be placed within 2 feet on each side of
couplings,with hanger spacing in no case to exceed the following:
Maximum Span Mechanically Coupled
Nominal Pipe Diameter Piping
to 1 Inch 7 Feet
1%to 1'/ Inch 7 Feet
2 Inches 10 Feet
2'/ Inches 10 Feet
3 Inches and Larger 12 Feet
NOTE: Manufacturer's support instructions shall be used where it is more restrictive than the above.
Above is for rigid coupled piping systems. Follow manufacturer's requirements for a flexible piping
system,except that, in no case is spacing to be more than the above.
H. Steel Pipe: Maximum spacing between supports:
Nominal Pipe Diameter Maximum Span Steel Pipe
Inch 6 Feet
to 1 Inch (% Inch to 1 Inch*) 8 Feet
I to 2'/ Inch (1% Inch or Larger*) 10 Feet
3 Inches and Larger 12 Feet
*Gas piping.
I. Copper Tubing: Maximum spacing between supports:
Nominal Tubing Diameter Maximum Span Copper
Inch 5 Feet
to 1% Inch 6 Feet
1%to 2% Inch 8 Feet
3 Inches and Larger 10 Feet
J. Soft Copper Pipe: Maximum spacing between supports:
Nominal Tubing Diameter Maximum Span of Soft Copper
All Sizes 5 Feet
K. Vertical Piping Supports: Support piping at each floor line with pipe clamps and at intermediate points
as required to prevent excessive pipe movement and so as to comply with the maximum spacings cited
above. Support all pipe stacks at their bases with a concrete pier or suitable hanger. For vertical pipe
drops which occur away from a wall or similar anchoring surface, provide angled bracing from nearest
structure to provide rigid anchoring of pipe drop. Any pipe requiring insulation shall use an insulated
pipe insert at pipe clamp with 360'shield.
L. Insulated Pipe Insert and Insulation Shields: Protect insulated pipe at point of support with pipe insert
and shield as required by the following table:
Nominal Pipe Insert Length in Shield Length in Minimum Shield
Diameter in Inches Inches** Inches Gauge
Y to 1%* 6 6 20
2to3% 6 6 20
4 to 5 9 9 18
6 to 10 9 9 18
*Insulated pipe inserts and shields may be omitted for pipe supported from the bottom.
**Inserts shall be in place at the time of installing pipe.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide anchors and supports for all ductwork.
Job Number 2170712.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29-4/5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Rectangular Duct: Supports and hangers shall be of size and spacing as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards for the appropriate class of duct. (Hangers maximum allowable loads shall not
be as shown in SMACNA Tables but shall be as specified in these specifications.)
C. Round Duct: Supports and hangers shall be of size and spacing as shown in SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards for the appropriate class of duct.
D. Maximum Hanger Spacing(provided duct gauge and reinforcement comply with SMACNA Standards for
such spacing):
Duct Area Maximum Spacing
Up to 4 sq.ft. (27" Diameter) 8 Feet
4.1 to 10 sq.ft. (28"to 42" Diameter) 6 Feet
10.1 sq.ft.and up(43" Diameter and up) 4 Feet
E. Provide supports at each change in direction of duct. Locate hangers at inside and outside corners of
elbows,or at each end of fitting,on each side.
F. Provide additional supports at each side concentrated loads(such as modulating dampers,duct heaters,
sound attenuators,etc.)
G. Provide supports for exterior ductwork per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards or as detailed
on the drawings.
3.04 CEILING AIR TERMINALS/SERVICES
A. Ceiling mounted air terminals or services weighing less than 20 pounds shall be positively attached to
the ceiling suspension main runners or to cross runners with the same carrying capacity as the main
runners.
B. Terminals or services weighing 20 pounds but not more than 56 pounds in addition to the above shall
have two No. 12 gauge hangers connected from the terminal or service to the ceiling system hangers or
to the structure above. These wires may be slack.
C. Terminals or services weighing more than 56 pounds shall be supported directly from the structure
above by approved hangers.
D. All air terminals that use side inlet"plenums"or have fire dampers shall be supported directly from the
structure with approved hangers(regardless of total weight).
3.05 INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide anchoring and supports for all mechanical equipment.
B. Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning equipment where suspended from structure shall be
supported per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards or as shown on the drawings.
C. Equipment shall be supported and anchored in such a way so that no equipment vibration is
transmitted to the building structure.
D. Added supports and bracing shall be provided per Section 23 05 48.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 29- 5/5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 05 48
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. This section includes, but not limited to vibration isolation and seismic restraint installation for all
equipment,ductwork,and piping as described here-in.
B. Seismic Restraints shall be bidder-designed. Seismic Design Criteria are to be established per the
International Building Code and ASCE along with Project Structural drawings.
C. Items not included in this specification shall not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of providing
seismic bracing that meets all the criteria required by the referenced codes and in accordance with the
seismic design guidelines and the project structural drawings.
1.02 REFERENCED CODE AND STANDARDS
A. The latest adopted versions of the following codes and standards apply to this section.
1. International Building Code(IBC)
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA-13)
3. Seismic Restraint Manual—Guidelines for Mechanical Systems(SMACNA)
4. ASCE 7-10, American Society of Civil Engineers "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures"
S. Applicable Project Structural Drawings for Seismic Design Criteria
6. Applicable Manufacturer's Seismic Design Guides for proprietary listed seismic bracing and
mounting hardware
7. Where there is a conflict in requirements between these guidelines and above-mentioned codes
the more stringent parameters shall prevail.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions, Division 1 and Division 23
B. Section 20 00 00—General Mechanical Requirements
1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Occupancy Category of Structure(I-IV) per IBC or ASCE
B. Component Importance Factor(Ip) per ASCE
C. Mapped Acceleration Parameters(Sl and (SS) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings
D. Site Class(A—F) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings
E. Site Coefficient(Fa) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings
F. Site Coefficient(FJ per IBC and Project Structural Drawings
G. Seismic Design Category(A—D) based on Short Period Response Accelerations per IBC and Project
Structural Drawings
H. Seismic Design Category(A—D) based on 1-Second Period Response Acceleration per IBC and Project
Structural Drawings
I. Amplification Factor ap per ASCE
J. Response Modification Factor Rp per ASCE
Job Number 2170712.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
23 05 48- 1/5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.05 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Isolation Pads
B. Spring Isolators
C. Seismic Control:
1. Include design calculations and details for selecting seismic restraints complying with performance
requirements, design criteria, and analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
2. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight, operation,
seismic,and wind forces required to select vibration isolators,seismic and wind restraints.
a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted
outdoors. Comply with requirements in other sections for equipment mounted outdoors.
3. Seismic and Wind Restraint Details:
a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic and wind restraints.
Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.
b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraint to the
restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacing's.
Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces
transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration
isolation devices.
C. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint details
required for equipment mounted outdoors.
4. Periodic Special Inspections: The mechanical contractor shall provide a list of components/systems
requiring periodic special inspections per IBC.
S. Special Certification Requirements: Each contractor responsible for the construction of a
"Designated Seismic System" for active mechanical equipment that must remain operable
following the design earthquake, or components with hazardous contents certified by the
manufacturer to maintain containment following the design earthquake shall submit a
Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance for review and approval by the Registered Design
Professional responsible for the design of the system.This information shall then be submitted to
the AHJ.
6. All brace or restraint components, mounting devices,snubbers and anchors.
1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NEOPRENE ISOLATORS
A. Isolation Pads: Oil resistant neoprene pads, minimum%-inch thick,with cross-ribbed or waffle design.
Size pads for not more than 50 psi or as recommended by vibration isolator manufacturer.
B. Suspension Isolators:Shall be double deflection neoprene type,with isolator encased in open steel
bracket and minimum 3/8-inch deflection. Hanger rod shall be isolated from steel bracket with
neoprene grommets. Mason Series HD,Amber Booth "BRD"or approved.
Job Number 2170712.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
23 05 48- 2/5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.02 SPRING ISOLATORS
A. General:The load carried by each isolator shall be carefully calculated and isolators selected so that the
static deflection will be the same and the supported equipment will remain level. Isolators shall be so
designed that the ends of the springs will remain parallel during and after deflection to operating
height. At operating height,springs shall have additional travel to complete (solid)compression equal
to at least 50 percent of the operating deflection. Suspension isolator springs shall have a static
deflection (as shown on drawings) not less than 1-1/2",except that for units with components rotating
at 1000 rpm and less,the static deflection shall be not less than 2 inches. Floor isolator springs shall
have deflection of not less than 1 inch. All isolators shall provide at least 96%isolation efficiency. Note:
Deflections other than these may be used where circumstances warrant and more optimum isolation
results can be achieved.
B. Suspension Type Spring Isolators:Shall consist of a rigid steel frame,a stable steel spring in the bottom
part of the frame,and double deflection neoprene isolating pad at the top of the frame. Where
supporting rods pass through the frame,a clearance of not less than on half rod diameter shall be
provided all around the rod.
1. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Mason Series DNHS
b. Amber Booth "BSSR"or approved
2.03 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. General:
1. All seismic hangers and components shall be domestically made. Products designed domestically
and fabricated in a foreign country are prohibited.
2. Products not permitted include: powder actuated anchors, gas actuated anchors, or anchors
requiring epoxy.
3. Only Steel or Ductile Iron components shall be provided. No Cast Iron or Cast Aluminum
components are allowed.
4. Steel shall be per ASTM A36; hangers and other devices shall be as shown in "SMACNA Seismic
Restraint Manual"or approved manufacturers seismic design guidelines.
B. Seismic Bracing(rigid and cable):
1. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Tolco
b. International Seismic Application Technology(ISAT)
C. Mason Industries
d. Cooper B-Line
e. Kinetics Noise Control
f. AFCON
g. Gripple
h. PHD
i. Unistrut
j. Anvil or prior approved equal.
C. Seismic Anchorages(for wood,steel and concrete):
1. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Hilti
b. ITW Ramset/Red Head
C. ITW Buildex
d. Mason Industries
e. Tolco,AFCON
f. Simpson Strong-Tie
g. Powers Fasteners, Inc.or prior approved equal.
Job Number 2170712.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
23 05 48- 3/5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
D. Flexible Connectors:
1. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Mason Industries
b. Metraflex
C. Victaulic
d. Kinetics Noise
e. International Seismic Application Technology(ISAT)or prior approved equal.
E. Pipe Hanger Components:
1. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Tolco
b. International Seismic Application Technology(ISAT)
C. Mason Industries
d. Cooper B-Line
e. Kinetics Noise Control
f. AFCON
g. Gripple
h. PHD
i. Unistrut
j. Anvil or prior approved equal
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 VIBRATION ISOLATION
A. Motorized equipment shall be mounted on or suspended from spring vibration isolators either integral
or external to the equipment. Floor mounted or suspended isolators.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, resilient mounts for motorized equipment shall be of the type and size to
provide maximum ten percent transmissibility. Use unhoused,free-standing stable steel springs which
are preferred over housed spring assemblies.The horizontal stiffness of the spring shall be
approximately equal to its vertical stiffness. The spring deflection shall be selected based on the
equipment power range(HP),speed range(RPM),and static deflection of the supporting structural
floor. It is a specific recommendation that whenever a steel spring is used,two pads of ribbed waffle-
pattern neoprene be used in series with the spring.
C. The design of vibration dampening shall consider lateral load as well as vertical load and be suitably
snubbed against earthquake forces.
D. A list of isolators accompanied by certified transmissibility ratings for the required duty shall be
submitted for each item of equipment.
E. Unless noted otherwise,all vibration isolating equipment shall be of the same make and shall be
submitted as one group.
F. All piping in the mechanical equipment rooms connected to vibrating equipment shall be supported
from resilient ceiling hangers or from floor mounted resilient supports.
G. Inertia bases shall be provided for all equipment with rotating or reciprocating parts when such
equipment is located above occupied spaces and for equipment where the motor is separate from
equipment. Bases shall be constructed of welded steel angles and channel frame filled solid with
structural concrete with#4 rebar at 6 inches on center spanning short dimensions.
Job Number 2170712.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
23 05 48-4/5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.02 SEISMIC BRACING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Support and bracing from the structure to pipes,ducts and mechanical equipment shall conform to
ASCE and the plumbing& HVAC industry standard SMACNA"Seismic Restraint Manual,Guidelines for
Mechanical Systems"or approved manufacturer's listed seismic assemblies.
B. Provide snubbers for all equipment that is supported on isolators and weighing over 400 lbs. including
base. Provide minimum of four snubbers for equipment weighing less than 2,000 lbs.,and eight
snubbers for heavier equipment.
3.03 SEISMIC BRACING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS-PIPING
A. When determining horizontal load requirements,consider all pipes full of water and maximum
equipment heights unless calculated for other substances and equipment.
B. Seismic bracing shall not limit the expansion and contraction of the piping system. When thermal
expansion or contraction is involved, longitudinal bracing shall be designed at the anchor point of the
piping system. The longitudinal bracing and the connections must be capable of resisting the additional
force induced by expansion and contraction.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of seismic restraints shall be as follows:
1. Upon completion of installation of all seismic restraint materials and before start up of restrained
equipment, all debris shall be cleaned from beneath all protected equipment, leaving equipment
free to contact snubbers.
2. All external utility connections to restrained equipment shall be designed to allow differential
seismic motion without damage to the equipment or utility connections.
3. Adjust isolators and restraints after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at its
operating weight,following manufacturer's written instructions.
4. After equipment installation is completed, adjust limit stops following manufacturer's written
instructions so they are out of contact during normal operation.
5. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
6. Torque anchor bolts according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions to resist seismic
forces.
7. Attach piping to the trapeze per seismic restraint manufacturer's design. Install cables so they do
not bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
8. Install vertical braces to stiffen hanger rods and prevent buckling per seismic restraint
manufacturer's design.Clamp vertical brace to hanger rods. Requirements apply equally to hanging
equipment. Do not weld vertical braces to rods.
3.05 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
A. When required continuous or periodic special inspections of the equipment and systems designated on
the list provided by the mechanical contractor shall be performed in accordance with the IBC and ASCE.
The owner shall reserve the right to employ an approved special inspector.
B. Per the IBC,the registered design professional in responsible charge may designate members of the
A&E team to act as special inspectors provided those personnel meet the qualification requirements of
the IBC to the satisfaction of the building official.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
23 05 48- 5/5
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 05 53
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. General Requirements: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other
Conditions and Division 1-General Requirements sections,apply to the work specified in this Section.
1.02 STANDARDS
A. ANSI Compliance: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size,colors,and installed viewing angles of
identification devices.
1.03 SCHEDULES
A. Submit Valve Schedule for each piping system,typewritten,and reproduced on 8-1/2"x 11" bond
paper. Tabulate valve number,piping system,system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve
(room or space),and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for
emergency shut-off and similar special uses,by special "flags", in margin of schedule. Provide a framed
copy of Valve Tag Schedule in the mechanical/janitors room.
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Not Applicable
2.02 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS
A. Provide manufacturer's standard preprinted,flexible or semi-rigid, permanent,color-coded, plastic
sheet pipe markers.
1. Insulation: Furnish 1"thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe marker to
be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 12S° F (S2° C) or greater. Cut
length to extend 2" beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.
2. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full band pipe
markers, extending 360' around pipe and minimum 12" long at each location, fastened by one of
the following methods:
a. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.
b. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. Laminate or bonded application of pipe marker to
pipe(or insulation).
C. Strapped to pipe with nylon strap.
3. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping system
in each instance, as selected by Architect/Engineer in cases of variance with names as shown or
specified.
a. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow,either integrally with
piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of
plastic.
Job Number 2170712.00 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53- 1/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.03 PLASTIC TAPE
A. Manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive(self-adhesive)vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils
thick.
1. Width: Provide 1-1/2" wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if
any)of less than 6".
2.04 PLASTIC VALVE TAGS
A. Provide manufacturer's standard plastic valve tags with printed enamel lettering,with piping system
abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8"
high,and with 5/32" hole for fastener.
2.05 VALVE TAG FASTENERS
A. Manufacturer's standard solid brass(wire link or beaded type),or solid brass S-hooks of sizes required
for proper attachment of tags to valves,and manufactured specifically for that purpose.
2.06 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES
A. For each page of Valve Schedule,provide glazed display frame,with screws for removable mounting on
masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded aluminum,with SSB-grade sheet
glass.
2.07 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS
A. Provide engraved stock phenolic plastic laminate,complying with FS L-P-387,engraved with engraver's
standard letter style of sizes and wording, black with white core(letter color)except as otherwise
indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of
substrate.
1. Thickness: 1/16"for units up to 20 sq in or 8" length; 1/8"for larger units.
2. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive where
screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate.
3. Letter Size: No less than%"tall. (Use unit#as noted on the equipment schedules)
B. Provide for all items on equipment schedules.
C. Provide for all emergency shut-offs.
D. Provide for all pressure vessels,storage tanks,air separators,etc.
2.08 PAINT
A. Benjamin Moore Impervo or equivalent.
B. Use appropriate primer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation,painting or other covering or
finish including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification prior to installation of
acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.
3.02 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A. Install pipe markers on each system,and include arrows to show normal direction of flow.
Job Number 2170712.00 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53- 2/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.03 PIPE MARKERS AND COLOR BANDS
A. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied space,
machine rooms,accessible maintenance spaces and exterior non-concealed locations or in accessible
ceiling spaces.
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at
branch where there could be question of flow pattern.
3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floor/ceilings,or enter non-accessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes,and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to
25' in congested areas of piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings omit intermediately spaced markers.
8. Color assignments and stencil for piping identification shall be as listed below (colors used shall be
verified with Owner prior to ordering).
Service Color Stencil
Condenser Water Supply Green White
Condenser Water Return Green White
Sprinkler Work Red White
Condensate Piping Green White
9. Identification stenciling and flow arrows shall be following colors for proper contrast:
Arrows&ID Stenciling Color Shade of Pipe
White Red,Gray, Black and Green
Black Yellows,Oranges and White
3.04 VALVE IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide valve tag on every valve,cock,and control devices in each piping system; exclude check valves,
valves within factory-fabricated equipment units,and shut-off valves at plumbing fixtures, HVAC
terminal devices and similar rough-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List each tagged valve
in Valve Schedule for each piping system.
3.05 SCHEDULES
A. Mount Valve Schedule frames and schedules in riser rooms or as directed by Engineer.
3.06 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Install engraved plastic laminate sign on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each
operation device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational
devices. Provide signs on suspended ceiling tile below mechanical equipment located above ceiling.
1. Heat Pumps
3.07 CONCEALED ITEMS
A. Items concealed above accessible ceilings requiring access,shall have the ceiling marked to indicate
such items location. The marking system shall consist of colored phenolic plates with%"tall engraved
lettering specifying the item concealed; plate shall be applied to ceiling T-bar framing with rivets or
other owner approved method below the concealed item. Colors used shall be verified with Owner,
and unless directed otherwise,shall be:
ITEM COLOR
Heating System Equipment Component Green
Fire Protection System Component Red
Job Number 2170712.00 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53- 3/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Provide three(3)color legends(hard laminate) listing the above colors. Locate as directed by Owner.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
23 05 53-4/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 05 93
AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes, but not limited to,testing, balancing and adjusting of air heating,cooling and exhaust systems.
1.02 RELATED SECTION(S)
A. General Conditions and Division 1 apply to this section.
B. Division 23 shall make changes in pulley, belts,and dampers as required for correct balance as
recommended by Air Testing&Balancing Agency at no additional cost to Owner.
C. Division 23 shall repair leaks in ductwork at no additional cost to Owner.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION(PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS)
A. Perform testing and balancing in complete accordance with the Associated Air Balancing Council
(AABC), National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB),or National Balancing Council (NBC)
standards and procedures.
B. Air Testing& Balance Agency shall perform tests specified,compile test data,and submit copies of
complete test data to Contractor for forwarding to Architect/Engineer for evaluation and approval.
1.04 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED BY THIS SECTION
A. Company information including Washington State Contractors' license.
B. Key personnel and resumes.
C. AABC, NEBB,or NBC certifications.
D. Provide reference of five(5)completed jobs of similar size and complexity.
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Final air balance report shall be bound in the O& M Manual or provided under a separate volume.
B. Preliminary air balance report shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval. Preliminary
report shall note all finished measured data.
C. Final Test Data:
1. Provide project name, name and telephone number of balancing firm, GC, MC, Architect, and
Engineer in the cover(or first page)of report.
2. Provide a summary of air balance findings regarding airtightness of each ducted systems,
deficiencies of equipment to meet design requirements, deficiencies of space pressure
relationships,etc.
3. Cover sheet shall have a statement from the site project manager that reads, "The air system
testing and balancing report contained here in is true and factual based on actual field
measurements and adjustments. I have personally performed or witnessed a minimum of 5% of
the airflow tests."
4. Each page of test report to have a unique page number.
5. Provide fan curve or chart of each fan in system.
6. Provide final approved test report in PDF format on CD. Provide one more CD than hard copies of
test report.
7. Obtain and provide a copy of the air barrier test(building tightness)whether or not the Air Balance
Contractor produced the test.
Job Number 2170712.00 AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING
23 05 93- 1/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE(QUALIFICATIONS)
A. Mechanical Contractor shall procure services of an independent Air Testing& Balance Agency,which
specializes in testing,and balancing of heating,ventilating,and cooling systems to balance,adjust,test
air-moving equipment,air distribution,and exhaust systems.
B. Agency shall be approved in writing by Consultant.
C. Instruments used by Agency shall be accurately calibrated and maintained good working order.
D. If requested,conduct tests in presence of Architect/Owner/Engineer.
1.07 SEQUENCING&SCHEDULING
A. Mechanical Contractor shall award test and balance contract to approved agency upon receipt of his
contract to proceed to allow Agency to schedule this work in cooperation with other Sections involved
and comply with completion date.
B. Begin air testing and balancing upon completion of air cooling,heating,and exhaust systems including
installation of all specialties and devices.
C. Mechanical Contractor shall put heating,ventilating,and cooling systems and equipment into full
operation and continue their operation during each working day of testing and balancing.
PART 2 PRODUCT
Not applicable
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Procedure:Air Testing& Balancing Agency shall perform following tests and balance system in
accordance with following requirements at design conditions of supply and a minimum outside air CFM
(not 100%return or 100%economizer).
1. Test,adjust,and record fan rpm to design requirements.
2. Test and record motor amperes at design conditions.
3. Make pitot tube traverse of main supply duct and obtain design cfm at fans. (systems of 1000 CFM
or greater)
4. Test and record system static pressures: suction, discharge, and clean filters (if applicable; for
systems of 2000 CFM or greater)
5. Test,adjust,and record system for design cfm air.
6. Test,adjust,and record system for design cfm outside air.
7. Test,adjust,and record each diffuser,grille,and register to within 10%of design requirements.
8. On a floor plan, identify each diffuser, grille, and register to location and area using a designation
symbol unique to that page.
9. Identify and list size, type, and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers, and testing equipment.
Use manufacturer's rating on equipment to make required calculations.
10. In readings and tests of diffusers, grilles, and registers, include required cfm and test cfm after
adjustments.
11. In cooperation with Division 23, set adjustments of automatically operated dampers to operate as
specified, indicated,or noted.
12. Adjust diffusers,grilles,and registers to minimize drafts.
13. Identify at each volume damper with permanent mark, the position of actuator handle once final
balance has been achieved.
14. Measure and record all pressure differential relationships as identified by the controls diagrams
(i.e. labs, kitchen, pharmacy, art rooms, building pressure, etc). These measurements are to be
taken when all HVAC is running after full balance has been completed. Note the measured
reference points to determine the pressure differential.
Job Number 2170712.00 AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING
23 05 93- 2/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
15. For any spaces with exhaust and supply to them where design airflows cannot be obtained, the
systems shall be adjusted to produce a negative pressure to the adjacent space (i.e. workrooms,
restrooms,labs, nurse rooms,etc.)
16. When reconciling supply, return, outside, and exhaust air quantities, priority shall be placed on
outside air quantities(typically, return air quantities noted on plans are for duct sizing only).
17. Where duct pressure sensors are noted in controls diagrams (i.e. variable volume systems) adjust
system to its minimum pressure point that still achieves full airflow to all terminals. Record this
setpoint in test report and provide data to controls contractor.
18. For variable volume systems, adjust sheave package to produce maximum airflow (or diversity as
applicable)at 60 Hz with simulated filter loading. If maximum airflow cannot be obtained at 60 Hz,
increase frequency until maximum airflow is obtained as allowed by the equipment manufacturer
and maximum motor amperes. Record final values.
19. Verify that all gravity backdraft dampers are moving freely, open in proper direction, and are
unbound.
20. After balancing system, measure terminal CFM when system is in 100% economizer. If supply is
greater than design, coordinate with controls contractor or MC to provide damper stops to provide
design CFM during 100%economizer.
21. On All Motors With Variable Drives: Set maximum amperage safety to protect motor from over
loading.
B. Final Inspection&Adjustments:
1. Balancing agency shall be represented at final inspection meeting by qualified testing personnel
with balancing equipment and two copies of air balancing test report.
a. Architect may choose and direct spot balancing of one zone. Differences between the spot
balance and test report will be justification for requiring repeat of testing and balancing for
entire building.
b. Rebalancing shall be done in presence of Architect and subject to his approval.
C. Spot balance and rebalance shall be performed at no additional cost to Owner.
2. System shall be completely balanced and all reports submitted to Architect prior to prefinal
inspection.
3. Where equipment supplied to job site provides over 5% more air than schedule requirements,
rooms supplied by that equipment shall have their supply air quantities increased by the ratio of
actual total air quantity supplied to minimum air quantity required by schedule.
3.02 BALANCING FIRMS(APPROVED)
A. Hardin and Sons
B. United Test and Balance
C. Airtest Company, Inc.
D. American Air Balance Company
E. Advanced Mechanical Services, Inc.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 AIR SYSTEM TESTING AND BALANCING
23 05 93- 3/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 05 95
WATER SYSTEM BALANCING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: Balancing and adjusting of water heating and cooling systems.
B. Related Sections:General Conditions and Division 1 apply to this Section.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:Testing& Balance Agency shall perform tests specified,compile test data,
and submit four copies of complete test data to Contractor for forwarding to Architect for evaluation
and approval.
1.03 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED OF THIS SECTION
A. Company information including Washington State Contractors' license.
B. Key personnel and resumes.
C. AABC, NEBB,or NBC certifications.
D. Provide reference of five(5)completed jobs of similar size and complexity.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Contractor shall procure services of an independent Testing & Balancing Agency which specializes
in balancing and testing of heating,ventilating and cooling system to balance,adjust and test water
systems and equipment.
2. Agency shall provide proof of having successfully completed at least five projects of similar size and
scope. Work by this Agency shall be done under direct supervision of a qualified Heating and
Ventilating Engineer employed by Agency.
3. Agency shall be approved in writing by Consultant.
4. Instruments used by Agency shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order.
5. Balance&Testing Agency shall provide the technicians with following instruments for field use:
a. One set of pressure gauges and fittings.
b. Dry bulb thermometer
C. Wet bulb thermometer
d. Thermocouple unit and thermocouples
e. Set of balancing cock adjustment wrenches
f. Portable field flowmeter
6. If requested,conduct tests in presence of Architect.
7. Provide or coordinate all required plugs, test ports, valves, and equipment required to provide a
complete and accurate balancing report for the hydronic system.
1.05 BALANCING FIRMS(APPROVED)
A. Hardin and Sons
B. Testing and Commissioning Services
C. Airtest Company, Inc.
D. American Air Balance Company
Job Number 2170712.00 WATER SYSTEM BALANCING
23 05 95- 1/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
E. Advanced Mechanical Services, Inc.
1.06 SEQUENCING&SCHEDULING
A. Contractor shall award test and balance contract to approved agency upon receipt of his contract to
proceed to allow Agency to schedule this work in cooperation with other Sections involved and comply
with completion date.
B. Begin testing and balancing upon completion of cooling and heating systems including installation of all
specialties and devices.
C. Contractor shall put heating,ventilating and cooling systems and equipment into full operation and
continue their operation during each working day of testing and balancing.
1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Final water balance report shall be bound in the O& M Manual or provided under a separate volume.
B. Preliminary water balance report shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval. Preliminary
report shall note all finished measured data.
C. Final Test Data:
1. Provide project name, name and telephone number of balancing firm, GC, MC, Architect, and
Engineer in the cover(or first page)of report.
2. Provide a summary of water balance findings regarding deficiencies of equipment to meet design
requirements,deficiencies of main system,etc.
3. Cover sheet shall have a statement from the site project manager that reads, "The water system
testing and balancing report contained herein is true and factual based on actual field
measurements and adjustments. I have personally performed or witnessed a minimum of 5% of
the airflow tests."
4. Each page of test report to have a unique page number.
5. Provide pump curve or chart of each pump in system.
6. Provide final approved test report in PDF format on CD. Provide one more CD than hard copies of
test report.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Applicable
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Preparation of System-Phase 1:
1. Open valves to full position including coil stop valves, close bypass valves and return line balancing
cocks.
2. Remove and clean strainers.
3. Examine water in system to determine if it has been treated and is clean.
4. Check pump rotation.
5. Check expansion tanks to make sure they are not air bound and system is full of water.
6. Document air pressure at normal system operating gpm in diaphragm type expansion tank.
7. Check air vents at high points of water systems to make sure they are installed properly and are
operating freely. Make certain air is removed from circulating system.
8. Set temperature controls so coils are calling for full cooling. This should close automatic bypass
valves at coil and chillers.
9. Check operation of automatic bypass valve.
Job Number 2170712.00 WATER SYSTEM BALANCING
23 05 95- 2/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
10. Check and set operating temperature of boilers heat exchangers, and cooling tower to design
requirements.
11. Perform air balance before beginning water balance.
B. Performance of Testing& Balancing- Phase II:
1. Set condenser water,and hot water pumps to proper gpm delivery.
2. Adjust flow of water through cooling tower.
3. Adjust flow of hot water through boilers, heat exchangers and condensers.
4. Check leaving water temperatures, return water temperatures and pressure drop through cooling
tower and boilers. Reset to correct design temperatures. Include heat exchangers and
condensers.
5. Check water temperature at inlet side of coils. Note rise or drop of temperatures from source.
6. Balance each water coil.
7. Upon completion of flow readings and coil adjustments,mark settings and record data.
C. Performance of Testing& Balancing- Phase III:
1. After making adjustments to coils, recheck settings at pumps, cooling tower, and boilers. Readjust
if required.
2. Install pressure gauges on each coil, then read pressure drop through coil at set flow rate on call
for full cooling and full heating. Set pressure drop bypass valve to match coil full flow pressure
drop.This prevents unbalanced flow conditions when coils are on full bypass.
3. Check and record the following items at each cooling and heating element:
a. Inlet water and air temperatures
b. Leaving water and air temperatures
C. Pressure drop of each coil
d. Pressure drop across bypass valve
e. Pump operating suction and discharge pressures and final TDH
f. Mechanical specifications of pumps
g. Rated and actual running amperage of pump motor
D. Domestic Hot Water Circulation Balance: Balance domestic hot water circulation using circuit balancing
valves per Section 22 05 23. Divide pump GPM by number of balancing cocks. Water flow not to
exceed 5 FPS(notify Engineer if flow exceeds maximum value).
E. On All Motors With Variable Drives:Set maximum amperage safety to protect motor from over loading.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 WATER SYSTEM BALANCING
23 05 95- 3/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 0713
EQUIPMENT/DUCTWORK INSULATION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. This section describes the insulation requirement to meet or exceed the 2012 Washington State Energy
Code. Lining installation is per 23 3113.
1.02 RELATED SECTION(S)
A. General Conditions, Division 1
B. Section 20 00 00-General Mechanical Conditions
C. Section 23 3113-Steel Ductwork
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Wrap Insulation
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Not Applicable
2.02 DUCTWORK INSULATION
A. Manufacturers: Manville Corporation Owens Corning, Knauf Insulation, Manson Insulation,or approved
equal.
B. Flexible Fiber Glass Blanket(Wrap Insulation): Manville, Microlite Type 75 meeting ASTM C553,Type 1,
Class B-2;flexible blanket.
1. 'K' ('ksi')Value: 0.27 at 75°F(0.040 at 24°C) installed.
2. Density and R-value:
a. R-3.3: 1.0" inch of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft.glass fiber blanket.
b. R-5.3: 2.0" inches of 0.75 lb/cu. Ft.or 1.5 inches of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft.glass fiber blanket.
C. R-7: 3.0 inches of 0.75 lb/cu. Ft.or 2.0 inches of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft.glass fiber blanket.
3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: FSK, aluminum foil reinforced with fiber glass yarn and laminated to fire-
resistant kraft, secured with UL listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward cinched expanded
staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed.
C. Rigid Fiber Glass Board: Insulation Board meeting ASTM C 612 Type IA and IB; rigid.
1. 'K' ('ksi')Value:ASTM C 177,0.22 at 75°F mean temperature.
2. Maximum Service Temperature:4507.
3. Vapor Retarder Jacket:ASJ conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type I,or FSK or PSK conforming to ASTM C
1136 Type 11.
4. Securement: Secured in place using adhesive and mechanical fasteners spaced a minimum of 12"
on center with a minimum of 2 rows per side of duct. Insulation shall be secured with speed
washers and all joints, breaks and punctures sealed with appropriate pressure-sensitive foil tape,
or glass fabric and vapor retarder mastic.
Job Number 2170712.00 EQUIPMENT/DUCTWORK INSULATION
23 07 13- 1/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
5. Density and R-value:
a. R-4.5: 1.0"of 6.0 Ib./cu.ft.
b. R-6.8: 1.5"of 6.0 Ib./cu.ft.
C. R-9.1: 2.0"of 6.0 Ib./cu.ft.
D. Duct Insulation Protection:
1. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016-inch (.045 mm)thick sheet,smooth/embossed finish,with longitudinal slip
joints and 2-inch (50 mm) lamps.
2. Manville Insulkote ET,a non-water-vapor retarder, non-burning,weatherproof coating for use over
insulation where"breathing" is required.
3. Manville Zeston 2000 jacketing, UV resistant polyvinyl chloride covering with joints secured and
sealed with Manville Perma-Weld Adhesive.
4. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 oz/sq. yd. (220 g/sq. m.), plain weave cotton treated with dilute
fire-retardant lagging adhesive.
S. Self-Adhering Jacketing: Material to be VentureClad [1579CW] with a white finish. Jacketing
material is to have a maximum flame spread/smoke developed index of 25/20 per UL 723, 10.0000
water vapor permeance rating per ASTM E-96, mold inhibitors incorporated,and be UV stable.
2.03 DUCTWORK LINING
A. See Section 23 3113-Steel Ductwork.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that ductwork has been tested for leakage in accordance with SMACNA standards before
applying insulation materials.
B. Verify that all surfaces are clean,dry,and free of foreign material.
C. External Ductwork Insulation:
1. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature with vapor retardant jacket.
Seal all vapor retardant jacket seams and penetrations with UL listed tapes or vapor retardant
adhesive.
2. Provide insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature with or without vapor
retardant jacket.Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of insulation.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations except where
prohibited by code.
4. The underside of ductwork 24 inches or greater shall be secured with mechanical fasteners and
speed clips spaced approximately 18 inches on center.The protruding ends of the fasteners should
be cut off flush after the speed clips are installed, and then, when required, sealed with the same
tape as specified above.
5. For ductwork exposed to physical abuse in unfinished and exposed spaces, finish with duct
insulation protection.
D. For installation of lining insulation,see Section 23 3113.
Job Number 2170712.00 EQUIPMENT/DUCTWORK INSULATION
23 07 13- 2/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.02 INSULATION SCHEDULE
A. Provide wrap insulation and duct liner for the duct systems indicated per the following table(R-value
indicates the thickness to be provided as defined in Section 23 07 13 for wrap insulation and Section 23
31 13 for liner):
DUCT TYPE AND LOCATION LINER WRAP
Within Conditioned Space:
-Supply Air R-3.3 Not Required
-Return Air R-3.3 Not Required
-Primary Air Not Required R—3.31
-Relief Air Not Required R—3.31,2
-Transfer Air R-3.3 Not Required
-Exhaust Air R-3.3 Not Requiredz
Table Footnotes:
1 Where duct is exposed to view, provide wrap with paintable duct insulation protection.
2 Building level insulation is required from backdraft/motorized damper to louver or roof hood.
See plans for additional details. Coordinate with GC for insulation.
B. For purposes of the Insulation Schedule above,the following defines the duct systems:
1. Supply Air: Air that has passed through mechanical conditioning device, such as a furnace, coil,
evaporative section, heat recovery device,etc.that is distributed to the conditioned space.
2. Return Air:Air from the conditioned space to an air handler.
3. Primary Air:See Section 23 3113—Steel Ductwork.
4. Relief Air: Air from the conditioned space to the outdoors or to a large semi-conditioned or non-
conditioned space.
5. Transfer Air:Air from one conditioned space to another conditioned space.
6. Exhaust air: Air from a space moved by a fan to directly outside. Also, air downstream of a heat
recovery device to directly outside.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 EQUIPMENT/DUCTWORK INSULATION
23 07 13- 3/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 0719
HVAC PIPING INSULATIONS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes, but not limited to, insulating of piping and fittings per schedule in Part 3 of this specification.
B. Insulation at Hangers: Insulation shall be continuous through hangers on all insulated systems. Inserts
at hangers are specified in Section 23 05 29 and are considered as part of the hanger and support
system. Inserts are required to be installed at the time of pipe installation and are intended to be
installed by the Contractor installing the pipe hangers/supports. See Section 23 05 29.
C. The intent of this section is to meet or exceed the requirements of the most current version of the
Washington State Energy Code(WSEC). The stricter of this section and WSEC shall be met.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions, Division 01
B. Section 20 00 00—General Mechanical Requirements
C. Section 23 05 29—Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping& Equipment
D. Section 23 20 00—Hydronic System
1.03 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping insulation,jackets,and accessories.
1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. All insulation
B. Field Applied Jackets
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTUERS
Not Applicable
2.02 PIPE INSULATIONS
A. Glass Fiber: Meeting ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'K' ('ksi')Value: 0.23 at 75 degrees F(0.033 at 24 degrees C).
2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F(454 degrees C).
3. Vapor Retarder Jacket:AP-T PLUS White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to
aluminum foil, secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips or AP Jacket with outward
clinch expanding staples or vapor barrier mastic as needed.
4. Approved Manufacturer:
a. Manville
b. Armstrong
C. Knauf
d. Manson Insulation
Job Number 2170712.00 HVAC PIPING INSULATIONS
23 07 19- 1/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
e. Elastomeric Insulation (Type 1): Meeting ASTM C534;flexible,closed cell,cellular
elastomeric, molded or sheet.
1. Thermal Conductivity:0.25 Btu-in/hr. Ftz'F.
2. Maximum Service Temperature of-70 degrees F. (-40 degrees C) to 220 degrees F (104
degrees C)
3. Maximum Flame Spread: 25.
4. Maximum Smoke Developed:25/50 through 1"wall.
5. Maximum water vapor permeability,wet cup, perm-in .10.
6. Connection:Waterproof vapor retarder adhesive as needed.
7. UV-Protection:Outdoor protective coating.
8. Shall have R-Value of 4.2 at 1"and R=8 at 2".
9. The material shall be manufactured under an independent third-party supervision
testing program covering the properties of fire performance, thermal conductivity and
W VT.
10. Shall be fiber free,formaldehyde-free,and low VOC's.
11. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Armacell
b. Kflex
c. Aeroflex
B. Pre-insulated Pipe:
1. Carrier pipe to be schedule 40 steel for heating water and HDPE for chilled water.
2. Jacket material to be HPDE.
3. Insulation to be polyurethane foam. Insulation shall completely fill the annular space between the
carrier pipe and jacket. Insulating rated temperature to be -40°F to 250°F. Minimum thermal
conductivity to be 0.16 Btu-hr/sq.ft./'F/inch at 73°F.
4. Install pipes and accessories per manufacturer's recommendations.
5. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Perma-Pipe
b. Thermacor
C. Rovanco
C. Field Applied Jackets:
1. PVC Plastic: One-piece molded type fitting covers and jacketing material,gloss white.
a. Connections:Tacks; Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.
2. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric,6 oz/sq yd (220 g/sq m), plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire-
retardant lagging adhesive.
3. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016-inch (0.045 mm) thick sheet, (smooth/embossed) finish,with longitudinal
slip joints and 2-inch (50 mm) laps,die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
4. Approved Manufacturer: Manville Zeston 2000.
D. Approved Manufacturers(Cellular Glass Excluded):
1. Manville
2. Armstrong
3. Knauf
4. Owens Corning
5. IMCOA(for Flexible Unicellular Polyolefin only)
2.03 PIPE SHIELDS(SADDLES)
A. Saddles shall be minimum,20 gauge dimpled galvanized sheet steel covering 40%of the circumference
of the insulation. Length shall be a minimum of 6". See Section 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for
longer shields.
Job Number 2170712.00 HVAC PIPING INSULATIONS
23 07 1 9- 2/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
A. Verify that piping has been tested for leakage in accordance with IMC standards before applying
insulation materials.
B. Verify that all surfaces are clean,dry,and free of foreign material.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, building codes,and industry
standards.
B. Continue insulating vapor barrier through penetrations except where prohibited by code.
C. Piping Insulation:
1. Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
2. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions,and interruptions.
3. Provide insulated dual temperature pipes or cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient
temperature with vapor retardant jacket with self sealing laps. Insulate complete system.
4. For insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature, secure jackets with self sealing
lap or outward clinched,expanded staples. Bevel and seal ends of insulation at equipment,flanges,
and unions.
S. Insulated pipe supports and insulation shield shall be in place at each hanger and support as
required by Section 23 OS 29 prior to insulating.
6. For pipe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or exposed in finished spaces up to 10 feet
above finished floor, finish with Manville Zeston 2000 PVC jacket and fitting covers or aluminum
jacket.
7. Hydronic system (water loop heat pump) piping that operates between 60°F and 907 will be
uninsulated.
D. Equipment Insulation Installation: Install sheets of polyolefin in largest manageable sizes. Apply full
coverage of manufacturer's recommended adhesive to both the equipment and insulation,or use pre-
glued flat sheets of insulation. Butt all joints firmly together and apply factory adhesive or fuse seal
system into joint as per manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
INSULATION TYPE PIPE SIZE INCH THICKNESS
INCH
Glass Fiber Insulation:
Piping Exposed to Freezing or Semi-Heated Spaces All Sizes 1%"
Elastomeric Insulation(Type 1):
Condenser Water Supply Up to 2" 1"
and Return 2'/" 1%"
And Above
3.04 F
ITTINGS,VALVES,STRAINERS,FLANGES,HEADERS,EXPANSION TANKS,HEAT EXCHANGERS,AIR CONTROL
EQUIPMENT,PUMP SUCTION AND DISCHARGE INSULATION COVERS
A. General: Provide all fitting insulation covers for pipe fittings,grooved end couplings,and for pipe
flanges.
Job Number 2170712.00 HVAC PIPING INSULATIONS
23 07 1 9- 3/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Exposed Work: Provide"Zeston PVC' insulated fitting covers applied after pipe insulation is installed. A
pre-cut"Hi-Lo Temp" insulation insert,conforming to the UL 25/50 rating,shall be snugly tucked
around the fitting making sure the fitting is covered with the full thickness of insulation.
1. All others, provide covering in pad form, constructed as follows: Use 1-inch thick Owens-Corning
Fiberglas TIW Glass Wool, Type I, non-oiled, fully enclosed on all sides and edges within tight-
weave canvas jacket. Attach Bergen hooks around edges of pad. Fit pad to device with edges
tightly butted and secure with copper wire laced between hooks. Provide vapor seal where vapor
seal is required for adjacent insulation.
C. The one-piece UL 25/50 rated PVC fitting cover shall be snapped over the insulated fitting and secured
with tack fasteners,staples,or tape.
D. Concealed Piping: Build up insulation with asbestos-free insulation cement for hydrous calcium silicate
pipe insulation; Owens-Corning T1W glass fiber wool-type wrap or"Hi-Lo Temp" insert,to full thickness
of adjacent pipe insulation;cover with Zeston fitting covers stapled to adjacent insulation jacket,or use
3"wide canvas and lagging adhesive.
E. Gauge Lines: Insulate to the gauge shutoff valve.
3.05 PIPE HANGERS
A. Do not allow pipes to come in contact with hangers.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 HVAC PIPING INSULATIONS
23 07 1 9-4/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 09 00
ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions for Washington State Facilities
Construction.
B. The general Provisions of the Contract, including General,Supplementary,and Special Conditions,and
Division 1-General Requirements,apply to work specified in this section. Subcontractor must
familiarize himself with the terms of the above documents.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Scope of Work: Under the base bids,the controls as specified under Section 23 09 00 will be added to
the project scope of work as a separate bid and pricing package. The following Controls manufacturers
are approved for use on this project. No substitutions of manufacturers other than those listed will be
considered. Input and output devices are not restricted to these manufacturers. Systems approved for
bidding are:
1. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Alerton by ATS
1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. All work of this Division shall be coordinated and provided by the single Controls Contractor.
B. The work of this Division shall be scheduled,coordinated,and interfaced with the associated work of
other trades. Reference the Division 23 Sections for details.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Analog: A continuously variable system or value not having discrete levels. Typically exists within a
defined range of limiting values.
B. Binary: A two-state system where an "ON"condition is represented by one discrete signal level and an
"OFF"condition is represented by a second discrete signal level each separated by a defined deadband.
Digital Inputs and Digital Outputs are examples.
C. Controls Contractor: The single Contractor to provide the work of this Division. This Contractor shall be
the primary installer,commissioner and ongoing service provider for the Controls work.
D. Control Sequence: A pre-programmed arrangement of software algorithms, logical computation,target
values and limits as required to attain the defined operational control objectives.
E. Direct Digital Control: The digital algorithms and pre-defined arrangements included in the controls
software to provide direct closed-loop control for the designated equipment and controlled variables.
Inclusive of Proportional, Derivative and Integral control algorithms together with target values, limits,
logical functions,arithmetic functions,constant values,timing considerations and the like.
F. Node: A digitally programmable entity existing on the controls network.
G. PC: Personal Computer from a recognized major manufacturer. PC"clones"assembled by a third-party
Subcontractor are not acceptable. PC must also have documentation verifying that it has been tested
and is completely compatible with all installed software and communicates with any peripherals such as
modems, NEC cards, printers,hubs,zip drives,etc.that may be attached.
H. Operator Workstation: Software and PC combination that serves as the graphic and/or text interface to
EMCS
Job Number 2170712.00 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS
23 09 00- 1/7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
I. Wiring: The term "Wiring"and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean provide the
controls wiring and terminations.
J. Install: The term "Install"and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean receive at the jobsite
and mount.
K. Software: The term "software"and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean all of
programmed digital processor software, preprogrammed firmware and project specific digital process
programming and database entries and definitions as generally understood in the controls industry for
real-time, integrated controls configurations.
L. The following abbreviations and acronyms may be used in describing the work of this Division:
ADC Analog to Digital Converter
Al Analog Input
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AO Analog Output
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
AWG American Wire Gauge
CFM Cubic Feet Per Minute
DAC Digital to Analog Converter
DDC Direct Digital Control
DI (Binary) Digital Input
DO (Binary) Digital Output
EEPROM -Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only
Memory
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
EMCS Energy Management Control System
FAS Fire Alarm Detection and Annunciation System
HOA Hand-Off-Auto
ID Identification
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
1/0 Input/Output
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
MCC Motor Control Center
NC Normally Closed
NIC Not In Contract
NO Normally Open
OWS Operator Workstation
OAH Outdoor Air Humidity
OAT Outdoor Air Temperature
PC Personal Computer
RAM Random Access Memory
RF Radio Frequency
RFI Radio Frequency Interference
RH Relative Humidity
ROM Read Only Memory
SPDT Single Pole Double Throw
SPST Single Pole Single Throw
TBA To Be Advised
VAC Volts,Alternating Current
VAV Variable Air Volume
VDC Volts, Direct Current
Job Number 2170712.00 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS
23 09 00- 2/7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General:
1. The Controls Contractor shall have a branch facility within a 100-mile radius of the job site
supplying complete maintenance and support services on a 24 hour, 7-day-a-week basis. This
branch facility shall provide the work for this project. This support facility shall have spare parts
and all necessary test and diagnostic equipment required to install, commission and service the
additional controls.
2. As evidence and assurance of the Contractor's ability to support the Owner's system with service
and parts, the Contractor must have been in business for at least the last ten (10) years and have
successfully completed three projects comparable to the value of this contract in the preceding five
years
B. Quality Management Program:
1. Provide a competent and experienced Controls Project Manager employed by the Controls
Contractor. The Project Manager shall be supported as necessary by other Controls Contractor
employees in order to provide professional management service for the work. The Project
Manager shall attend scheduled Project Meetings as required and shall be empowered to make
technical,scheduling and related decisions on behalf of the Controls Contractor
1.06 REFERENCES
A. All work shall conform to the following Codes and Standards,as applicable:
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)Standards.
2. National Electric Code(NEC)and applicable local Electric Code.
3. Underwriters Laboratories(UL) listing and labels.
4. UL 916 Energy Management
5. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code.
6. NFPA 90A-Standard for The Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
7. NFPA 92A and 92B Smoke Purge/Control Equipment.
8. Factory Mutual (FM).
9. American National Standards Institute(ANSI).
10. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA).
11. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME).
12. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers(ASHRAE).
13. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA).
14. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers(IEEE).
15. American Standard Code for Information Interchange(ASCII).
16. Electronics Industries Association (EIA).
17. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
18. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM).
19. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) including Part 15, Radio Frequency Devices.
20. Americans Disability Act(ADA)
B. In the case of conflicts or discrepancies,the more stringent regulation shall apply.
C. All work shall meet the approval of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction at the project site.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Control Drawings, Product Data,and Samples:
1. The Controls Contractor shall submit a complete controls package divided in two sections. The first
section shall be delivered within 30 days after the contract has been awarded and the second
section shall be delivered within 60 days after the contract has been awarded.
2. Allow at least 15 working days for the review of each package by the Engineer.
Job Number 2170712.00 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS
23 09 00- 3/7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3. Equipment and systems requiring approval of local authorities must comply with such regulations
and be approved. Filing shall be at the expense of the Controls Contractor where filing is
necessary. Provide a copy of all related correspondence and permits to the Owner.
B. Submittal Section 1:
1. Product data sheets for all products including software.
C. Submittal Section 2:
1. Controller wiring diagrams and sequences. Control drawings shall be created on AUTOCAD
software,version 14 or newer.
2. Detailed Bill of Material, identifying part number,quantity,description,and optional features.
3. Details of all interfaces and connections to the work of other trades.
1.08 RECORD DOCUMENTATION
A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Three (3) copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided to the Owner's
Representative upon completion of the project. The entire Operation and Maintenance Manual
shall be furnished on Compact Disc media,and include the following for the controls provided:
a. Table of contents
b. As-built Control Drawings using AutoCAD Version 14 or newer. Drawings shall represent the
as-built condition of the system and incorporate all information supplied with the approved
submittal.
C. Manufacturer's product data sheets for all products including software.
d. System Operator's manuals.
e. Wiring termination diagrams(use AutoCAD version 14 or newer).
f. Interfaces to all third-party products and work by other trades.
g. Point to point checkout sheets with dates and checkout signatures
h. Repair contact name and phone number.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. Standard Material and Labor Warranty:
1. Provide a one-year labor warranty on the Controls.
2. The controls components shall be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal
use and service. If within one (1) year from the date of awarding of the Certificate of Occupancy
any controls equipment is found to be defective, it will be replaced, repaired or adjusted by the
Controls Contractor free of charge. The Controls Contractor is not responsible for the removal or
reinstallation of any components that were originally installed by others, such as valves, dampers,
wells,air flow stations,etc.
3. Maintain an adequate supply of materials within 100 miles of the Project site such that
replacement of key parts and labor support, including programming. Warranty work shall be done
during Controls Contractor's normal business hours unless there is an emergency.
4. Maintain an on-site record of all work done,all items removed from site, all items returned to site,
all new replacement items installed and all remedial programming and database entry work
undertaken including software revisions installed. Maintain a record of all re-calibrations required
as a result of Warranty service.
1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
See Paragraph 1.08 A.
Job Number 2170712.00 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS
23 09 00-4/7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Not Applicable
2.02 CONTROLS DESCRIPTION
A. The controls work shall be an addition to the existing EMCS. It shall have controls and sensors that shall
perform all the functions listed in the drawings. The new additional controls shall be added via graphics
and/or text test screens to all operator workstations currently communicating with the existing EMCS.
All controllers and workstations connected to or communicating with the new additional controls shall
be updated as necessary to continue connection and/or communication.The points list is as follows:
two(2) pump start stops,and two(2) pump statuses.Controls contractor is responsible for all
programming and scheduling changes that need to occur though-out the existing EMCS to
accommodate the new additional controls.
B. The work of the single Controls Contractor shall be as defined individually and collectively in all Sections
of this Division specifications together with the associated Point Sheets and Drawings and the
associated interfacing work as referenced in the related documents as are listed in Part 1 of this
Section.
C. The controls work shall consist of the provision of all labor, materials,etc.as Specified in these Division
documents which are required for the complete,fully functional and commissioned controls.
D. Provide a complete, neat and workmanlike installation. Use only employees who are skilled,
experienced,trained,and familiar with the specific equipment,software and configurations to be
provided for this Project.
E. Manage and coordinate the controls work in a timely manner in consideration of the Project schedules.
Coordinate cooperatively with the associated work of other trades so as to assist the progress and not
impede or delay the work of associated trades.
2.03 NODES
A. HVAC Node:
1. HVAC Node shall provide direct digital control of HVAC systems.
2. A dedicated HVAC Node shall be configured and provided for the new additional controls.
3. The HVAC Node shall retain its function and setpoint information in the event of a power failure,
and shall return to normal operation upon restoration of power.
PART 3 PERFORMANCE/EXECUTION
3.01 NSTALLATION PRACTICES
A. Controls Wiring:
1. All conduit,wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the installation of the Controls,
as herein specified, shall be provided by the Controls Contractor unless specifically shown on the
Electrical Drawings under Division 26 Electrical. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of
applicable portions of Division 26 and all local and national electric codes, unless specified
otherwise in this section.
2. All Controls wiring materials and installation methods shall comply with Controls manufacturer
recommendations.
3. The sizing type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall be the design
responsibility of the Controls Contractor. If complications arise, however, due to the incorrect
selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the Controls Contractor,the Contractor
shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the selected components.
4. Wire/conduit ratios shall follow the same wire/conduit ratios included in Division 26.
5. Class 2 Wiring:
a. All Class 2 (24VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit or be plenum rated and shall be
installed in accordance with local code requirements.
Job Number 2170712.00 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS
23 09 00- 5/7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
b. Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible locations. Inaccessible
locations such as"hard lid"ceilings require conduit.
c. Wire supports and be installed per local wiring code requirements. As a default,wire shall be
supported every 5' from the building structure utilizing metal hangers designed for this
application.
d. Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface raceway
(Wiremold) may be used as approved by the Engineer.
e. All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the building lines
and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are attached.
f. Provide firestopping for all penetrations used by dedicated Controls conduits and raceways
using approved fire resistive sealant. All other project firestopping to be by other trade.
g. All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls or other structure, shall be in conduit
or enclosed raceway.
h. Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be plumb,true, and
square.
i. No penetrations in structural elements shall be made before receipt of written approval from
the Structural Engineer.
6. Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power wiring 120VAC and
greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal wiring.
7. Perform circuit tests using qualified personnel only. Provide necessary instruments and equipment
to demonstrate that:
a. All circuits are continuous and free from short circuits and grounds.
b. All circuits are free from unspecified grounds;that resistance to ground of all circuits is no less
than 50 megaohms.
c. All circuits are free from induced voltages.
8. Provide complete testing for all cables used under this Contract. Provide all equipment,tools, and
personnel as necessary to conduct these tests.
9. Provide for complete grounding of all signal and communications cables, panels and equipment so
as to ensure system integrity of operation. Ground cabling and conduit at the panel terminations.
Avoid grounding loops.
B. Controls Line Voltage Power Source:
1. 120-volt AC circuits used for the controls shall be taken from panelboards and circuit breakers
provided by Division 26. Coordinate circuit installation with Division 26. Division 26 shall be
responsible for the installation of 120 VAC controls circuits.
2. Circuits used for the controls shall be dedicated and shall not be used for any other purposes.
3. Terminal unit controllers may use 120-volt AC power from motor power circuits.
C. Controls Identification Standards:
1. Node Identification: All nodes shall be identified by a permanent label fastened to the outside of
the enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location.
2. Cable and/or conduit shall be labeled at suitable intervals with the controlled unit's name.
Labeling shall be sufficient to trace cable from device to unit.
3. Specify a different wire color for analog, digital, power and communication wiring. Include wiring
color on control drawings legends.
4. Raceway Identification: All the covers to junction and pull boxes of the control's raceways shall be
labeled.
5. Wire Identification: All low and line voltage control wiring shall be identified by a number, as
referenced to the associated shop drawing and as-built drawing, at each end of the conductor or
cable. Identification number shall be permanently secured to the conductor or cable and shall be
typed.
Job Number 2170712.00 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS
23 09 00- 6/7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
D. Node Installation:
1. The controls panels and cabinets shall be mounted at shoulder height wherever possible. All
panels shall be accessible. Each cabinet shall be anchored per the manufacturer's
recommendations.
2. The Controls Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating panel locations with other trades and
Electrical and Mechanical Contractors.
E. Input Devices:
1. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation and shall be of the type
and accuracy suitable for this specific application.
2. Locate components in accessible local control panels wherever possible.
3. The Mechanical Contractor shall install all in-line devices such as temperature wells, pressure taps,
airflow stations,etc.
F. HVAC Output Devices:
1. All output devices shall be installed per the manufacturers recommendation and shall be suitable
in type and accuracy for this specific application. The Mechanical Contractor shall install all in-line
devices such as control valves,dampers,etc.
3.02 TRAINING
A. The Controls Contractor shall provide the following training services:
1. Provide one half day of on-site orientation by a system technician who is fully knowledgeable of
the specific installation details of the project. This orientation shall, at a minimum, consist of a
review of the project as-built drawings and a walk through of the facility to identify panel and
device locations.Training may be split into smaller sessions on different days if the Owner prefers.
2. Supply a list of available factory training classes and contact information.
3.03 COMMISSIONING
A. Acceptance Verification Document is defined as a series of check sheets that include all controls and
functions. Each point entry shall be signed and dated verifying that each point and function has been
fully calibrated and tested.
B. Conduct functional performance tests to demonstrate that controls systems maintain setpoints and
operates through the full range of operations. The commissioning agent will provide functional tests
that the Controls Contractor shall review and provide comments on the tests for incorporation into the
final test documents.
C. Provide all necessary specialist labor,materials and tools to demonstrate to the Engineer that the
controls have been commissioned and are operating in compliance with the contract. Prepare a list of
noted deficiencies signed by both the Engineer and the Controls Contractor.
D. Promptly rectify all listed deficiencies and submit to the Engineer that this has been done.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 ADDITION TO EXISTING CONTROLS
23 09 00- 7/7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 11 19
HVAC PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Furnish devices as indicated with complete installation procedures for systems.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions, Division 1
B. Section 20 00 00—General Mechanical Requirements
C. Section 23 05 23—Valves for HVAC Piping
D. Section 23 05 29—Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
E. Section 23 20 00—Hydronic System
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Strainers
B. Unions
C. Dielectric Unions
D. Flexible Connectors
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STRAINERS
A. Water Strainers: "Y"type,same size as the pipe in which they are installed,with cast iron or semi-steel
bodies rated for 125 psi working pressure,and with removable cover and sediment basket. Basket
screen shall be stainless steel or monel,with a net free area of at least 3 times that of the entering pipe.
Provide with blowdown valve where shown on the drawings.
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong
2. Bell and Gossett
3. Conbraco
4. Hoffman
S. Wheatley
6. Victaulic
2.02 UNIONS
A. Unions on Copper Pipe:
1. In 2-Inch Pipe and Smaller:Wrought copper solder joint copper to copper union.
a. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Nibco
2. Watts
3. Mueller
Job Number 2170712.00 HVAC PIPING SPECIALTIES
23 11 19- 1/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. In 2-1/2-Inch Pipe and Larger: Brass flange unions.
a. Approved manufacturers:
1. Nibco
2. Watts
3. Mueller
B. Unions on Steel Pipe:
1. In 3-1/2-Inch Pipe and Smaller: Screwed malleable iron with ground joints, brass to iron insert, 150
psi minimum working pressure.
2. In 4-Inch Pipe and Larger: Flange unions,cast or malleable iron.
2.03 DIELECTRIC UNIONS
A. Dielectric Unions: Rated at 250 psi at 180 deg. F.,conforming to ANSI B16.39.Type and size to match
piping.
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Victaulic 647,or prior approved equal
2.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Water Pump Flexible Connectors: Neoprene twin sphere type,suitable for 225 psi working pressure
and 240°F. maximum temperature. Mason Industries or Minnesota Flex same size as pipe installed in.
B. Air and Water Flexible Connectors:
1. Corrugated hose type with outer braided wire sheath covering. Corrugations shall be close pitch
annular type.Connector shall have a minimum working pressure of 200 psig, minimum length of 12
inches (or 3 times the connector's nominal diameter, whichever is more), and screwed or flanged
end connections. Metal for hose shall be stainless steel; braided sheath shall be 300 series
stainless steel.
2. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Metraflex,or prior approved equal
C. Three(3)Victaulic flexible type couplings in close proximity to rotating equipment such as pumps and
chillers when installed per the manufacturer's latest recommendations.
2.05 PIPE SHIELDS(SADDLES)
A. Pipe shields shall be minimum,20 gauge galvanize sheet steel.
B. Pipe shield shall cover 40%of the insulation, minimum,where the pipe is supported at the bottom.
C. Pipe shield shall cover 100%of the insulation where the pipe is clamped to the hanger or support.
D. See Section 23 05 29-Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping& Equipment for information on length and
gauge.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Strainers: Install strainers as indicated. Provide plugged gate or ball valve in blow-off connection on
strainers,valve shall be same size as blow-off tapping.
B. Unions: Install unions in pipe connections to control valves,coils, regulators, reducers,all equipment,
and where it may be necessary to disconnect the equipment or piping for repairs or maintenance; and
as indicated.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 HVAC PIPING SPECIALTIES
23 11 19- 2/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 20 00
HYDRONIC SYSTEM
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes But Not Limited To: General piping installation procedures for hydronic piping systems.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 1 applies to this section.
B. Section 20 00 00—General Mechanical Requirements
C. Section 23 05 23—Valves for HVAC Piping
D. Section 23 05 29—Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
E. Section 23 07 19—HVAC Piping Insulation
F. Section 23 1119—HVAC Piping Specialties
G. Section 23 2100—Sleeves and Seals for HVAC Piping and Equipment
1.03 SUMMARY
A. Section includes pipe and fitting requirements for the following hydronic piping systems:
1. Hot Water Heating Piping
2. Chilled Water Piping
B. Section includes pipe and fitting requirements for condensate piping systems for mechanical systems.
1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Hydronic Pipe and Fittings
B. Condensate Pipe and Fittings
C. Dielectric Waterways
D. Automatic Air Vents
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF THIS SECTION
A. Automatic Air Vents
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 VALVES
A. See Section 23 05 23.
2.02 PIPE HANGERS
A. See Section 23 05 29.
2.03 HVAC PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. See Section 23 1119 for the following HVAC Piping Specialties:
1. Strainers
2. Unions
3. Flexible Connections
Job Number 2170712.00 HYDRONIC SYSTEM
23 20 00- 1/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.04 HYDRONIC PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. All pipe and fittings shall be domestically made.
B. Aboveground Steel Pipe:
1. Pipe 2% inches and larger:
a. Standard weight, black, Schedule 40, steel pipe ASTM A53, when using welded or flanged
fittings.
b. Standard weight, black,Schedule 10,steel pipe ASTM A53 when using grooved fittings.
2. Pipe 2 inches and smaller:
a. Steel Pipe:
1. Standard weight, black,Schedule 40,steel pipe ASTM A53,when using threaded fittings.
b. Aboveground Copper Pipe:
1. Pipe 2 inches and smaller:
a. ASTM B 88,Type L Copper.
C. Fittings:
1. Welded Fittings:Wrought Steel,ASTM A 234/A 234M,wall thickness to match pipe.
2. Flanged Fittings:ASME B16.1,Class 125 and 250; raised ground face,and bolt holes spot
faced.
3. Threaded Fittings: Malleable iron,ASME B16.3,Class 150,or cast iron,ASME B16.4,Class
125.
4. Grooved Fittings: The Victaulic System with Standard 177N and W77 (and 107N and
W07 for rigid applications) coupling installed according to manufacturer's
recommendations. All gaskets shall be Grade "EHP" EPDM suitable for hot water up to
+250°F, or Grade "E" EPDM suitable for hot water up to+230°F lubricated with Victaulic
Lubricant and all grooved material shall be of the same manufacturer.
5. Fittings: Solder type (all sizes)
2.05 CONDENSATE PIPE
A. Schedule 80 PVC.
B. Type L copper, insulated per 23 07 19, if installed in air plenum.
C. Type L copper if penetrating a firewall.
2.06 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Dielectric Waterways: Inert, non-corrosive thermoplastic lining with zinc electroplated casing, rated at
300 psi at 225 deg. F.,conforming to ANSI/NSF 61.Type and size to match piping.
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Victaulic 47,or prior approved equal.
2.07 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS
A. Maintenance free,continuous air venting of free air, 150 PSI working pressure, up to 2707 working
temperature. Unit to be leak resistant("spit-less")and act as a vacuum breaker during drain
procedures. Provide%"or larger pipe connection.
1. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Spirotherm Spirotop
Job Number 2170712.00 HYDRONIC SYSTEM
23 20 00- 2/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install complete system of piping,valved as indicated or as necessary to completely control
entire apparatus. Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general location and connections.
Piping may have to be offset,lowered,or raised as required or directed at site. This does not relieve
this Division from responsibility for proper erection of systems of piping in every respect.
B. Properly support piping and make adequate provisions for expansion,contraction,slope,and
anchorage based upon field conditions.
C. Arrange piping to not interfere with removal of other equipment,ducts,or devices,or block access to
doors,windows,or access openings. Provide accessible,ground joint unions in piping at connections to
equipment.
D. Make connections of dissimilar metals with dielectric waterway fittings.
E. Provide sleeves around pipes passing through floors,walls, partitions,or structural members. See
Section 23 2100.
F. Seal sleeves per Section 23 2100.
G. Cap or plug open ends of pipes and equipment to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of system.
Do not use plugs of rags,wool,cotton waste,or similar materials.
H. Install piping systems so they may be easily drained.
I. Do not use reducing bushings,street elbows,or close nipples.
J. Provide seismic bracing on every third pipe hanger 2 inches and larger pipe and any size pipe where
hanger rod is 24 inches or longer.
K. Cut tubes square and remove burrs from inside and outside edges of ends.Apply flux, heat joints to
remove excess flux and solder,and cool joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
L. Install unions on downstream side of shut-off valves and specialty valves.
M. Unions shall be provided in each line immediately preceding the connection to each piece of equipment
requiring maintenance,such as coils, pumps,and control valves.
N. Use teflon tape for lubricating threads on all threaded connections.
0. Labels:
1. Label valves, pumps, flowmeters, and other equipment mark number shown on Drawings or with
space served.
2. Labels shall be 2"x3" laminated plastic, black with white engraved letters, and attached with brass,
beaded chain.
P. Insulation: See Section 23 07 19.
Q. Install automatic air vents at all high points in the piping system. No areas of`trapped' piping shall be
present without automatic air vents being installed.
Job Number 2170712.00 HYDRONIC SYSTEM
23 20 00- 3/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
R. Grooved Piping Systems:
1. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines and recommendations. All grooved
couplings, fittings,valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving
tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. The gasket style and
elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the intended service as specified.
Gaskets shall be molded. Grooved end shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and
roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing. A factory-trained field
representative shall provide on-site training for contractor's field personnel in the proper use of
grooving tools and installation of grooved piping products. Factory-trained representative shall
periodically review the product installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly
installed products.
2. Manufacturer's Review: Coupling manufacturer's factory trained representative shall periodically
visit project site and review the mechanical coupled products and installation and confirm
compliance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Manufacturer's representative shall
submit a written report of such visits to the Engineer, noting work progress, areas and items
reviewed and an evaluation of the installation. The Contractor shall pay all costs for
manufacturer's review and report. The Contractor shall remove and replace any work deemed
improper by the manufacturer's representative or by the Engineer."
3.02 FLUSHING AND TESTING(WATER SOURCE HEAT PUMP)
A. Scope: All hydronic heat pump and cooling tower water piping systems that have been worked on shall
be tested. The system shall have an initial test applied after flushing and an additional test applied
after system cleaning.
B. Isolation: Isolate from the piping,all hydronic heat pumps,cooling tower and any other parts of the
system or equipment(this includes all constant flow valves)that may be damaged by the test pressure
or entrapment of debris during the flushing process. The system may be isolated into various smaller
sub-systems to allow earlier testing and locating of leaks. Connect each heat pump's supply line directly
to the return run-out, bypassing the heat pump and the constant flow valve. Provide temporary bypass
piping as required.
C. Flushing: Prior to initial testing and chemical cleaning,the system shall be filled and flushed with clean
water to remove all large debris. Flush system until water runs clear.
D. Initial Testing: After initial flushing and draining,the system shall be refilled and a hydrostatic test
applied. Test pressure shall be 125 psig on new systems and 75 psig on existing piping systems. System
shall hold the test pressure for a minimum of 2 hours with no drop in pressure. Any leaks shall be
repaired and the system re-tested until system proves tight.
E. Final Testing: After system cleaning,the system shall be prepared for normal operation,with
equipment connected (except parts of system or equipment that would be damaged by the test
pressure)and re-tested using the same pressure and criteria as outlined in sub paragraph D, Initial
Testing. All leaks shall be repaired and the system re-tested until it proves tight.
F. Gauges: Contractor shall insure that clear,accurate,and readable pressure gauges are used to insure
accurate testing and allow for witnessing by others. Contractor shall make a written record off the
gauge readings,time,date,and where connected to the system and mark this information on the site
as-builts.
G. Witnessing: Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer in advance(minimum three(3)days notice)
of when testing will take place,and such testing shall be witnessed by the Architect/Engineer.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 HYDRONIC SYSTEM
23 20 00-4/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 2100
SLEEVES AND SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes sleeving and sealing of piping and ductwork.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions, Division 1
B. Section 23 3113—Steel Ductwork.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E814: Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
B. UL 1479: Through-Penetration Fire Stop Systems.
1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submittal requirements for this Section.
1. Seals
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Products shall comply with Section 20 00 00, paragraph 2.01,Approved Manufacturers.
B. Fire Seals:3M, Dow Corning,General Electric, Rectorseal Metacaulk.
2.02 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Size: Inside diameter of pipe sleeves shall be at least 1/2-inch larger than the outside diameter of the
pipe or pipe covering,so as to allow free movement of piping.
B. Ends: Sleeve ends shall be cut flush with finished surfaces,except in rooms having floor drains where
sleeves shall be extended 3/4-inch above finished floor.
C. Material-Structural: Sleeves through structural elements shall be fabricated from Schedule 40 steel
pipe.
D. Material-Non-structural:Sleeves through non-structural elements shall be fabricated from 18-gauge
galvanized sheet metal or 24-gauge spiral duct.
E. De-burr pipe ends and smooth slab penetration (to accept final slab finish)from sleeves extending
above finished floor.
2.03 DUCT SLEEVES
A. Size: Inside dimension of sleeves shall be at least%" larger than the outside dimensions of the duct or
duct covering on all sides.
B. Ends: Sleeve ends shall be cut flush with finished surface.
Job Number 2170712.00 SLEEVES AND SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2321 00- 1/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Material-Non-structural: Sleeves shall be fabricated from 20-gauge galvanized steel,shall be
continuous around the interior without holes or openings,and shall match the configuration of the item
being sleeved.
D. Material-Structural: Sleeves through structural elements shall be fabricated from Schedule 40 steel
pipe(round openings)and welded steel supporting elements(sizes/arrangement as shown on
drawings)for other openings.
2.04 SEALS
A. Seals in Interior Fire Rated Assemblies: Shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E814 and shall be UL
classified per UL 1479 as a through-penetration fire stop device.
B. Seals in Exterior Masonry Walls and Floors:
1. Piping: Seals shall consist of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the
annular space between the pipe and wall opening. The seal assembly shall expand when
mechanically tightened to provide an absolute watertight seal between the pipe and wall opening.
Sizing shall be per manufacturer's recommendations. Seal shall be Thunderline "Link-Seal" or
approved equal.
2. Ducts: Silicone type sealant, designed for use with duct material involved as weatherproof sealant
and as specified in Section 07900.
C. Seals in Other Areas: Packed fiberglass or wool insulation,where no weatherproofing or adhesive
properties are required;otherwise,sealants shall be silicone type,as specified in applicable Division 7
Specification Section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPE SLEEVES
A. Provide pipe sleeves for all piping passing through walls,floors, partitions,roofs,foundations,footings,
grade beams,and similar elements,except that sleeves are not required for penetrations through
existing single solid elements, having no voids,at the location where the piping passes through the solid
elements(e.g.,solid wood stud,core drilled solid concrete,etc.). Where a sleeve is required,such
sleeve shall continue all the way through any solid items within that element.
B. Set sleeves plumb or level (or sloped as required for drainage pipe) in proper position,tightly fitted into
the work.
C. Fill openings around outside of pipe sleeve with same material as surrounding construction,or with
material of equivalent fire and smoke rating.
D. Seal around all pipes inside of pipe sleeve.
E. Insulation shall run continuous through sleeves in non-fire rated elements. Insulation shall not run
continuous through sleeves in fire rated elements unless the fire sealant system used is UL accepted for
use with insulated pipes.
F. Do not place sleeves around soil,waste,vent,or roof drain lines passing through concrete floors on
grade.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF DUCT SLEEVES
A. Provide duct sleeves for all round ducts less than 1S inches in diameter where the duct passes through
any floors,walls,ceilings, partitions,or roofs and similar elements.
B. Provide duct sleeves for all square and rectangular ducts having their largest dimension 14 inches and
less where the duct passes through any walls,partitions,and similar elements.
Job Number 2170712.00 SLEEVES AND SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2321 00- 2/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Round ducts larger than 15 inches in diameter,and square of rectangular ducts larger than 14 inches in
any dimension,shall have framed openings where the duct passes through any element. Such framed
openings shall be of the same type as the structural materials used in the wall and shall comply with
materials specified for this project. Sleeves shall be provided in addition to the framed opening where
any void space(s)occurs through the penetration (as through CMU walls,double walls,etc.).
D. Set sleeves plumb or level, in proper position and location,tightly fitted into the work.
E. Fill openings around outside of duct sleeve with same material as surrounding construction,or with
material of equivalent fire and smoke rating.
F. Sleeves are not required for penetrations through existing single solid elements, having no voids,at the
location where the duct passes through the element(e.g., precast concrete panels with pre-framed
openings,core drilled/saw cut solid concrete,etc.). Where a sleeve is required,such sleeve shall
continue all the way through any solid items within that element however.
G. Insulation shall run continuous through sleeves in non-fire rated elements. Insulation shall not run
continuous through sleeves in fire rated elements unless the fire sealant system used is UL accepted for
use with insulated pipes.
H. Sleeves for fire dampers shall be as specified for fire dampers and be in compliance with the damper UL
listing.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF SEALS
A. Provide seals around all piping and ducts passing through walls,grade beams, partitions,and similar
elements.
B. Seals shall be of material and workmanship to maintain the fire and smoke rating of element being
penetrated. Seals ability to maintain the rating of the element being penetrated shall be listed in UL
Laboratories Building Materials Directory or otherwise confirmed by an approved listing agency. It shall
be the Contractor's responsibility to submit shop drawings and technical data showing seals and
systems proposed,and corresponding agency approval. The Contractor shall also be responsible to
submit any data as required by local agencies to satisfy them that the Contractor's proposed fire seals
are satisfactory.
C. Seals shall be watertight where the penetration may be exposed to water or moisture.
D. Duct penetrations through roof or exterior wall assemblies shall be provided with flashings for a
weathertight assembly in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Such openings
shall be sealed to be weatherproof.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 SLEEVES AND SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2321 00- 3/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 3113
STEEL DUCTWORK
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes, but not limited to,furnishing and installing above-ground ductwork and related items
specified below and shown on Drawings.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions and Division 1 apply to this Section.
B. Section 20 00 00-General Mechanical Conditions
C. Section 23 05 29-Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping& Equipment
D. Section 23 07 13-Equipment/Ductwork Insulation
E. Section 23 33 00-HVAC Specialties
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Duct liner
B. Access doors
C. Volume dampers
D. Duct Sealers
E. Duct Closure Collars
F. Turning vanes
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Not applicable
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Duct Sizes: All duct dimensions shown are inside clear dimensions. Where inside duct lining is specified
or indicated,duct dimensions are to the inside face of lining.
B. Low Pressure System: Velocities less than 2,000 fpm and static pressure in duct 2 inches w.g.or less.
C. Medium Pressure System: Velocities greater than 2,000 fpm or static pressure in duct up through 6
inches w.g.
D. High Pressure System: Velocities greater than 2,000 fpm or static pressure in duct over 6 inches w.g.
and up to 10 inches w.g.
E. Primary Duct System: Any duct between an air handler and a terminal (capable of heating and/or
cooling) in a variable air volume or induction terminal system.
F. Gauges: Steel sheet and wire are U.S.Standard Gauge; aluminum sheet is Brown and Sharpe Gauge.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Not Applicable
Job Number 2170712.00 STEEL DUCTWORK
2331 13- 1/7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.02 DUCTS
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal,except
as indicated. Fabricate of zinc-coated lock-forming quality steel sheets meeting requirements of ASTM
A 527-85, "Specification for Sheet Steel Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming
Quality",with G 60 coating.
B. Construct T's, bends,and elbows with radius of 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not
possible, provide turning vanes.
C. Increase duct sizes gradually,not exceeding 30'divergence and 45'convergence.
D. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inches(200 mm)and smaller with
crimp in direction of airflow.
2.03 DUCTJOINTS
A. General: Duct with sides or diameter up to and including 36 inches shall be as scheduled below.
Max.Side Required Minimum Metal Type of Transverse Joint Bracing
Inches Gauges Steel,U.S. Connections Required
Standard Gauge
Under 13" 26 S-drive, pocket or bar None
slips on 7-10"centers
13"to 24" 24 S-drive, pocket or bar None
slips on 7-10" centers
S-drive, 1" pocket or 1" 111x1"x1/8"
25"to 30" 24 bar slips on 7'-10" angles 4'from
centers joints
Drive 1"pocket or 1"bar 111x1"x1/8"
31"to 36" 22 „ angles 4'from
slips on 7-10 centers
joints
B. Ducts with sides over 36 inches to 48 inches,transverse duct joint system by Ductmate/25, Nexus,or
WDCI (Lite) (SMACNA"E" or"G"Type connection).
C. Ducts 48 inches and larger, Ductmates/35, Nexus,or WDCI (Heavy) (SMACNA"J"Type connection).
D. Proprietary duct connections may be used on other sizes, Ductmate,WDCI,or equal.
2.04 ROUND DUCT
A. Fabricate of zinc-coated lock-forming quality steel sheets meeting requirements of ASTM A 527-85,
"Specification for Sheet Steel Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Lock Forming Quality",
with G 60 coating.
Job Number 2170712.00 STEEL DUCTWORK
2331 13- 2/7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Gauge Selection Table:
Duct Maximum 2"w.g. Maximum 2"w.g.
Diameter Static Positive Static Negative
in Inches Spiral Seam Longitudinal Spiral Longitudinal
Gauge Seam Gauge Seam Gauge Seam Gauge
3 thru 8 28 28 28 24
9 thru 14 28 26 26 24
15 thru 26 26 24 24 22
27 thru 36 24 22 22 20
37 thru 50 22 20 20 18
51 thru 60 20 18 18 16
61 thru 84 18 16 16 14
C. Provide insulation where required by the Insulation Schedule in Section 23 07 13- Equipment/Ductwork
Insulation.
2.05 SPIRAL DUCT
A. The outer pressure sheet shall be manufactured from galvanized steel meeting ASTM A-527-67 in the
following minimum gauges:
Nominal Size Solid Spiral Wound Duct Outer Solid Welded Fitting Outer Pressure
Range Pressure Shell Shell
3"-12" 26 Ga. 20 Ga.
13"-24" 24 Ga. 20 Ga.
25"-34" 22 Ga. 20 Ga.
35"-48" 20 Ga. 18 Ga.
50"-58" 18 Ga. 16 Ga.
2.06 DUCT LINER
A. Densities and R-value:
1. R-3.3: 1.0 inch of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft.duct liner.
2. R-5.3: 1.5 inches of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft.duct liner.
3. R-7: 2.0 inches of 1.5 to 3.0 lb/cu. Ft.duct liner
B. Duct Liner:
1. W ('ksi')Value:ASTM C518,0.25 at 75°F(0.036 at 24°C).
2. Noise Reduction Coefficient: 0.65 or higher based on "Type A mounting".
3. Maximum Velocity on Mat or Coated Air Side:5,000 ft/min (25.4 m/sec).
4. Adhesive: UL listed waterproof type.
5. Fasteners: Duct liner galvanized steel pins,welded or mechanically fastened.
6. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Manville Permacote Linacoustic(HP)
C. Spiral Duct Liner:
1. For ductwork requiring 1-inch (25 mm)Spiracoustic Plus System Lining:
a. The installed 1-inch lining shall have a Thermal Resistance (R-Value) of 4.3 (.76) at 75°F(24°C)
mean temperature, and Noise Reduction Coefficients (NRC) per ASTM C 423, Type "A"
mounting.
Job Number 2170712.00 STEEL DUCTWORK
2331 13- 3/7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
b. Metal duct with inside diameters from 8 inches to 18 inches (203 to 457 mm) shall be lined
with 1-inch Preformed Round Liner.
1. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Permacote Spiracoustic Liner
C. Metal duct with inside diameters from 18 inches to 32 inches (457 to 813 mm) shall be lined
with 1-inch Round Liner Board.
1. Approved Manufacturers
a. Spiracoustic Plus"SD" Liner
d. Metal duct with inside diameters greater than or equal to 34 inches (364 mm) shall be lined
with 1-inch Round Liner Board.
1. Approved Manufacturers
a. Spiracoustic Plus"LD" Liner
2. For ductwork requiring 1 1/2-inch (38 mm) Lining:
a. The installed 1 1/2-inch lining shall have a Thermal Resistance (R-Value) of 6.3 (1.11) at 75°F
(24°C) mean temperature, and a Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) of 0.95 per ASTM C 423,
Type"A" mounting.
b. Metal duct with inside diameters from 9 inches to 18 inches (229 to 457 mm) shall be lined
with 1 1/2-inch Preformed Round Liner.
1. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Permacote Spiracoustic Liner
C. Metal duct with inside diameters from 22 inches to 38 inches (559 to 965 mm), shall be lined
with 1 1/2-inch Round Liner Board.
1. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Spiracoustic Plus"SD" Liner
d. Metal duct with inside diameters greater than or equal to 40 inches (1.02 m), shall be lined
with 1 1/2-inch Spiracoustic Plus LID Round Liner Board.
2.07 ACCESS DOORS IN DUCTS
A. At each backdraft damper and at each motorized damper, install factory built 1" insulated access door
with hinges and sash locks. Locate doors within 6 inches of installed dampers.Construction shall be
galvanized sheet metal,22 ga. minimum frame and 24 ga. minimum door. Minimum door shall be
12x12. If duct is too small for 12"door,then maximum door size shall be installed in duct.
B. Access doors for fire damper shall have a minimum clear opening of 12"x12"or as specified on
Drawings to easily service fire damper. Doors shall be within 6 inches of fire dampers.
C. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Nailor-Hart Industries Inc.
2. Cesco-Advanced Air
3. AirBalance Fire/Seal
4. Louvers& Dampers
5. Kees Inc.
6. Ductmate Industries Inc"Sandwich"Access Door
7. National Controlled Air Inc.
8. Greenheck
9. Elmdor
2.08 FLEXIBLE EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Provide flexible equipment connections between ductwork and equipment. See Section 23 33 00-
HVAC Specialties.
Job Number 2170712.00 STEEL DUCTWORK
2331 13- 4/7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.09 VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible,and as
indicated.
B. Fabricate splitter dampers of same material and gage as duct to 24 inches(600 mm)size in either
direction,and two gages heavier for larger sizes,secured with continuous hinge or rod,operated with
minimum 1/4-inch (6 mm)diameter rod.
C. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 30 inch (240 x 760 mm).
D. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12 x 72 inch (300 x
825 mm).Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with
suitable hardware.
E. Except in round ductwork 12 inches(300 mm) in diameter and smaller, provide end bearings.
F. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.Where width
exceeds 30 inches(750 mm), provide regulator at both ends.
2.10 DUCT HANGERS
A. See Section 23 05 29- Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping& Equipment.
2.11 DUCT SEALANT AND ADHESIVES
A. Duct Sealant technical makeup shall be water based,solvent-free and of the synthetic latex family.
Sealants shall be UL 181 Listed, meet all SMACNA pressure and seal classes and be rated to± 15 inches
water gauge. Sealants shall have flame spread of 0 and smoke development of 0 when tested in
accordance to ASTM E-84. They shall be formulated to withstand working temperatures of-25°F to
+200°F. All sealants shall exceed 500 hours under ASTM C-732 (Artificial Weathering)and pass ASTM C-
734(Low Temperature Flexibility after Artificial Weathering). All sealants shall be of an elastomeric
nature, have a minimum weight of 12 pounds and a minimum solids content by weight of 66%±2%
Sealants shall be resistant to cracking, peeling, mold and mildew. Sealants shall also have excellent
water and UV resistance. Sealants shall meet FDA, USDA and EPA standards as well as meet NFPA 90A
and 90B requirements. Sealant shall be Design Polymerics DP 1010 or DP 1020 duct sealant or equal.
B. Solvent based duct sealant VOC shall be less than or equal to 50 g/I and be UL 723 Classified with a
flame spread of 0 and a smoke development of 0. Sealant shall have passed 1000 hours of QUV
accelerated outdoor aging testing. Sealant shall be Design Polymerics DP 1090 duct sealant or equal.
1. All traverse joints, longitudinal seams and penetrations in duct systems shall be sealed with duct
sealant of the type specified. Spiral lockseams are not longitudinal seams and do not require duct
sealant. All sealant shall be applied per the manufactures' recommendations. Joints that are not
fully welded shall be sealed. For spiral and flat oval duct slip connections; coat both the female
and male ends. The slip connections should then be brushed over with an additional coat 2 to 3
inches wide 20 to 40 mils thick.
2. All conditioned air supply ducts, return ducts and fresh air intakes shall have all joints and seams
sealed or welded,except spiral seams round and flat oval ducts,which are exempt.
3. Seal sealants and joint sealants shall not be used as a substitute for good workmanship. No
ductwork will be covered or installed until inspected and pressure tested if necessary.
C. Gaskets for TDC,TDF and applied flange connections shall meet all SMACNA pressure and seal classes.
The gasket shall meet UL 723,ASTME E-84, NFPA 90A and 90B requirements as well as FDA, USDA and
EPA standards. The tape shall be 5/8 inches by 3/16 inches and applied according to the manufactures'
directions. Expanded or extruded foam gaskets are not acceptable. Gasket shall be Design Polymerics
DP 1040 Butyl Gasket Tape or equal.
D. Exterior Ductwork: Sealant shall be Design Polymerics DP 1090,or equal.
Job Number 2170712.00 STEEL DUCTWORK
2331 13- 5/7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.12 DUCT CLOSURE COLLARS
A. General: Closure collars shall provide closure of opening between duct and opening in element
penetrated and shall abut tight up to and overlap duct and shall consist of rolled angle material (for
round ducts)and welded framed angles(for rectangular/round ducts).
B. Size: Closure collars shall be sized to match duct/opening applied to and shall have minimum 2-inch
overlap on duct side and 2-inch overlap at opening/penetrated element side but shall completely cover
opening in element penetrated with minimum 1-inch overlap to undisturbed element(i.e.,wall,floor,
etc.).
C. Material: Closure collars shall be fabricated of 20-gauge galvanized steel for ducts 15 inches diameter
and less and shall be fabricated of 18-gauge galvanized steel duct for all larger ducts and all square and
rectangular ducts.
2.13 TURNING VANES
A. Turning vanes may be either Contractor or factory fabricated. Factory fabricated vanes shall be Barber
Colman "Airturns"or approved.
B. Vanes and runners shall be fabricated of minimum 24 gauge galvanized.
C. Turning vanes shall comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. For duct widths less than
19 inches,vanes may be single wall construction;for widths greater than 19 inches,vanes shall be
double wall "airfoil"type.
D. Turning vanes shall be equally spaced, parallel to each other,and securely attached to runners.
E. For elbows where the inlet and outlet dimensions are not the same, modify vane shape or angle to
provide optimum turning.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Ducts:
1. Straight and smooth on inside with joints neatly finished unless otherwise directed.
2. Duct panels through 48-inch dimension having acoustic duct liner need not be crossbroken or
beaded.
3. Crossbreak unlined ducts and duct panels larger than 48 inch or bead 12 inches on center.
4. Securely anchor ducts to building structure with screws.
5. Brace and install ducts so they shall be free of vibration under all conditions of operation.
6. Round, horizontal ducts shall be hung with bands,which extend the entire perimeter of the duct.
7. Ducts shall be braced and guyed to prevent lateral or horizontal swing.
8. Ducts shall not bear on top of structural members.
9. Make duct take-offs to branches, registers,grilles,and diffusers as detailed on Drawings.
10. Ducts shall be large enough to accommodate inside duct liner. Dimension shown on Drawings are
net clear inside dimensions after duct liner has been installed.
11. Install internal ends of slip joints in direction of flow. Make joints airtight using specified duct
sealer.
12. Cover horizontal and longitudinal joints on exterior ducts two layers of Hardcast tape installed with
Hardcast HC-20 adhesive according to Manufacturer's recommendations.
13. All exposed ducts shall be spiral.
14. Provide duct transitions to equipment openings.
B. Duct Liner:
1. Adhere insulation to sheet metal with full coverage of a UL listed adhesive.
2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners as indicated by SMACNA or manufacturer. Pin
length should be as recommended by the liner manufacturer.
Job Number 2170712.00 STEEL DUCTWORK
2331 13- 6/7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3. All exposed edges of the fibrous type liner must be factory or field coated. For systems operating
at 4000 fpm or higher,a metal nosing must be installed in all liner leading edges.
4. Repair fibrous type liner surface penetrations with UL listed adhesive.
5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to
allow for insulation thickness.
6. Provide duct liner for all return air ducts unless specifically excluded in Section 23 07 13.
7. Provide liner for all supply duct unless specifically excluded from Section 23 07 13.
C. Turning Vanes:
1. Install turning vanes in all square duct turns,and at locations shown on drawings.
2. Securely attach turning vane runners to ductwork.
D. Flexible Connections: See Section 23 33 00-HVAC Specialties.
E. Balancing Dampers:
1. Provide each take-off with an adjustable volume damper to balance that branch.
2. Anchor dampers securely to duct.
3. Install dampers in main ducts within insulation.
4. Dampers in branch ducts shall fit against sheet metal walls, bottom and top of duct, and be
securely fastened. Cut duct liner to allow damper to fit against sheet metal.
F. Grilles, Registers,and Diffusers: Install and anchor securely.
G. Painting of Ductwork: Paint ductwork visible through registers,grilles,and diffusers flat black.
H. Ductwork Leakage Criteria:
1. All transverse joints and longitudinal seams shall conform to SMACNA's Class A sealing
requirements as defined on page 1-6 of the 1985 SMACNA Manual, First Edition.
2. Constant Volume Systems/Supply Ductwork
a. Allowable Leakage—per SMACNA
3. Constant Volume Systems/Return Ductwork
a. Return Ductwork—per SMACNA
4. Variable Air Volume Systems/Supply Ductwork
a. Fan to VAV Boxes-- 1%of design cfm
b. VAV Boxes to Registers--2%of design cfm
S. Variable Air Volume Systems/Return Ductwork
a. Return Ductwork--2%of design cfm
I. Ductwork Leakage Testing:
1. Duct leakage testing is required for all duct systems constructed to a pressure class of 3" water
column or greater per the 2015 Washington State Energy Code,Section C403.2.8.3.3.
2. Installed ductwork shall be tested prior to installation of access doors,take-offs, insulation,etc.
3. All leak testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer or representative of the Engineer. The
Contractor shall give the Engineer 72 hours notice prior to testing. Any testing not witnessed by
the Engineer or his/her representative,shall be considered invalid and will be redone.
4. Ductwork shall be tested in accordance with the requirements outlined in the SMACNA HVAC Air
Duct Leakage Test Manual and shown to have a (CL) less than or equal to 4.0.
5. Duct leakage, in excess of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Manual, shall be repaired and have the
test re-performed until the leakage rate is within acceptable levels.
6. Submit leakage test report identifying on a plan all the ducts tested and tested leakage rate.
J. Duct Cleanliness Criteria: Unless otherwise specified,the delivery,storage,and installation of all un-
lined ductwork shall comply with the intermediate duct cleanliness level of SMACNA Duct Cleanliness
for New Construction Guidelines. All lined and acoustic duct shall comply with the advanced level.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 STEEL DUCTWORK
2331 13- 7/7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 33 00
HVAC SPECIALTIES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Includes, but not limited to,furnishing and installing specified material as described in Contract
Documents.
B. Filters used in air handling units and heat pumps.
C. Flexible ductwork from supply air branch duct runouts to diffusers where indicated on drawings.
D. Section Includes:
1. Backdraft dampers.
2. Filters and filter housing.
3. Flexible connections.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions
B. Division 01
C. Section 20 00 00-General Mechanical Requirements
D. Section 23 3113-Steel Ductwork
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Filters
B. Filter housing
C. Flexible ductwork
D. Flexible equipment connections
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Filters(Summarized list including equipment tag and size and quantity of filter per unit.)
1. Provide dates or projected dates of extra filter replacement.
B. Airflow station maintenance and calibration.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
Not Applicable
2.02 FILTERS
A. 2" MERV 8:
1. General: 30% efficient filters as specified herein shall be medium efficiency, pleated panel type,
disposable filters; Farr 30/30 or approved and shall have an average efficiency of 25-30%
atmospheric and 90-92%arrestance by ASHRAE Standard 52-76 unless instructed otherwise.
2. Filter Housings: Shall be sized to fit furnished unit or duct to be installed in and provide minimum
filter sizes to obtain a maximum filter velocity of 300 fpm.
3. Resistance: Initial resistance of a 24"x24"x2"filter handling 2000 CFM shall not exceed 0.31"w.g.
4. Duct Holding Capacity: Shall be no less than 60 grams per square foot of face area at 1.0"w.g.
Job Number 2170712.00 HVAC SPECIALTIES
23 33 00- 1/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
5. Size: Filters shall be 2" deep (unless indicated otherwise), with number and sizes indicated, or as
required to give minimum nominal face area as scheduled on drawings.
6. Provide a filter pull strap for all multiple filter sets longer than 24 inches.
7. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Farr Co.
b. Airguard
C. Purolator
d. Eco-Air
2.03 FILTER HOUSINGS-FAN COIL UNITS
A. Shall be fabricated and furnished as part of the fan coil units.
2.04 FILTER HOUSINGS-DUCT MOUNTED
A. Filter housings shall be factory or Contractor fabricated of not less than 20-gauge galvanized steel.
B. Housing shall have access doors on two sides,constructed of minimum 20-gauge galvanized steel and
shall be hinged type with minimum of two heavy-duty latches(Ventlock or equal) and have neoprene
sponge gasketing.
C. Holding frames shall be constructed of minimum 20-gauge galvanized steel,with U-type bearing
channels, polyurethane gasketing on surfaces adjacent to filters.
2.05 TEMPORARY AIR INLET FILTERS
A. Type: Glass fiber or synthetic material blanket type filter media. Inlets and outlets shall be MERV 8 and
unit shall be same as final.
B. Capacity: Shall have an average arrestance no less than 64%; dust holding capacity of 172 grams.
C. Size: Minimum 1"thick cut to size as required to cover inlets.
2.06 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK
A. Formable,flexible,circular duct shall have a fiberglass scrim (or equivalent)and retain its cross-section,
shape, rigidity,and shall not restrict air flow after bending.
B. Normal 1-1/2 inches thick,3/4 Ib/cu ft density fiberglass insulation with airtight,see-through
polyethylene or polyester core,sheathed in seamless vapor barrier jacket factory installed over flexible
assembly.
C. Assembly including insulation and vapor barrier,shall meet Class 1 requirements of NFPA 90A and be
UL 181 rated,with flame spread of 25 or less and smoke developed rating of 50 or under.
D. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Wiremold
2. Flexible Air Movers Inc.
3. J.P. Lamborn
4. General Flex Corp.
5. Young&Co. Mfg 165
6. Thermaflex'GKM'
7. Cleavaflex
Job Number 2170712.00 HVAC SPECIALTIES
23 33 00- 2/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.07 FLEXIBLE EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A. General: 30 oz.closely woven UL approved glass fabric,double coated with neoprene. Fire retardant,
waterproof,airtight, resistant to acids and grease,and withstand constant temperatures of 2S0°F.
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Ventglas by Ventfabrics
2. DuroDyne MFN
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for structural rigidity,
strength,anchors,and other conditions affecting performance of heat exchangers.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Filters and Filter Housing:
1. Contractor to install temporary filters to provide temporary sealing of all duct systems during the
construction period to prevent the entry of dirt, dust and debris into the duct systems. These
systems that are operated during the construction period shall have temporary filters installed
over all inlets and filters installed in the air handling equipment. Filters installed in equipment shall
be same type as final filters required for the units. Temporary air inlet type filters shall be taped
over all inlets to completely filter all air drawn into the systems.
2. Contractor to provide and install four(4)complete sets of all filters as scheduled below:
a. At equipment start-up.
b. Prior to balancing system.
C. Three (3) months after building occupancy.
d. During the one-year warranty to be scheduled with Owner.
3. Construct and install filter housings to prevent passage of unfiltered air. Provide sheet metal
blanks,felt, rubber,and/or neoprene seals as necessary.
4. Furnish Owner with schedule of filter sizes for heat pump.
B. Flexible Equipment Connections:
1. Provide insulated flexible equipment connections between ducts and vibrating equipment. Fans
which are internally isolated with spring isolators do not require flexible connections, unless
indicated on the plans.
2. Install flexible connections with sufficient slack to permit 2 inches of horizontal or vertical
movement of ducts or equipment at connection point without stretching the flexible material.
C. Flexible Ductwork:
1. Install duct in fully extended condition free of sags and kinks, using ten-foot maximum lengths.
2. Make duct connections by coating exterior of duct collar for 3 inches with duct sealer and securing
duct in place over sheet metal collar with 1/2-inch-wide metal cinch bands and sheet metal screws.
Tape exterior of flex to duct ahead of damper.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 HVAC SPECIALTIES
23 33 00- 3/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 36 00
VAV TERMINAL BOX UNITS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: Furnish and install specified material as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Sections: General Conditions and Division 1 apply to this Section.
1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Fan terminal boxes
B. VAV Shut-off boxes
C. Sound Data (discharge, intake,and radiated)
1.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Submittal Data
B. Unit Operation and Maintenance Manual
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Trane
B. Titus
C. Nailor
D. Price
E. ENVIRO-TEC(ETI)
2.02 FAN TERMINAL VAV BOX
A. Fan Terminal Box Unit:
1. Horizontal constant fan series.
2. Standard UL approved unit consists of: Casing, fan, motor and drive, coils, single point electrical
connection, control power transformer, fan relay, control box, filter section, and electrical
components
B. Casing:
1. Single wall constructed of 22-gauge minimum galvanized steel. Provide with flange at outlet and
inlets for duct connections.
2. Insulated with 1", 1.55 lb./cu.ft. density glass fiber, coated to retard erosion, meets NFPA 90A and
U L 181.
3. Entire bottom panel to be removable for service of components.
C. Fan, Motor and Drive:
1. Forward curved, centrifugal type, aluminum wheel with factory-built housing and inlet cones,
direct drive.
2. Fans are statically and dynamically balanced.
3. Motors to be permanently lubricated, permanent split capacitor type with thermal overload
protection.
4. Motors rated for 100,000-hour life.
Job Number 2170712.00 VAV TERMINAL BOX UNITS
23 36 00- 1/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
5. Motors to be factory run tested in unit.
6. ECM motor with factory mounted controller to change fan motor speed. Adjustment knob located
external to control panel.
7. Fan Control Relay-24 VAC coil, rated as required for fan motor,suitable for connection to terminal
unit controller.
D. Damper Assemblies of 16-gauge,galvanized steel shall be multiple opposed blade construction
arranged to close at 45 degrees from full open to minimize air turbulence. Damper blades shall be
fitted with flexible seals for tight closure. In the fully closed position,air leakage past the closed
damper shall not exceed 2%of the nominal catalog rating a 3"w.g. inlet static pressure as rated by
ASHRAE Standard 130. Each unit shall be complete with factory mounted DDC controls including
actuators,which shall be fully coordinated with Controls Contractor prior to equipment ordering.
Gauge tap ports shall be supplied in the piping between the flow pick up and the controller.
2.03 SHUT-OFF VAV BOX
A. Casing:
1. Unit casing shall be 22-gauge,galvanized steel with round or flat oval inlets(flanged).
2. Units shall be internally lined with 1" dual density fiberglass insulation. Edges shall be sealed
against airflow erosion. Units shall meet NFPA 90A and UL 181 standards.
B. Inlet Damper Assemblies shall be of galvanized steel construction with a fully closed leakage rate no
greater than 2%at 3.0"wg. Damper blades shall be fitted with flexible seals for tight closure. In the
fully closed position,air leakage past the closed damper shall not exceed 2%of the nominal catalog
rating a 3"w.g. inlet static pressure as rated by ASHRAE Standard 130. Each unit shall be complete with
factory mounted DDC controls including actuators,which shall be fully coordinated with Controls
Contractor prior to equipment ordering. Gauge tap ports shall be supplied in the piping between the
flow pick up and the controller.
2.04 ELECTRIC COILS
A. Provide electric coils sized and staged per equipment schedule.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Physical size and noise criteria will be strictly enforced. Approved manufacturers are listed for quality
only, not for noise and size. It is up to the equipment supplier to provide equal VAV boxes to those
listed on the schedule.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 VAV TERMINAL BOX UNITS
23 36 00- 2/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 37 00
AIR TERMINALS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To:
1. Furnish and install complete,all air terminals described in Contract Documents.
2. Ceiling diffusers with damper.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions and Division 1 apply to this Section.
B. Section 20 00 00-General Mechanical Conditions.
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Grilles, registers,and diffusers
1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not Applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GRILLES,REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS(GRD)
A. Shall be as scheduled on drawings.
B. Provide the various grilles, registers and diffusers shown on the plans and of the various types herein
before specified.All terminals with prime-coat finish shall be installed before the walls and ceiling is
painted, in order that they may be finish painted by the General Contractor. Those with factory finish
or aluminum construction shall be installed after the walls and ceilings are painted.All air terminals
located in shower,toilet rooms, locker and dressing rooms shall be of aluminum construction w/baked
off-white finish.All other Air Terminals shall be of a standard steel construction;wall-mounted
terminals shall be prime coat finish; ceiling diffusers,exhaust and return air terminals shall have
factory-applied baked enamel finish,color as selected by Architect.
C. Approved Manufacturers: (subject to submittal approval):
1. Anemostat
2. Nailor
3. Kees
4. Krueger
5. Price
6. Titus
7. Tuttle& Bailey
8. Shoemaker(except 700MA)
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Bird Screen: 1/2-inch mesh,constructed of either 0.051-inch aluminum wire or 19-gauge galvanized
steel wire.
B. Insect Screen: 14 x 18,0.009"galvanized steel mesh.
Job Number 2170712.00 AIR TERMINALS
23 37 00- 1/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. The interior of duct connection including opposed blade damper and all visible duct interiors at
connection shall be painted matte black.
B. Each air terminal shall be installed with a spun rubber gasket between the flange and the frame or wall.
C. Each air terminal with flexible duct connection shall have a square-to-round transition adapter box.
D. Anchor securely into openings.
E. All air terminals that supply, return,and/or exhaust air,which are not required to have an OBD,shall be
provided with a volume damper.
F. Provide round neck to flex duct reducers as required.
G. Provide bird screened openings(1/2" mesh)on all duct openings where indicated and where openings
do not have grilles or registers.
H. Provide insect screen where indicated on drawings.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 AIR TERMINALS
23 37 00- 2/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 8146
WATER TO AIR HEAT PUMPS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Not Limited To: Furnish and install material as described in Contract Documents.
B. Related Sections: General Conditions, Division 1,and Section 20 00 00 apply to this Section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications: Heat pump units shall be started up,checked out,and adjusted by Unit Manufacturer's
authorized factory trained service mechanic.
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Each unit shall be UL labeled.
1.03 WARRANTY
A. All systems and control equipment shall be inspected and serviced or adjusted as required for optimum
and satisfactory performance a minimum of four(4)times during the first calendar year after date of
final acceptance. The first inspection shall be made approximately thirty(30)days,after final
acceptance and the final inspection shall be made during the eleventh month thereafter. This
Contractor shall warrant the systems to be free from defects in material,equipment,and workmanship
under normal use and service and any time within one(1)year from date of final acceptance,with
repair or replacement without cost to the Owner,any material,equipment or workmanship found to be
defective.
B. In addition to the above one-year warranty,all motor compressors furnished under this Contract shall
be warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for an
additional four(4)years. At the end of the first year the Contractor shall present a service contract to
the Owner,which would cover the above and filters.
1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Equipment
B. Fan Curve
C. Sound Data
1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Submittal Data
B. Operation and Maintenance Manual
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Florida Heat Pump
B. Trane
C. Water Furnace
D. Daikin
Job Number 2170712.00 WATER TO AIR HEAT PUMPS
2381 46- 1/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.02 WATER TO AIR HEAT PUMPS
A. All units must meet or exceed the latest Washington State Energy Code(WSEC)COP and EER
requirements to be acceptable.
B. Units:
1. System shall be reverse cycle water-to-air conditioning units of type, size, and capacity as detailed
in this section and accompanying drawings.
2. Provide water source heat pumps, packaged horizontal units as indicated on drawings. Units shall
be serviceable from the front and have a choice of return air positions.
3. All units shall be listed with UL or ETL and CSA and bear appropriate label. Unit shall be
constructed of heavy gauge galvanized sheet metal with the base pan made of a minimum of 16-
ga. for rigidity and acoustical barrier. All interior surfaces shall be lined with 1/2" dual density
insulation that enhances sound absorption in both the low and high frequency ranges. The drain
pan will be coated with UL listed, Archem fireproof coating for corrosion protection. Cabinet shall
be painted with one coat of epoxy primer and two coats of lacquer acrylic paint. All water
connections shall be female pipe threaded and mounted flush to the cabinet exterior.
4. Unit control panel shall include, but not be limited to: Complete factory-wired high and low
pressure switch (freeze stats not acceptable); compressor and blower motor contactors and the
impedance relay to avoid recycling of the compressor while off on safety. Also included is the 24V
transformer for field control wiring connections.
5. Units include all refrigeration components including the hermetic compressor, reversing valve, air
refrigerant coil, capillary tube or expansion valve refrigerant metering device and water to
refrigerant heat exchanger. Units shall also have high and low pressure access ports for service
evaluation.
a. Compressor: Hermetic construction with internal and external vibration isolation.
Compressor to be contained in a separate acoustical lined section and mounted on 16 ga. hat
channels to minimize sound transmission. Provide compressor crankcase heater.
b. Air Coil: Shall be of staggered copper tube construction with aluminum fins not exceeding 14
fins per inch.
C. Heat Exchanger: Coaxial (tube in tube) refrigerant to water heat exchanger shall be with
copper inner water tube and steel refrigerant outer tube design, rated to withstand 450 psig
refrigerant working pressure.
6. Blower/motor assembly shall be easily removable for service through the cabinet access panel.
The centrifugal blower shall be of the dynamically balanced, double inlet type. All units through
five tons nominal capacity shall have direct drive thermally protected PSC motors with three speed
taps. Taps shall have spade connections and be brought to an accessible location on box exterior.
Belt driven units shall be provided with variable pitch sleeves. The motors on all sizes shall be
isolated from the fan housing with rubber isolators.
7. Each unit shall include a factory-mounted discharge air duct collar for easy connection to field
ductwork.
8. Each horizontal unit less than five tons shall be supplied with four heavy metal hanging brackets
and rubber vibration isolators to suspend and isolate the unit from the building structure.
9. Heat pumps shall be equipped with a factory mounted preheat/precool coil piped in parallel with
condenser. Field installation of coils is not acceptable.
10. Heat pumps shall be equipped with factory-installed welded hermetic compressor with internal
and external anti-vibration mounting. Compressor shall be contained in a separate acoustical lined
section of the heat pump cabinet, totally isolated from the conditioned air stream. It shall be
protected by the heat pump manufacturer's five(5)year limited warranty.
11. Provide unit with drain pan overflow cutout. Cutout shall disable heat pump when condensate line
becomes plugged and condensate level rises in drain pan.
12. Refrigerant: Unit shall be fully charged at the factory with refrigerant that conforms to the latest
EPA requirements.
Job Number 2170712.00 WATER TO AIR HEAT PUMPS
2381 46- 2/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
13. Valves: High and low side service valves shall be provided on each refrigerant circuit for servicing
the refrigerant circuit.
14. Filters: As specified in Section 23 33 00.
15. Controls:
a. General: Unit shall be furnished with devices that are compatible with the Section 23 09 00
control system. Unit shall have all necessary inter-connections, relays, transformers,
terminals, and wiring to properly control the unit's compressor, reversing valve, fan, and
safety cut-outs. All control devices shall be located in an accessible control box within the
unit. Unit control shall have the fan interlocked with the compressor to be on whenever the
compressor is on.
b. Condensate Overflow: Units shall have a condensate overflow switch in the drain pan to shut
down compressor operation when the pan is full.
16. Condensate Removal Pump: Provide corrosion resistant, all plastic body and impeller. Furnish
with mercury float switch actuated by 3/4"water rise for automatic operation. 115V-1 phase, 1/60
H.P.,fan cooled.
17. Provide freeze sensor for system without glycol.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install units in locations shown on plans and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Piping: Provide condensate, hydronic loop supply,and hydronic loop return piping connected to unit.
No hydronic loop piping connections shall be made to the heat pumps until lines are thoroughly flushed
and cleaned.
C. Unit Protection: Units shall be protected during construction to prevent debris from depositing on the
unit.
D. Horizontal Units:
1. Pitch units towards condensate drain outlet to facilitate condensate drainage.
2. Hung Units: Support units with hangers, rods, and manufacturer furnished clips and vibration
isolators.
3. Drain Pan: Provide drain pans below each unit; pipe drain pan to nearest point of drainage.
E. Provide condensate removal pump if drain pan is installed too low for proper condensate drain.
Coordinate with E.C.for 115V connection.
3.02 START-UP
A. Initial Checks: Prior to operating units,checks shall be made to insure that adequate voltage,water
flow,duct connections,electrical connections,control connections,crankcase heaters(where
applicable),and other items as listed by the manufacturer are properly provided/connected and
operating to insure safe and proper unit operation.
B. Testing and Adjustment: Operate unit in various modes of operation to test for proper operation,
including fan rotation,proper damper travel (where applicable), proper cooling/heating,correct
interface to other controls(time clock,fans,etc.), purging of air from coils,etc. Make necessary
adjustments per manufacturer's directions.
C. Final Check: When testing and adjustment is complete,a final check of each unit shall be done by the
manufacturer's authorized service representative to verify proper unit operation.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 WATER TO AIR HEAT PUMPS
2381 46- 3/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 23 90 00
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Includes But Limited To: Demolition and maintaining existing systems.
B. Related Sections: General Conditions, Division 1 and Section 20 00 00 apply to this Section.
1.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
Not applicable
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not applicable
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DEMOLITION
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all existing Mechanical equipment
including, but not limited to piping,fixtures, HVAC equipment,ductwork in areas shown on the
drawings and indicated thereon.
B. The Mechanical Contractor shall also be responsible for the removal and/or relocation of all Mechanical
equipment that will interfere with installation and operation of any new construction indicated or
required.
C. Any existing equipment to which modifications are made under this contract shall be painted and
labeled in accordance with specifications for new materials.
D. All Mechanical equipment(other than piping)to be removed shall remain the property of and shall be
transported,stored,or disposed as directed by the Owner. This will be at no cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
23 90 00- 1/1
-- TACOMA OFFICE
6021 12th Street East, Suite 200
Tacoma,WA 98424
��®® Phone (253)922-0446
Fax (253)922-0896
RENTON CITY ATTORNEY&POLICE TRAINING CENTER
BCE PROJECT NO.218-295.00
J U LY 15,2019
Notice:
The following list of specifications and drawings represents those documents that were prepared under the
provisions of the Revised Code of Washington RCW 18.43, by BCE Engineers, Inc. of Tacoma, Washington. The
sealing of this specification and drawings list is provided in accordance with Washington Administrative Code
WAC196-23-020.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION DESCRIPTION NO.OF PAGES
DIVISION 26—ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
26 00 00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 13
26 00 05 ELECTRICAL EXISTING CONDITIONS 2
26 05 19 WIRES AND CABLES 3
26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING 2
26 05 32 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES 3
26 05 33 RACEWAY 4
26 05 34 METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC)AND FITTINGS 3
26 05 36 CABLE TRAYS 2
26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL 10
26 27 26 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 4
26 28 13 FUSES 2
26 28 16 DISCONNECTS AND FUSED SWITCHES 2
26 50 00 LIGHTING 3
DIVISION 27—COMMUNICATION SPECIFICATIONS
27 00 00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 25
27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 8
27 20 00 DATA AND VOICE INFRASTRUCTURE 17
DIVISION 28—ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM 25
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
Job Number 2170712.00 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC - 1/1
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 26 00 00
ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Conform to the General Conditions,Supplementary Conditions,and related work in other Divisions for
all work in Division 26 and 27.See Division 1 for sequence of work.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. It is the intention of this division of the specifications and the accompanying drawings to describe and
provide for the furnishing, installing,testing and placing in satisfactory and successful operation all
equipment, materials,devices and necessary appurtenances to provide a complete electrical system,
together with such other miscellaneous installations and equipment hereinafter specified and/or shown
in the plans.The work shall include all materials,appliances and apparatus not specifically mentioned
herein or noted on the plans, but which are necessary to make a complete working installation of all
electrical systems shown on the plans or described herein. Equipment and devices furnished and
installed under other divisions of this specification (or by the Owner)shall be connected under this
division.The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is binding
as if called for in both.
B. By submitting a bid,the Contractor is acknowledging that he has made a thorough examination of the
Contract Documents,existing site and building conditions,and has determined that these documents
do sufficiently describe the scope of construction work required under this Contract.
1.03 SCOPE OF BASIC BID
A. Included in Division 26 and 27 work is all work and related items necessary to provide all electrical
installations except as specifically excluded. In general,this includes all labor,equipment,tools,etc.,to
complete the electrical work.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A. Temporary Power and Lighting—Division 1
B. Mechanical Control Wiring—See Division 23
C. Cutting and Patching-See Division 1
D. Trenching,backfill and asphalt work—See Division 2
1.05 STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
A. The work shall comply with the latest edition of the applicable Standards and Codes of the following:
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters
NEC National Electrical Code
- - State Electrical Code
NESC National Electrical Safety Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
U.L. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Associated
CBM Certified Ballasts Manufacturers
--- Federal,State and Local Building Codes
Job Number 2170712.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00- 1/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories
B. If any conflict occurs between Government adopted Code Rules and this specification,the codes are to
govern. Nothing in these drawings and specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming
to governing codes.Also,this shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with
any requirements of the plans and specifications which may be in excess of, but not in conflict with,
requirements of the Governing Codes.
1.06 PERMITS&FEES
A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all licenses, permits and inspections required by laws,
ordinances and rules governing work specified herein.The Contractor shall arrange for inspection of
work by the inspectors and shall give the inspectors all necessary assistance in their work of inspection.
B. The Contractor shall consult with and follow the requirements of the local fire, power,telephone,and
television utilities serving the area and shall coordinate his work with them.
C. Utility connection and hook-up charges for power,telephone and television shall be paid by the Owner
directly to the utility. The Electrical Contractor is required to provide any and all coordination necessary
to support the utility connection,file for application of service (or assist the Owner in filing for
application of service)and coordinate dates for service with the utilities.
1.07 DEFINITIONS
A. When "Provide" is used,it shall be interpreted as"furnishing and installing complete in operating
condition".
B. When "Drawings" is used, it shall be interpreted as"all Contract Drawings for all Disciplines".
C. When "Contractors" is used, it shall be interpreted as the Electrical Contractor.
1.08 INTENT OF DRAWINGS
A. The electrical drawings are intended to serve as working drawings for general layout. The equipment
layout is diagrammatic and unless specifically dimensioned or detailed,does not indicate all fittings,
hardware or appurtenances required for a complete operating installation.
B. Anything shown on the drawings but not covered in the specifications,or anything covered in the
specifications but not shown on the drawings,shall be as if covered in both. In case of conflict between
the drawings and specifications,the Engineer will select the method to be used.The Contractor shall be
responsible for verifying all measurements before proceeding with the work.
C. Wiring diagrams are not intended to indicate the exact course of raceways or exact location of outlets.
Raceway and outlet locations are approximately correct and are subject to revision as may be necessary
or desirable at the time of installation. Precise location in every case shall be subject to the Engineer's
approval.
D. The contractor shall review the manufacturer provided installation instructions for each piece of
equipment prior to rough-in. Any conflict between the drawings,specifications and installation
instructions shall be brought to the Engineer's attention immediately. The contractor will not be paid
for any reinstallation required due to failing to comply with manufacturer's recommendations or
requirements unless specifically directed by the engineer, in writing,after the conflict has been
identified.
1.09 PROTECTION
A. The Contractor shall store and guard all equipment before installation and shall protect same,and
replace any equipment that has been damaged prior to final acceptance.See Division 1 for detailed
requirements.
Job Number 2170712.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00- 2/1 3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.10 HOUSEKEEPING
A. All electrical materials shall be kept stored in an orderly fashion protected from heat,cold,and the
weather.
B. All marred surfaces shall be refinished and painted after installation.
C. All debris shall be removed from premises during work,as directed,and at completion of job.
1.11 TEMPORARY USE
A. Temporary or interim use of any and all portions of the electrical system shall be under the supervision
of the Electrical Contractor.
B. Temporary power and lighting for use during construction shall be provided per the requirements of
the Division 1 specifications.
1.12 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall maintain, in addition to any reference drawings,an as-built set of prints,on which
all deviations from the original design shall be drafted in a neat,legible manner with red colored pencil.
This red lined set shall identify all drawing revisions including addenda items,change orders,and
Contractor revisions.The Contractor is responsible to revise panel schedules and load calculations as
required.
B. Drawings shall show locations of all concealed raceway runs larger than 1",giving the number of
conductors and size of raceway. Underground ducts shall be shown with cross section elevations. All
pipe, raceway, manholes or lines of other trades shall be included.
C. The Contractor shall update all references to specific products to indicate products actually installed on
project. This shall include, but not be limited to,lighting fixtures, lighting controls,etc.
D. Upon completion of the Division 26 and 27 work,the Contractor shall deliver the red lined drawings and
one set of neatly marked up as-built drawings to the Engineer for transmittal through the Engineer to
the Owner.
E. Upon completion of the Division 26 and 27 Work,the Contractor shall deliver the red lined drawings
and one set of neatly drafted as-built drawings on electronic media in AutoCAD R-2013 format and full-
size pdf to the Engineer for transmittal through the Engineer to the Owner.
F. See Section 27 00 00 for additional requirements of low voltage systems.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Provide a written warranty that the Division 26 and 27 work is free from mechanical and electrical
defects. Contractor shall replace and repair,to the satisfaction of the Engineer,any parts of the
installation which may fail within a period of 12 months after the certificate of final acceptance or date
of substantial completion, provided that such failure is due to defects in material or workmanship,or
failure to follow the specifications and drawings.
B. See Section 27 00 00 for additional requirements of low voltage systems.
1.14 INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS
A. Operation and maintenance data shall be submitted in accordance with Section 0178 23.
B. A preliminary,complete copy,except for the bound cover,shall be submitted 60 days prior to
completion of the project for checking and review. Five(5) bound,corrected copies shall be delivered
to the Owner 20 days prior to scheduled instruction periods as specified under Section 1.16"Instruction
Periods" after review of the preliminary copy. Obtain a receipt for the manuals and forward a copy of
the receipt to the Engineer with the completed form.
Job Number 2170712.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00- 3/1 3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Manuals shall contain shop drawings,wiring diagrams,operating and maintenance instructions,
replacement parts lists,and equipment nameplate data for all equipment and systems installed under
the project. Signal equipment submittals shall contain step-by-step circuit description information
designed to acquaint maintenance personnel with equipment operation in each mode of operation.
Manuals shall contain original brochures supplied by manufacturers. Xerox copies of originals will not
be accepted.
D. Each type of device provided shall be identified in the O& M Manual using the same identification as
shown on the drawings and specifications.The information included must be the exact equipment
installed not the complete"line"of the Manufacturer. Where sheets show the equipment installed and
other equipment,the installed equipment shall be neatly and clearly identified on such sheets. Parts
lists shall give full ordering information assigned by the original parts manufacturer. Relabeled and/or
renumbered parts information as reassigned by equipment supplier is not acceptable. The following
information shall be provided for each device:
1. Manufacturer's name,address and phone number.
2. Local supplier's name,address and phone number.
3. Complete parts lists including quantities and manufacturer's part numbers.
4. Installation instructions.
5. Recommended maintenance items including maintenance procedure and recommended interval
of maintenance listed in hours of operation,calendar unity or other similar time unit.
E. The O& M Manual shall be assembled as detailed in Section 0170 00. As a minimum,the following
sections shall be broken out:
F. The O& M Manual shall be assembled in a loose leaf,3-ring, hard cover binder and electronically on
compact disc.The information contained in the manuals shall be grouped in an orderly arrangement by
specification index. The manuals shall have a typewritten index and divider sheets between categories
with identifying tabs. The covers shall be imprinted with the name of the job,Owner,Architect,
Electrical Engineer, Division 26 and 27 Contractor,and year of completion. The back edge shall be
imprinted with the name of the job,Owner,and year of completion. As a minimum,the following
selection shall be broken out:
1. Light Fixtures
2. Fire Alarm System
3. Intrusion Alarm
4. Access Control System
5. Audio/Visual Presentation Systems
6. Sound Systems
7. Low Voltage Lighting Control Systems
8. Data Network
9. Uninterruptible Power Supply System
10. Electrical System Protective Device Study
11. Ground Fault Testing Results
G. Wiring Diagrams for each system shall be complete for the specific system installed under the Contract.
"Typical" Line Diagrams will not be acceptable unless properly marked to indicate the exact field
installation.
1.15 WORK NOT INCLUDED
A. Indicated motors,controls,and equipment as described in other divisions shall be furnished by other
trades, but shall be moved,set and wired to electrical controls and power supply by the Electrical
Contractor.
B. Work to be included under this Contract shall be defined on drawings and in these specifications.Any
details beyond these limits are meant only to give installation clarity to that portion which is a part of
this Contract.
Job Number 2170712.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00- 4/1 3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.16 INSTRUCTION PERIODS
A. Upon completion of the work and after all tests and final inspection of the work by the authority(s)
having jurisdiction,the Contractor shall demonstrate and instruct the Owner's designated operation
and maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the various electrical systems. The
Contractor shall arrange scheduled instruction periods with the Owner. The Contractor's
representatives shall be superintendents or foremen knowledgeable in each system and suppliers'
representatives when so specified.
B. Scheduled Instruction periods shall be:
1. Low Voltage Lighting Control Systems 1/2 day
2. Sound Systems 1/2 day
3. Fire Alarm System 1/2 day
4. Security System 1/2 day
S. Access Control System 1/2 day
6. Data Network 1/2 day
7. Uninterruptible Power Supply System 1/2 day
8. Daylighting Control Systems 1/2 day
C. Costs for time involved by Contractor shall be included in the bid.
1.17 COMPLETION OF WORK
A. Upon completion of the Division 26 and 27 work,the Contractor shall comply with requirements of
Section 0170 00 for project closeout.
B. Upon completion of the Division 26 and 27 work,the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer a
completion letter stating that he has fulfilled all the requirements of his Contract for Division 26 and 27
work as set forth in the drawings and specifications and that all items in pre-final inspection lists
submitted by the Engineer have been satisfactorily completed.
C. Arrange for and obtain all required inspections and certificates pertaining to the Division 26 and 27
work and deliver the certificates to the Engineer in triplicate.
D. Prior to or at the time of final inspection,the Contractor shall,as outlined in detail in the specifications,
complete the delivery of all the following items:
1. Completion Letter
2. Certificate of Final Inspection, in triplicate form.
Electrical Inspector COMPLETION OF WORK
Fire Department 26 00 00—1.17
3. Warranty to Owner (with copy for SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
Engineer 26 00 00-1.13
4. Marked Set, Electronic Media Set on GENERAL AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
CD in AutoCAD R-2013 Format, and 26 00 00-1.12
PDF of"As-Built" Electrical Drawings
S. Certificate of Completion and ELECTRICAL SYSTEM PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY 26
Document Requirements for 0573
Protective Device Study
6. Motor Current Readings GENERAL,TESTS
26 05 19—3.03(D)
7. Phase Current Readings GENERAL,TESTS
26 05 19—3.03(E)
8. OHMIC Test Readings GENERAL,TESTS
26 05 19—3.03(B)
9. Ground Fault Settings
Job Number 2170712.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00- 5/1 3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
10. Panelboard and Special Equipment MATERIALS,GENERAL
Shop Drawings and Final Approved 26 00 00—2.03
List of Materials Installed
11. Certificate of Feeders Torque WIRES AND CABLES
Results 26 05 19
12. * Receipt from person to whom LIGHTING FIXTURES
delivered the following spare 26 50 00
glasses, plastic diffusers, lamps, and
ballast fuses.
13. * Receipt from person to whom LOW VOLTAGE—27 00 00
delivered the following: Spare FIRE ALARM—28 3100
Elements for Fire Detectors, Fuses FUSES—26 28 13
for Switches, Spare Keys for SWITCHES& RECEPTACLES—26 27 26
Panelboards, receptacles switches,
plugs,etc.
14. Wiring diagrams, Maintenance GENERAL, INSTRUCTIONS& MANUALS-
Manuals, Operation Instructions, 26 00 00-1.14
and Brochures(5 sets minimum)
* Secure delivery instructions from Architect for delivery to Owner.
1.18 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS
A. This Contractor shall submit to the Architect as described in Section 0160 00. When shop drawings are
submitted electronically,they shall be submitted as described in Paragraph B below.
B. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect no later than 30 days after the award of the Contract,a
minimum of seven (7)copies,each bound under separate cover,with index,detailed shop drawings,to
include:
1. Manufacturer's Catalog Data.
2. Complete Physical and Technical Data.
3. Wiring Diagrams.
4. Detailed Reference (written or highlighted) noting compliance with the appropriate specification
section and applicable item numbers within that section.
5. Other Descriptive Data as required by the Architect/Engineer.
C. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect electronic shop drawings in PDF format. Electronic Shop
Drawings that are submitted without following the format as outlined below will be returned for
corrections without any further review.
1. A separate PDF file shall be submitted for each Division including All submittal items for that
Division as outlined below:
a. Division 26—Electrical
b. Division 27—Telecommunications
2. The contractor shall provide either a digital or hardware method of transporting the electronic
submittal to the Architect. Files larger than 10Megabytes shall not be sent via email and shall be
transferred via an FTP or similar file transfer protocol, PC compatible CD or PC compatible Thumb
Drive. Divisions shall not be broken up into separate files for transfer via email.
3. Each Specification PDF shall be submitted with the following format and salient attributes:
a. Cover page including:
1. Project Title as indicated on the plans
2. Project Location including Address,City,State,Country
3. Prime Contractor name, phone number,and email address
4. Sub-Contractor name,phone number,and email address
5. Specification Division Number and Title
Job Number 2170712.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00- 6/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
b. Index Page outlining each specification section included in the submittal. This list shall be
linked to a corresponding Specification Section Divider for each section.This link shall enable
the reviewer to jump to a specification section by clicking the item in the list.
c. Specification Section Divider:Shop Drawings shall be divided by specification section and each
section shall begin with a Divider Page outlining the Specification Number,Title, and a list of
Submittal Items for the section. In the upper right-hand corner of the divider page,a Link shall
be provided returning the reviewer to the Index Page.
d. Each Submittal Item listed on the Specification Section Divider shall be linked to the specific
item being submitted. Each Submittal Item shall be hi-lighted Yellow with a Note Reference to
the specific paragraph giving the submittal requirements.
e. Each page of the submittal shall be numbered in the Bottom Right corner of the page. Page
numbering shall be Roman Numerals for all pages before the First Specification Section. Each
Specification Section page shall be numbered with the Specification Section number, a dash,
and the page number in the Specification Section.
f. Specification items shall be specifically hi-lighted as they apply to the project rather than hi-
lighting an entire product family. Items that do not apply to this project shall be crossed out
with a Red X.
g. The PDF file shall be not be protected to prevent printing, selecting of text within the
document,or extracting of pages from the document.
D. Shop drawings shall be submitted complete,at one time and each item indexed with dividers and
separated per specification section and shall be,but not limited to the items of equipment listed below:
1. Motor starters and controls designating where items are intended to be used and equipment being
controlled.
2. Disconnect Switches
3. Fuses and spare fuse cabinet
4. Electrical System Protective Device Study
5. Lighting Fixtures(Complete)
6. Low Voltage Lighting Control Systems
7. Wiring Devices
8. Back Boxes
9. Coverplates
10. Raceways and Connectors
11. Fire Wall Penetration Seals
12. Cable Tray
13. Copper Wire
14. *Fire Alarm System
15. *Security System
16. *CCTV
17. *Access Control System
18. *Telecommunication System
19. *Sound Systems
20. *Audio/Visual Presentation Systems
21. *Data Network Systems
22. **All Specialty Systems not listed above**
23. Any other items requested by Engineer.
*See Section 27 00 00 for further requirements.
Job Number 2170712.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00- 7/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
E. Within 10 working days after the date of the letter rejecting any items of equipment, lighting fixtures,
or materials as not in accordance with the specifications,Contractor shall submit a new list of items he
proposes to furnish and install in place of those items rejected. If the Contractor fails to submit this new
list within the above specified time,or if any items on this second list are rejected as not being in
accordance with these specifications,the Engineer may select the items which the Contractor shall
furnish and install without change in Contract price or time of completion.
F. The acceptance of a manufacturer's name or product by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of
the responsibility for providing materials and equipment which comply in all details with the
requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for submitting
materials at such a time to allow a minimum of two weeks for Engineer's review.
G. Electrical Drawings for the project have been developed by the Engineer using AutoCAD'" Revision 2013
software.These drawing files will be made available to the Contractor for development of shop
drawings and/or"As-Builts"with a signed waiver of responsibility.
1.19 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Provide Schedule of Values per Division 1 and related project requirements.
B. Division 26 and 27 Breakdown: Provide schedule of values for the following categories(as a minimum):
1. Electrical Mobilization
2. Electrical Submittals
3. Electrical General Project Management,General Design,General Coordination
4. Branch Circuit Materials Rough-in
5. Branch Circuit Materials Rough in—Labor
6. Branch Circuit Trim—Materials
7. Branch Circuit Trim—Labor
8. Panelgear, Disconnects,Starters
9. Panelgear, Disconnects,Starters—Labor
10. Light Fixtures
11. Light Fixtures—Labor
12. Fire Alarm System
13. Security System
14. Data System
15. Systems Equipment—Labor
16. Cable Tray
17. Cable Tray—Labor
18. Commissioning
19. Electrical Punchlist,Closeout,and Owner Training
C. The dollar value for"Electrical Punchlist,Closeout,and Owner Training"shall in no case be less than 2%
of the total dollar value of the Division 26 and 27 work(or as indicated in Division 1,whichever is
higher). The dollar value for"Commissioning"shall in no case be less than 3.0%of the total dollar value
of the Division 26 and 27 work(or as indicated in Division 1,whichever is higher).
D. The Contractor is advised that in addition to payments held out for retainage and project final
completion (i.e. "Electrical Punchlist,Closeout,and Owner Training"),as specified above and in Division
1,the Owner reserves the right to withhold 10%of the funds for any of the above categories until the
systems(of that category) have been proven to operate as specified and have been completely tested
and adjusted.
Job Number 2170712.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00- 8/1 3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COMPETITIVE PRODUCTS
A. Any reference in the specifications to any article,device, product,material,fixture,form or type of
construction by name,make or catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality
and shall not be construed as limiting competition. The Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use
any article,device, product, material,fixture,form or type of construction which in the judgment of the
Engineer,expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. However,any manufacturer not listed as an
accepted Bidder for a specific item must be submitted for acceptance in writing in accordance with
Section 0160 00.
B. Any reference in the specifications to any article,device, product,material,fixture,form or type of
construction by name,make or catalog number shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality
and shall not be construed as limiting competition.The Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use
any article,device, product, material,fixture,form or type of construction which in the judgment of the
Engineer,expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. However,any manufacturer not listed as an
accepted bidder for a specific item must be submitted for acceptance in writing and with descriptive
data verifying equal quality and performance at least ten (10)working days prior to the bid date for
approval.
2.02 MANUFACTURER/EQUIPMENT PRIOR APPROVALS
A. Any manufacturer/equipment not listed as an approved substitute for a specified item must be
submitted for acceptance in accordance with Section 0160 00, in writing,with detailed information to
include:
1. Manufacturer's Catalog Data
2. Complete Physical and Technical Data
3. Wiring Diagrams
4. Detailed reference (written or highlighted) noting compliance with the appropriate Specification
Section and all applicable Specification item numbers within that Section
5. Complete type written index cross referencing all proposed substitutes and specified items
6. Detailed reference to specified items(written or highlighted) noting equal quality and performance
of proposed substitute equipment
7. Other descriptive data,as required by the Engineer
B. If substitute material is determined to be acceptable by the Engineer, it will be included in a subsequent
Addenda prior to bidding. The acceptance of a manufacturer's name or product by the Engineer does
not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing materials and equipment which comply in
all details with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
C. Only materials which are specified or published in addenda as acceptable shall be used.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. All materials must be of the quality herein specified.All materials shall be new,of the best quality and
free from defects.They shall be designed to ensure satisfactory operation and operational life in the
environmental conditions which will prevail where they are being installed.
B. Each type of material shall be of the same make and quality. The materials furnished shall be standard
products of the manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and shall be the
manufacturer's latest standard design.
C. All materials shall be U.L.or E.T.L. listed for the purpose for which they are used.
Job Number 2170712.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00- 9/1 3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
D. Equipment in compliance with U.L.standards but not bearing their label is not acceptable. If the
manufacturer cannot arrange for labeling of an assembled unit at the factory the unit shall be field
evaluated per the Washington State Administrative Code(WAC)and the electrical inspector's
requirements.
2.04 COMPLETE SYSTEM
A. All the systems mentioned shall be complete and operational in every detail except where specifically
noted otherwise. Mention of certain materials in these specifications shall not be construed as
releasing the Contractor from furnishing such additional materials and performing all labor required to
provide a complete and operable system.
2.05 NAMEPLATES
A. Provide nameplates constructed of plastic(black on white) laminated material engraved through black
surface material to white sublayer(attach with screws on NEMA 1 enclosures). EXCEPTION (1):
Emergency distribution system component labeling-white letters on red background. Exception (2):
Series rated systems shall be yellow background with white letters.
1. Switch and Receptacle Labels: Refer to Section 26 27 26
2. Motor Starter and Disconnect Labels: Refer to Section 26 28 16
3. Special Equipment/Outlet Labels: Refer to Appropriate Sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Careful consideration shall be given to clearances under and over beams, pipes and ducts,to provide
proper headroom in all cases.Check drawings to determine heights of all suspended ceilings and size of
pipe shafts where raceway and wire-ways shall run. Coordinate installation of Division 26 and 27 wiring
and equipment with Division 23 and other trades. Where insufficient room for proper installation
appears,obtain clarification from Engineer before any installation is begun.
B. Cutting and Patching:
1. Obtain permission from the Architect and/or Owner's Representative prior to cutting. Locate
cuttings so they will not weaken structural components. Cut carefully and only the minimum
amount necessary. Cut concrete with diamond core drills except where space limitations prevent
the use of such drills.
2. All construction materials damaged or cut into during the installation of this work must be repaired
or replaced with materials of like kind and quality as original materials by skilled labor experienced
in that particular building trade.
3.02 COORDINATION
A. The Contractor is responsible for accomplishing Division 26 and 27. The work shall coordinate with that
of the other Contractors and/or other trades doing work in the building and shall examine all Drawings,
including the several Divisions of Mechanical,Structural,Civil and Architectural,for Construction Details
and necessary coordination. Specific locations of construction features and equipment shall be
obtained from the Contract Documents,field measurements,and/or from the trade providing the
material or equipment. No extra costs will be allowed for failure to obtain this information.
B. All conflicts shall be reported to the Engineer in writing before installation for decision and correction.
Special attention is called to the following items:
1. Door swings to the end that switches will be located on "Strike"side of the door.
2. Location of grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment so that all
electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and other electrical outlets and equipment are clear from and in
proper relation to these items.
Job Number 2170712.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00- 10/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3. Location of cabinets, counters and doors so that electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and equipment
are clear from and in proper relation to these items.
4. Type and height of ceiling.
5. All device measurements referenced on drawings or specifications are to be centered of device
unless noted otherwise.
C. The Contractor will not be paid for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination or
interference with other Contractors or trades. This includes, but is not limited to, removing,replacing,
relocating,cutting,patching,and finishing.
D. The Contractor shall review the installation manual for each device to be installed. If a conflict appears
to occur between the manufacturer's recommended installation practices and the plans or
specifications,notify the Engineer immediately. Final determination shall be by the Engineer. The
Contractor will not be paid for reinstallation due to failure to comply with manufacturer instructions or
design documents.
E. Device and fixture locations may be changed within 15 feet without extra charge if so desired by the
Engineer, before installation.
3.03 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION(RFI)
A. It is our intent to provide a timely response for RFIs regarding Division 26 and 27 work.To further
expedite this process,where a suggestion can be determined or derived at by the initiator of the RFI, it
is required this suggestion be supplied with the submitted RFI. If no suggestion is given where one is
possible,the RFI will be returned as incomplete. All Electrical RFIs shall be written on the form provided
at the back of this section.
3.04 CLEANING AND PAINTING
A. All equipment,whether exposed to the weather or stored indoors shall be covered to protect it from
water,dust and dirt.
B. After installing,all metal finishes shall be cleaned and polished,cleaned of all dirt, rust,cement,plaster,
grease and paint.
C. All equipment with a primer coat of paint shall be given two(2)or more coats of a finish enamel and
scratched surfaces be refinished to look like new. Markings, identification and nameplates shall be
replaced.
3.05 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide identifying engraved bakelite nameplate on all equipment, including pull boxes,to clearly
indicate its use,area served,circuit identification,voltage,and any other useful data.
B. Each auxiliary system,including communications,shall be clearly labeled to indicate its function.
3.06 DEVIATION
A. Deviation from the shop drawings in construction or installation of equipment shall not be made unless
Shop Drawings showing proposed deviations are submitted to and approved by the Engineer. If any
equipment is furnished under this or other divisions with current,voltage or phase ratings that differ
from those shown on the drawings,the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing immediately and
shall not connect said equipment until instructed as to required changes by the Architect. No extension
of time will be granted as a result of such changes.
3.07 EXCAVATIONS
A. All excavations are to be so conducted so that no walls or footings shall be disturbed in any way.
B. Remove all surplus earth not needed for backfilling and dispose of same as directed.
Job Number 2170712.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00- 11/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.08 WIRING METHODS
A. All low voltage wiring shall be in Raceway with Junction Boxes and Fittings where concealed in walls, in
inaccessible ceiling space,or where exposed in finished or unfinished areas.
B. All low voltage wiring shall be in Raceway with Junction Boxes and Fittings.
C. All branch circuit wiring shall be installed in raceway with junction boxes and fittings.
D. Provide access panels as needed for pull boxes and equipment located above ceiling or behind walls.
E. All emergency systems outlet and junction boxes shall have a red plastic tag inside marked critical or life
safety as applicable.
F. Multiple feeder runs shall be rod hung, using a strut type channel with individual one-hole clamps, back
plates and machine screws.
G. Any low voltage cables that are not terminated at both ends shall be tagged and labeled per code.
H. See Section 27 00 00 for additional requirements of low voltage systems.
3.09 PENETRATIONS OF FIRE RATED ELEMENTS
A. Must be made such as to retain that rating.
3.10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide hangers, brackets,and suspension rods and supplementary steel to support equipment.
B. Hangers provided under other divisions shall not be used for support of Division 26 and 27 equipment
unless permitted by Architect/Engineer.
3.11 CHASES AND OPENINGS
A. Provide to the masonry and concrete trades all templates and details of chases,openings in floors and
walls as required for Division 26 and 27 equipment installation.
3.12 PAINTING
A. Painting in general will be covered under another division of this specification,except items furnished
under Division 26 and 27 that are scratched, marred in shipment or installation,shall be refinished by
the Division 26 and 27 Contractor.
3.13 WORKMANSHIP AND OBSERVATION
A. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and none but competent workers shall be employed under
the supervision of a competent foreman. All completed work shall represent a neat and workmanship
like appearance.
B. All work and materials shall be subject to observation at any and all times by representatives of the
Engineer.
3.14 MISCELLANEOUS
A. Provide complete seismic anchorage and bracing for the lateral and vertical support of conduit and
electrical equipment,as required by the International Building Code.
B. Conduits that cross seismic separations shall be installed with flexible connection suitable to
accommodate conditions. Secure raceways on each side of a separation and provide a minimum of 36"
length of flexible conduit to span separation.
Job Number 2170712.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00- 12/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.15 CABLE AND WIRING ROUTED UNDERGROUND OR UNDERSLAB
A. All cables and conductors, both line voltage and low voltage, routed underground or underslab shall be
U.L. listed for installation in wet locations per NEC and WAC codes.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
26 00 00- 13/13
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 26 00 05
ELECTRICAL—EXISTING SYSTEMS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Portions of the existing electrical lighting, power and signal systems are to be removed as detailed on
the drawings.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00—Electrical General Conditions
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EXISTING MATERIALS
A. Existing materials which are a part of the building shall remain the property of the Owner.
2.02 EXISTING MATERIALS RE-INSTALLED
A. Existing materials and equipment that are removed as a part of the work or stored in surplus may be re-
installed as a part of the new system subject to approval of condition suitability by the
Architect/Engineer. The requirements of the specifications(i.e. installation,warranty,testing,etc.)
shall apply as if the materials were new,supplied by the Contractor.
2.03 EXISTING MATERIALS NOT TO BE RE-INSTALLED
A. In coordination with the Architect/Engineer,these materials shall be made available for his inspection
and decision as to whether the Owner will retain possession. Items selected for retention shall be
delivered to a location on the premises selected by the Owner and turned over to him. Take reasonable
care to avoid damage to this material. If the Contractor fails to conform to this requirement,he shall
purchase and turn over to the Owner replacement materials of like kind and quality.
B. All material not selected for retention by the Owner and debris shall be disposed of by the Contractor.
This shall include, but not be limited to, removal of PCB type ballasts and fluorescent lamps which shall
be disposed of in accordance with EPA requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Examine the structure, building,and conditions under which Division 26 work is to be installed for
conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until
deficiencies encountered in installation have been corrected. Report any delay or difficulties
encountered in installation of Division 26 work which might be unsuitable to connect with work by
other divisions of this specification. Failure to report conditions shall constitute acceptance of other
work as being fit and proper for the installation of Division 26 work.
B. Maintain continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain. Existing circuits of equipment shall
remain energized. Circuits which are to remain but were disturbed during demolition shall have
circuits,wiring,and power restored back to original condition.
Job Number 2170712.00 ELECTRICAL- EXISTING SYSTEMS
26 00 05- 1/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.02 DEMOLITION
A. Switchboards, panelboards,signaling systems,other electrical equipment free standing(or surface
mounted), raceway(exposed)and conductors no longer in service as a result of this Contract shall be
removed. Unused raceways or sleeves shall be cut flush at ceiling,floor or wall and filled with grout.
3.03 NEW DEVICES IN REMODEL AREAS
A. Provide surface mounting for devices on existing walls. Where existing boxes are indicated to be
reused,extend box as necessary and provide new devices and plates.
3.04 EXISTING PANELBOARD
A. Any modifications made to existing panels must be incorporated into the existing circuit index on the
panel. If more than three circuits are modified a new typewritten index incorporating the changes to
the existing index shall be installed in the existing panel.
B. Listing shall match circuit breaker arrangements,typically with odd numbers on the left and even
numbers on the right. Room numbers used shall be final room numbers used in the building as verified
with the Owner.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 ELECTRICAL- EXISTING SYSTEMS
26 00 05- 2/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 26 05 19
WIRES AND CABLES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all wire,cable,and terminations complete.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00—Electrical General Conditions
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WIRE AND CABLE(COPPER,600-VOLT)
A. Interior and Above Grade: All wires to be Type THW or RHW. Type THWN/THHN or XHHW wire may be
utilized at Contractors option,subject to code requirements. Wire and cables shall be brought to
project in original containers bearing the underwriters label. Provide Type AVA wire where conductors
are subject to temperature above 167 Degrees F.
2.02 SPLICES
A. Above Grade: Solderless type only. Preinsulated "twist-on"type(limited to size#10 and smaller). Bolt
on compression type with application of preformed insulated cover, heat shrinkable tubing or plastic
insulated tape acceptable for all sizes.
2.03 TERMINATIONS
A. Compression set,bolted or screw terminal.
B. Conductors#12 and smaller shall utilize eye or forked tongue type compression set terminator when
termination is to a bolted or screw set type terminal block or terminal cabinet.
2.04 PLASTIC CABLE TIES
A. Nylon or Equivalent, locking type.
2.05 CABLE TAGS
A. Cable tags shall be installed on all three phase feeder cables.Tags shall be embossed with feeder power
source and circuit number, i.e. panel A-26. Use tag part No. FT201 for cables up to 1-1/2 inch,use FT-
205 for over 1-1/2 inch.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install all wiring in Raceway unless shown or specifically authorized otherwise.
3.02 WIRE SIZE
A. No. 12 AWG minimum for power and lighting circuits.
B. Provide solid wire for No. 10 AWG and smaller,and stranded conductors for No.8 AWG and larger(600)
volts.
Job Number 2170712.00 WIRES AND CABLES
26 05 19- 1/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.03 TESTS
A. In addition to the factory testing of all equipment and cable,the Contractor shall test all wiring
connections for continuity and ground before any fixtures or other loads are connected. Tests shall be
made with a SOOV minimum DC"Megger"type tester. If tests indicate faulty insulation (less that 2
megohms),such defects shall be corrected and tested again. Contractor shall provide all apparatus to
make tests and shall bear all expenses of required testing. Routine operation tests shall be made on all
pieces of equipment to demonstrate that working parts are in operating condition. Results of all tests
shall be recorded and submitted to the Architect. The Contractor shall immediately replace all parts,
which fail to pass the test.
B. Measure the OHMIC value of the Electric Service Entrance metallic"System Ground"with reference to
"Earth Ground" using the"Multiple Ground Rod Fall-In-Potential" method and suitable instruments.
Maximum resistance to ground shall be less than 10 ohms. If this resistance cannot be obtained with
the ground system shown, notify the Architect immediately for further instructions. Provide OHMIC
test results to Engineer.
C. All circuits both in and out of the building shall test out free of grounds,short circuits and other defects.
D. Check and record catalog number and ampere size of controller overload heaters installed, nameplate
full-load amperes,and actual operating amperes of each motor. IMPORTANT: Submit recorded data in
triplicate to the Engineer. Check proper load balance on the electrical system,direction of rotation,
lubrication,and overload protection of all motors before placing in operation.
E. Provide a log of ampere reading for all panels from phase to neutral for 4 wire panels and from phase to
phase for 3 wire panels. These readings shall be taken with all loads activated.
F. The final test of all equipment shall be made on dates designated by the Architect/Engineer and all
readings shall be made in his presence.
G. Feeders shall be checked to ensure all phases are energized before connecting to their respective
motors. Each motor shall rotate in the proper direction for its respective load. Prior to rotation test,all
bearings shall be inspected for proper lubrication.
H. Minimum megger test for equipment shall be as follows:
Equipment Maximum Minimum Test
Voltage Rating Resistance
1,000-Volts or less 2 Megohms
I. Provide certification of torque values for feeder and service entrance conductors per equipment
manufacturer's recommendation.
3.04 CONDUCTOR SIZES,REFERENCED ON PLANS
A. Copper,type THW or RHW unless noted.
3.05 PULLING
A. Use no mechanical means for pulling No.8 AWG conductors and smaller. Powdered soap stone or
approved spray cream shall be the only lubricant used.
3.06 STRIPPING INSULATION
A. Do not ring the cable,always pare or pencil.
3.07 TAPING
A. If used shall be half lapped synthetic tape.
Job Number 2170712.00 WIRES AND CABLES
26 05 1 9- 2/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.08 CONDUCTORS IN PANELS AND SWITCHBOARDS
A. Conductors in panels,switchboards,and terminal cabinets shall be neatly grouped and formed in a
manner to"Fan" into terminals with regular spacing.
3.09 CABLE SUPPORTS
A. Provide conductor support devices as required by code in vertical cable runs.
3.10 RACEWAY SIZES REFERENCED ON DRAWINGS
A. Raceways are sized for copper,type THW, unless otherwise noted. Size all Raceways per code unless
specifically noted to be larger on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 WIRES AND CABLES
26 05 1 9- 3/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. A grounding system shall be provided for neutral ground and equipment ground as required by code.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00—Electrical General Conditions
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Copper,code size,with physical protection where subject to damage. Bare or green insulated.
2.02 GROUND RODS
A. 3/4"x 8'-0"copper clad steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide all grounding for electrical systems and equipment as required by codes and as specified
herein.
3.02 GROUND RODS
A. Provide as shown and/or required. Connect the ground conductor to each rod.
3.03 SIZE OF GROUND WIRE
A. As required by code. Where ground wire is exposed to physical damage or is used outside of building,
protect with conduit.
3.04 GROUND CONNECTION OF WATER PIPING
A. Metal internal piping shall be grounded,as part of this Contract. This includes jumpers for dielectric
fittings.
3.05 GROUND CONNECTION OF BUILDING STEEL
A. Structural metal shall be grounded,as part of this Contract.
3.06 CONNECTION TO THE GROUND BUS
A. Provide connections in accordance with the codes; including but not limited to raceway systems,
switch boa rd/panelboard frames,service neutral,separately derived systems,electrically operated
equipment and devices. No device or equipment shall be connected for electrical service which has a
neutral conductor connected to a grounding conductor or to the frame within the device or equipment.
3.07 METHOD OF CONNECTION
A. Make all ground connections and ground cable splices by thermal welding. Grounding lugs,where
provided as standard Manufacturer's items on equipment furnished,may be used.
Job Number 2170712.00 GROUNDING AND BONDING
26 05 26- 1/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.08 FLEXIBLE RACEWAY
A. Shall not be used for grounding. Install separate ground conductor in all flexible raceway.
3.09 PVC RACEWAY
A. Install separate ground conductor in all PVC raceway as required per code.
3.10 DROP CORDS
A. Shall have a grounding wire and be connected with a grounding type plug and receptacle.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 GROUNDING AND BONDING
26 05 26- 2/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 26 05 32
OUTLET AND PULL BOXES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide outlet and pull boxes to enclose devices,permit the pulling of conductors and for wire splices
and branches.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00—Electrical General Conditions
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 INTERIOR WIRING
A. General: Outlet and pull boxes shall be pressed drawn steel,zinc coated with plaster ring where
applicable. Welded boxes not allowed. Four-inch size minimum. Large pull boxes shall be fabricated
sheet steel,zinc coated or baked enamel finish,with return flange and screw retained cover.
B. Surface Metal Raceway: Boxes of same Manufacture and to match Raceway. Boxes to accommodate
standard devices and device plate.
C. Concrete and Masonry: Boxes for casting in concrete or mounting in masonry walls shall be the type
specifically designed for that purpose.
D. Install pull boxes so as to be accessible after completion of building construction.
E. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be galvanized octagonal 4 inch, 1-1/2-inch-deep(without fixture stud),2-1/8
inches deep(with fixture stud).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ANCHORING
A. All boxes shall be firmly anchored directly or with concealed bracing to building studs or joints. Boxes
must be so attached so that they will not"Rock"or"Shift"when devices are operated.
3.02 FLUSH MOUNTING
A. Except for surface mounted boxes or boxes above accessible ceilings,all boxes shall have front edge
(box or plaster ring)even with the finished surface of the wall or ceiling.
3.03 ELECTRICAL OUTLETS
A. General: Coordinate the work of this section with the work of other sections and trades. Study all
Drawings that form a part of this Contract and confer with various trades involved to eliminate conflicts
between the work of this section and the work of other trades. Check and verify outlet locations
indicated on Architectural Drawings,door swings, installation details, layouts of suspended ceilings and
locations of all plumbing, heating and ventilating equipment.
B. Centered on Built-In Work: In the case of doors,cabinets, recessed or similar features,or where outlets
are centered between such features,such as between a doorjamb and a cabinet, make these outlet
locations exact. Relocate any outlets which are located off center.
C. Vertical and Horizontal Relationships: Where more than one outlet is shown or specified to be at the
same elevation or one above the other,align them exactly on centerlines horizontally or vertically.
Relocate as directed all such outlets(including lighting, receptacle, power signal and thermostat
outlets)which are not so installed,at no additional cost to Owner.
Job Number 2170712.00 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES
26 05 32- 1/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
D. Device Outlet Height: Measure from the finished floor.
*Switches 4 Feet,Set Vertically,to Top of Box
*Receptacles, 18 Inches,Set Vertically to Centerline
Telecommunications
Other As Noted or as Directed by Architect
* Heights may vary. See Drawings for additional information
E. Ceiling Location: For acoustical material locate outlet either at the corner joint or in the center of a
panel,whichever is closer to the normal spacing. Locate all outlets in the same room in the same panel
location.
F. Installed in Sound Walls: Boxes installed in sound walls shall not be installed back to back. All boxes
shall be separated by one stud space and shall be interconnected with flex conduit with a 90' loop.
Where stud space separation is not possible,utilize sound attenuating mastic around each box. 3M Fire
Barrier Moldable Putty Pads MPP+(2.54 mm minimum)or similar.
3.04 ELECTRICAL WORK IN COUNTERBACKS, MILLWORK AND CASEWORK
A. Provide as shown and/or specified. Provide templates,where required,to other trades for drilling and
cutting to ensure accurate location of electrical fixtures(outlets and devices)as verified with the
Architect. Provide all wiring,devices,plates and connections required by said fixture.
3.05 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT
A. For equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the Specifications,or by others. Provide outlet
boxes of sizes and at locations necessary to serve such equipment. An outlet box is required if the
equipment has pigtail wires for external connection,does not have space to accommodate circuit
wiring used. Study equipment details to assure proper coordination.
3.06 BLANK COVERS
A. Provide blank covers or plates over all boxes not covered by equipment.
3.07 JUNCTION OR PULL BOXES
A. Pull and junction boxes shall be installed as shown,and to facilitate pulling of wire and to limit the
number of bends within code requirements. Boxes shall be permanently accessible and shall be placed
only at locations approved by the Architect.
B. In suspended ceiling spaces, boxes shall be supported from the structure independently from ceiling
suspension system.
C. The Drawings do not necessarily show every pull or Junction Box required. The Contractor is permitted
to provide boxes deemed necessary when installed in accordance with these Specifications.
3.08 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER
A. Conceal the Electrical Outlet behind the unit housing as provided for by the Manufacturer.
3.09 BOXES CONTAINING MULTIPLE DEVICES
A. Boxes containing emergency and normal devices are permitted only with steel barriers Manufactured
especially for the purpose of dividing the box into two completely separate compartments.
B. Device boxes containing multiple devices and wiring rated over 150 volts to ground and over 300 Volts
between conductors are permitted only with steel barrier manufactured especially for the purpose of
dividing the box into separate compartments for each device having exposed live parts.
Job Number 2170712.00 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES
26 05 32- 2/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.10 COLOR CODING
A. All junction boxes installed in accessible spaces and exposed in unfinished areas shall be color coded
using spray paint or tape on the box and cover as applicable in the following manner:
277/480-Volt ...........................................Sand
120/208-Volt ...........................................Gray
Emergency Power....................................Orange
Fire Alarm ................................................ Red
Intrusion Alarm ........................................Yellow
B. The colors shall match the colors used on the Raceway-See Section 26 05 33
3.11 NAMEPLATES
A. For all line voltage junction boxes, provide engraved nameplate indicating circuit numbering of all
wiring in junction box.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES
26 05 32- 3/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide Raceway System complete.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00—Electrical General Conditions
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT(GRS)
A. General: Hot dipped galvanized.
B. Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or noncorrosive alloy compatible with galvanized conduit. Erickson
couplings,watertight split couplings(O.Z.type or equivalent) permitted. Running thread or set screw
type fittings not approved.
2.02 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT(IMC)
A. General: Hot Dipped galvanized.
B. Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or noncorrosive alloy compatible with galvanized conduit. Erickson
couplings,watertight split couplings(O.Z.type or equivalent) permitted. Running thread or set screw
type fittings not approved.
2.03 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING(EMT)
A. General: Hot dipped galvanized.
B. Fittings: Raintight;steel or malleable iron type using a split corrugated compression ring and tightening
nut or stainless-steel locking disc.Steel set screw fittings are acceptable for dry locations. Indenter,
drive-on and pressure cast or die cast type set screw are not acceptable.
2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT(FMC,LFMC)
A. Dry Locations:
1. General: Galvanized flexible steel for dry locations only.
2. Fittings: Malleable iron or steel,Thomas and Betts"squeeze"type or equal.
B. Damp and Wet Locations:
1. Liquid Tight: Polyvinyl chloride(PVC)weatherproof cover over flexible steel conduit.
2. Fittings: Thomas and Betts"liquid tight"or equal.
2.05 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A. Formed steel or aluminum type. Standard factory finish. Where color choice is available,consult
Architect/Engineer for selection prior to ordering.
2.06 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT(PVC)
A. Schedule 40 rigid polyvinyl chloride type unless otherwise noted.
Job Number 2170712.00 RACEWAY
26 05 33- 1/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install Raceway concealed in construction unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or specifically
approved in writing by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Cut Raceway ends square,ream and extend maximum distance into all couplings and connectors.
C. Provide and install manufactured end caps on all Raceway ends during construction to prevent the
entrance of water or dirt. Tape,as a cover, not permitted.
D. Swab out all Raceways before pulling wires.
E. All elbows for GRS and PVC Raceway shall be factory radius bends. For all other Raceway, use factory
radius bends of 1-1/4"and larger diameter.
F. Raceway shall not penetrate sheet metal ducts unless permission is granted by Architect/Engineer.All
sleeves shall be provided for Raceway installation.
G. Provide 2-3/4"C.O.stub into accessible ceiling space from all recessed panelboards or systems
terminal boxes.
3.02 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
A. All Connections shall be watertight. Install for all Raceways in concrete or where subject to damage.
3.03 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT
A. Intermediate metal conduit is permitted as a substitute for galvanized rigid steel conduit except where
GRS is required by code.
3.04 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING
A. Install for wiring in masonry,frame construction,furred ceilings and above suspended ceilings. May be
used for exposed work in unfinished areas where not subject to damage.Where construction involves
masonry work,surface cut masonry units wherever such masonry units are to remain unplastered or
uncovered in complete construction.
3.05 RACEWAYS UNDERGROUND
A. Galvanized rigid steel conduit-painted with two coats of bitumastic paint-or galvanized rigid steel
conduit with 15 mil. polyvinyl chloride(PVC)jacket(repair abrasions with PVC base paint or PVC)
B. PVC Raceways may be used for underground runs when permitted by code. Field bends,when
necessary,shall be formed only with factory recommended heater. Penetrations through floor and
walls shall be galvanized rigid steel (GRS)conduit. PVC, if used,shall be increased in size from that
shown to include code required ground wire.
C. All underground bends in excess of 10 degrees and all elbows shall be GRS.
D. Arrange and slope Raceways entering building to drain away from building.
E. Ground wires shall be provided in all PVC Raceway.
3.06 INSERTS,SHIELDS AND SLEEVES
A. Furnish and set in place, in advance of pouring slabs and walls,all inserts and sleeves needed to execute
Division 26 equipment installation.
B. Where supports in slabs are required after wall has been poured, use a drilled-in threaded insert,
installed as recommended by Manufacturer.
C. Sleeves shall be provided for all wall penetrations.
Job Number 2170712.00 RACEWAY
26 05 33- 2/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.07 RACEWAYS THAT STUB UP THROUGH FLOOR
A. Install at such depth that the exposed Raceway is vertical and no curved section of the elbow is visible.
B. PVC Raceway shall not be stubbed through floors.
3.08 SEALING OF RACEWAY PENETRATIONS
A. Exterior Wall Surfaces Above Grade:Seal around all penetrations with caulking approved by Engineer.
For concrete construction above ground level,cast Raceway in wall or core drill wall and hard pack with
a mixture of equal parts of sand and cement.
B. Exterior Surfaces Below Grade: Cast Raceway into wall (or floor)or use manufactured seal assembly
(such as O.Z.type"FSK")cast in place.
C. Roofs: Provide mopped, lead, roof jack where Raceway penetrates roof membrane.
D. Fire Rated Floors,Walls,Ceiling/Roofs:Concrete or masonry,seal around Raceway penetration with
Dow Corning 3-6548 silicone RTV foam or approved equal. Plaster or gypsum wallboard,seal around
Raceway penetration with plaster,fire tape per local Fire Marshal's requirements.
3.09 SEALING OF RACEWAYS
A. Seal interior of all Raceways which pass through buildings roofs,floors or through outside walls of the
building,above or below grade.Seal on the end inside the building using duct sealing mastic, non-
hardening compound type,specially designed for such service to maintain the integrity of the seal of
the wall,floor or roof. Pack around the wires in the Raceways.
3.10 HANGERS FOR RACEWAYS
A. In suspended ceiling spaces Contractor may,at his option,attach 1/2"or 3/4" EMT Raceways to the
ceiling suspension system where such system is structurally suitable on independent wire secured at
both ends; in which case, provide clips manufactured for the purpose.
B. When more than two Raceways will use the same routing,group together on a patented channel
support system (such as Unistrut).
3.11 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY
A. Install parallel to building surface(i.e.,wall,ceiling,floor). Fasten to surface as recommended by
Manufacturer. Mount so Raceway is in the least obvious location. Shall be used in lieu of conduit in
finished areas.
3.12 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
A. Flexible conduit shall be used only for connection to motors and equipment subject to vibration with 90
degrees loop minimum to allow for isolation and for lay-in fluorescent fixtures above T-Bar ceilings. For
fixture installations,one end of flex must terminate in rough-in junction box. Flex conduit shall not be
installed over 6' long or used to connect from fixture to fixture. Use liquid tight for pumps,equipment
which is regularly washed down,and equipment in damp locations. Provide ground wire.
3.13 COLOR CODING
A. General: Provide color bands of tape or paint one inch (25 mm)wide for Raceways up to two inches(51
mm) in diameter and one-half the Raceway diameter for larger Raceways,applied at panel and pullbox
locations within each room,and 50 ft. (15.25 m)on centers within an area.
Job Number 2170712.00 RACEWAY
26 05 33- 3/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Color Banding:
120/208 Volt..............................Gray
277/480 Volt .............................Sand
Emergency Power .....................Orange
Fire Alarm .................................. Red
Intrusion Alarm .........................Yellow
Low Voltage Switching .............. Black
C. The colors shall match the colors used on the boxes-See Section 26 05 32.
3.14 PULL CORDS
A. Nylon type shall be included in all installed empty Raceway.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 RACEWAY
26 05 33-4/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 26 05 34
METAL CLAD CABLE(TYPE MC)AND FITTINGS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide Metal Clad (Type MC)Cable for power,control and lighting systems.
B. Provide wiring connections and terminations.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00—Electrical General Conditions
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. UL 1569. Products shall be tested,approved and labeled/listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
1.04 USES PERMITTED
A. MC Cable is permitted to be used for 20amp lighting and power circuits where routing is above grade,
concealed and the installation meets the requirements of NEC 330.
B. MC Cable shall NOT be used for homerun circuits from the fixture, receptacle,or equipment to the
panelboard. Hard conduit must be used from the panelboard to the nearest accessible ceiling space to
the panelboard.
C. MC Cable shall not be used for HVAC equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CABLE ASSEMBLY
A. Metal clad cable assemblies shall consist of 2,3 or 4 current carrying conductors and an equipment
ground conductor.
B. Conductors: Solid Copper conductor, No. 12 AWG minimum or No. 10 AWG maximum. Installation
methods shall be as specified under Part 3-Execution.
C. Insulation: Conductor insulation shall be rated 600-volt,Type THHN,90oC dry.
D. Fillers: Fillers shall be non-hygroscopic and non-wicking.
E. Binder:Core binder shall be corrugated polyester.
F. Sheath:The metal sheath shall be galvanized steel or aluminum. The metal sheath shall be extruded
onto the cable or applied longitudinally,then wrapped and welded. The sheath shall then be
corrugated for greater flexibility.
G. Jacketing: When PVC jacketing is required,the jacket shall be flame-retardant PVC with a temperature
range of-40°C to 90°C.
H. Equipment Grounding Conductor:The equipment ground wire shall be of the same construction as
specified in 2.02.A and 2.02.E and be at a minimum the same size as the current carrying conductors.
The insulation color shall be green.
2.02 FITTINGS
A. Fittings shall be UL listed and identified for such use with metal clad continuous corrugated sheath
cable,with or without PVC jacketing,as is appropriate for the installation.
Job Number 2170712.00 METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC) AND FITTINGS
26 05 34- 1/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Connectors shall be of steel or malleable iron and shall be a squeeze type clamp connector with a
locknut for non-jacketed metal clad cable. Compression gland type connectors shall be used for
jacketed metal clad cable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION—POWER AND LIGHTING SYSTEMS WIRING
A. All wiring shall be installed in compliance with the latest version of the National Electrical Code and all
other applicable codes and standards as indicated elsewhere in these specifications.
B. Use of metal clad cable shall be permitted only for lighting,equipment and receptacle branch circuits.
Metal clad cable shall not be permitted in locations designated to be hazardous Class I, II or III.
C. Metal clad cable shall be permitted only for motor circuits where the motor being served is less than
HP and rated for 120V,single phase. Metal clad cable is not permitted for HVAC equipment and
controls.
D. Metal clad cable shall only be installed concealed within walls and above ceiling interstitial spaces.
Where there is no ceiling interstitial space,metal clad cable may not be used.
E. Bends in corrugated sheath metal clad cable shall be made so that the cable will not be damaged. The
radius of the curve of the inner edge of any bend shall not be less than seven (7)times the diameter of
the metallic sheath.
F. Metal clad cable is not permitted to connect branch circuits to fumehoods,gas storage cabinets,or
chemical storage cabinets.
G. No metal clad cable shall be installed in ventilation ducts or plenums.
H. Conductors in Enclosures: Provide neat and workmanlike installation with conductors tied with T&B Ty-
Rap,Virginia Plastics,or equal,nylon wire ties in terminal cabinets,gutters and similar locations.
3.02 FITTINGS
A. Fittings used for connecting metal clad cable to boxes, light fixtures or other equipment shall be UL
listed and identified for such use.
B. Cable preparation for installation of fittings shall follow manufacturer's instructions. The
manufacturer's specialized tools shall be used for preparing cable ends for installation of fittings.
C. The cable end shall be cut square to ensure flush seating of the cable into the fitting. Fitting
securement screws shall be properly torqued. Cable ends shall be fitted with insulating bushings
intended for the type of metal clad cable being installed.
D. For jacketed metal clad cable,the outer jacket shall be removed to the length specified by the fitting
manufacturer's instructions. Remove oils or solvent by-products from the outer jacket of the cable.The
cable end shall be cut square to ensure flush seating of the cable into the fitting. The fitting gland nut
shall be properly torqued to the manufacturer's specifications.
3.03 ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT
A. Metal clad cables shall be run parallel with walls or structural elements. Vertical runs shall be plumb;
horizontal runs level and parallel with structure,as appropriate. Groups shall be racked together neatly
with both straight runs and bends parallel and uniformly spaced.
B. Metal clad cables shall be securely fastened in place at intervals of not more than six feet,with suitable
clamps or fasteners of approved type,and all vertical conduits shall be properly supported to present a
mechanically rigid and secure installation.
Job Number 2170712.00 METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC) AND FITTINGS
26 05 34- 2/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Metal clad cable installed parallel to framing members,such as studs,joist,or rafters,shall be
supported so that the nearest outside surface of the cable is not less than 1-1/4 inches from the nearest
edge of the framing member. Where this distance cannot be maintained,the cable shall be protected
by a steel plate,sleeve,or equivalent that is at least 1/16-inch thick.
D. Maintain at least 6-inch clearance between metal clad cables and other piping systems. Maintain
12-inch clearance between metal clad cables and heat sources such as flues,steam pipes,and heating
appliances.
E. No metal clad cable shall be fastened to other conduits or pipes or installed so as to prevent the ready
removal of other pipes or ducts for repairs.
F. Individual metal clad cables hung from roof structure or structural ceiling shall be supported by split-
ring hangers and wrought-iron hanger rods. Where three(3)or more metal clad cables are suspended
from the ceiling in parallel runs,use steel channels, Kindorf, Unistrut or equal, hung from 1/2-inch rods
to support the conduits. The conduit on these channels shall be held in place with metal clad cable
clamps designed for the particular channel that is used.
G. Secure metal clad cable support racks to concrete walls and ceilings by means of cast-in-place anchors;
die-cast, rustproof alloy expansion shields; or cast flush anchors. Wooden plugs, plastic inserts,or
gunpowder driven inserts shall not be used as a base to secure conduit supports.
H. Metal clad cable shall be supported immediately on each side of a bend and not more that one(1)foot
from an enclosure where a run of metal clad cable ends.
I. Use of cable tray:
1. The sum of the cross-sectional areas of all cables shall not exceed the maximum allowable cable fill
area allowed by NEC Tables 392.9,392.9(E) and 392.9(F).
2. Cables shall be installed in a single layer with a maintained spacing of not less than one cable
diameter between cables.
3. Ampacity of cables installed in cable tray shall meet the requirements of NEC 392.11.
3.04 INSPECTION AND TESTS
A. General: The electrical installation shall be inspected and tested to ensure safety to building occupants
and operating personnel and conformity to Code
B. Measure and record insulation resistance of all power and control wiring including insulation resistance
of all equipment:
1. The insulation resistance of each circuit phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground shall be measured.
For circuits rated less than 600 volts,the resistance shall not be less than 2 megohms.
2. Systems rated above 240 volts shall be tested with a 1000-volt Megohmeter. Circuits rated 240
volts and below shall be tested with a S00-volt Megohmeter. The D.C. potential shall be applied
for thirty(30)seconds.
C. The contractor shall record test readings and submit certified test to the Engineer for review and
acceptance approval before energizing respective circuits.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 METAL CLAD CABLE (TYPE MC) AND FITTINGS
26 05 34- 3/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 26 05 36
CABLE TRAY
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions for Washington State Facilities
Construction.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide Cable Tray System complete.
1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00—Electrical General Conditions
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCT NAME
A. Flextray Cable Management System or approved equal. Approved flexible site configurable wire mesh
basket tray—5mm minimum wire gauge thickness.
2.02 MANUFACTURER
A. GS Metals Corp. Manufacturer must have US production facilities;tray must be produced and finished
in the United States with full domestic content.
B. Tray specified shall be UL classified and listed. Tray shall have T-weld on top rail in order to avoid sharp
surfaces or protrusions on tray surface.
2.03 CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
A. Product Description: Tray must be a welded wire mesh cable management system. The open mesh
permits easy access to the tray and provides continuous ventilation of cables installed in the tray. A
continuous ground conductor fixing system shall be accomplished by the use of approved splices and
bonding jumper or a continuous rigid welded steel wire mesh cable management system. Continuous
safety edge wire shall be welded to the top of tray. Wire mesh shall be welded at all intersections.
B. Composition &Materials:
1. Cable tray shall be produced from high mechanical strength steel wire,which is first welded into a
net,then formed into channels to carry the cables. Covers and inserts shall be available to protect
cables. There shall be a minimum of (5) five splicing options to effectively connect trays end to
end.
C. Mesh size shall be 2"x 4". The channel depth shall be 4"and the width 12".
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Install cable tray in configuration as indicated on the drawings.
B. Connect all tray sections together with approved splicing methods suggested by the manufacturer to
maintain an effective ground bond.
C. Provide unistrut wall mounting and ceiling mounted supports for mounting of the cable tray system.
D. Install cable tray at a minimum height of 6"above the ceiling tile.
Job Number 2170712.00 CABLE TRAY
26 05 36- 1/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
E. Maintain a 12"clearance above the cable tray,free from all obstructions.
F. Cable tray shall be installed at the same elevation, unless obvious obstructions prevent this.
G. Where cable tray is indicated to pass through a wall,the Contractor shall stop the tray on either side of
the wall and provide sleeves through the wall. The sleeves shall be sized to accommodate the fill area
and capacity of the cable tray.
H. Cable tray shall be bonded to all conduit sleeves and data racks.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 CABLE TRAY
26 05 36- 2/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 26 09 23
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
PART1 GENERAL
1.00 INTRODUCTION
The work covered in this section is subject to all of the requirements in the general conditions of the
specifications. Contractor shall coordinate all of the work in this section with all the trades covered in
the other sections of the specification to provide a complete and operative system.
A. Electrical Contractor shall provide all support, labor and material to accommodate commissioning, per
Section 01 91 13.
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Extent of lighting control system work is indicated by drawings and by the requirements of this section.
It is defined to include low voltage lighting control panels,switch inputs,and wiring.
B. The work covered by this section of the specifications shall be coordinated with the related work as
specified elsewhere under the project specifications.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. UL& ULC Approvals: The control panels shall be tested and listed under the UL 916 Energy
Management Equipment standards by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
B. NEC Compliance: The control system shall comply with all applicable National Electrical Codes
regarding electrical wiring standards.
C. NEMA Compliance: The control system shall comply with all applicable portions of the NEMA standards
regarding the types of electrical equipment enclosures.
D. Component Pre-Testing: All control equipment shall undergo strict inspection standards. The
equipment shall be previously tested and burned-in at the factory prior to installation.
E. System Checkout: A factory-trained technician or factory-authorized personnel or Contractor shall
functionally test the control system and verify performance after installation.
F. Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years'experience in control systems. These
specifications are based on the nLight Network Control System from Sensor Switch,an Acuity Brands
Company. Substitutions of the specified equipment will be considered providing sufficient
documentation is provided to the Engineer which certifies that the equipment qualification meets the
requirements of this specification.
G. Similar systems manufactured by Hubbell (NX Networked Lighting Controls)and Wattstopper(Digital
Lighting Management, DLM)are acceptable. The listing of any manufacturer as"acceptable"does not
imply automatic approval. It is the sole responsibility of the electrical contractor to ensure that any
price quotations received and submittals made are for devices and systems which meet or exceed the
specifications included herein.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on lighting control system and components.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings of lighting control system and accessories including, but not
necessarily limited to,the low voltage relay panels, power wiring,and switch inputs.
1. Complete layout of every space with the parts identified and wire routing:
2. Riser Diagram/System Diagram
3. Switch Input Wiring
4. Example Contractor Startup/Commissioning Worksheet
Job Number 2170712.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23- 1/10
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
5. Hardware and Software Operation Manuals
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate lighting control components to form an integrated interconnection of compatible
components.
B. Coordinate lighting controls with BAS(building automation system)either through I based
intercommunication of system or hardwired auxiliary relay outputs.
C. The installing contractor shall be responsible for a complete and functional system in accordance with
all applicable local and national codes.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. All devices in lighting control system shall have a 5-year warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.00 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
System shall have an architecture that is based upon three main concepts:
1. Intelligent lighting control devices
2. Standalone lighting control zones
3. Network backbone for remote or time-based operation.
A. Intelligent lighting control devices shall consist of one or more basic lighting control components;
occupancy sensors, photocell sensors, relays,dimming outputs, manual switch stations,and manual
dimming stations.Combining one or more of these components into a single device enclosure should
be permissible so as to minimize overall device count of system.
B. System must be able to interface directly with intelligent LED luminaires such that only CAT-5e cabling is
required to interconnect luminaires with control components such as sensors and switches.
C. Intelligent lighting control devices shall communicate digitally, require<4 mA of current to function
(Graphic wall stations excluded),and possess RJ-45 style connectors.
D. Lighting control zones shall consist of one or more intelligent lighting control components, be capable
of stand-alone operation,and be capable of being connected to a higher-level network backbone.
E. Devices within a lighting control zone shall be connected with CAT-5e low voltage cabling in any order.
F. Lighting control zone shall be capable of automatically configuring itself for default operation without
any start-up labor required.
G. Individual lighting zones must continue to provide a user defined default level of lighting control in the
event of a system communication failure with the backbone network or the management software
becoming unavailable.
H. Power for devices within a lighting control zone shall come from either resident device already present
for switching(relay device)or dimming purposes,or from the network backbone.Standalone"bus
power supplies"shall not be required in all cases.
I. All switching and dimming for a specific lighting zone shall take place within the devices located in the
zone itself(i.e. not in a remotely located devices such as panels)to facilitate system robustness and
minimize wiring requirements.Specific applications that require centralized or remote switching shall
be capable of being accommodated.
J. System shall have one primary wall mounted network control "gateway"devices that are capable of
accessing and controlling connected system devices and linking into an Ethernet LAN.
K. System shall use"bridge"devices that route communication and distribute power for up to 8 directly
connected lighting zones together for purposes of decreasing system wiring requirements.
Job Number 2170712.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23- 2/10
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
L. System shall have a web-based software management program that enables remote system control,
status monitoring,and creation of lighting control profiles.
M. Individual lighting zones shall be capable of being segmented into several "local"channels of
occupancy, photocell,and switch functionality for more advanced configurations and sequences of
operation.
N. Devices located in different lighting zones shall be able to communicate occupancy,photocell,and
switch information via either the wired backbone.
O. System shall be capable of operating a lighting control zone according to several sequences of
operation.System shall be able to change a spaces sequence of operation according to a time schedule
so as to enable customized time-of-day,day-of-week utilization of a space. Note operating modes
should be utilized only in manners consistent with local energy codes.
1. Auto-On/Auto-Off(via occupancy sensors):
a. Zones with occupancy sensors automatically turn lights on when occupant is detected.
b. Zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights off when vacancy or sufficient
daylight is detected.
C. Pressing a switch will turn lights off. The lights will remain off regardless of occupancy until
switch is pressed again,restoring the sensor to Automatic On functionality.
2. Manual-On / Auto-Off (also called Semi-Automatic, Vacancy Sensing or Occupant Sending Device
set to Vacancy Mode):
a. Pushing a switch will turn lights on.
b. Zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights off when vacancy or sufficient
daylight is detected.
3. Manual-On to Auto-On/Auto-Off:
a. Pushing a switch will turn lights on.
b. After initial lights on, zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights on/off
according to occupancy/vacancy and/or daylight conditions.
c. Sequence can be reset via scheduled (ex.daily each morning)events
4. Auto-to-Override On:
a. Zones with occupancy sensors automatically turn lights on when occupant is detected.
b. Zone lighting then goes into an override on state for a set amount of time or until the next
time event returns the lighting to an auto-off style of control.
c. Sequence can be reset via scheduled (ex.daily each morning)events
5. Manual-to-Override On:
a. Pushing a switch will turn lights on.
b. Zone lighting then goes into an override on state for a set amount of time or until the next
time event returns the lighting to an auto-off style of control.
Sequence can be reset via scheduled (ex. daily each morning) events
6. Auto On/Predictive Off:
a. Zones with occupancy sensors automatically turn lights on when occupant is detected.
b. Zones with occupancy and/or photocell sensors turn lights off when vacancy or sufficient
daylight is detected.
1. If switch is pressed, lights turn off and a short "exit timer" begins. After timer expires,
sensor scans the room to detect whether occupant is still present. If no occupancy is
detected,zone returns to auto-on. If occupancy is detected, lights must be turned on via
the switch.
P. Control software shall enable logging of system performance data and presenting useful information in
a web-based graphical format and downloadable to .CSV files.
Q. Control software shall enable integration with a BMS via BACnet IP.
Job Number 2170712.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23- 3/10
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
R. Desktop or Laptop Computer shall be furnished by the school district,and software will be loaded,and
tested,during system start-up and programming by factory authorized technician.
2.01 INDIVIDUAL DEVICE SPECIFICATIONS
A. Control Module(Gateway):
1. Control module shall be a device that facilitates communication and time-based control of
downstream network devices and linking into an Ethernet.
2. Devices shall have a user interface that is capable of wall mounting, powered by low voltage, and
have a touch screen.
a. Control device shall have three RJ-45 ports for connection to other backbone devices
(bridges)or directly to lighting control devices.
b. Device shall automatically detect all devices downstream of it.
C. Device shall have a standard and astronomical internal time clock.
d. Device shall have one RJ-45 10/100 BaseT Ethernet connection.
e. Device shall have a USB port
f. Each control gateway device shall be capable of linking 1500 devices to the management
software.
g. Device shall be capable of using a dedicated or DHCP assigned I address.
h. Network Control Gateway device shall be the following Sensor Switch model Series:
i. GWY2
B. Networked System Occupancy Sensors:
1. Occupancy sensors system shall sense the presence of human activity within the desired space and
fully control the on/off function of the lights.
2. Sensors shall utilize passive infrared (PIR) technology, which detects occupant motion, to initially
turn lights on from an off state; thus, preventing false on conditions. Ultrasonic or Microwave
based sensing technologies shall not be accepted.
3. For applications where a second method of sensing is necessary to adequately detect maintained
occupancy(such as in rooms with obstructions),a sensor with an additional "dual"technology shall
be used.
4. Dual technology sensors shall have one of its two technologies not require motion to detect
occupancy. Acceptable dual technology includes PIR/Microphonics (also known as Passive Dual
Technology or PDT) which both looks for occupant motion and listens for sounds indicating
occupants. Sensors where both technologies detect motion (PIR/Ultrasonic) shall not be
acceptable.
5. All sensing technologies shall be acoustically passive meaning they do not transmit sounds waves
of any frequency(for example in the Ultrasonic range),as these technologies have the potential for
interference with other electronic devices within the space (such as electronic white board
readers). Acceptable detection technologies include Passive Infrared (PIR), and/or Microphonics
technology. Ultrasonic or Microwave based sensing technologies shall not be accepted.
6. Communication and Class 2 low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard CAT-5
low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors.
7. All sensors shall have two RJ-45 ports or capable of utilizing a splitter.
8. All sensors shall have the ability to detect when it is not receiving valid communication (via CAT-5
connections)and blink its LED in a pattern to visually indicate of a potential wiring issue
9. Every sensor parameter shall be available and configurable remotely from the software and locally
via the device push-button.
10. Sensors shall be able to function together with other sensors in order to provide expanded
coverage areas by simply daisy-chain wiring together the units with CAT-5 cabling.
11. Sensors shall be equipped with an automatic override for 100-hour burn-in of lamps. This feature
must be available at any time for lamp replacements.
12. Network system shall also have ceiling,fixture,recessed,&corner mounted sensors available.
Job Number 2170712.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23- 4/10
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
13. Sensors shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers,with device options as specified: nCM
PDT 10(ceiling mounted)or nWV PDT 16(wall mounted).
C. Networked System Daylight(Photocell and or Dimming)Sensors:
1. Photocell shall provide for an on/off set-point, and a deadband to prevent the artificial light from
cycling. Delay shall be incorporated into the photocell to prevent rapid response to passing clouds.
2. Photocell and dimming sensor's set-point and deadband shall be automatically calibrated through
the sensor's microprocessor by initiating an "Automatic Set-point Programming" procedure. Min
and max dim settings as well as set-point may be manually entered.
3. Deadband setting shall be verified and modified by the sensor automatically every time the lights
cycle to accommodate physical changes in the space (i.e., furniture layouts, lamp depreciation, or
lamp outages).
4. Sensor shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers,with device options as specified: nCM
ADC X(on/off,0-10 VDC dimming)
D. Networked System Power(Relay) Packs:
1. Dimming Power Pack shall incorporate one Class 1 relays,contribute low voltage power to the rest
of the system,and provide 0-10 VDC dimming output
2. Power Packs shall accept 120 or 277 VAC (or optionally 347 VAC), be plenum rated, and provide
Class 2 power to the system.
3. All devices shall have two RJ-45 ports.
4. Every Power Pack parameter shall be available and configurable remotely from the software and
locally via the device push-button.
S. Power Pack shall securely mount to junction location through a threaded% inch chase nipple or be
capable of being secured within a luminaire ballast channel. Plastic clips into junction box shall not
be accepted. All Class 1 wiring shall pass through chase nipple into adjacent junction box without
any exposure of wire leads. Note: UL Listing under Energy Management or Industrial Control
Equipment automatically meets this requirement, whereas Appliance Control Listing does not
meet this safety requirement
6. Auxiliary relay pack shall provide cry contact output for connection to HVAC system.
7. Power (Relay) Packs and Supplies shall be the following Sensor Switch model Series: nPP16 D
(Power Pack w/16A relay,and 0-10VDC dimming output); nAR 40(Low voltage auxiliary relay pack)
E. Networked LED Luminaires:
1. Networked LED luminaire shall have a mechanically integrated control device
2. Networked LED luminaire shall be able to digitally network directly to other network control
devices(sensors, photocells,switches,dimmers)
3. Networked LED luminaire shall provide low voltage power to other networked control devices
4. System shall be able to turn on/off LED luminaire without using a relay
5. System shall be able to maintain constant lumen output over the specified life of the LED luminaire
(also called lumen compensation) by varying the input control power (and thus saving up to 20%
power usage).
6. System shall indicate (via a blink warning) when the LED luminaire has reached its expected life (in
hrs.).
7. nLight enabled luminaires will be noted in the fixture schedule.
F. Networked System Wall Switches& Dimmers:
1. Devices shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening.
2. Communication and low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard CAT-5 low
voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors.
3. All devices shall have two RJ-45 ports.
4. All devices shall provide toggle switch control.
5. Devices shall be available in four colors(Ivory,White, Light Almond,Gray).
6. Devices with mechanical push-buttons shall provide tactile and LED user feedback.
Job Number 2170712.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23- 5/10
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
7. Devices shall have custom button labeling as indicated on drawings.
8. Wall switches&dimmers shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers,with device options
as specified:
a. nPOD(single on/off,capacitive touch,audible user feedback)
b. nPOD 2P(dual on/off,capacitive touch,audible user feedback)
c. nPODM (single on/off, push-buttons, LED user feedback)
d. nPODM 213(dual on/off, push-buttons, LED user feedback)
e. nPODM DX(single on/off,single dimming raise/lower,push-buttons, LED user feedback)
f. nPODM 213 DX(dual on/off,dual dimming raise/lower, push-buttons, LED user feedback)
g. nPODM 413(quad on/off, push-buttons, LED user feedback)
h. nPODM 413 DX(quad on/off,quad dimming raise-lower, push-buttons, LED user feedback)
G. Networked System Graphic Wall Station:
1. Device shall have a 3.5"full color touch screen for selecting up to 8 programmable lighting control
presets or acting as up to 16 on/off/dim control switches.
2. Device shall enable configuration of lighting presets, switched, and dimmers via password
protected setup screens.
3. Device shall enable user supplied .jpg screen saver image to be uploaded.
4. Device shall surface mount to single-gang switch box
5. Device shall have a micro-USB style connector for local computer connectivity.
6. Device shall have two RJ-45 ports for communication
7. Device shall be the following Sensor Switch model number:
8. nPOD GFX
H. Networked System Scene Controllers:
1. Device shall have two to four buttons for selecting programmable lighting control profiles or acting
as on/off switches.
2. Device shall recess into single-gang switch box and fit a standard GFI opening.
3. Devices shall provide LED user feedback.
4. Communication and Class 2 low voltage power shall be delivered to each device via standard CAT-5
low voltage cabling with RJ-45 connectors.
5. All sensors shall have two RJ-45 ports.
6. Device shall be capable of reprogramming other devices in its zone so as to implement user
selected lighting scene.
7. Device shall be capable of selecting a lighting profile be run by the system's upstream Gateway so
as to implement selected lighting profile across multiple zones(and not just its local zone).
8. Device shall have LEDs indicating current selection.
9. Scene Selector device shall be the following Sensor Switch model number:
a. nPODM 2S(2 Scene,push-button)
b. nPODM 4S(4 Scene,push-button)
c. nPODM 4S DX(4 Scene, push-button,On/Off/Raise/Lower)
I. Communication Bridges:
1. Device shall surface mount to a standard 4"x 4"square junction box.
2. Device shall have 8 RJ-45 ports.
3. Device shall be capable of aggregating communication from multiple lighting control zones for
purposes of minimizing backbone wiring requirements back to Control Gateway.
4. Device shall be powered with Class 2 low voltage supplied locally via a directly wired power supply
or delivered via a CAT-5 cabled connection.
5. Device shall be careful of redistributing power from its local supply and connect lighting control
zones with excess power to lighting control zones with insufficient local power. This architecture
also enables loss of power to a particular area to be less impactful on network lighting control
system.
Job Number 2170712.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23- 6/10
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
6. Communication Bridge devices shall be the following Sensor Switch model numbers:
a. NBRG 8(8 Ports)
J. IP& Building Management Interface
1. Shall be native BACnet and listed as a BACnet Building Controller.
2. HTMLS management through ENVYVISION
3. nLight ECLYPSE
2.02 EMERGENCY LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
A. Provide an Emergency Lighting Control Unit to allow standard lighting control device to control
emergency lighting in conjunction with normal lighting in any area within a building. Emergency
Lighting Control Unit shall be a UL 924 listed device that monitors a switched circuit providing normal
lighting to an area. The unit provides normal ON/OFF control of emergency lighting along with the
normal lighting. Upon normal power failure the emergency lighting circuit will close,forcing the
emergency lighting ON until normal power is restored. Features include:
1. 120/277 volts,50/60 Hz,20-amp ballast rating
2. Push to test button
3. Auxiliary contact for remote test or fire alarm system interface
2.03 DMX512 CONTROLLER
A. Provide a standalone entry-level controller enabling creation and playback directly at the LCD
touchscreen.
B. The controller shall feature an astronomical time clock for automating shows and expands the
controller's features by accepting inputs from remote button stations,and button station contact
closure inputs.
C. Acuity Control-Easyl EZ Pro.
2.04 LIGHTING CONTROL PROFILES
A. Changes to the operation of the system shall be capable of being made in real-time or scheduled via
lighting control profiles.These profiles are outlines of settings that direct how a collection of devices
function for a defined time period.
B. Lighting control profiles shall be capable of being created and applied to a single device,zone of
devices,or customized group of zones.
C. All relays and dimming outputs shall be capable of being scheduled to track or ignore information
regarding occupancy,daylight,and local user switches via lighting control profiles.
D. Every device parameter(e.g.sensor time delay and photocell set-point)shall be configurable via a
lighting control profile.
E. All lighting control profiles shall be stored on the network control gateway device and on the software's
host server.
F. Lighting control profiles shall be capable of being scheduled to run according to the following calendar
options:start date/hour/minute,end date/hour/minute,and sunrise/sunset+/-timed offsets.
G. Sunrise/sunset times shall be automatically derived from location information using an astronomical
clock.
H. Daylight savings time adjustments shall be capable of being performed automatically, if desired.
I. Lighting control profile schedules shall be capable of being given the following recurrence settings:
daily,weekday,weekend,weekly,monthly,and yearly.
J. Software shall provide a graphical tool for easily viewing scheduled lighting control profiles.
Job Number 2170712.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23- 7/10
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.05 MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE
A. Every device parameter(e.g.sensor time delay and photocell set-point)shall be available and
configurable remotely from the software
B. The following status monitoring information shall be made available from the software for all devices
for which it is applicable:current occupancy status,current PIR Status,current Microphonics Status,
remaining occupancy time delay(s),current photocell reading,current photocell inhibiting state,
photocell transitions time remaining,current dim level,device temperature,and device relay state(s).
C. The following device identification information shall be made available from the software: model
number, model description,serial number, manufacturing date code,custom label(s),and parent
network device.
D. A printable network inventory report shall be available via the software.
E. A printable report detailing all system profiles shall be available via the software.
F. Software shall require all users to login with a User Name and Password.
G. Software shall provide at least three permission levels for users.
H. All sensitive stored information and privileged communication by the software shall be encrypted.
I. All device firmware and system software updates must be available for automatic download and
installation via the internet.
J. Software shall be capable of managing systems interconnected via a WAN (wide area network)
2.06 BMS COMPATIBILITY
A. System shall provide a BACnet IP gateway as a downloadable software plug-in to its management
software. No additional hardware shall be required.
B. BACnet IP gateway software shall communicate information gathered by networked system to other
building management systems.
C. BACnet IP gateway software shall translate and forward lighting relay and other select control
commands from BMS system to networked control devices.
D. Sensorview software must be running on a computer connected to the nGWY2,with BACnet plug-in
enabled for this feature to function.
2.07 LIGHTING CONTROL APPLICATIONS
A. Unless relevant provisions of the applicable local Energy Codes are more stringent, provide a minimum
application of lighting controls as follows:
1. Space Control Requirements — Provide occupancy/vacancy sensors with Manual- or Partial-ON
functionality in all spaces except toilet rooms, storerooms, library stacks, or other applications
where hands-free operation is desirable and Automatic-ON occupancy sensors are more
appropriate. Provide Manual-ON occupancy/vacancy sensors for any enclosed office, conference
room and meeting rooms. For spaces with multiple occupants, or where line-of-sight may be
obscured, provide ceiling-or corner-mounted sensors and Manual-ON switches.
2. Daylit Areas — Provide daylight-responsive automatic control in all spaces (conditioned or
unconditioned)where daylight contribution is available as defined by relevant local building energy
code:
a. All luminaires within code-defined daylight zones shall be controlled separately from
luminaires outside of daylit zones.
b. Daytime setpoints for total ambient illumination (combined daylight and electric light) levels
that initiate dimming shall be programmed in compliance with relevant local building energy
codes.
Job Number 2170712.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23- 8/10
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Multiple-leveled switched daylight harvesting controls may be utilized for areas marked on
drawings.
d. Provide smooth and continuous daylight dimming for areas marked on drawings. Daylighting
control system may be designed to turn off electric lighting when daylight is at or above
required lighting levels,only if system functions to turn lamps back on at dimmed level, rather
than turning full-on prior to dimming.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.00 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING
A factory authorized manufacturer's representative shall provide the electrical contractor a functional
overview of the lighting control system prior to installation.The contractor shall schedule the pre-
installation site visit after receipt of approved submittals to review the following:
1. Confirm the location and mounting of all digital devices, with special attention to placement of
occupancy and daylighting sensors.
2. Review the specifications for low voltage control wiring and termination.
3. Discuss the functionality and configuration of all products, including sequences of operation, per
design requirements.
4. Discuss requirements for integration with other trades.
A. Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of occupants and energy
savings.
1. Adjust time delay so that controlled area remains lighted while occupied.
B. Provide written or computer-generated documentation on the configuration of the system including
room by room description including:
1. Sensor parameters,time delays,sensitivities,and daylighting setpoints.
2. Sequence of operation,(e.g. manual ON,Auto OFF.etc.)
3. Load Parameters(e.g. blink warning,etc.)
C. Post start-up tuning—After 30 days from occupancy contractor shall adjust sensor time delays and
sensitivities to meet the Owner's requirements. Provide a detailed report to the Architect/Owner of
post start-up activity.
3.01 COMMISSIONING SUPPORT SERVICES
A. On this project,a commissioning agent will be hired to verify the installation and programming of all
building systems,which includes the lighting control system. Manufacturer should include an extra day
of technician's time to review the functionality and settings of the lighting control hardware with the
commissioning agent, including reviewing submittal drawings and ensuring that instructions on how to
configure each device are readily available. Manufacturer is NOT responsible for helping the
commissioning agent inspect the individual devices. It will be the commissioning agent's responsibility
to create and complete any forms required for the commissioning process,although the manufacturer
or contractor may offer spreadsheets and/or printouts to assist the agent with this task.
B. The commissioning agent shall work with the electrical contractor during installation of the lighting
control hardware to become familiar with the specific products.The agent may also accompany the
manufacturer's technicians during their start-up work to better understand the process of testing,
calibration and configuration of the products. However,the contractor and manufacturer shall ensure
that interfacing with the agent does not prevent them from completing the requirements outlined in
the contract documents.
Job Number 2170712.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23- 9/10
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND DOCUMENTATION
A. Installation: The control system shall be installed and fully wired as shown on the plans by the installing
Contractor. The Contractor shall complete all electrical connections to all control circuits and override
wiring.
B. Documentation: The Contractor shall provide accurate"as-built"drawings to the Owner for correct
programming and proper maintenance of the control system. The"as-builts"shall indicate the load
controlled by each relay and the relay panel number.
C. Operation and Service Manuals: The factory shall supply all operation and service manuals as related to
the design of the control system.
3.03 PRODUCT SUPPORT AND SERVICE
A. Factory Support: Factory telephone support shall be available at no cost to the Owner. Factory
assistance shall consist of solving programming or application questions concerning the control
equipment. The factory shall maintain toll-free numbers for technical support for their customers.
3.04 START-UP&SUPPORT FEATURES
A. Upon completion of the installation,the manufacturer's factory authorized representative shall start up
and verify a complete fully functional system.
B. The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the electrical engineer with three
weeks written notice of the system start up and adjustment date.
C. Upon completion of the system start up,the factory-authorized technician shall provide the proper
training to the owner's personnel on the adjustment and maintenance of the system.
D. To facilitate start-up,all devices daisy-chained together(using CAT-5)shall automatically be grouped
together into a functional lighting control zone.
E. All lighting control zones shall be able to function according to default settings once adequate power is
applied and before any system software is installed.
F. Once software is installed,system shall be able to auto-discover all system devices without requiring
any commissioning.
G. All system devices shall be capable of being given user defined names.
H. All devices within the network shall be able to have their firmware reprogrammed remotely and
without being physically uninstalled for purposes of upgrading functionality at a later date.
I. All sensor devices shall have the ability to detect improper communication wiring and blink it's LED in a
specific cadence as to alert installation/startup personnel.
3.05 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. The Contractor is responsible for complete installation of the system according to strict factory
standards and requirements. The following items shall be included requirements:
B. All system equipment shall operate in accordance with specification and industrial standard procedures.
C. An operational user program shall exist in the control system. The program shall execute and perform
all functions required to effectively operate the site according to the requirements.
D. Demonstration of program integrity during normal operation and pursuant to a power outage.
E. Contractor shall provide a minimum of three hours training on the operation and use of the control
system. Additional support services shall be negotiated between the Contractor and the building
Owner or manager.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
26 09 23- 10/10
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 26 27 26
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all wiring devices and plates.
B. No push-in terminals allowed.
C. All devices color shall be white, unless otherwise noted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Hubbell
B. Pass&Seymour
C. Leviton
D. Cooper
2.02 SWITCHES
A. Emergency Push-Button Switches: Provide a red emergency push-button, momentary contact,yellow
enclosure with clear plastic cover. Reset shall be by twisting the push-button.
1. For Shut-Down of Boilers: Switch shall be connected through an auxiliary contact tied to the boiler
power supply. Label shall read: "Boiler shut-down".The switch shall be located adjacent to an exit
door.
2. Approved Manufacturer:STI—Safety Technology International.
B. "Industrial Specification Grade",quiet type, rated 277-volt,20 amp, unless noted,with plastic handle.
Single pole,double pole,3-way,or locking type as required. Meets Fed.Spec.WS-896 Provide
matching styles and colors in other devices as required for the conditions of installation. Hubbell
CSB120, Eaton CSB120, Leviton 1221,and P&S 20AC1
C. Interchangeable type shall be rated same as above.
D. LED Dimmer: LED 0-10V dimmer switch shall be compatible with supplied LED board and driver.
Dimmer switch shall have vertical slide with a positive"on/off" button. Dimmer shall have high and low
end,field adjustable trim setting. Provide with associated power pack for control. Lutron Diva or
approved equal.
E. Momentary Contact Line Voltage Switches: Single pole,double throw,3-wire, normally open. Rating
same as above.
F. Magnetic Low-Voltage Dimmer: Dimmer switch shall be listed for use with magnetic low-voltage light
fixtures. Dimmer switch shall have a vertical slide with a positive"off" button. The dimmer shall be
rated for a minimum of 1500VA. Dimmer shall have a radio/TV interference filter. Leviton `Renoir'
series.
G. Motor rated switches: Switches serving as motor disconnecting means shall be horsepower rated with
overload relays and meet requirements as stated above. See manual starters in Section 26 24 19,
'Manual Starters'.
H. Device plates shall be Hubbell and Cooper Type 302 stainless steel.
Job Number 2170712.00 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
26 27 26- 1/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.03 RECEPTACLES
A. In All Unfinished Areas&Non-occupy Able Spaces: Provide"Industrial Specification Grade", Duplex
NEMA 5-20R configuration (20-Amp, 120-Volt) unless shown otherwise. Must have"rivetless ground"
contact manufactured as an integral component of the external ground screw terminal. Meets Fed
Spec.WC-596 Hubbell HBL5362,Cooper 5362, P&S 5362A,and Leviton 5362.
B. In All Finished Areas: Provide heavy duty specification grade;general purpose 20 amp. 125-volt, Nema
5-20R,2P,3W decora plus duplex receptacle,straight blade,commercial grade,self-grounding, back&
side wired. Leviton 16352T
C. Self-Testing Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Duplex Receptacles: 20A. 125V AC; 2-pole,3 wire
grounding; 10,000 amps current interrupting;green light indicator when power is'on'; red light
indicator when device is in the tripped position; Red "EOL" (end of life) indicator with rapid flash when
the unit has reached end of life and/or cannot provide GFCI protection. Provide GFI receptacles where
required by code.
D. Faceless Self-Testing Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Device: 20A. 125V AC;2-pole,3 wire grounding;
10,000 amps current interrupting;green light indicator when power is'on'; red light indicator when
device is in the tripped position; Red "EOL" (end of life) indicator with rapid flash when the unit has
reached end of life and/or cannot provide GFCI protection. Provide faceless self-testing ground fault
device ahead of switched receptacles that require GFI protection per code. Mount device in same
backbox as the device it is protecting.
1. Dedicated Computer Receptacle: Duplex NEMA 5-20R configuration, gray in color. Leviton 5362G,
and Cooper IG5362.
2. Tamper resistant receptacle & USB charger: Duplex 20 Amp; 125V; 3.6-amp USB charging
capability. Leviton T5832
E. Switched Receptacles shall be'green' in color,smooth nylon face,with permanently marked for use
with automatic control systems, back and side wired,decora style.
1. Tamper resistant, Duplex NEMA 5-20R configuration. Hubbell BR201TR, Leviton 5362-SGI, and
CooperTR8300
F. Weather Resistant(WR)/Ground Fault Circuit-Interrupter(GFCI)Outdoor Duplex Receptacles: NEMA 5-
20R. Hubbell GFTR201 or equal,for 20 Amp, 125-Volt AC.
G. Special Purpose Receptacles: For special purpose receptacles,see drawings for voltage,amperage,and
phase. Provide with matching plug delivered to the Owner.
2.04 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. Provide self-adjusting occupancy sensor light switching devices for control of lighting in all rooms and
offices shown on drawings. Sensors shall be ceiling or wall mounted to provide adequate coverage.
Occupancy sensors shall be "Leviton", Model OSC20-MOW for ceiling mounting,OSW12-MOW for wall
mounting,complete with OSP20-RDO power pack and associated mounting hardware. Provide
"Leviton"ODSOD-ID wall switch sensors where shown. Sensors shall be wired to maintain switching
and circuits shown on drawings.
2.05 DEVICE PLATES
A. Interior: Plates for recessed boxes shall be Hubbell and Cooper Type 302 stainless steel. Attachment
screws shall match finish of plate. Plates for surface mounted boxes shall be of pressed stainless steel
with size to fit exactly the box used.
1. Where a duplex receptacle is indicated next to a USB receptacle, provide a dual-gang faceplate and
mount both devices in the same backbox under the same faceplate.
Job Number 2170712.00 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
26 27 26- 2/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.06 LABELING
A. For NEMA 5-20R receptacles,each device shall be identified with a clear label with black typing stating
the panel&circuit number.
B. For receptacles other than NEMA 5-20R,the coverplate shall have ampere rating,voltage and phase
engraved on a phenolic label and attached to the cover plate.
2.07 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLY(WHEN SHOWN)
A. Provide assemblies complete, including necessary fittings and hardware with circuits as indicated on
Plans and outlet spacing as indicated. All assemblies shall contain ground wire. Wiremold or equal.
2.08 SPARE DEVICES
A. Provide the following spare devices:
Device Quantity
Single-pole switch 2
Duplex receptacle 4
Dedicated duplex receptacle 2
GFI receptacle 1
B. Each spare device shall include 100 feet of conduit,wire,faceplate and labor;all as required for a
complete installation. Location of these units to be determined by the Owner's representative at the
site. Unused devices shall be turned over to the Owner.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 MOUNTING
A. Rigidly fasten each device to the outlet box at proper position with the wall to bring receptacle flush
with plate or switch handle the proper distance through the plate.
B. Occupancy sensors that are ceiling mounted shall be located a minimum of 4'-0"away from a
mechanical equipment diffuser.
3.02 ORIENTATION
A. Set Switches vertical with handle operating vertically, up position "ON"at+48"above finished floor.
B. Set Receptacles vertical with ground slot down at+18" above finished floor.
3.03 DEVICE PLATES
A. Shall be stainless steel for each new wiring device and for each signal equipment outlet,except where
equipment mounted thereon covers the outlet box completely.
B. Provide new covers on existing outlet boxes being reused.
3.04 DIMMER SWITCHES
A. Provide a separate neutral for each phase.
B. LED dimmer switches require a 4 square backbox per switch.
3.05 RECEPTACLE GROUNDING
A. Provide bare bonding wire between receptacle grounding terminal and box. Plaster ear screws
connecting frame to the box will not be acceptable for grounding.
Job Number 2170712.00 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
26 27 26- 3/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Provide green insulated grounding conductor in all branch circuits supplying isolated ground and
ground-fault circuit-interrupter type receptacles.
3.06 HANDICAPPED ACCESS
A. Comply with requirements of Washington State Handicapped Access Code.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
26 27 26-4/4
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 26 2813
FUSES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00—Electrical General Conditions
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all fuses as required. Provide three(3)spare of each size and type required. Fuses shall not be
installed until equipment is ready to be energized. This measure prevents fuse damage during
shipment of the equipment from the manufacturer to the jobsite or from water that may contact the
fuse before the equipment is installed. Final tests and inspections shall be made prior to energization
of the equipment. This shall include a thorough cleaning,tightening,and review of all electrical
connections and inspection of all grounding conductors. All fuses shall be furnished by the Electrical
Contractor. All fuses shall be of the same manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MAINS, FEEDERS,AND BRANCH CIRCUITS
A. Circuits 0 to 600 amperes shall be protected by current limiting BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK Dual-Element
Fuses LPN-RK(250 volts)or LPS-RK(600 volts).All dual-element fuses shall have separate overload and
short-circuit elements. Fuse shall incorporate a spring activated thermal overload element having a
284°F. melting point alloy and shall be independent of the short-circuit clearing chamber. The fuse
must hold 500%of rated current for a minimum of 10 seconds and be listed by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc.,with an interrupting rating of 200,000 amperes r.m.s.symmetrical. The fuses shall be
UL Class RK1 to maintain the Engineered protection of the system components.
B. Motor Circuits:All individual motor circuits with full load amperes ratings(FLA)of 480 amperes or less
shall be protected by BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK Dual-Element Fuses LPN-RK(250 volts)or LPS-RK(600
volts). Larger H.P. motors shall be protected by BUSSMANN Type KRP-C Low-Peak Time-Delay Fuses of
the ratings shown on the drawings. All other motors, (such as 1.0 service factor motors)shall be
protected by BUSSMANN LOW-PEAK Dual-Element Fuses LPN-RK(250 volts)or LPS-RK(600 volts)
installed in ratings of approximately 115%of the motor full load current except as noted above. The
fuses shall be UL Class RK1 Dual Element Time Delay or Class L.
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Bussman
B. Littlefuse
2.03 SPARE FUSE CABINET
A. Provide a spare fuse cabinet for the above-required spare fuses.
2.04 NAMEPLATE
A. Provide Nameplate"Spare Fuse Cabinet."
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FUSES
A. Install in all fusible devices provided under this Contract.
Job Number 2170712.00 FUSES
26 28 13- 1/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.02 SPARE FUSE CABINET
A. Locate in 41"floor electrical room.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 FUSES
26 28 1 3- 2/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 26 2816
DISCONNECTS AND FUSED SWITCHES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00—Electrical General Conditions
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provided all disconnects,fused and unfused, required by code for equipment furnished under this and
other divisions of these specifications and as shown on the drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. General Electric
B. Square-D
C. Siemens
D. Cutler-Hammer
2.02 DISCONNECTS
A. Switch shall be heavy-duty type,shall be quick-break and shall be horsepower rated.Switch shall have
blades as required to open all ungrounded conductors and shall be single throw unless noted.
B. Enclosure shall have interlocking cover to prevent opening door when switch is closed. Door interlock
shall include a defeating scheme,shall be padlockable in the"Off" position.
C. Enclosure shall be suitable for environment in which mounted. All exterior enclosures shall have a
minimum raintight rating.
2.03 FUSED SWITCHES(OR FUSED DISCONNECTS)
A. Shall be as above with addition of fuse space and clips to accept only fuses as noted in Section 26 28 13.
B. Fuses shall be sized in accordance with manufacturer's requirements of protected equipment.
2.04 NAMEPLATES
A. Provide nameplates on all enclosures and include the following information: Load served,voltage,
phase, panel and circuit number.Construct and attach in accordance with Section 26 00 00, Paragraph
2.05.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SUPPORTS
A. Secure solidly to wall or approved mounting frame. Disconnects supported only by Raceway are not
acceptable.
3.02 SPLICES
A. Wiring space within enclosure shall not be used as a junction box.
Job Number 2170712.00 DISCONNECTS AND FUSED SWITCHES
26 28 1 6- 1/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. All material installation shall be in accordance with manufacturers' recommendations and the
provisions of applicable codes.
B. Fuses shall not be installed until equipment is ready to be energized.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 DISCONNECTS AND FUSED SWITCHES
26 28 1 6- 2/2
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 26 50 00
LIGHTING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 26 00 00—Electrical General Conditions
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide the lighting system complete and operational.
B. Recessed fixtures installed in fire-resistive ceiling construction shall have the same fire rating as the
ceiling or shall be provided with fireproofing boxes having materials of the same fire rating as the
ceiling.
1.03 FIXTURE SCHEDULE MANUFACTURER'S SERIES NUMBERS
A. Series numbers are a design series reference and do not necessarily represent the number,size,
wattage or the type of lamp, ballast or special requirements as specified hereinafter.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shall be neatly and clearly marked to indicate the fixtures, lamps and ballasts fully comply with contract
documents. When substitute fixtures are submitted (if permitted)the data shall clearly cross reference
(written or highlighted)that the substitute fixture complies with every detail of the specified fixture.
Fixtures not fully complying with contract documents are not permitted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL PARTS
A. Interior Fixtures: Steel or aluminum with 300°F, baked enamel finish, brushed aluminum with baked
acrylic clear lacquer finish,or stainless steel with a brushed finish, manufacturer's standard color unless
specified otherwise.
2.02 LIGHT TRANSMITTING COMPONENTS
A. Virgin acrylic or polycarbonate plastic(0.125-inch thick overall minimum), UV stabilized or glass. Shall
be contained in a captive metal frame that remains attached to the fixture when door is in open
position.
2.03 SPECIAL PARTS
A. Adapters, Plates, Brackets and Anchors: Provide where required by construction features of the
building to suitably mount lighting fixture. All such appurtenances and mounting methods shall be
approved by the Architect/Engineer prior to fabrication and installation.
B. Low Voltage Transformers: Provide and install where required to power individual or linear runs of low
voltage light fixtures.
2.04 LAMPS
A. Provide for each fixture in the exact number and type for which the fixture is designed or as noted.
B. Solid-State Lighting: Fixtures shall have a lumen maintenance life expectancy(L70)of>50,000 hours,a
CRI of>82,and a CCT of 3500K. Each solid-state fixture model shall be tested in accordance with IES
LM-79.
Job Number 2170712.00 LIGHTING
26 50 00- 1/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.05 HANGING FOR PENDANT FIXTURES
A. Rigid type,with not less than 5 thread engagement at each end,consisting of iron pipe,with brass or
aluminum tubing casing,or painted tubing not less than 0.040 inches thick.
B. Aircraft cable,stainless steel,sized appropriately by manufacturer for weight and seismic zone.
C. Provide a canopy for each fixture hanger except where fixture conceals the outlet box directly without a
canopy.
2.06 EXIT SIGNS
A. Fronts: Cutout stencils made of minimum#20-gauge sheet steel or sheet aluminum with red glass or
plastic back of the cutout. Mount fronts either on concealed hinges or pull-out type with chain catch.
Removable cutout arrows shall indicate direction of travel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES-GENERAL
A. Size and mounting height from finished floor to bottom of fixture as indicated on the drawings.Verify
mounting provisions prior to the ordering of fixtures. Fixtures shall be UL listed for the location,and
application in which they are installed.
B. Ceiling fixtures shall be coordinated with and suitable for installation in,on or from the ceiling as
shown. Installation and support of fixtures shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 and manufacturer's
recommendations.
C. Recessed fixtures installed in seismic areas shall be installed utilizing specially designed seismic clips.
D. Suspended fixtures installed in seismic areas shall have 45'swivel hangers and shall be located with no
obstructions within the 45'range in all directions. The stem,canopy and fixture shall be capable of 45'
swing.
3.02 DIFFUSERS AND ENCLOSURES
A. Install lighting fixture diffusers only after construction work, painting and clean up are completed. Prior
to final acceptance, remove all lamps, reflectors and diffusers,wash,rinse and reinstall.
3.03 ADJUSTMENT OF FIXTURES
A. Make all final spotlight and adjustable light settings under the direction of the Architect/Engineer
during a scheduled period of time prior to the completion of the project. Include costs for all
equipment and personnel expenses required for adjustment.
B. For fixtures with indirect lighting, notify Engineer prior to installation of any circumstance where the
fixture lamp source will be within 12"of ceiling.
3.04 LED FIXTURES
A. Recessed Troffer Type: For fixtures supported by the ceiling suspension system, provide integral tabs,
which rotate into position after fixture is lifted into the ceiling cavity. Provide two safety chains secured
to structural members above suspended ceiling.Circuit connection shall be through use of 60-inch
flexible conduit from a rigidly supported junction box. For plaster or GWB ceilings, provide a plaster
frame compatible with light fixture.
B. Recessed Downlight Type: Mount in frames suitable for the ceiling,with the recessed portion of the
fixture securely supported from the ceiling framing. For fixtures supported by a ceiling suspension
system, provide two safety chains secured to structural members above suspended ceiling.
C. Surface and Pendant Mounted Type:
Job Number 2170712.00 LIGHTING
26 50 00- 2/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1. Where mounted on accessible ceilings, hang from structural members by means of hanger rods
through ceiling or as approved.
2. Where ceiling is of insufficient strength to support weight of lighting fixture, provide additional
framing to support as required. Fixtures shall be supported from structure with seismic bracing
independent of ceiling.
3. For Pendant Mount Type: Provide a unistrut channel for mounting fixtures entire fixture length
unless light fixture is designed specifically for supporting itself. Provide 3/8-inch thread rod
secured to structural members for support of unistrut channel.
4. Continuous Runs of Fixtures: Straight when sighting from end to end, regardless of irregularities in
the ceiling. Where fixtures are so installed,omit ornamental ends between sections.
3.05 LOCATION
A. Mount to the dimensions shown on the drawings. Mount at quarter points where no dimensions
appear.Architect shall specify mounting locations where no dimensions appear and quarter point
mounting is impractical or not indicated on the drawings.
B. Refer to details,mechanical drawings,and coordinate with mechanical Contractor for equipment and
ductwork mounted in ceilings to prevent conflict with light fixtures prior to installation. If conflicts
cannot be resolved with the Mechanical Contractor, notify Architect/Engineer.
3.06 SPARE PARTS
A. Drivers/Ballasts: Provide(10)or 10%spare (whichever is less)of each replaceable LED driver or
fluorescent/HID ballast.
3.07 SPARE FIXTURES
A. Provide the following spare devices:
Item Quantity
EX1 2
B. Spare fixtures shall include 100 feet of conduit,wire, miscellaneous appurtenances,and all labor,as
required for a complete installation. Location of these units to be determined by the Owner's
representative at the site. Unused devices shall be turned over to the Owner.
C. Self-Luminous Exit Sign: Provide(4)four Self-Luminous Exit Signs Lithonia#DSW1X Green or Red to
match EX-1. Install at locations as directed by Architect.
3.08 FIXTURE TENTING
A. Contractor shall coordinate ceiling types with architectural drawings and specifications and provide
equivalent fire rated enclosures above all light fixtures which penetrate rated ceilings.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 LIGHTING
26 50 00- 3/3
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 27 00 00
LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01
Specification Sections,apply to work of this Section.
1. Phasing and Schedule: Phasing and Schedule are critical for successful completion of this project
on an occupied school site and it is anticipated overtime,double-shifting,or special work schedules
and coordination of phased work will be required. Refer to the Phasing Plans and specification
Section 011100 for additional information.
1.02 SCOPE AND RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The work performed under this specification shall be of good quality and performed in a workmanlike
manner. In this context"good quality" means the work shall meet industry technical standards and
quality of appearance. The owner reserves the right to reject all or a portion of the work performed,
either on technical or aesthetic grounds. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall make all corrections as
needed,to the satisfaction of the Architect.
B. Provide system documentation and Owner training as specified below.
C. An important item of the construction process for this project is the Pre-Construction Kick-Off Meeting,
which shall take place PRIOR to Submittal of equipment data sheets.
1. The General Contractor shall coordinate the scheduling of the meeting.
2. The Owners representative and the Owners IT Department representative will be present for the
meeting.
3. The General Contractor, Electrical Contractor, and a representative from EACH Section shall attend
this coordination meeting.
4. The estimated time is approximate and shall be extended for each Installing Vendor as necessary.
5. EACH Installing Vendor shall submit their list of coordination items through the Construction
Channels a minimum of 14 Days in advance of the meeting for Owner review.
a. Review EACH specific Section for the sub-section titled "Coordination" for a minimum list of
items to be discussed during the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting
D. The requirements of the conditions of the Contract,Supplementary Conditions,General Requirements,
or other work specified to provide a fully functional system for EACH specific Low Voltage Section in all
Division 27 and Division 28 sections as a part of this project.
E. Applicable Standards:All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the
following standards:
1. International Building Code(latest edition).
2. International Fire Code(latest edition).
3. NEC(National Electrical Code) (latest edition).
4. Telecommunications Architectural Standards-In Washington State Government(latest edition).
5. TIA-607-B Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.
F. EACH Installing Vendor for their Section shall possess a current and valid Washington State 06 Electrical
Low Voltage License.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 1/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Device or wiring arrangement shown on the drawings represents the intent of the system. If additional
equipment(that may not be shown) is required to make a fully functional system,then provide such
equipment as required.
B. Each specification section that is governed by these specifications shall be provided, installed,
commissioned,and warranted by a local Installing Vendor that meet the following requirements for the
equipment manufacturer that is being submitted for:
1. All equipment for EACH Specification Section shall be provided and installed by a single supplier.
2. Have installed a minimum of three(3)Systems within the past five(5)years.
3. Maintain a 24-hour emergency service program using Manufacturer Trained technicians, shall
respond to service calls within 24 hours during and after the warranty period.
4. The Installing Vendor shall be Manufacturer Approved to purchase the equipment, have a local
office staffed with Manufacturer Certified installers that are capable to maintain, service, and
warrant the equipment being installed, who are full-time employees and are capable of
programming, testing, inspecting, maintaining, warranting, inventorying parts for the life of the
system,and shall be located within a 100-mile radius of the project site.
5. Offices that require staff from another "Branch Office and/or Company Office" outside of this
radius,are not acceptable.
C. Prior to completion of the installation,the Installing Vendor shall provide:
1. At the Owner's option,a preventative maintenance agreement shall become effective at the end of
the warranty period.
2. A proposal for off-site monitoring services(for systems that are applicable).
1.04 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. In addition to the"Substantial Completion" requirements,when applied to EACH of the specification
sections identified in "Scope and Related Documents" listed elsewhere in this specification,this shall be
defined as follows;
1. The stage in the progress of the Work, where the Work or designated portion is sufficiently
complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Owner can utilize the Work for
its intended use.
2. ALL of the requirements listed in "Testing&Complete System Functionality" shall be met. Once all
conditions have been met,this shall be deemed Substantial Completion. These requirements shall
be completed on or before the Substantial Completion date listed in the Contract Documents.
1.05 DOCUMENTATION
A. Document Format:
1. All documents shall be generated on a PC. Provide these documents electronically, with the As-
built Documentation,where applicable.
a. Data sheets, installation manuals, technical documents, brochures, and user manuals may be
in PDF format.
b. Power Point Presentation(s)shall be in MS-Power Point.
c. Test Forms and other project specific documents shall be in an editable format, either MS-
Word or MS-Excel.
d. Drawings and details shall be in AutoCAD'"2013 or newer.
1.06 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submittals and Shop Drawings shall be provided for EACH Low Voltage System Specification Section
Number and shall contain, but not be limited to the items listed below:
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 2/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Submittals—Prior to installation of any equipment,the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall provide the
Architect with seven (7)copies of submittals for approval. Provide the following:
1. A complete materials list of the quantity of each device, the manufacturer, model number, and
description of the equipment for each individual system component or device that will be
provided.This list shall precede the data sheets.
a. Each System component or device data sheet shall have and indicating arrow next to each
component or device that is being submitted.
C. Additional Shop Drawing Requirements:
1. For additional shop drawing requirements, refer to EACH Low Voltage System Specification Section
Number, in addition to what is listed below.
D. Shop Drawings—Prior to installation of any equipment,the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall provide
the Architect with seven (7)copies of submittals for approval.
1. Shop Drawing Requirements: The installing vendors complete and full-size set of shop drawings
shall be issued in the following format:
a. They shall be clear and legible.
b. The same sheet size as the Contract Drawings(i.e.30"x 42").
c. A minimum of 1/8"text height shall be used for all text,symbol text,and subscript text.
d. Scale of Drawings:
1. Site Plan Drawings shall be the same scale as issued in the Contract Documents.
2. Floor Plan Drawings shall be 1/8"=1'-0", unless directed to do otherwise.
e. The Electrical Legend, Wire Legend, Load and Battery Calculations, Riser Diagram, Sequence
of Operation info, Wiring Details, and Mounting Details shall precede the Site Plans and Floor
Plans.
f. All sheets, including the cover, shall include a Title Block along the edge of each of the
drawings,that when the drawings are rolled up,the following information shall be visible:
1. The System specific sheet number.
2. Project Name,specification Section Number and Section Title name.
3. Floor Name, area, and/or section of the building(use the name of the area and/or floor
description that is on the Contract Drawings).
g. Architectural information on the Contract Drawings, shall be included on the Installing Vendor
Shop Drawing, including, but not limited to; Match Lines, Grid Lines, Grid Bubbles, Key Plan,
and Enlarged Floor Plans.
h. Electrical information on the Contract Drawings shall be included on the Installing Vendor
Shop Drawing, including, but not limited to; all applicable General Notes and applicable
Construction Notes for each of the Floor Plans. Where Enlarged Plans are shown on the
Contract Drawings, include this in Installing Vendor Shop Drawings to show the room and ALL
equipment within the room, to help facilitate and coordinate the installation of the Low
Voltage equipment for all systems.
2. Cover Sheet: The first page of the shop drawings shall be a cover sheet to include the following
items;
a. Owners Project information:
1. Site Information
2. Name of site,address,city,and zip code of where the installation shall take place.
b. Installing Vendors Project information:
1. Business name.
2. Local office address of the Installing Vendor.
3. Primary contact person name, phone number, and email address who is responsible for
the long-term management of the Owners System.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 3/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Provide a "Sheet Index", which assigns a sheet number and unique name for each sheet that
is included in the shop drawing submittal package. As part of the sheet index, list every sheet
that is part of the system shop drawing package. On the left side of the Sheet Index, provide
two columns - "Included" and "Not Included". Include a check box and provide a check in
each box for all sheets that are included or not included, in each submittal.
1. Each sheet shall have a System Specific Sheet Number and shall match the Contract
Drawing sheet numbering system. (i.e. E4.02 shall be FA-4.02 [for Fire Alarm], E4.02
shall be LAN-4.02 [for Local Area Network]).
3. Legend Information: From Left to Right, provide the following information for EACH device:
a. Use the symbol on the Legend of the contract drawings.
b. List the manufacturer's name.
C. List the manufacturer's model number.
4. Provide a logical description of the device.
a. Provide the back-box requirements and related information. At a minimum,this shall include;
1. The height,width,and depth of each required back box for each symbol on the legend.
2. If the device is a back box or comes with a back box (IE: control panel, power supply,
enclosure,etc.)then provide the height,width,and depth of the dimensions.
3. Indicate if this device back box is going to be installed flush, semi-flush, or surface
mounted.
S. Provide a Wire Legend listing the cable manufacturer, model number, cable rating, size of
conductors, quantity of conductors, and color of each conductor. Use the format in the Sample
"Wire Legend", as it applies to each system (see the Sample at the end of this specification).
Provide a cable identification naming scheme(as defined within these specifications).
a. The Wire Legend shall include the Cable Manufacturer and Model Number for EACH of the
following types of cables(as applicable to the project):
1. Conduit/Raceway Cable
2. Open Cabling
3. Wet Rated Cable
4. Aerial Rated Cable
5. EACH cable and EACH cable type shall have a different letter designation.
6. Load and Battery Calculations: For EACH control Panel, Power Supply, and/or Amplifier for EACH
System,at a minimum show the following Amp Draw,Circuit,and Battery calculations;
a. The total Amp Draw load in stand by or non-active mode.
b. The total Amp Draw load with all devices active and in a maximum load condition.
C. Provide the spare power information that is available for future additional devices and/or
equipment.
1. Include the quantities of spare circuits that are available(where applicable).
d. Circuit calculations:
1. The quantity of each device per circuit.
2. The Amp Draw per device per circuit (where applicable [this is not applicable to
addressable devices that receive their power from an addressable data loop. Simply
include the maximum amount of devices than can be placed on each addressable loop
and the amount of addressable devices that are included on each addressable loop for
this project]).
3. The total Amp Draw load per circuit.
4. The cable length distance of each circuit.
5. The gauge size of wire used for each circuit.
6. The total line loss for each circuit.
7. Factor the line loss and Amp Draw to show the actual voltage available at the end of
each circuit(after the last device).
8. Include in the design layout, the requirements of "Spare Capacity" in Part 2 of this
specification (where applicable).
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00-4/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
e. Battery Back Up:
1. All Batteries shall be sized to provide at least 20% spare capacity. Include this
information in all calculations.
2. For Fire Alarm, include all calculations that are required by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
f. Uninterruptible Power Supply(s) (UPS):
1. For systems that include a UPS, provide the maximum load (allowed by the UPS
manufacturer) that EACH UPS is capable of providing, and list each item and its
maximum load that will be connected to the UPS. Include the total load of all
equipment connected to the UPS and list the spare capacity available.
7. Riser Diagram: Provide a System One-Line Riser Diagram that shows the entire system. List the
following:
a. List the head-end equipment and IP addressed devices. Show the connection to the "Cloud"
WAN,where applicable.
1. Show each location (the MDF and EACH designated IDF separately).
2. Show each cable types, sizes, and quantities between the MDF and each designated IDF
location.
3. Show EACH device in the MDF and each designated IDF location (Control Panel, CPU,
DVR, Server, Power Supply and Terminal Cabinet [where applicable])for each applicable
system, the room name that each major system component is located in and show the
connection to the headend equipment.
4. Show all field devices with their respective room names and/or room numbers and
connections to their associated equipment.
5. Show all field devices with their respective address point(where applicable).
8. For the Fire Alarm System ONLY, provide a detailed Sequence of Operation matrix that meets or
exceeds industry standards, and shows how the System will work. This includes, but is not limited
to:
a. All Inputs and/or Actions:
b. All Outputs and/or Controls:
9. Provide all Mounting Details and mounting heights for:
a. All head-end equipment.
b. Rack(s) (where applicable).
C. Device(s).
10. Detailed Wiring Information:
a. Show each individual conductor color for all wiring on the point-to-point wiring diagrams for
each device.
b. Show complete scale drawings of equipment,devices,wiring diagrams,and terminations of:
1. Each Control Panel,CPU, DVR,etc.
2. Power Supply and/or amplifier
3. Rack equipment(where applicable).
4. EACH device type
5. EACH Terminal Cabinet(where applicable)
11. Rack Layout(where applicable).
a. Show the intended equipment layout within the Rack(s).
b. Show blank filler plates in spaces where equipment is not installed.
C. Indicate the rack unit size of each device or filler plate in the rack.
1. If rack equipment is installed on the rear side of the rack, show rear view of the rack
also.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 5/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
12. The matrix as defined in the `System Device Naming Matrix' of each system specification (where
applicable).
13. On the shop drawings, include a letter signed by the System designer that is responsible for the
design depicted in the submittals and on the shop drawings. The letter shall state that the
equipment and shop drawings design conform to national, state, local codes as adopted by the
local authority having jurisdiction and meet or exceed all of the performance requirements as
outlined in the specifications.
a. Designers shall provide the following:
1. Provide a "signature" line and signature of the designer.
2. Provide a "printed name" line, below [or to the right] of the signature line and the
printed name of the designer.
3. Provide a "date" line, below [or to the right] of the printed name line and date of the
design.
b. For Fire Alarm Shop Drawings, include the above information and the system shall be
designed by one of the following(provide a copy of the supporting documentation):
1. NICET Level III Certified Designer
2. Registered Professional Engineer.
14. Label and Labeling:
a. On the drawings, label each Rack, Control Panel, CPU, DVR, Power Supply(s), and Terminal
Cabinet(s) in a logical numeric sequence. (i.e. for Fire Alarm Power Supplies, list them as
FAPS-1, FAPS-2,etc).
b. Cables: Generate an alpha-numeric label for each cable type and cable run.
C. For projects with multiple sites,all labeling shall be consistent for all sites.
15. Show floor plan layout of devices and the anticipated routing of cable runs in parallel with all
structural framing in a neat and orderly fashion.
16. EACH device at EACH location shall be shown on EACH floor plan. The cabling for EACH device shall
be shown from EACH device to the device that it shall be connected to. EACH cable(s) shown on
the floor plan shall be identified as described in the "Wire Legend" portion listed within this
specification.
a. Floor Plans: Show all system related devices and all equipment that the system specific shop
drawings will interface to, on each of the floor plans. Provide Cabling for each device and the
related wire type (as shown on the "Wire Legend") shown for each of the device(s). Where
multiple devices are on the same circuit or an addressable data cable is used,show all devices
and their related cable(s).
17. EOL Supervision:
a. Indicate on the floor plan drawings where EACH of the End-Of-Line Resistor(s) is located
(where applicable).
18. Addressable Device information:
a. Show each device address next to each device (where applicable), and clearly displaying this
information so that it is not confusing as to which address belongs to which device. For non-
addressable devices that will be connected to an addressable module, show the device
address next to each device and the addressable module that it will be connected to.
b. List the System Address Point(s) using a logical numbering sequence for the devices on a
single run.
C. Maintain the "Spare Capacity" requirements listed elsewhere in the specifications (where
applicable).
d. Include the complete Dip Switch and/or Rotary Addressing Scheme (used to set the device
address for each addressable point)on the drawings.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 6/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
19. Illuminated Graphic Map(s) (where applicable)—Prior to ordering or installation of any equipment,
the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall obtain written approval by the Architect. Provide the
Architect with seven (7) copies of submittals for approval. These shall be submitted with the Shop
Drawings, but not be bound with the Shop Drawings submittal.
a. Provide the actual full-size scale drawing and artwork that will be provided to the Owner for a
final product.
b. The Drawing submittal shall be in color.
20. All drawing submittals shall be a complete and full set of the system. If drawings are required to be
re-submitted, a full and complete set must be re-submitted. Partial system drawing sets will be
rejected and the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall reissue a full set of drawings. Any re-
submittal(s)shall be provided at the Installing Vendor/Contractors expense.
21. The Installing Vendor/Contractor is responsible for assuring that the conduit size, wire quantity,
wire size, and wire type is suitable for the equipment supplied. The Installing Vendor/Contractor
shall review the proper installation method(s) for each type of device/equipment with the
manufacturer's representative,and the AHJ, Prior to Rough-In.
22. Provide shop drawings that are usable for trouble-shooting purposes showing equipment/device
locations,conduit routing,junction boxes and connection wiring of entire system.
E. Contract drawings shall not be used as Shop Drawings.
F. The Shop Drawings shall be system specific. For example: only Fire Alarm equipment and connections
to other equipment that will be interfaced to the Fire Alarm,shall be shown on the Fire Alarm drawings.
G. Floor plans for the project have been developed by the Engineer using AutoCAD'"software. These
drawing files will be made available to the Installing Vendor/Contractor for development of Shop
Drawings and/or As Builts with a signed waiver of responsibility.
1.07 GOVERNING CODES AND CONFLICTS
A. If the requirements of this section, related sections or the Project Drawings exceed those of the
governing codes and regulations,then the requirements of this section, related sections,and the
Drawings shall govern. However, nothing in this section, related sections or the Drawings shall be
construed to permit work not forming to all governing codes and regulations.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS—CIVIL PLANS
A. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall carefully coordinate the various symbols utilized on the drawings
and shall consult the civil plans to determine site conditions in the various areas.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide all equipment as defined in each specification and on the drawings.
B. All equipment, panels, power supplies,and devices shall be manufactured under the appropriate
category by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL),and shall bear the UL label.
C. All equipment for each system shall bear the UL label. Partial or pending listings shall not be
acceptable. It shall be the Installing Vendor's responsibility to ensure that these requirements are met
and replace any and all equipment up to and including the entire system if these requirements are not
met.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 7/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
D. EACH of the specified Low Voltage Systems identified in PART 1 of these specifications including the
design,devices and/or wiring arrangement shown on the drawings, represent that based on various
equipment manufacturers. Any changes resulting from differences between the specified product and
other manufacturers or substitute manufacturers,shall be the responsibility of the Installing Vendor.
1. Substitutions of the specified equipment and/or supplier will be considered provided that sufficient
documentation is provided to the Engineer which certifies that the equipment and or supplier
qualification meets the requirement of these specifications. Any request for substitution shall be
submitted by the Installing Vendor in writing so as to be received by the Architect not later than
(10) days prior to the bid due date. Equipment that is approved by the Engineer will be issued by
addendum prior to the bid date.
E. Refer to PART 1 for any equipment that is not specifically defined.
2.02 CONDITION OF MATERIAL
A. All equipment shall be new, in un-opened boxes,and be the most current model available for each
component and/or device that is provided for this project. For products that use firmware,the most
current version available shall be downloaded and installed at each component and/or device, prior to
any programming being performed. Outdated or used equipment,as determined by the Architect,shall
be removed and replaced by the Installing Vendor/Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers'
recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams,schematics,
physical equipment sizes,etc., before beginning system installation. All materials shall be in working
order as intended by the manufacturer,at the completion of the project.
2.03 TERMINAL CABINETS,TERMINAL STRIPS,AND ENCLOSURES
A. On-Site System Information Binder and Enclosure: EACH Specification Section identified on the first
page of this specification shall have an Information Binder that shall be housed in a System Information
enclosure. The enclosure shall have a hinged door with the text"(Section Title here) Information",with
each specific system name silk screened onto the enclosure door and shall bear the Underwriters'
Laboratories"UL" label. A"T-Turn"cam lock shall be used to keep the enclosure door closed,and a key
shall NOT be required to open the enclosure. Use the following Space Age Electronics model number or
approved equal.
1. All Systems (other than Fire Alarm): Model#YD9048DBXAA. Verify with the Architect the color of
the enclosure(s) prior to ordering the enclosure. There shall be no additional charge to the Owner,
for changes to the color of the enclosure.
2. For the Fire Alarm: Model # YD9049DBXAA shall be Red in color, have a hinged door, and have
"Fire Alarm System Documentation"silk screened on the enclosure door.
B. Terminal Cabinets(TC):
1. See EACH Specification for Terminal Cabinet requirements(where applicable).
C. Terminal Strips:
1. See EACH Specification for Terminal Strip requirements(where applicable).
D. Enclosures:
1. Each Systems Control Panel(s), Power Supply(s), TC(s), and other metal enclosures shall have the
following:
a. Use key operated locks to secure the enclosure(keyed so that a single key can lock and unlock
all enclosure locks for the entire system)and provide ten (10) keys.
b. Use some form of wire management that uses permanently secured fasteners (no double
back tape), and uses reusable and adjustable Velcro style cable straps,which shall be installed
approximately every four inches within each enclosure.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 8/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.04 LABELS AND LABELING
A. The alpha-numeric labeling shall be developed by the Installing Vendor.
B. Label all equipment and cables in an identical fashion of a sequential manner.
C. The Installing Vendor proposed alpha-numeric labeling that is intended to be used to identify all
components of the system shall be submitted for approval by the engineer,with the submittal of
equipment data sheets.
D. All labeling information shall be recorded on the as-built drawings and all test documents shall reflect
the appropriate labeling scheme.
E. Phenolic name plates shall be used for identification of the Racks,Control Panel(s), Power Supply(s),
Terminal Cabinet(s),and other appurtenances of each system in a logical numeric sequence. Use an
alpha-numeric name of each device for each location (created by the Installing Vendor)to identify the
equipment on the Shop Drawings.
1. The size of the plate shall be two-inches high by approximately eight-inches wide. Different colors
of backgrounds may be used for each System(but Red shall only be used for Fire Alarm).
2. The text color shall be White Letters that are 3/4-inch high and are 1/2-inch in width.
F. Labeling of Cables must be provided in the following locations: EACH System Control Panel, Power
Supplies,Terminal Cabinets,Terminal Strips, Racks,other system related appurtenances,and all
junction boxes. Label all cables as shown on the Installing Vendors Shop Drawings.
G. All label printing shall be machine generated using indelible ink ribbons or cartridges,self-laminating
labels shall be used on cable jackets,appropriately sized to the outside diameter of the cable,and
placed within view at the termination point on each end.
1. Temporary Labels:Shall consist of the following:
a. Using a fine point permanent style marker, Sharpie° or equivalent, to write directly onto the
outer jacket of the cable or use temporary tags.
b. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall take all precautions to use care when pulling the cable
to insure the integrity of the temporary label.
C. Remove all temporary labels and tags, prior to installing the permanent label.
2. Permanent Labels: Labels shall be produced using an electronic labeler. Cabling shall be marked
with a permanent, electronic printed label with a self-laminating clear wrapping to cover the
printed label and shall be secured to the outer jacket of the cable.
3. Provide Brady Model XSL-116-427 or approved equal.
2.05 SYSTEM CABLES
A. All cable(s)shall be new.
B. All cable types shall be rated to meet all code requirements for site conditions, including, but not
limited to; underground,wet, plenum,and aerial requirements as mandated per N.E.C.and local AHJ
requirements. The Installing Vendor shall be responsible for ensuring that all cables meet all national
codes,state codes, local codes,AHJ requirements,and each equipment manufacturer's requirements,
for a reliable,fully functional,and warrantable system,as intended. Do not exceed the wiring distance
limitation of the equipment,device(s),cable(s)and/or conductor(s)as recommended by the
manufacturer of either the equipment and/or the cables for each installation application:
1. Use the manufacturer recommended cables for EACH application and as required by Code (i.e.
Raceway,Open Cabling,Wet and/or Aerial).
2. All cables shall be stranded, unless otherwise noted and/or recommended otherwise in writing by
the manufacturer.
a. Balanced twisted pair horizontal cabling as part of the permanent link (CAT5e, CAT6, CAT6A)
are excluded from this requirement.
3. See PART 3 of this section,and of each System specification for more information.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 9/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.06 PROOF OF DELIVERY FORM
A. When providing Equipment to the Owner,the Installing Vendor shall provide the following transmittal
document and obtain the necessary signatures.
1. The Installing Vendors Transmittal Document is defined as:
a. Company logo.
b. Name.
c. Address.
d. Telephone number.
e. Delivery date.
f. Installing Vendors representative name that is making the delivery.
g. Quantity of each item.
h. Manufacturers Name and Model Number.
i. The exact same description of the device(as used on the shop drawings).
j. Provide a "signature" line for the Owners representative.
k. Provide a "printed name" line,for the Owners representative.
I. Provide a "date" line, below for the Owners representative.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 WORK ENVIRONMENT
A. General:
1. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall have implemented an OSHA approved safety plan at their
place of business and is a daily practice for all staff.
a. Avoiding an injury is the primary concern for this project. Use OSHA industry standards to
avoid accidents.
2. Coordination with Other Trades:
a. It is the responsibility of the Installing Vendor/Contractor to coordinate with all trades for this
project. Maintain all requirements for; project schedule deadlines, rough in, installation,
programming, training, and ensuring that the Owner receives a fully functional system as
defined in this specification.
3.02 APPROVED EQUIPMENT AND PERMITS
A. No equipment shall be delivered to the job site until shop drawings have been reviewed and approved
by the Architect.
B. An approved set of shop drawings shall be continuously available at the job site during construction,for
review by the Architect.
C. Obtain all permits as required, prior to installation of any equipment. They shall be continuously
available at the job site during construction,for review by the Architect.
3.03 CABLE INSTALLATION—GENERAL
A. Open Cable installation methods are acceptable for this project when they are above accessible ceilings
or in attic spaces, provided that all requirements identified in this specification are met.
B. All cable types shall be rated to meet all code requirements for site conditions, including, but not
limited to; underground,wet,and aerial requirements as mandated per N.E.C.and local AHJ
requirements.
C. Do not exceed the wiring distance limitation of the equipment,device(s),cable(s)and/or conductor(s)
as recommended by the manufacturer of either equipment and/or cables for each installation
application. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all cables meet all
equipment manufacturers' requirements for a reliable,fully functional,and warrantable system,as
intended.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 10/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
D. Wiring insulation shall be one of the types required by NEC 725-16.
E. Cable Supports:Clamps, "D-Rings", "J-Hooks", Hangers,and Velcro tie-wraps are all acceptable ways to
support cable. However, installation of these supports must be done with care so as not to cause
crushing or distortion of the cable, nor cause tighter bends than the minimum radius permitted for each
type cable.
1. See each specific Section requirements that shall be applied to this project in addition to these
requirements.
F. Allowable Cable Bend Radius and Pull Tension: In general,all cables cannot tolerate sharp bends or
excessive pull tension during installation. The minimum radius bend shall be ten (10)times the cable
outer diameter with no tensile load applied,and twenty(20)times the cable outer diameter with a
maximum tensile load of 25ft/lbs applied during installation. The Installing Vendor/Contractor is
responsible for maintaining the cable manufacturers Bend Radius and Pull Tension at all times.
Corrections to cable installation shall be made to the satisfaction of the Architect at no additional cost
to the Owner.
G. Service Loops and Cable Management:
1. Comb all wires for the duration of the cable run so they are neat, orderly, do not have excessive
slack, and are not tangled, prior to any service loop, continuing through any service loop,
continuing into EACH Enclosure(s)and/or System Rack(s).
a. Provide a 10'-0" service loop of EACH device cable (a minimum of 2'-0" above the accessible
ceiling(within 5'-0"of plan view)above EACH device.
b. For ceilings that are open to structure, do NOT provide a service loops, except for the
following locations:
1. MDF Rooms.
2. IDF Rooms.
3. Electrical Rooms.
4. Storage Rooms.
5. Designated system equipment locations that are NOT in view of the public.
6. Prior to rough-in,obtain Architects approval.
2. Cable Management shall be used to bundle all cables of like kind,separated by system type.
3. See Systems Plywood Backboard Cabling, listed elsewhere in this specification for more
information.
H. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall ensure that communications cable is installed with care, using
techniques which prevent kinking,sharp bends,scraping,cutting,deforming the jacket,or other
damage. During inspection,evidence of such damage will result in the material being declared
unacceptable. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall replace all unacceptable cabling at no additional
expense to the Owner.
I. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall order and install the exact cables as specified on the Installing
Vendors Shop Drawings. If at any time during the installation and through the warranty period, it is
discovered that any cable other than what is called for on the Installing Vendors drawings has been
installed,the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall remove all effected cables and shall provide and install
the correct cable,as required. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall also provide the staff to monitor
the building during the cable replacement period until the System is fully operational to the satisfaction
of the Architect,without any additional cost to the Owner.
J. All horizontal cables shall be supported at a maximum of 4'-0" intervals with UL approved devices. At
no point shall cables rest on,be tied to or otherwise secured to electrical conduit, plumbing,ventilation
ductwork,accessible ceiling and/or light fixture hangers,or any other equipment. Cable shall be
secured to building supports or wire hangers(at the structures ceiling)specifically designed to support
cables and/or to additional blocks or anchors specifically installed for this purpose.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 11/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
K. All open cabling and/or conduit shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to the structure. Open cable
installations shall use insulated mounting supports or rings approved for such use. Wiring shall be
installed near or on structural members as to minimize risk of physical damage by other trades or
maintenance personnel servicing the equipment.
1. Installing open cabling and/or conduit on an exposed area of wall that could have been installed in
a less conspicuous manner, especially where art or murals are to be painted is NOT acceptable.
Any installation that does not meet this requirement will be required to be removed, and to patch
and paint to match adjacent surfaces to the satisfaction of the Architect. Then install the conduit,
fasteners, and wire as required by the project, at no additional cost to the Owner in an acceptable
manner that meets with the Architects approval. Obtain direction from the Architect prior to
rough-in,for areas that need clarification.
2. In some cases, it may be more aesthetically appealing to install conduit down the wall to the floor
and either through the floor or along the floor, to be less conspicuous. Contact the Architect for
further clarification.
L. Conduit type and areas where conduit will be required for this project are:
1. Provide EMT metal raceway in the following areas:
a. Always conceal conduits within walls and/or ceiling spaces wherever possible.
b. Provide conduit in all areas required by Code.
C. Provide conduit from the device to accessible ceiling.
d. Areas exposed to view and inaccessible areas. Install conduits to an accessible ceiling space,
as defined above.
2. Provide conduit, conduit sleeves,junction boxes, couplers, connectors, cabling and terminations as
recommended by the manufacturer and as required for a complete installation.
3. Conduit, conduit sleeves, raceways, floor boxes, device boxes, mud rings, etc., shall be furnished
and installed per the Division 26 requirements. Maintain all Conduit Code Fill Requirements and
provide no less than an additional 40%spare capacity for future growth.
4. Conduit and Raceway Usage: All communications cable shall be dedicated for communications
purposes, and not to be shared with other electrical wiring when required by code. Obtain written
approval from EACH of the manufacturers if more than one system type is going to be installed in a
single conduit.
a. Fire Alarm Cabling shall be in a separate, dedicated raceway (where indicated on the
drawings).
S. Pull Cords: Provide Nylon type pull cords in EACH Conduit raceway.
M. Cable Lubricants: Lubrications specifically designed for installing cables may be used to reduce pulling
tension as necessary when pulling cable into conduit. After installation,exposed cable and other
surfaces must be cleaned of lubricant residue.
1. Recommended Products:
a. Dyna-Blue.
b. American Polywater.
N. Horizontal Cabling:
1. Horizontal cable terminations shall be made at the appropriate patch panel and labeled. At each
outlet box, a sufficient length of spare cable shall be provided for terminating outlet devices such
that the outlet can be easily removed and inspected. In addition,each cable shall be terminated as
indicated below:
a. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the
TIA/EIA-568-C document, manufacturer's recommendations and/or best industry practices.
b. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not be less than 4 times the outside
diameter of the cable.
c. The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 12/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
O. Systems Plywood Backboard Cabling:
1. Cable shall be routed as close as possible to the ceiling, floor, or corners to ensure that adequate
backboard space is available for current and future equipment and for cable terminations. Cables
shall NOT be tie-wrapped to existing electrical conduit, existing cables, or other equipment.
Minimum bend radius shall be observed.
2. Install cables via the shortest route directly to the nearest edge of the backboard from the
mounted equipment or block. Lace, Plastic or Velcro tie wrap all similarly routed cables together
and attach to the outside edge(s) of the backboard vertically and/or horizontally, then route via
"square" corners over a path that will offer minimum obstruction to future installations of
equipment and/or other cables.
3. See "Service Loops and Cable Management" listed within this specification for additional
information.
3.04 SYSTEMS PLYWOOD BACK BOARD(S)
A. Systems plywood back board(s)shall be used to mount enclosures of any kind,to any wall or surface.
The systems plywood backboard shall be securely fastened to the walls to accommodate no less than
ten times the total weight of the equipment to be mounted. The systems plywood backboard shall be a
minimum of 3/4",APA exterior grade Douglas Fir A-C,and fire retardant with a flame spread rating not
more than 25 when tested according to ASTM E-84. Provide the systems plywood backboard from the
floor up to ceiling height(not exceeding 12'-0")on all walls shown,unless otherwise noted. The entire
backboard shall be painted with three(3)coats of fire-retardant paint(the color shall match the
adjacent surface). EACH enclosure,when mounted,shall bear a minimum of 150 pounds weight on the
enclosure.
B. Mounting of equipment shall be logically placed,and shall be located at the top, bottom, left,or right
portion of the systems plywood backboards to accommodate future growth of the system. Under no
circumstances will the equipment be allowed to be mounted in the middle of the backboards.
3.05 GROUNDING
A. Ground all equipment per the Manufacturers recommendations, per Division 26 and as required by
Code.
B. Provide grounding and bonding per TIA-607-13.
C. Provide(1)#3/0 green insulated copper grounding conductor in 1"conduit from the Main Electrical
Room MDB Ground Busbar to the Main Distribution Frame(MDF)Telecommunication Main Grounding
Busbar(TMGB).
D. Provide(1)#3/0 green insulated copper grounding conductor in 1"conduit between the MDF Room
TMGB and EACH designated Intermediate Distribution Frame(IDF) location shown on the drawings and
terminate on the Telecommunication Grounding Busbar(TGB).
E. Provide(1)#3/0 green insulated copper grounding conductor in 1"conduit between the EACH
designated Intermediate Distribution Frame(IDF) location shown on the drawings and terminate on the
Telecommunication Grounding Busbar(TGB).
F. See Section 27 2000"TMGB and TGB(Telecommunication Grounding Busbars)"for additional
Grounding requirements.
3.06 DEVICE RELOCATIONS
A. Device location may be changed prior to installation,within 15'-0"without extra charge, if so desired by
the Architect.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 13/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.07 INSTALLATION
A. Provide all equipment,wiring,conduit,and outlet boxes required for the installation of a complete,fully
functioning,operating system in accordance with applicable local,state, national codes,AHJ
requirements,the manufacturer's recommendations,these plans and specifications. All circuits not in
conduit must be wired with UL listed power limited cable under NEC 725,Class II wiring. Plenum cable
shall be utilized in all return air plenum ceilings.
1. Color coded wires shall be used throughout.
2. Wiring shall conform to the National Electrical Code Article 725.
B. Provide 120vac wiring and connections to the Control Panel(s), EACH Amplifier(s),CPU(s), DVR(s),and
Power Supply(s)as required for a fully functional system,while maintaining all of the design
requirements described elsewhere within each system specifications. At a minimum,this shall include
the following;
1. Multiple Power Supplies and/or the Control Panel(s) may be placed on the same circuit, while
maintaining all code mandated load calculations, but shall be on circuit(s) that is dedicated for
EACH System.
a. Consult with the Architect to verify load calculations meet all code requirements.
b. Install 120 VAC wiring and conduit as specified in Division 26.
c. Show on the As-Built drawings, the location of each panel board that is being used to power
any System equipment and list each panelboard circuit for each system (at the panel board).
(i.e. Panelboard "x",circuit 12=FAPS-3; Circuit 14=IACP.)
C. Maintain all fire wall ratings,as required.
D. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely
coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.
E. EACH manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide on-site supervision of the installation for
EACH of the systems equipment for the duration of the project. This includes programming,training,
and the Owners ability to use the Complete System Functionality as it was designed.
F. Install wire guards at locations as shown on the drawings and as described elsewhere within these
specifications.
G. Every attempt shall be made to avoid running telecommunications close to(less than 2'-0")and/or
parallel to other communication cables in the building,all lighting,and conduits containing 120vac(or
greater). This shall be to avoid interference with any other service or system,operation,or
maintenance purposes such as access boxes,ventilation-mixing boxes,access hatches to air filters,
switch or electrical outlets,electrical panels,fire alarm equipment,clock systems,and lighting fixtures.
Avoid crossing areas horizontally just above or below any conduit and/or riser. Route cables in such a
manner to allow other cables to enter the conduit and/or riser without difficulty at a later time by
maintaining maximum distance from these openings. Maintain all recommended distances from other
cables,as required by the manufacturer. Install cable to whichever of these two requirements are more
stringent.
H. Room numbers shown on plans are architectural designs numbers for construction purposes. These
numbers are NOT to be used for programming. Final system programming shall reflect the final room
numbering plan and actual room signage, unless directed to otherwise in writing or as specified in
another specification section. Update the As-Built Drawings to reflect the final room numbering plan
and actual room signage.
3.08 MOUNTING HEIGHTS,LOCATIONS,AND SETTINGS
A. Install all equipment as recommended by the Manufacturer.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 14/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. The installation of EACH device,enclosure,and/or control panel shall be installed so that the
Maintenance Staff will be able to access,test and/or replace any component of the system. If this
installation does not meet this requirement to the satisfaction of the Architect, it will not be accepted.
The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall be required to remove the item, patch and paint the area to the
satisfaction of the Architect,and reinstall the device,enclosure,or control panel as required to make
the system easily maintainable and acceptable,at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Control Panel(s), Power Supply(s),and Locations:
1. Mount Control Panel(s), Power Supplies, and Enclosures (provide quantities as required) with
approximately two inches of separation between the enclosures.
2. Each enclosure,when mounted,shall meet the following criteria;
a. Conduit shall not enter any enclosure or panel,except where conduit entry is approved by the
manufacturer.
b. Chase nipple the enclosures together. At a minimum, use two (2) 1%" conduits. Size and/or
provide additional conduits as required. Provide conduits between enclosures to
accommodate an additional 100%conduit fill while maintaining all NEC requirements. Avoid
installing chase nipples where batteries are to be installed (contact the manufacturer and/or
the Installing Vendor prior to drilling any holes). Any chase nipples installed where batteries
are to be located will be rejected, and require the reinstallation as specified, up to and
including installing new enclosures.
c. The bottom of the chase nipples shall be a minimum of two-inches above the location where
any batteries are to be installed.
d. EACH enclosure door shall be able to open no less than 105°.
e. The top of each enclosure shall be mounted at the same height of 60-inches above the
finished floor and shall be level.
f. If changes to the above requirements are preferred, contact the Architect for approval prior
to rough-in.
D. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in place(IE:
devices shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be able to
support the no less than four times the weight of the equipment and/or device.
E. Rack Equipment: EACH Rack shall be securely attached to the floor and/or wall using the
manufacturer's recommended mounting hardware.
F. See each system specification for additional mounting information.
3.09 FLUSH MOUNT AND SURFACE MOUNT EQUIPMENT AND ENCLOSURE LOCATIONS
A. Prior to rough-in,consult the Architect for clarification for Flush Mount and Surface Mount locations.
B. Flush mounted equipment and enclosures shall be installed in areas where the rooms are finished such
as Administrative Areas,Offices,Work Rooms, Break Room and Corridors. Provide the appropriate
finish work around each enclosure as required. This type of equipment includes, but is not limited to
the following:
1. Enclosures: Typically,are Control Panels, Power Supplies,etc.
a. Provide the manufacturers flush mount Trim Rings,Adapters, and/or Brackets for this type of
equipment.
C. Surface mounted equipment and enclosure shall be installed in areas where the rooms are NOT finished
such as Electrical Rooms, MDF/IDF Rooms, Mechanical Rooms,or Utility Rooms. Unless otherwise
noted,this equipment shall be installed on the Systems Plywood Back Boards. This type of equipment
includes, but is not limited to the following:
1. Enclosures: Typically,are Control Panels, Power Supplies,etc.
2. Punch Blocks: Typically,are used with Telephone PBX and Intercom equipment.
3. Wall Mounted and Floor Mounted Racks.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 15/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.10 NUMBERING AND LABELING
A. Phenolic Plates:
1. Install phenolic plates at each of the Control Panel(s), Power Supply(s), Terminal Cabinet(s), and
Rack(s).
a. All phenolic plates shall be secured to each enclosure with rivets.
b. Install each plate 1" from the top of the enclosure and be centered on the door. Relocate as
required to avoid interfering with equipment or components within the enclosure or that may
prevent the enclosure door from closing properly. The location of the phenolic plates shall be
consistently installed in the same location on each system enclosure,at EACH location.
B. Terminal Cabinets:
1. Label each termination point on the inside of EACH enclosure door. All information shall be legible,
as defined by the Architect.
C. Addressable Devices/Address Point Labels(where applicable):
1. Install the Address Label for each addressable device on or near the device. Verify with the
Architect, prior to installation.
2. Clean the surface from dust, grease, or lubricants as recommended by the manufacturer of the
label.
3. The addressable label shall be able to be viewed by the general public when standing on the
ground.
a. Prior to Installation, coordinate with the Owner's Representative for exact location of how
and/or where to mount the address label for EACH device type to fulfill this requirement,
prior to installation.
4. Provide the following address label format:
a. The background shall be clear(see through).
b. The text shall be Black in color,and a minimum of%"tall.
C. Use Brothers or P-Touch models to produce the label.
3.11 WIRING
A. For consistency of wiring throughout the entire system equipment, if specific conductor colors are not
called out in EACH system specification,then the following colors shall apply:
1. Red is(+) Positive voltage or data bus(+) positive.
2. Black is(-) Negative voltage or data bus(-) negative.
3. White is common.
4. Green is normally open or normally closed.
B. Wiring within EACH enclosure shall have the outer jacket of the cable removed to within three-inches of
the cable entering the enclosure. Individual conductors from each jacketed cable shall be spirally
twisted to keep them together, until they are routed into each appropriate individual terminal. Route
all conductors parallel with the walls of the enclosure, make 90'turns within the enclosure,and always
keep a two-inch minimum spacing from any circuit board and/or terminals.
1. Labeling of Cables.
a. Prior to installing any label, clean each cable with the appropriate cleaner to remove any
pulling compound residue, grease, oil, dirt, etc. in order for the label to properly adhere to
the cable jacket.
b. The Label shall indicate the Device or Outlet and the area or wing of the building that the
cable is being routed from. The Label shall also indicate the MDF Room or designated IDF
location that the cable is being routed to.
C. Each label shall be located on each cable that enters any enclosure or junction box and shall
be easily visible and readable.
d. The cable numbering system shall be consistent with shop drawings.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 1 6/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. End-of-Line(EOL) Resistors: Each device that is capable of being supervised by the Control Panel and/or
Power Supply shall be supervised. Install equipment and/or program as required.
1. Indicate on the As-Built drawings where EACH of the End-Of-Line Resistors is located.
2. Each End-of-Line Resistor shall be installed at the last device on each circuit. Locating the EOL in
the Control Panel and/or Power Supply is NOT acceptable.
D. The telephone dialer connections and Ethernet WAN connections shall be made by the Installing
Vendor. Coordinate with the Owner for scheduling the Owners IT Department to supervise all
terminations and connections.
E. All wiring routed under slab or underground shall be suitable for wet locations.
F. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of EACH
enclosure after completion of the installation,and prior to any testing being performed.
G. All circuits shall be identified in accordance with table below and all labels shall include wire type,
quantity and circuit number. Wire code shall match approved shop drawings wire code.
Table
Example: C2HX3
C=Signal Circuit Wire
2=Signal circuit number
H = LCD Keypad wire
X=Addressable initiating device circuit wire
3=Addressable initiating device circuit number
3.12 SPLICE CONNECTORS AND CONNECTIONS
A. All references to splices are for cables that are 50 volts or less.
B. A continuous cable run without any splices is the preferred method. When a splice is required the
following information shall apply.
1. Cable splices are only allowed in accessible, dry locations, in a junction box or terminal cabinet
suitable for the purpose. The only exception is for field devices that have wire leads (i.e. Pigtail)
and require a connection of two wires at the device.
a. Each cable end that is spliced must be labeled, as specified. (i.e.: At the splice point, "From
FACP in MDF Room XXX"on one cable,and "To the East Wing RCAP"on the other cable).
C. All splices shall be performed in one of the following methods:
1. Wire nuts shall NOT be used on this installation, will be deemed unacceptable, and shall be
removed and installed as outlined below.
2. In Junction Boxes:
a. Either one of the following Splice Methods are acceptable:
1. Use the Tool-less Terminal Strip, Model Number SS000470 (Black) or SS000471 (White),
and SS000465 (the Back-Box Bracket)for use with extra deep 4S boxes. This equipment
is manufactured by Space Age Electronics.
2. Use Model DC-100-S Blue Dolphin Connectors (with Sealant), Manufactured by Dolphin
Components Corporation, on all splice connections that are size 18 gauge or less. The
rubber coated outer jacket of the inch-long connector shall contain non-curing sealant
that fills the crimp cavity when crimped. Strip the color coded outer jacket of each
individual conductor that is going to be crimped, approximately 1/8-inch shorter than
the length of the crimp connector, so that when the conductors are inserted all of the
way in the connector, no bare wires(or any strands of wire)are exposed or visible out of
the connector.
3. In Terminal Cabinets:
a. In Terminal Cabinet(s)with each conductor to be landed on a separate terminal.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 1 7/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
b. Indicate on the Shop Drawings and As-Builts,the locations of EACH Terminal Cabinet.
C. Maintain the"Spare Capacity" requirements,as specified.
4. At Field Devices(where the device has wire leads and not a terminal strip).
a. Use Model DC-100-S Blue Dolphin Connectors as described above.
5. Spare or unused conductors shall be:
a. Landed on terminal strips.
b. Shall have the Blue Dolphin Connectors crimped on the end of each conductor.
1. Field devices with pigtails shall have a Blue Dolphin Connectors crimped on the end of
any unused conductor(s).
D. All conductors, if spliced,shall be ONLY spliced to the same gauge size and color of conductor. Changing
of gauge size or color at any point within any cable run is strictly prohibited,and all cables will be
replaced at no additional cost to the Owner,and to the satisfaction of the Architect.
1. If the field device has wire leads, then wire as necessary at the device for proper operation.
Indicate the color code change on the shop drawings per point wiring diagrams. Update any and
all changes to the drawings,for accurate as-builts.
3.13 ON-SITE SYSTEM INFORMATION BINDER ENCLOSURE
A. The Installing Vendor shall install the wall mount enclosure that is labeled "(Section Title here)
information". The enclosure shall be located in the administrative area or the MDF room. Verify the
exact location with the Architect, prior to installation.
B. The enclosure shall have a Site-specific manual, in a "D"style 3-ring binder with an 18-inch heavy-duty
chain securely fastened to the inside of the enclosure.
C. See"As-Built Documentation"for more information.
3.14 TESTING&COMPLETE SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY(SPECIFICALLY FOR THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ONLY)
A. The installing vendor shall notify the Architect a minimum of five(5) business days in advance of testing.
B. The warranty shall NOT begin until the following conditions have been met:
1. Fire Alarm System Testing:
a. The Installing Vendor shall provide two-way communication devices for their own staff, each
Owners Representative, and the Architect, so that all parties can communicate as required to
perform all tests.
b. Completely fill out the 2007 Edition NFPA Fire Alarm System Record of Completion document.
c. Obtain the AHJ signature, printed name, date, and telephone number on the Record of
Completion.
d. Obtain the AHJ signature, printed name, date, and telephone number on the Fire Alarm
Permit.
e. If the Installing Vendor fails the Fire Marshal Inspection,the following shall occur:
1. The Installing Vendor shall make all of the necessary corrections as required,to pass the
AHJ testing and inspection. Then, notify the AHJ and schedule another test, and
continue making corrections until the Fire Alarm System has been accepted by the AHJ.
f. The Installing Vendor is subject to the Close Out requirements as specified in Section 20 0000,
Schedule of Values.
2. As-builts:
a. Refer to the"As-Built Documentation"of this specification for more information.
3. Training:
a. Refer to Section 28 3176 for the Training Requirements as described in "Training Materials".
4. Complete System Functionality:
a. After ALL the above conditions have been met, and includes each of the required signatures,
this shall then be deemed that the Owners ability to use the Complete System Functionality as
it was designed.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 18/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
5. Warranty:
a. The Warranty period shall now begin, and the initiating date of the Warranty period shall
commence on the date of the Owners ability to use the Complete System Functionality as it
was designed. Refer to the"Warranty"of this specification for more information.
C. Upon completion of the installation,testing,and Instruction &Training,the Installing Vendor shall
provide the following Signed Test Forms, in the as-built documentation as required.
1. The signed original Record of Completion
2. The signed original Fire Alarm Permit
3.15 TESTING&COMPLETE SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY(SPECIFICALLY FOR AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEMS)
A. Electronic System Testing:
1. After all equipment specified herein for the system has been completely fabricated and wired and
is in operating condition in the Sound System Installing Vendor's shop, performance tests shall be
conducted by the Sound System Installing Vendor on the system to determine if the installation
and components comply with these specifications.
2. The following test shall be performed and the system shall be made to meet each listed
performance criterion:
3. Overall frequency response of the complete electronic system (unequalized) shall be 20 to 20,000
Hz+2 dB. Equalizing circuits shall be temporarily set in the indicated "flat" position.
4. Total harmonic distortion from microphone input to power amplifier output at rated power shall
be less than 1%for the frequency range of 20 to 20,000 Hz
5. The overall broadband hum and noise from 20 Hz to 20 kHz using 6 dB/octave filter at 12.47 kHz
shall be at least 65 dB below the rated output from system input to output.
6. The total system shall be installed from microphone to loudspeaker in Absolute Polarity. A positive
pressure on the microphone shall produce a positive pressure from the loudspeaker.
B. Acoustical Testing:
1. After all electronic equipment specified herein is fully installed at the job site and the speakers are
fully installed,the system shall be equalized and acoustically tested by the Sound System Installing
Vendor utilizing the Real-Time testing technique. Personnel,test equipment, complete report, and
signing shall be as described.
2. The speakers shall be oriented and sound levels set to provide an even distribution of the Sound
Field frequency response of 250 to 10,000 Hz throughout the seating area.
3. Provide equalization to DSP (when applicable) to attain frequency response that is within +3 dB
from 100 to 10,000 Hz with a 6 dB roll off below 80 Hz and above 12,500 Hz, at any seat in the
audience covered by the loudspeakers.
4. The system shall deliver a minimum of 85 dB average program level with additional 10 dB peaking
margin to any seat in the audience at distortion level below 1%THD over the specified frequency
range.
3.16 TESTING&COMPLETE SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY(FOR ALL SYSTEMS THAT IDENTIFY THIS TESTING
REQUIREMENT)
A. The warranty shall NOT begin until the following conditions have been met:
1. Obtain the AHJ signature, printed name, date, and telephone number on the Permit(s) and other
required documentation. Provide this documentation with the As-Built documents.
2. The Installing Vendor shall provide a copy of the (Section Number and Section Title here)-
Operational Test Form has been performed and submitted to the Architect for review. The
purpose of this document is to show that the Installing Vendor has in fact performed a complete
test. In some cases, every device may not pass the test. This shall serve as the Installing Vendors
own punch list, to make corrections prior to the Acceptance Test. This must be completely filled
out and have an original signature of the representative of the Installing Vendor. Allow for a
minimum of ten (10) business days for the Architect to review this document.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 19/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3. After the Architects review of the System Operational Test Form, the Architect will discuss the
results of the test with the Installing Vendor.
4. The Installing Vendor shall coordinate with the Architect to witness Performance Test. Allow for a
minimum of ten (10) business days to schedule this testing.
S. System Testing:
a. The Installing Vendor shall provide two-way communication devices for their own staff, each
Owners Representative, and the Architect, so that all parties can communicate as required to
perform all tests.
b. The Installing Vendor shall demonstrate the testing of each device, to the Owners
Representative and the Architect, and document this information on the (Section Number
and Section Title here)-Performance Test Form.
C. Upon the completion and passing the Performance Test with 100% positive results, the
Acceptance Test form shall be signed by the Installing Vendor, the Owners Representative,
and the Architect.
1. If the Installing Vendor fails this test by NOT passing the test with 100%positive results,
the following shall occur;
2. The Installing Vendor shall make all of the necessary corrections to provide 100%
positive results.
3. The Installing Vendor shall document the corrective action taken for each item that
failed the Test and submit to the Architect for review. Upon approval by the Architect,
the Acceptance Test shall be rescheduled.
4. The Installing Vendor is subject to the Close Out requirements as specified in Section 01
29 50,Schedule of Values.
6. As-builts:
a. Refer to the"As-Built Documentation"of this specification for more information.
7. Training:
a. Refer to EACH specific Section for the Training Requirements as described in "Training
Materials and Programming Survey".
8. Complete System Functionality:
a. After ALL the above conditions have been met as deemed by a "Pass" on the Governing
Acceptance Form - (Section Name and Section Title here), all training has been completed,
and the required signatures have been acquired, this shall then be deemed that the Owners
ability to use the Complete System Functionality as it was designed.
9. Warranty:
a. The Warranty period shall now begin, and the initiating date of the Warranty period shall
commence on the date of the Owners ability to use the Complete System Functionality as it
was intended. Refer to the"Warranty"of this specification for more information.
3.17 WARRANTY
A. See"Testing&Complete System Functionality", listed elsewhere in these specifications,to establish the
requirements and confirm when the actual warranty period shall begin.
B. The Installing Vendor shall include in the pricing of their bid that they will honor and provide EACH of
the manufacturers Full Term Warranty period for the provision of replacement equipment for EACH
individual device and/or component provided for this project. The completed and fully functional
System, including wiring, installation,and all equipment shall be free from inherent mechanical and
electrical defects. At a minimum,this shall be no less than one(1)year from the date of Complete
System Functionality as defined in "Testing&Complete System Functionality" portion of this
specification. Warranty service for the on-site replacement of equipment shall be provided by the
system supplier's Manufacturer trained representative during normal working hours, Monday through
Friday,excluding holidays,and respond for service no later than the following business day after the call
was received.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 20/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. When the manufacturers warranty exceeds one year,the Installing Vendor shall be responsible for
replacing the actual component or device for the Full Duration of the manufacturer's warranty,if the
Owner or their representative chooses to take the item to the Installing Vendors place of business. If
the Owner chooses to have the Installing Vendor provide on-site service,then the Installing Vendor is
entitled to their standard published (or negotiated) labor rates and miscellaneous material items to
replace the damaged warranty item.
D. The Installing Vendor who is authorized to provide Warranty Service for this project is defined in
"Quality Assurance" located in Part 1 of this specification.
3.18 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION
A. The following documentation must be completed to the satisfaction of the Architect, in order to fulfill
the Close Out requirements as specified in Section 26 00 00,Schedule of Values.
B. All electronic and hard copy information submitted to the Owner shall immediately become the Owners
property to use as best determined by the Owner,without any compensation to any party.
C. All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project(not the room
number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings).
D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall provide three(3)sets of
detailed Operation and Maintenance manuals in a "D"style 3-ring binder. The binder shall be sized to
allow for 20%additional documentation. The spine of the binder shall have a clear cover with an insert
clearly typed with the following label "(Project Name,Section Number,and Section Title here)
Operation and Maintenance Manual". The binder shall have a clear front cover with an insert clearly
typed with the title of the spine on the binder, located at the top of the page,and centered. The
following information shall also be included on the front sheet of the binder;the Project Name and
Project Number,Specification Section Number and Section Title,the Owners name,the Site Name and
Site Address,the Installing Vendors Name,Address,and Contact Name. These O& M Manuals shall
include the following:
1. Use color-coded numbered tabs to separate each item defined below and for each device that was
installed. Provide the following in the order listed below:
a. Provide an 8%"x 11" clear heavy plastic sheet in front of a Table of Contents page as the first
page of the binder indicating each of the equipment or device documents contained in each
tab section.
b. The System Software User Guide.
c. The Web Server"Web-based"software User Guide.
d. The System Control Panel LCD Display User Guide.
e. The Remote LCD Display User Guide(Where Applicable).
f. Provide Step-By-Step instructions for typical Basic Operation of EACH System.
g. Warranty information. The Installing Vendor shall provide Warranty information in the form
of a matrix from left to right, list the following information:
h. Use the symbol on the Legend of the contract drawings.
i. List the actual manufacturer's name of each device shown on the Installing Vendors shop
drawings.
j. List the actual manufacturer's model number of each device shown on the Installing Vendors
shop drawings.
k. Provide the description of the device that is used for each symbol on the legend.
I. On the matrix, indicate recommended testing frequency for each item.
M. State the Manufacturers Full Term of the Warranty for EACH control panel, EACH power
supply,and EACH device provided.
n. Indicate where the Owner may purchase each of these devices. Provide the Business Name,
Address,City,State,Zip Code, Phone Number,and list two (2)contact names.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 21/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
o. A reduced copy(11"x17") of record drawings. Enlarge all notes,text, and symbols to a legible
(as defined by the Architect)reading format.
p. Provide one (1) original and two (2) copies of the "Spare Parts Proof of Delivery" form that
was signed by the Owners representative.
q. A printed copy of the final completed version of the (Section Number and Section Title here)
technical configuration and this document shall be dated.
r. A printed copy of the final completed version of the (Section Number and Section Title here)
software`point status report' (where applicable)and this document shall be dated.
S. Update the matrix as defined in the `System Device Naming Matrix' for each specification
section, to correct any changes that may have occurred through the course of this project.
This list shall follow the above equipment list.
t. The technical date sheet for each Control Panel, Power Supply,Terminal Cabinet, field device
and component installed. Use a separate tab for each of these that were supplied and/or
installed.
u. Include all testing documentation and the procedure to properly test each device. Put this
document immediately behind the respective technical data sheet.
V. Include the installation manual for each device that was installed. Put this information
immediately behind the testing documentation.
w. Provide one(1)original and two (2)copies of the AHJ approved document(s).
X. Provide one(1)original and two (2)copies of the completed documents:
y. The(Section Number,and Section Title here)-Operational Test Form.
z. The(Section Number,and Section Title here)-Performance Test Form.
aa. The approved Governing Acceptance Form-(Section Number,and Section Title here).
bb. If the Governing Acceptance Form has not been approved, accepted, and signed by the
Architect,this binder will be rejected.
cc. Each binder shall not exceed three-inches in width. Use multiple binders as required.
Indicate Volume 1 of X,Volume 2 or X,etc.
dd. Provide the above information on six (6) CD's and label each one (with a PC generated label)
"(Owners Name, Project Name, Section Number, Section Title, and the current date goes
here) - Operation and Maintenance Manuals, Data Sheets, Documents, and As-Built Shop
Drawings". Organize the manuals, data sheets, documents, and drawings into separate
folders.
ee. Include on EACH system CD provided, the AutoCAD As-Built Drawings, located elsewhere in
these specifications.
ff. EACH of the three (3) Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall have one CD securely
fastened inside.
gg. Provide three(3)CD's for general As-Built documentation for the project.
E. On-Site System Information Binder:The Installing Vendor shall provide Individual Site Manual, in a "D"
style 3-ring binder with an 18-inch heavy-duty chain securely fastened to the inside of the"(Section
Title here) information"enclosure. See the"On-Site System Information Binder Enclosure" listed
elsewhere in these specifications,for the enclosure information and location. The binder shall be sized
to allow for 20%additional documentation. The spine of the binder shall have a clear cover with an
insert clearly typed with the following label "(Section Title here) information". The binder shall have a
clear front cover with an insert clearly typed with the title of the spine on the front sheet, located at the
top of the page,and centered. The following information shall also be included on the front sheet of
the binder;the Project Name and Project Number,Specification Section Number and Section Title,the
Owners name,the Site Name and Site Address,the Installing Vendors Name,Address,and Contact
Name. Each binder shall include the following:
1. Use color-coded numbered tabs to separate each item defined below and for each device that was
installed. Provide the following:
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 22/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
a. Provide an 8%"x 11" clear heavy plastic sheet in front of a Table of Contents page as the first
page of the binder indicating each of the equipment or device documents contained in each
tab section.
2. The Installing Vendor shall coordinate with the Owner to obtain the information listed below. A
single sheet shall list the following items:
a. The Site Name and Site Address.
b. State "In case of emergency during regular business hours: (list the appropriate name and
telephone number)". List the Owners Representative who should be contacted during regular
business hours.
c. State "In case of emergency after regular business hours: list the appropriate name and
telephone number)". List the Owners Representative who should be contacted after regular
business hours.
d. List the following information (where applicable). State "The monitoring of the (Section Title
here) is being monitored by (list the name of the central monitoring station here), Phone
Number: (list the central station phone number here) Account # (enter the account number
here)".
3. Provide each of the items identified in the operation and Maintenance Manuals,with the following
exceptions. Do NOT provide:
a. Spare Parts Proof of Delivery form.
b. As-built Operation and Maintenance CD's of the project.
F. As-Built Drawings:The Installing Vendor shall provide three(3)sets of hard copy As-Built drawings.
Drawings shall be the same size that were issued for the shop drawings and clearly indicates the
following:
1. Update the Shop Drawings:
a. To address any changes, including but not limited to the Riser, point-to-point wiring diagrams,
and mounting details.
b. To accurately reflect the final installation of equipment and devices that were relocated,
added or removed.
C. Update the matrix as defined in the 'System Device Naming Matrix' of the specification, to
correct any changes that may have occurred through the course of this project.
d. Actual routing of all raceways.
e. Actual routing of all Open Cables.
f. Actual cable type,color,and numbers.
g. Actual splice locations.
h. Actual system wiring diagrams, connection diagrams, and interface of all components in the
system.
i. Provide scale drawings of the internal components of the main panel, and each power supply.
Show each circuit number coming from the terminals of each Control Panel and/or Power
Supply.
j. Actual room number and programming addresses (where applicable) for all components in
the system.
k. Show on the As-Built drawings the location of each panel board that is being used to power
any System equipment and list each panel board circuit used (at the device that is connected
to that circuit. IE: FACP or FAPS).
I. Indicate on the As-Built drawings where EACH of the End-Of-Line Resistors is located.
m. Provide all updated As-Built drawings in AutoCAD'" 2004 format (or newer) and put these
electronic files on the Operation and Maintenance Manuals CD, as described elsewhere in
these specifications.
G. Provide all As-Built Documentation to the Architect prior to any Training and no less than ten (10)
business days prior to project completion.
H. Any re-submittal(s)shall be provided at the Installing Vendor/Contractors expense.
Job Number 2170712.00 LOW VOLTAGE SYSTEMS
27 00 00- 23/25
w -
kLL §
J k �w
C14 co< / I
x o e 0
\ LUc
2c
Lo cc w � § � / � � � � w z EE/ z / /
a. / _ / = 2 2 /2 / 2 2 \] 5/ % ]5 / O ^
w � z � _ �_ � � /\ ya / \ya »
4
\ a 0 � 0
O
a a a ƒ ƒ a a « & ƒ
< Q Q # # k k 2 2 it
m 0
� j §
w 0
0LU
°
w
� a. -
� ° LL
- z
E� mLL
fLU
2 a
aa � Do-
2 w )a ) a ) a ) a )a ) a ) 0 LUW4z w W Z
E a. �/ * / * / * / */ * / * / L] §/ U ]§ /
§ ® (® ( ® ( ® ( ® (® ( ® ( ® 41LL % Iya
0
em em
�
�
$ _ C,
2
_
k § § ) a ) a � / W /_ ) / ) / ) a
< ƒ < ƒ » » < _j < < ƒ E w
2 / 2 0 \ + m + ) * ) * \ \ m \ CO + z z
IL o 0 ` ` ` ` 0
R 0
0 e e e e F,
2 0 5 5 5 5 e e v
/ z �)_ � )_ LU Wz k)_ k )_ § § 0_
z z
k z k )� ) � 0 CO 0 0 4 O O
Mn z /§ / § / / � z z i z w b
» M wp wp @e @e Lp Lp C) $ $ -0
b LL Ir< of « z = z = >< > « a � < < � E
a ap epp � e � e z- z -o ° < � o =
o 0 a2 e20 om om o§ o §0 $ m c- 0- 0 2
2 < <_ < _ ze ze e_ e _ � e m mu 2
2 K °
< = e 0 w LL c = -
0 w
0
w -
kLL §
® w kLO
m
% / ( / /
\ LUc
A ee , aa ,
w � � 04 /§ 44 � /§ 4z / /
a. /2 2 / @g5/ / »g5/ 2 2 z O ^
w �� _ /= LL /= 0 LL L »
a /
§ ^ ^ Cl)
w
2 \ \ \ a.
w
a k it k it it it
k
m 0
j §
w § S
ALU
°
w
� a. -
oLL 2
c g
- E ®
E � mLL /
� q b
Do 2 a p
2
2 w ) a C\l g /§ /z ) a ) c w
E * / ° ®g §/ m ®g §/ * / �/
§ U)U- coE0 � ° ° w
w
m cn
$ � N N w
& z
/ 2 00 / / (a.
0) k k k k a a & k k k
/ D i w
\§ j § } }\ w w 0.
/ 2 § i/ +
° o o
o ° ` ' `
R
wR /
z 2
w E \ \ j /
0 z
k z k \ \ i ƒ \ § \ &
oe m m
u § z / \ / § § LU\ /
= �$ ƒ ƒ � \w ) )
f < / /% f
2 K °
§z 2 z
0
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 27 05 28
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of contract,including General Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01
Specification Sections,apply to work of this Section.
1. Phasing and Schedule: Phasing and Schedule are critical for successful completion of this project
on an occupied school site and it is anticipated overtime,double-shifting,or special work schedules
and coordination of phased work will be required. Refer to the Phasing Plans and specification
Section 01 11 00 for additional information.
B. WSSP REQUIREMENTS: The work of this section is part of the overall requirements to comply with the
required minimum Washington Sustainable School Protocol (WSSP) requirements. Comply with Section
01 81 13—WSSP Requirements; refer to WSSP Scorecard in Section 01 81 13 for WSSP edition and
Credit identification.
C. Specification Section 26 00 00—Electrical General Conditions
D. Applicable Standards:All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the
following standards:
1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
a. NEMA FG 1-Fiberglass Cable Tray Systems.
b. NEMA VE 1-Metal Cable Tray Systems.
C. NEMA VE 2-Cable Tray Installation Guidelines.
2. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code
3. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises
4. ANSI/TIA-569-B Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
5. TIA-607-B Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.
1.02 SCOPE
A. The installation shall include innerduct,fire rated and non-fire rated penetration assemblies,conduit,
cable tray,and wire management.
B. The bonding of metallic raceways
C. The work performed under this specification shall be of good quality and performed in a workmanlike
manner. In this context"good quality" means the work shall meet industry technical standards and
quality of appearance. The owner reserves the right to reject all or a portion of the work performed,
either on technical or aesthetic grounds.
D. The system shall meet ALL of the requirements listed in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General
Requirements PART 3"Testing&Complete System Functionality", prior to "Substantial Completion".
E. Contractual information,guidelines, requirements,or other work specified to provide a fully functional
system for Section 27 05 28 includes, but is not limited to the sections identified in Section 27 00 00.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installing Contractor Qualifications:
1. Work in this section shall be performed by a licensed and bonded low voltage Installing Contractor
with a minimum of five years' experience in the installation and maintenance of high-speed data
and voice networks. Only Installing Contractors whose primary business is that of installing,
maintaining, troubleshooting, and testing Telecommunication Infrastructures shall perform this
work.
Job Number 2170712.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 28- 1/8
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. License Classification: Installing Contractor must possess a valid Washington State 06 Electrical Low
Voltage License.
1.04 GOVERNING CODES AND CONFLICTS
A. If the requirements of this section or the Project Drawings exceed those of the governing codes and
regulations,then the requirements of this section and the Drawings shall govern. However, nothing in
this section or the Drawings shall be construed to permit work not conforming to all governing codes
and regulations.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS-ARCHITECTURAL PLANS
A. The Installing Contractor shall carefully coordinate the various symbols utilized on the drawings and
shall consult the architectural plans to determine ceiling and floor types in the various areas.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to specification 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements,for additional data sheet
submittal requirements and the shop drawing submittal requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. See Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional requirements.
B. The Installing Contractor shall review the Site Plans, Floor Plans, Riser Diagrams,and Detail Sheets for
additional work that is required to be performed by the Installing Contractor of this section.
2.02 COORDINATION
A. Refer to "Installation of Owner Furnished Equipment"for additional coordination and installation
requirements.
B. Refer to "Submittals"for additional coordination requirements.
2.03 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to "As-Built Drawings"listed elsewhere in this specification for additional equipment required for
this project.
2.04 SEISMIC BRACING
A. Provide Seismic Bracing as required by the AHJ.
B. This includes, but is not limited to:
1. Racks
2. Cable Tray
3. Cable Supports
2.05 INNERDUCTS AND CONDUIT SEALS
A. Innerduct(Fabric Mesh):
1. The Installing Contractor shall provide the proper type of fabric mesh Innerduct for the application
in which it is being used.
2. Provide flexible multi-cell fabric mesh Innerduct consisting of White Polyester and Nylon resin
polymer.
3. EACH Cell shall contain a factory installed pull tape,which shall be a different color of pull tape for
EACH Cell.
Job Number 2170712.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 28- 2/8
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
4. Manufactured by MaxCell: Model# MXC3456BK (Black), or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required where shown on plans.
a. This shall be the default color for one 3-Cell innerduct.
S. Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXC3456RD (Red), or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required where shown on plans.
a. Where two 3-Cell innerducts are shown in a single conduit on the plans, this shall be the
second color.
6. Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXC3456BL (Blue), or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required where shown on plans.
a. Where three 3-Cell innerducts are shown in a single conduit on the plans, this shall be the
third color.
B. Inner Duct(Non-Metallic Tubing):
1. Provide 1"corrugated inner duct for EACH fiber optic cable run.
2. Inner duct shall be rated for the application and environment that it is installed in and shall meet
all Code and AHJ requirements.
3. Non-Metallic Tubing for Fiber Optic Cables shall be Orange in color.
4. Provide quantities as required where shown on plans.
S. Approved Manufacturer: Pyramid Industries or approved equal.
C. Inflation Bags(for 3"Conduits and 4"Conduits):
1. Inside EACH Hand Hole and inside EACH Man Hole, install inflation bags in 3" Conduit(s) and 4"
Conduit(s)that comes into the building. Provide inflation bags in EACH conduit at the opposite end
(in the MDF and designated IDF locations).
2. Provide inflation bags
3. Locate inflation bags in EACH 3" underground conduit and in EACH 4" underground conduit (at
each end of the conduit)that is routed between the MDF and EACH designated IDF location.
4. Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXCITB3 (for 3" conduits), or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
a. Seal each conduit as described above using the manufacturer approved inflation seal method
at the completion of the project.
b. Provide (6) 3" conduit inflation bags (when this sized conduit is used on this project) to the
Owner at the completion of the project.
5. Manufactured by MaxCell: Model # MXCITB4 (for 4" conduits), or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
a. Seal each conduit as described above using the manufacturer approved inflation seal method
at the completion of the project.
b. Provide (6) 4" conduit inflation bags (when this sized conduit is used on this project) to the
Owner at the completion of the project.
6. Inflation Tool.
a. Provide (1) new (unopened package) inflation tool to the Owner at the completion of the
project.
b. Manufactured by MaxCell: Model#MXCITT,or approved equal.
7. Gas Cartridges.
a. Provide (12) new (unopened packages) gas cartridges to the Owner at the completion of the
project.
D. Duct Seal (for conduits that are 2.5"or less):
1. Inside EACH Hand Hole and inside EACH Man Hole, install a water tight seal in EACH Conduit that
comes into the building. Provide a water tight seal in EACH conduit at the opposite end (in the
MDF and designated IDF locations).
Job Number 2170712.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 28- 3/8
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. In addition to the above locations, provide Duct Seal that includes, but is not limited to other
conduits such as:
a. Reader Boards.
b. Portables.
C. Hand holes for future equipment.
3. Manufactured by Ideal: Model#31-601,or Manufactured by Gardner Bender: Model# DS-130,or
approved equal.
2.06 OPEN CABLING SUPPORT&HARDWARE
A. Each Cable Support shall be UL Listed for the Application and meet the TIA requirements for structured
cabling systems.
B. Provide manufacturer approved mounting brackets and fasteners.
C. Do not exceed the cable support manufacturer's cable fill capacity for each type provided for this
project.
D. Do not exceed the cable manufacturer's recommendations for cable suspension in open cabling
environments.
E. J-Hooks shall have a galvanized finish.
1. Manufactured by Erico CADDY: Model # CAT32HP, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
2. Manufactured by Erico CADDY: Model # CAT48HP, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
3. Mounting Tree:
4. Manufactured by Erico CADDY: Model # CATHPTM, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
F. Adjustable Cable Support:
1. Manufactured by Erico CADDY: Model # CAT42S Series, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
G. Conduit Waterfalls:
1. Conduit Waterfalls shall be used where conduits empty into cable trays.
2. Manufactured by Panduit: Model#CWF400,or approved equal. Provide quantities as required.
H. Conduit Bushings:
1. Conduit Bushings shall be used to protect communications cabling where conduits terminate in
accessible ceiling space.
2. Bushings shall be non-metallic to reduce cable abrasion.
3. Manufactured by Arlington: Model#EMTXXX,or approved equal. Provide quantities as required.
2.07 CABLE TRAY—WIRE BASKET STYLE
A. Chatsworth Products(CPI) is the basis of design for all wire-style cable. Equivalent manufacture's
solutions may be submitted for prior approval no less than 2 weeks before bid date closing. Products
not submitted for prior approval shall be rejected.
B. Provide Seismic bracing.
C. The Cable Tray shall be UL Classified.
D. The Cable Tray shall be 4"high x 18"wide(unless otherwise noted).
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34821-618, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
Job Number 2170712.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 28-4/8
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
E. Splice Bar,Splice Bolt/Washer Trapeze Support Bracket,Cable Radius Drop,Ground Clam and other
related materials:
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34728-501, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
2. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34739-501, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
F. Trapeze Support Bracket:
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34730-620, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
2. Unistrut may be used in lieu of the above model number if approved by the AHJ.
G. Cable Radius Drop:
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34747-701, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
H. Ground Clamp:
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 34838-001, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
2.08 CABLE TRAY—LADDER STYLE
A. Chatsworth Products(CPI) is the basis of design for all ladder-style cable. Equivalent manufacture's
solutions may be submitted for prior approval no less than 2 weeks before bid date closing. Products
not submitted for prior approval shall be rejected.
B. Provide Seismic bracing where required by the AHJ.
C. The Cable Tray shall be UL Classified.
D. The Cable Tray shall be 1.5" high x 18"wide(unless otherwise noted)with 9" rung spacing in Steel
construction that has been painted by the manufacturer.
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 11275-718, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
E. Butt Splice,Junction Splice,Swivel Butt Splice,Swivel Junction Splice,Wall Mount Bracket, Rack Mount
Plate,Ground Strap,Cable Runway Dividers and Cable Radius Drop:
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 16301-701, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
F. Junction Splice:
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 16302-701, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
G. Swivel Butt Splice:
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 16487-701, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required,where applicable.
H. Swivel Junction Splice:
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 16488-701, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required,where applicable.
I. Wall Mount Bracket:
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 11746-718, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
J. Ground Strap:
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model #40164-001, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
Job Number 2170712.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 28- 5/8
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
K. Cable Runway Dividers:
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 13392-721, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
L. Cable Radius Drop:
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 12100-718, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
2. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc (CPI): Model # 12101-702, or approved equal. Provide
quantities as required.
2.09 FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS AND NON-FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS
A. Provide Fire Rated Penetration equipment for EACH wall that is rated for 1-Hour or more.
B. Provide penetration equipment for each wall that is not a fire rated wall.
C. A firestop system shall be comprised of the item or items penetrating the fire rated structure;the
opening in the structure and the materials and assembly of the materials used to seal the penetrated
structure. Firestop systems comprise of an effective block for fire, heat,vapor,and pressurized water
stream.
D. All penetrations through fire rated building structures(walls and floors)shall be sealed with an
appropriate firestop system. This requirement applies to through penetrations(complete penetration)
and membrane penetrations(through one side of a hollow fire rated structure). Any penetrating items
i.e., riser slots and sleeves,cables,conduit,cable tray,and raceways,etc.shall be properly firestopped.
E. Firestop systems shall be UL Classified to ASTM E814(UL 1479).
F. Indicate on the Shop Drawings EACH location showing the proposed system location for approval, prior
to installing the penetration system(s).
G. All firestop systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and
shall be completely installed and available for inspection by the local authorities prior to cabling system
acceptance.
H. For EACH penetration,the following requirements shall apply:
1. Provide pathway assemblies for EACH Low Voltage System Cables for each individual assembly
opening.
2. Provide the quantity of pathway assemblies required for the Horizontal cables, while maintaining
all code requirements. Additionally, provide (1) pathway assembly opening for EACH System listed
on the Electrical Legend. This includes, but is not limited to: Fire Alarm System, Intrusion Alarm
System, Intercom System, Access Control System, CCTV System, etc.) and no less than (2) Spare
empty assembly openings,which shall remain empty at the completion of the project.
3. Manufactured by Specified Technologies, Inc (STI): EZ Path Model # 33 Series and/or EZ Path
Model#44 Series for fire rated walls. Provide quantities as required for all rated installations.
a. For EACH penetration, provide the Stud Wall Attachment (for either series provided), filling
the entire stud wall space with cable pathways for all cabling required and future cabling.
Maintain all spare capacity requirements.
b. For EACH EZ Path Model#33 Series provided, provide one pair of Radius Control Modules.
C. Manufactured by Specified Technologies, Inc(STI): EZ Path Model# RCM33.
4. Manufactured by Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI): EZ Path Model # NEZP33 Series. Provide
quantities as required for all non-rated fire wall installations.
2.10 ADDITIONAL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
A. See Part 3 of this specification for additional provision of system Equipment and/or Labor.
Job Number 2170712.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 28- 6/8
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. See Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional information.
B. Prior to rough-in,coordinate with the Architect for the exact location(s).
C. Install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendation.
3.02 PRODUCT INSPECTIONS
A. The Installing Contractor shall inspect all cable prior to installation to verify that it is identified properly
on the reel identification label,that it is of proper gauge,containing correct number of pairs,and is the
material ordered. Any physical damage to the cable and wire must be noted; un-uniform jacket
thickness and jacket tightness should also be identified. Note any buckling of the jacket,which would
indicate possible problems.
3.03 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Provide grounding and bonding per TIA-607-13,which includes, but is not limited to: Cable Tray, Rack(s),
conduit sleeves,and other equipment connected to the TMGB/TGB.
B. The minimum conductor size shall be#6 green insulated copper grounding conductor. However,size
each conductor shall be based on the actual cable length as defined in TIA-607-B.
3.04 HORIZONTAL PATHWAYS
A. It is the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that ALL PATHWAYS for the permanent link of each
balanced twisted pair cable shall not exceed 295'in length from work area outlet to
telecommunications room patch panel.
B. To ensure this length,all pathways shall be coordinated and installed prior to pouring of any slabs or
the installation of any permanent structure which would inhibit a conduit or cable tray run from being
installed after the structure is complete.
C. See section 27 20 00 for horizontal cabling types and additional requirements.
3.05 FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS AND NON-FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS
A. Install per manufacturers recommendations.
B. Maintain all Code and AHJ requirements.
3.06 PLENUMS
A. Provide metallic conduit through building plenum spaces for all cables which do not bear a CMP rated
label.
3.07 WARRANTY
A. The warranty shall be direct to the end user,from the manufacturer,supported through the installing
and certified Installing Contractor,and shall cover both materials and labor costs for any claims related
to the warranty program. If the Installing Contractor were to default,the manufacturer will assume
responsibility of employing another certified installer to maintain the existing warranty. Bids from
installers or Installing Contractors who are not certified by the connecting hardware manufacturer and
wire manufacturer at the time of project bid,will be rejected.
Job Number 2170712.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 28- 7/8
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.08 OPERATION&MAINTENANCE MANUALS(O&M'S)
A. Provide all Operation& Maintenance Manuals(O&M's)documentation as defined in Section 27 00 00
Low Voltage Systems General Requirements and listed elsewhere in this specification.
3.09 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Provide all As-Built documentation as defined in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General
Requirements and listed elsewhere in this specification.
B. All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project(not the room
number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings).
C. Update all documents provided in the Submittal and Shop Drawings to accurately reflect the actual
equipment that was provided for this project,and the actual locations of the installed equipment.
D. The Installing Contractor shall provide As-Built drawings to the Architect,which clearly indicates:
1. The floor plan of the building showing the As-Built location of conduit runs,cable tray,and terminal
cabinets.
2. Provide(3)sets of complete As-Builts.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A. Upon completion of the system installation,the installation representative shall conduct a system test
for the Owner,Architect, Engineer,and Owner or their appointed representatives.
B. Upon completion of the installation,after test and demonstration,the Installing Contractor shall
provide to the Architect a signed written statement substantiating the:
1. "System has been completely tested, demonstrated to the Owner's representative, and accepted
by the appropriate authority."
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
27 05 28- 8/8
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 27 20 00
DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions,Supplementary
Conditions and Divisions 0 and 1 Specification Sections,apply to work of this Section.
B. Contractual information,guidelines, requirements,or other work specified to provide a fully functional
system for Section 27 20 00 includes, but is not limited to the sections identified in Section 27 00 00.
C. Specification Section 26 00 00 Electrical General Conditions.
1.02 SCOPE
A. The Installing Contractor shall furnish and install all materials for a fully functional extension of the
existing data and voice Telecommunications Infrastructure system in accordance with this specification
and the contract drawings. The system shall be in full compliance with a "Limited Lifetime Warranty".
The Installing Contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete,functional system including all
necessary components,whether included in this specification or not.
B. The installation shall include Copper Category Rated Cables, interconnect equipment,connectors,
jumpers punch blocks,copper patch panels,copper and fiber patch cables,telecommunication outlets,
and wire management.
C. The Installing Contractor is required to coordinate with the Owner so that the telephone system can be
patched into the Data and Voice infrastructure by the Installing Contractor.
D. All copper Horizontal Cables shall be terminated on patch panels in the Telecommunication Rooms
(designated IDF location)and on Telecommunications Outlets.All copper backbone cables shall be
terminated on punch blocks at main cross connects and on patch panels at the horizontal cross connect
end, unless noted otherwise.
E. Upon completion of installation,the Installing Contractor shall test all fiber and copper cables. All
cables shall be tested as defined elsewhere within this specification.
F. The work performed under this specification shall be of good quality and performed in a workmanlike
manner. In this context"good quality" means the work shall meet industry technical standards and
quality of appearance. The owner reserves the right to reject all or a portion of the work performed,
either on technical or aesthetic grounds.
G. The system shall meet ALL of the requirements listed in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General
Requirements PART 3"Testing&Complete System Functionality", prior to "Substantial Completion".
H. Contractual information,guidelines, requirements,or other work specified to provide a fully functional
system for Section 27 20 00 includes, but is not limited to the sections identified in Section 27 00 00.
I. See "Horizontal Cable"and "Racks"located in this specification for additional work and equipment.
This includes, but is not limited to; CAT6 Cabling for ALL Local Area Network(LAN) based Systems as
shown on the plans,detail sheets,and riser diagrams.
1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specifications Sections,apply to work specified in this Section.
B. Applicable Standards:All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the
following standards:
1. BICSI Information Technology Systems Installation Methods Manual,6th Edition
Job Number 2170712.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00- 1/17
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual, 13th Edition
3. ANSI/TIA 606-A(2002)Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure.
4. ANSI/TIA 607-B Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications.
S. EIA/TIA-455-61 (latest edition). "FOTP-61, Measurement of Fiber or Cable Attenuation Using An
OTD R".
6. TIA-526-7. Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant OFSTP-7.
7. ANSI/TIA 568-C.0. "Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises."
8. ANSI/TIA 568-C.1. "Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 1: General
Requirements."
9. ANSI/TIA 568-C.2. "Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard - Part 2: Balanced
Twisted Pair Cabling Components."
10. ANSI/TIA 568-C.3. "Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard."
11. EIA/TIA 569-B. "Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces."
12. IEEE 802.3(latest edition) "Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection."
13. International Building Code(latest edition).
14. International Fire Code(latest edition).
15. NEC(National Electrical Code) (latest edition).
16. Telecommunications Architectural Standards-In Washington State Government(latest edition).
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installing Contractor Qualifications:
1. The Installing Contractor project manager shall hold a valid and current Registered Communications
Distribution Designer (RCDD) certification issued by Building Industry Consulting Service
International (BICSI). The project manager shall have a minimum of five years' experience with
projects of similar size and scope.
2. The Installing Contractor field staff installers shall hold valid and current Installation certifications
issued by Building Industry Consulting Service International(BICSI)or hold documented certification
of training from the manufacturer of the cabling and equipment that is being installed. The field
staff shall have a minimum of five years'experience with projects of similar size and scope.
3. The Installing Contractor shall be an Authorized Premier Network Installer Certification Only Partner
of the Manufacturer of the equipment being installed and shall furnish documentation showing that
the Installing Contractor is trained and certified. The Installing Contractor shall be capable of
providing the Owner with a documented Limited Lifetime Performance Warranty of the equipment
being installed at the time of project bid,to be approved for bidding.
4. Work in this section shall be performed by a licensed and bonded low voltage Installing Contractor
with a minimum of five years'experience in the installation and maintenance of high-speed data and
voice networks.Only Installing Contractors whose primary business is that of installing,maintaining,
troubleshooting,and testing Telecommunication Infrastructures shall perform this work.
5. In order to qualify for installation of the Telecommunications Infrastructure Installing Contractor
must possess the required license classification,a performance history,experience in the installation
and termination of copper and optical fiber cable systems,and proof of time in business.
6. License Classification: Installing Contractor must possess a valid Washington State 06 Electrical Low
Voltage License.
1.05 GOVERNING CODES AND CONFLICTS
A. If the requirements of this section or the Project Drawings exceed those of the governing codes and
regulations,then the requirements of this section and the Drawings shall govern. However, nothing in
this section or the Drawings shall be construed to permit work not conforming to all governing codes
and regulations.
Job Number 2170712.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00- 2/1 7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS-ARCHITECTURAL PLANS
A. The Installing Contractor shall carefully coordinate the various symbols utilized on the drawings and
shall consult the architectural plans to determine ceiling and floor types in the various areas.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to specification 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements,for additional data sheet
submittal requirements and the shop drawing submittal requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. See Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional requirements.
B. The Installing Contractor shall review the Site Plans, Floor Plans, Riser Diagrams,and Detail Sheets for
additional work that is required to be performed by the Installing Contractor of this section.
C. Leviton/Berk-Tek manufactures the products that are used for the basis of design of this specification.
1. Equivalent manufacture's solutions may be submitted for prior approval no less than 2 weeks before
bid date closing. Products not submitted for prior approval shall be rejected.
a. Include with substitution request, a 3rd party verified testing agency's report which shall
include, but not be limited to,the following TIA-568-C.2 tests:
1. Insertion Loss/Attenuation.
2. NEXT(Near End Cross Talk).
3. PSNEXT(Power Sum Near End Cross Talk).
4. ACR(Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio).
5. PSACR(Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio).
6. ACR-F(Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio—Far End)
7. PSACR-F(Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio—Far End)
8. The following tests are only required for CAT6A cabling:
a. PSANEXT(Power Sum Alien NEXT)
b. PSAACRF(Power Sum Alien ACRF)
D. All products shall be new,and brought to the job site in original manufacturer's packaging. Electrical
components shall bear the Underwriter's Laboratories label. All Telecommunications cable shall bear
the manufacturer's label in accordance with NEC 800 based on flammability testing as follows:
1. CMR General Purpose Communications Riser Cable.
2. CMP Plenum-rated Communications Cable.
3. And other cable ratings to comply with the National Electrical Code requirements for the installation.
E. All products shall meet the certification requirements of the warranty. All device products and all
cabling products shall be of a single manufacturer.
F. Provide all equipment as defined in the specification(s)and shown on the drawings.
G. Refer to PART 1 for any equipment that is not specifically defined.
2.02 MATERIALS NOT INCLUDED(PROVIDED&INSTALLED BY OTHERS)
A. Telephone switching equipment and related appurtenances.
B. Telephones.
C. Switchers, routers, network hubs,data concentrators and other similar active electronic equipment for
data communications.
D. Computers, printers,facsimile machines, modems and other similar utilization equipment.
Job Number 2170712.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00- 3/1 7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.03 COORDINATION
A. Refer to "Installation of Owner Furnished Equipment"for additional coordination and installation
requirements.
B. Refer to "Submittals"for additional coordination requirements.
2.04 INSTALLATION OF OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
A. The Installing Contractor shall install the following Owner Furnished equipment:
1. Wireless Access Points(WAP's). Coordinate with the Owner as required.
a. Install each WAP where indicated on the plans.
2.05 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.
A. Refer to "As-Built Drawings" listed elsewhere in this specification for additional equipment
required for this project.
2.06 SEISMIC BRACING
A. Provide Seismic Bracing as required by the AHJ.
B. This includes, but is not limited to:
1. Cable Supports.
2.07 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide Horizontal Cabling from each Telecommunication port to the nearest MDF or designated IDF
location. Each Telecommunication Outlet type and style shall contain the quantity of Horizontal Cables
identified on the Legend,unless noted otherwise.
B. Horizontal cables are to be terminated on rack-mounted patch panels of the same data speed transfer
rating. Horizontal Cabling shall be to Patch Panels within each designated rack. Horizontal Cabling shall
be cross-connected to backbone cables.
C. Modems,fax machines,wall mount voice outlets for telephone handsets,etc.shall be connected to the
data and voice infrastructure via Horizontal Cabling.
2.08 LABELING
A. See Section 27 00 00 for additional label type and additional requirements.
B. The alpha-numeric labeling shall be developed by the Installing Contractor, under the direction of the
Owners IT Department at the Pre-Installation project kick-off meeting.
C. The Installing Contractor shall label all equipment and cables in an identical fashion of a sequential
manner to the satisfaction of the Owner.
D. All label printing shall be machine generated using indelible ink ribbons or cartridges,and self-
laminating labels shall be used on cable jackets appropriately sized to the outside diameter of the cable.
E. All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project(not the room
number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings). This includes, but is not limited to;the Outlets,
Port Addresses, Patch Panels,As-Built Drawings,and Test Results.
F. Patch panels shall have each port labeled to identify each outlet port.
G. Racks shall have phenolic labels installed at the Top and Centered of EACH Rack installed on this
project. Phenolic labels shall be size 36 font.
Job Number 2170712.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00-4/1 7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
H. Cable Identification Labels shall be placed in the following locations:
1. Horizontal Cables. Each cable shall be identified and marked with the outlet port identification near
the cable termination point at the rear of the patch panel and placed within view.
2. Backbone Cables. Each cable shall be identified and marked on all backbone cables(at both ends of
the cable)with an identifier as to the location of the beginning and termination of each cable. Labels
shall be attached to each cable at the point of entrance and exit to the MDF and each designated IDF
location.
a. Where telecommunications outlets are located above accessible ceiling space, provide a label
directly on the ceiling tile grid indicating"TELECOM OUTLET ABOVE".
2.09 TELECOMMUNICATION OUTLETS
A. Review the Site Plan(s), Floor Plan(s), Riser Diagram(s),and Detail Sheet(s)for all cable types and
quantities required for this project.
B. Each Telecommunication Outlet type and style shall contain the quantity of Horizontal Cables identified
on the Electrical Legend,unless otherwise noted.
C. Provide Horizontal Cabling from EACH Telecommunication Outlet port to the nearest MDF or
designated IDF location.
D. Telecommunication Outlet:
1. Each Outlet shall accommodate individual modular ports and each modular port shall be individually
removed without affecting any other port within the outlet.
2. Coordinate the labeling requirements with the Owner's IT department.
a. Outlet label identification information shall be typed text and indicate patch panel and port for
each jack and shall comply with the Owners Labeling Standards. Hand written information will
not be acceptable.
b. The Installing Contractor shall match the color and finish of the devices specified in Section
262726. Modify the model number if a different color or finish is identified in Section 26 27 26.
C. 1-Port Stainless Steel Telecommunication Outlets, where shown on the plans, shall be
manufactured by Leviton: Model # 43080-1L1, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
d. 2-Port Stainless Steel Telecommunication Outlets, where shown on the plans, shall be
manufactured by Leviton: Model # 43080-11-2, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
e. 4-Port Stainless Steel Telecommunication Outlets, where shown on the plans, shall be
manufactured by Leviton: Model # 43080-11-4, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
f. 6-Port Stainless Steel Telecommunication Outlets, where shown on the plans, shall be
manufactured by Leviton: Model # 43080-1L6, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
3. Surface Mount Outlet Locations shall only be installed above accessible ceiling spaces, the MDF
Room, and designated IDF locations. They are not to be installed below the ceiling surface or
exposed to view, unless approved in writing by the Engineer.
a. Provide modular single-port or dual port Surface Mount Outlet where indicated on the Plans.
This includes, but is not limited to:
1. Wireless Access Points.
2. Projector Mounts.
3. CCTV Cameras.
4. Intrusion Alarm Control Panel.
5. Access Control Panel.
6. Energy Management Panels.
Job Number 2170712.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00- 5/1 7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
b. 1-Port Surface Mount Telecommunication Outlet, where shown on the plans, shall be
manufactured by Leviton: Model # 41089-11P, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
C. 2-Port Surface Mount Telecommunication Outlet, where shown on the plans, shall be
manufactured by Leviton: Model # 41089-21P, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
E. Modular Inserts:
1. 8-position, 8-conductor(8138C). Individual workstation port and patch panel port modules shall be
Category 6 rated, 8-position, 8-conductor (8138C) for termination of conductors and shall be
approved by the manufacturer.
2. 8-position,8-conductor(8138C). Individual Wireless Access port and patch panel port modules shall
be Category 6A rated, 8-position, 8-conductor (8138C) for termination of conductors and shall be
approved by the manufacturer.
3. EACH workstation port shall be Category 6 rated.
4. Each Wireless Access port shall be Category 6A rated.
5. Cables shall be wired in accordance with TIA/EIA-T568B, unless noted otherwise.
6. Each individual insert shall be fully compatible with the Face Plates provided.
a. The Installing Contractor shall match the color and finish of the devices specified in Section 26
27 26 for the workstation modules. Modify the model number if a different color or finish is
identified in Section 26 27 26.The Installing Contractor shall match the color of the horizontal
cabling as called out in this specification for the patch panel modules.
b. Manufactured by Leviton: Model#61110-R(X)6 Series for Category 6 applications,or approved
equal for all workstation outlets. Provide quantities as required. (X) Indicates color.
C. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 6110G-R(X)6 Series for Category 6A applications, or
approved equal for all Wireless Access point outlets. Provide quantities as required. (X)
Indicates color.
7. Blank inserts. Fill all remaining unused ports with a blank filler insert that is approved by the
manufacturer.
a. The Installing Contractor shall match the color and finish of the devices specified in Section 26
27 26. Modify the model number if a different color or finish is identified in Section 26 27 26.
8. Manufactured by Leviton: Model#41084BGB,or approved equal. Provide quantities as required.
F. Wall Mount Telephone Outlet:
1. Provide modular single-port stainless steel wall phone outlet with mounting studs.
2. Manufactured by Leviton: Model#4108W-1SP,or approved equal. Provide quantities as required.
2.10 PATCH CABLES—FIBER OPTIC
A. Upon completion of the project,the Data and Voice Infrastructure Installing Contractor shall deliver the
following Fiber Optic patch cables for the MDF and EACH designated IDF location to the owner,as
identified below:
1. EACH Data Rack shall have a Qty.of 4—3' (1 meter) Fiber Optic multimode patch cords with Duplex
LC connectors.
a. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 5LDLC-M01, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
b. Provide Single Mode patch cords when Single Mode Fiber is shown on the Drawings.
2. EACH Data Rack shall have a Qty. of 4 — 23' (10 meters) Fiber Optic multimode patch cords with
Duplex LC connectors.
a. Manufactured by Leviton: Model # 5LDLC-M10, or approved equal. Provide quantities as
required.
b. Provide Single Mode patch cords when Single Mode Fiber is shown on the Drawings.
Job Number 2170712.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00- 6/1 7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2.11 HORIZONTAL CABLE—INSIDE PLANT(ISP)
A. See "Testing of Cables"listed elsewhere within this specification for Testing Requirements to be
documented and submitted at the completion of this project.
B. EACH Cable installed shall be rated for the appropriate application,such as; Riser Rated, Plenum Rated,
Wet Rated,etc.
C. Provide Horizontal Cabling from each Telecommunication Outlet to the nearest MDF or the nearest
designated IDF location.
D. Analog Plain Old Telephone Service(POTS) lines shall be provided for,but not limited to,the following
items. These items shall be installed complete without splices between the jack and cable termination
point.
1. Fire Alarm System.
2. Intrusion Alarm System.
3. Elevator(where applicable).
4. Terminate all telephone jacks as described elsewhere in these specifications.
a. Cable color codes shall be as follows.
1. All horizontal data cable shall be blue in color.
2. All voice cable shall be white in color.
3. All CCTV and IP Access Control cable shall be yellow in color.
4. All Wireless Access Point cable shall be green in color.
E. The work station Telecommunication Horizontal Cable shall be Category 6 rated,4-pair,23 AWG UTP,
unless noted otherwise.
1. Manufactured by Berk-Tek: Model # LANmark 1000 Series plenum rated cable for Category 6
applications,or approved equal.
a. The Wireless Access Point Cable shall be Category 6A rated,4pair, 23 AWG UTP, unless noted
otherwise
2. Manufactured by Berk-Tek: Model # LANmark-10G Series plenum rated cable for Category 6A
applications,or approved equal.
2.12 HORIZONTAL CABLE—OUTSIDE PLANT(OSP)&WET RATED LOCATIONS
A. See "Testing of Cables"listed elsewhere within this specification for Testing Requirements to be
documented and submitted at the completion of this project.
B. Outside Plant(OSP)cables shall be used where conduits are routed below grade. Such as;slab on grade
floor boxes, underground conduits to another building,where required by code,etc.All Outside Plant
(OSP)cable extending within the building at a distance greater than 49 feet shall be run in conduit.
C. Provide Horizontal Cabling from each Telecommunication port to the nearest MDF or the nearest
designated IDF location.
D. The Telecommunication Horizontal Cable shall be Category 6 rated,4-pair,23 AWG UTP, unless noted
otherwise.
1. Manufactured by Berk-Tek: Model#LANmark-6 OSP Series,or approved equal.
2.13 PATCH PANELS—COPPER
A. Existing 96-port and 48-port CATSe patch panels are to remain unless every cable associated with that
panel is removed during demolition. Existing panels and horizontal CATSe cables upon completion to
verify functionality.Contractor is to troubleshoot and re-terminate as required.
B. All new patch panels shall be located at the designated IDF location. They shall be rack mounted in
Rack 1 or Rack 3 unless specifically otherwise noted.
C. Provide a minimum of 2S%spare patch panel jack capacity.
Job Number 2170712.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00- 7/1 7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
D. Patch panels should be fully populated,avoiding blanks and empty ports(with the exception being the
last patch panel in the series which may not be fully populated).
E. All Category patch panels shall be tested and approved for Category wiring as specified to cable type,
per TIA/EIA-568C;shall have rear cable management bar and front labeling.
F. Provide separate Patch Panels for the following equipment connection types:
1. Data Cables.
2. Wireless Access Points.
3. Analog Voice Cables(existing).
4. Section 28 23 00 CCTV System.
a. Prior to running any cables, coordinate with the CCTV System Installing Contractor for actual
Patch Panel locations within each Rack.
5. Section 28 13 00 IP Access Control System.
a. Prior to running any cables, coordinate with the CCTV System Installing Contractor for actual
Patch Panel locations within each Rack.
6. The panel shall be field-configurable and shall accept a full range of modular connectors.
a. Manufactured by Leviton: Model#4S255-S48,or approved equal for 48 port applications.
b. Manufactured by Leviton: Model#4S255-S24,or approved equal for 24 port applications.
2.14 MULTI-CONDUCTOR BACKBONE CABLE
A. Provide multi-pair plenum cables from the MDF Room to each designated IDF location unless noted
otherwise.
1. See the riser diagram for more information.
2. Provide(1)25-pair riser service cables,unless noted otherwise. Provide Plenum Rated Cable or Wet
Rated Cable where required by Code. Cable shall be 24 gauge with pair count as indicated, UL listed
for the application that which it is installed in.
2.15 PATCH CABLES-COPPER
A. The Patch Cables shall be Category 6 rated,4-pair,23 AWG UTP for all Category 6 systems and Category
6A rated,4-pair,23 AWG UTP for all Category 6A systems, unless noted otherwise. Provide(1) Patch
Cable per telecommunications outlet jack and (1) Patch Cable per telecommunications patch panel port
as described below.
B. The outer cable jacket shall match the color selection of the Horizontal Cable Color identified in
"Horizontal Cable".
1. Provide a minimum quantity of (1) 15' equipment cord for EACH telecommunication workstation
outlet box shown in work areas. (Leviton # 62460-15L), or approved equal. See table below for
MDF/IDF patch cord quantities.
2. Provide a minimum quantity of (1) 3' equipment cord for EACH telecommunication jack at Each
Wireless Access Point.(Leviton#6210G-3(X),or approve equal.(X)Indicates color of equipment cord
according to Horizontal Cable Color identified in "Horizontal Cable".
3. Provide a minimum quantity of(1)3'equipment cord for EACH telecommunications jack at systems
related equipment such as CCTV, IP access control system. (Leviton # 62462-03(X), or approved
equal. (X) Indicates color of equipment cord according to Horizontal Cable Color identified in
"Horizontal Cable".
Job Number 2170712.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00- 8/1 7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. Upon completion of the project,the Data and Voice Infrastructure Installing Contractor shall deliver the
following patch cables:
The following items shall apply ONLY to the MDF Room and designated IDF locations.
Quantity of
Patch Cables
Color to be (provide the following
Item# Cable determined by percentage of patch cables
Length horizontal based on the Total patch
System cabling. panel Ports provided for Model#X
Y g• p p manufactured indicates color of
this project) by
Unless noted otherwise. patch cable
Leviton (eXtreme CAT6)
1 3'CAT6 20°� 62460 series(X)
2 T CAT6 50%
Leviton (eXtreme CAT6)
62460 series(X)
3 15'CAT6 30% Leviton (eXtreme CAT6)
62460 series(X)
4 1'CAT6A 100% Levition (eXtreme CAT6A)
621OG series(X)
2.16 RACKS AND ENCLOSURES
A. Rack Mount all equipment that is capable of being Rack Mounted.
B. 45RU Two Post Data Racks are existing and contain 25%free rack space for rack mounting new patch
panels. Provide additional racks as required only if existing Rack 1 and Rack 3 become full. Rack 2 is
designated for the owner's switches and new horizontal wire managers.
C. Equivalent manufacture's solutions may be submitted for prior approval no less than 2 weeks before
bid date closing. Products not submitted for prior approval shall be rejected.
D. Provide seismic bracing for ALL RACKS AND ENCLOSURES per manufacturer's recommended
instructions/accessories.
E. Section 27 20 00 shall provide ALL Racks and related equipment,including but not limited to; Patch
Panels, Patch Cords,Wire Management, Power Strip assemblies,etc.for ALL Local Area Network(LAN)
bases Systems as shown on the site plans,floor plans,detail sheets,and riser diagrams.
F. Racks:
1. Free-Standing 2-Post
a. The Rack shall have the following features:
1. Complies with 19"wide rack EIA-310-D standards.
2. Rack Height:45RU.
3. Color: Black.
a. Installation:
4. Secure EACH Rack to the floor using the manufacturer recommended installation method
and the manufacturers recommended hardware/bolt down kit.
5. Secure EACH Rack to the Cable Tray using the manufacturer recommended installation
method.
6. Provide vertical cable management between each rack
a. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products: Model#55053-703 or approved equal
b. Provide the quantities where shown on the drawings.
Job Number 2170712.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00- 9/1 7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. Free-Standing 4-Post Rack
a. The Rack shall have the following features:
1. Complies with 19"wide rack EIA-310-D standards.
2. Rack Height:45RU.
3. Rack Depth:29".
4. Color: Black.
a. Installation:
5. Secure EACH Rack to the floor using the manufacturer recommended installation method
and the manufacturers recommended hardware/bolt down kit.
6. Secure EACH Rack to the Cable Tray using the manufacturer recommended installation
method.
a. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products: Model# 15053-703, or approved equal for
Small Server Equipment Frame.
b. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products: Model#20120-703, or approved equal for
Data Equipment Frame. Includes 12-24 threaded rack rails.
7. Provide the quantities where shown on the drawings
G. Enclosures:
1. Free-Standing Data Equipment Enclosure
a. The Rack shall have the following features:
b. Complies with 19"wide rack EIA-310-D standards.
C. Rack Height:44RU.
d. Rack Depth:36".
e. Color: Black.
f. Racks shall be gang-able
g. Front Door: Locking,Vented
h. Rear Door: Locking,Vented
i. Front and Rear rails
j. Vertical wire management("LACE"series,quantities and sizes as required to accommodate full
rack-height)
k. Vertical power distribution ("PD" series, quantities and sizes as required to accommodate full
rack-height)
1. Installation:
I. Secure EACH Rack to the wall using the manufacturer recommended installation method and
the manufacturers recommended hardware/bolt down kit.
1. manufactured by Middle Atlantic Products: Model#R412-4524B or approved equal.
m. Provide the quantities where shown on the drawings
n. Wall-Mounted Hinged Enclosure
1. The Rack shall have the following features:
o. Complies with 19"wide rack EIA-310-D standards.
p. Rack Height: 24RU.
q. Color: Black.
r. Front Door: Locking,Vented
S. Provide Top Mount Fan Kit Model#DWR-FK32
t. Provide Solid Copper Bussbar Model#BB-12
u. Provide Rear Rail Kit Model#DWR-RR24
v. Vertical wire management("LACE"series,quantities and sizes as required to accommodate full
rack-height)
w. Vertical power distribution ("PD" series, quantities and sizes as required to accommodate full
rack-height)
1. Installation:
Job Number 2170712.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00- 10/1 7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
X. Secure EACH Rack to the floor/wall using the manufacturer recommended installation method
and the manufacturers recommended hardware/bolt down kit.
1. Manufactured by Middle Atlantic: Model# DWR-24-32 or approved equal.
y. Provide the quantities where shown on the drawings
H. Grounding Terminal Block for Rack: For EACH Rack provided for this project,provide one Grounding
Terminal Block.
I. Cable Management:
1. Vertical Cable Management for open-frame racks: Provide vertical cable management on both sides
of each rack.Where two racks are installed side-to-side, provide one section between the Racks for
each Rack provided for this project.
a. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products: "30161"series,or approved equal. Provide quantities
as required. Match existing wire managers as required if different than the above part.
2. Horizontal Cable Management
a. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products: Model#30130-x19 for 2RU applications,or approved
equal. Provide quantities as required.
2.17 WIRE RINGS
A. Cables on backboards shall be supported using open distribution rings. Rings shall be located within 12"
of entering or exiting conduit,6" prior to any radius bends and at least 12"on center. The rings shall
have rounded edges and be designed in a "C"configuration. Securely mount distribution rings to the
plywood backboard.
B. Chatsworth Products Inc.(CPI): Model#12035-001,or approved equal. Provide quantities as required.
2.18 CABLE MANAGEMENT TIES
A. Wire ties of any type shall NOT be used anywhere in this installation.
B. Bundle all Horizontal Cables together with Velcro-type tie wraps.
1. Adjustable Velcro Straps shall be used for all cable bundles.
a. Provide Velcro Straps every two-feet (approximately) above accessible ceilings, in Cable Trays
(where applicable)and throughout the cable run.
b. Provide Velcro Straps every twelve-inches(approximately)within the MDF and each designated
IDF location.
2. Chatsworth Products Inc. (CPI): Model#020XX-201, or approved equal. XX indicates actual length.
"06"(6-inches long for two-inch diameter cable bundles),"09"(9-inches long for three-inch diameter
cable bundles), and "12" (12-inches long for four-inch diameter cable bundles). Provide quantities
as required.
2.19 TMGB AND TGB(TELECOMMUNICATION GROUNDING BUSBARS)
A. See Section 27 00 00 for additional Grounding requirements.
B. Ground all equipment per the Manufacturers recommendations, per Division 26,and as required by
Code.
C. Provide grounding and bonding per ANSI-STD-J-607-A,which includes, but is not limited to: Cable Tray,
Rack(s),conduit sleeves,and other equipment connected to the TMGB/TGB.
1. The minimum conductor size shall be #6 green insulated copper grounding conductor. However,
size each conductor shall be based on the actual cable length as defined in ANSI-STD-J-607-A.
D. TMGB is existing and is located in the electrical room.
Job Number 2170712.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00- 11/17
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
E. TGB: Provide and install at EACH designated IDF location (1)2"high x 12"wide Copper
Telecommunication Grounding Busbar(TGB). Use standoff brackets to wall mount the copper busbar
and insulators.
1. Manufactured by Chatsworth Products Inc(CPI): Model#13622-012,or approved equal.
F. Lug Style: EACH connection to the TMGB/TGB shall be a Copper 2-Hole Lug Straight Long Barrel
Connection.
1. Manufactured by Thomas& Betts: Model#256 Series,or approved equal.
2.20 UNINTERRUPTED POWER SUPPLY(UPS)
1. A large format UPS is currently installed in the electrical room that feeds the sub-panel powering the
designated IDF outlets.
2. The UPS backed 208V 1P outlets at the rear of Rack 2 are dedicated 20A circuits for rack PDUs.
2.21 HORIZONTAL POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS(PDU)
A. Provide two(2) Horizontal PDU in Rack 2 for the owner provided switches.Coordinate with the owner
for exact location and requirements.
1. Horizontal PDU manufactured by APC, Model#AP9566.
2.22 ADDITIONAL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
A. See Part 3 of this specification for additional provision of system Equipment and/or Labor.
B. See 270528 for pathway requirements(cable tray,inner duct,etc.).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. See Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional information.
B. Prior to rough-in,coordinate with the Architect for the exact location(s).
C. Install all cabling,devices,and/or equipment per the manufacturer's recommendation.
3.02 PRODUCT INSPECTIONS
A. The Installing Contractor shall inspect all cable prior to installation to verify that it is identified properly
on the reel identification label,that it is of proper gauge,containing correct number of pairs,and is the
material ordered. Any physical damage to the cable and wire must be noted; un-uniform jacket
thickness and jacket tightness should also be identified. Note any buckling of the jacket,which would
indicate possible problems.
3.03 CABLE INSTALLATION-GENERAL
A. EACH CABLE RUN SHALL BE CONTINUOUS,WITHOUT ANY SPLICES,from the Telecommunications Outlet
to the patch panel(s). Any cable run that does not meet this requirement shall be replaced at no
additional cost to the Owner.
B. The Installing Contractor shall ensure that EACH Telecommunications cable is installed with care, using
techniques which prevent kinking,sharp bends,scraping cutting,deforming the jacket,or other
damage. During inspection evidence of such damage will result in the material being declared
unacceptable.The Installing Contractor shall replace unacceptable cabling at no additional cost to the
Owner.
C. Conduit and Raceway Usage:All Telecommunications cable shall be installed in grounded metal conduit
or raceway dedicated for Telecommunications purposes,when called for on the Project Drawings,and
not to be shared with electrical wiring.
Job Number 2170712.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00- 12/17
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
D. Cable shall not be draped on,tied or otherwise secured to electrical conduit, plumbing,ventilation
ductwork or any other equipment.Cable shall be secured to building supports or hangers or to
additional blocks or anchors specifically installed for this purpose.
E. All wiring to be installed in a neat and inconspicuous manner and per local code requirements. Route
wires parallel or perpendicular to the building structure using the specified cable supports. Wiring shall
be installed near or on structural members as to minimize risk of physical damage by other trades or
maintenance personnel servicing the equipment.
F. Cable Lubricants specifically designed for installing Telecommunications cable may be used to reduce
pulling tension as necessary when pulling cable into conduit.After installation,exposed cable and other
surfaces must be cleaned of lubricant residue.
G. Backboard and Rack Cable Supports: Clamps, "D-Rings",Velcro and tie-wraps are all acceptable ways to
support cable. However, installation of these supports must be done with care so as not to cause
crushing or distortion of the cable,nor cause tighter bends than the minimum radius permitted for each
type cable.
3.04 HORIZONTAL CABLING
A. Horizontal Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with TIA/EIA-568-B requirements and
the cable manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Untwisting of pairs at the termination point shall not exceed one-half an inch for Category 6
connecting hardware.
2. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not be less than the manufacturer's
recommendation.
3. The Horizontal Cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point.
B. Every attempt shall be made to avoid running Horizontal Cables close to(less than 24")and parallel to
power raceway and wiring,or close to light fixtures.
C. When an approved cable support is used to support cable bundles,all horizontal cables shall be
supported at a maximum of four-foot intervals with UL approved cable support. At no point shall
cables rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels. Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting
support wires. Where light support for drop cable legs is required,the Installing Contractor shall install
clips to support the cabling.
D. The installation of Horizontal Cables around moveable devices, instruments,subpanels,etc.shall be
provided with adequate support, length,protection,and flexibility so that the cable is not damaged in
the event the equipment is moved.
E. Pathways:
1. It is the responsibility of the contractor to ensure that ALL PATHWAYS for the permanent link of each
balanced twisted pair cable shall not exceed 295' in length from work area outlet to
telecommunications room patch panel.
2. To ensure this length,all pathways shall be coordinated and installed prior to pouring of any slabs or
the installation of any permanent structure which would inhibit a conduit or cable tray run from
being installed after the structure is complete.
3. See section 27 05 28 for pathway types and additional requirements.
3.05 PLYWOOD BACKBOARD CABLING
A. Plywood backboard shall be painted with fire-resistant white paint prior to equipment mounting and
cabling.
Job Number 2170712.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00- 13/17
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Horizontal Cable installation must conform to the Project Drawings.All cabling shall be routed so as to
avoid interference with any other service or system,operation,or maintenance purposes such as access
boxes,ventilation mixing boxes,access hatches to air filters,switch or electrical outlets,electrical
panels,fire alarm equipment,clock systems,and lighting fixtures.Avoid crossing areas horizontally just
above or below any riser conduit. Lay and dress cables to allow other cables to enter the conduit/riser
without difficulty at a later time by maintaining maximum distance from these openings.
C. Horizontal Cables shall be routed as close as possible to the ceiling,floor,or corners to ensure that
adequate backboard space is available for current and future equipment and for cable terminations.
Horizontal Cables shall not be connected or attached to electrical conduit or other equipment.
Minimum bend radius shall be observed.
D. Lay cables via the shortest route directly to the nearest edge of the backboard from the mounted
equipment or block. Velcro wrap all similar cables together and attached by means of clamps screwed
to the outside edge(s)of the backboard vertically and/or horizontally,then route via "square"corners
over a path that will offer minimum obstruction to future installations of equipment or other cables.
E. Horizontal Cables that are not dressed in a neat fashion,or with excessive slack,will not be accepted.
3.06 TELEPHONE RISER BACKBONE CABLE
A. Backbone Cable splices are only allowed in accessible,dry locations and housed in a splice case
enclosure intended and suitable for the purpose. Each cable end that is spliced must be labeled. Verify
intended splice locations with Engineer prior to installation.
B. Backbone cables shall be installed separately from horizontal cables.
C. Where backbone cables and horizontal cables are installed in a cable tray, backbone cables shall be
installed first and bundled separately from the horizontal cables..
3.07 CABLE LABELING
A. Alpha-numeric numbering shall be developed by Installing Contractor, under the direction of the
Owners IT Department. Label all equipment and cables in an identical fashion.
B. Patch Panel Labeling: Each terminal shall be identified and marked on the patch panel with the outlet
port identification.
C. Outlet Port Labeling:Outlet labels for each port shall be identified and marked on the Outlet with the
outlet port identification.
D. Backbone Labels: Labels shall be identified and marked on all backbone cables(at both ends of the
cable)with an identifier as to the location of the beginning and termination of each cable. Labels shall
be attached to each cable at the point of entrance and exit to the MDF and IDF Rooms.
E. Horizontal Cables: Each cable shall be identified and marked with the outlet port identification near the
cable termination point at the rear of the patch panel.
3.08 TELECOMMUNICATION ROOMS
A. The Telecommunication Rooms(MDF and designated IDF's)shall house Racks, Patch Panels,Wire
Management, UPS's, Punch Blocks,and required cable routing hardware. Racks shall be placed in a
manner that will allow a minimum of 3 feet of clearance from the front and rear mounting surfaces and
on one side. If one mounting rail of the rack is placed against a wall,the mounting rail shall be no closer
than 6"to the wall to allow room for vertical management. Where there is more than one rack,the
racks shall be ganged with vertical management hardware to provide interlay management. Ganged
rack frames will be placed in a manner that will allow a minimum of 3 feet of clearance from the front
and rear mounting surfaces.
Job Number 2170712.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00- 14/1 7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Racks shall be installed in the following manner:
1. EACH Rack shall be securely attached to the floor and/or wall using the manufacturer's
recommended mounting hardware.
2. EACH Rack shall be Grounded/Bonded to the TMGB/TGB with a minimum size of one (1)#6 copper
green insulated conductor or larger due to distance requirements based on ANSI-J-STD-607-A.
3. Rack mount screws (#12-24)that are spare shall be bagged and left with the rack upon completion
of the installation.
4. All rack mounted equipment shall be installed in a designated Rack Unit. Equipment shall NOT be
installed in between Rack Units;this will NOT be considered acceptable.
C. Cable Tray: Configure as shown on the drawings. Provide Cable Tray as specified in 27 OS28. Install the
Cable Tray using the manufacturer's recommended mounting hardware,connectors,brackets,and
fasteners.
3.09 TESTING OF CABLES
A. Notification shall be given a minimum of 14 days prior to any testing so that the testing may be
witnessed by the Owner.
1. An ETL certified, TIA-11S2 Level Ille (ISO/IEC 11801 Level IV) Test Meter shall be used to test all
balanced twisted-pair coper cabling.
B. All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project(not the room
number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings). This includes, but is not limited to;the Outlets,
Port Addresses, Patch Panels,As-Built Drawings,and Test Results.
C. Provide documentation of the following items of EACH Test Meter used:
D. Calibration certification from a third party shall be within two-years of testing(at the time that the test
is performed).
1. Manufacturer of Test Meter.
2. Model Number of Test Meter.
3. Serial Number of Test Meter.
E. Copper Cables—Category 6 and 6A Cables: Each of the pairs shall be tested from the Patch Panel or
Punch Block to the Outlet. The Installing Contractor shall test:
1. Wire Map.
2. Length.
3. Insertion Loss/Attenuation.
4. NEXT(Near End Cross Talk).
S. PS-NEXT(Power Sum Near End Cross Talk).
6. ACR-F Loss(Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far-end).
7. PS ACR-F Loss(Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far-end).
8. Return Loss.
9. Propagation Delay.
10. Delay Skew.
11. The following tests are only required for CAT6A cabling:
a. PSANEXT(Power Sum Alien NEXT)
b. PSAACRF(Power Sum Alien ACRF)
F. Copper Cables—Category 3 or Se Cables: Each of the pairs shall be tested from the Patch Panel or
Punch Block to the Outlet. The Installing Contractor shall test:
1. Wire Map.
2. Length.
3. Insertion Loss/Attenuation.
4. NEXT(Near End Cross Talk).
S. PS-NEXT(Power Sum Near End Cross Talk).
Job Number 2170712.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00- 15/17
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
6. ACR-F Loss(Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far-end).
7. PS ACR-F Loss(Power Sum Attenuation Crosstalk Ratio Far-end).
8. Return Loss.
9. Propagation Delay.
10. Delay Skew.
G. Fiber Optic Cables—Multi-Mode Inside Plant(ISP)and Outside Plant(OSP): Each of the fibers shall be
tested from End-to-End. The Tests performed shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 standards. The
Installing Contractor shall test:
1. Polarity Testing
2. Length Measurement.
3. OLTS/Link Attenuation.
4. OTDR.
5. Two 2-meter patch cords shall be used for the actual test. The two-jumper test shall be used to
estimate the actual link loss of the installed cables plus the loss of the connectors. This measurement
is consistent with the loss which network equipment will see under normal installation and use.
H. Fiber Optic Cables—Multi-Mode Inside Plant(ISP): Each of the fibers shall be tested from End-to-End.
The Tests performed shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 standards.
I. Fiber Optic Cables—Single-Mode Inside Plant(ISP)and Outside Plant(OSP). Each of the fibers shall be
tested from End-to-End. The Tests performed shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 standards.
J. The source of each error shall be determined,corrected,and the cable re-tested.All defective cables,
connectors,connections,and related appurtenances shall be replaced and re-tested at no additional
cost to the Owner.
K. Submit the Test Reports in PDF format.
L. See the O&M Manual/As built Drawings requirements in this specification and also in Section 27 00
00 for additional requirements.
M. Acceptance of these test procedures is predicated on the Installing Contractor's use of the
recommended products including, but not limited to;the specified cable type,patch panels,outlets,
punch blocks,specified equipment identified in Part 2 and the installation standards of this
specification. Adherence to these requirements shall be determined upon the completed installation
and will be evaluated in the context of each of these factors.
3.10 FIRE RATED PENETRATIONS
A. Install per manufacturers recommendations.
B. Maintain all Code and AM requirements.
C. See 270528 for additional requirements.
3.11 WARRANTY
A. Upon final installation,a certificate providing a "Performance and Application Warranty"shall be
provided to the owner.This warranty shall be valid for a period of no less than 25 Years. The warranty
shall be direct to the end user,from the manufacturer,supported through the installing and certified
Installing Contractor,and shall cover both materials and labor costs for any claims related to the
warranty program. If the Installing Contractor were to default,the manufacturer will assume
responsibility of employing another certified installer to maintain the existing warranty. Bids from
installers or Installing Contractors who are not certified by the connecting hardware manufacturer and
wire manufacturer at the time of project bid,will be rejected.
Job Number 2170712.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00- 1 6/1 7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center-Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.12 OPERATION&MAINTENANCE MANUALS(O&M'S)
A. Provide all Operation& Maintenance Manuals(O&M's)documentation as defined in Section 27 00 00
Low Voltage Systems General Requirements and listed elsewhere in this specification.
B. Provide hard copies of the Test Results of EACH Cable tested.
C. Provide the Test Results on CD in PDF format.
3.13 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Provide all As-Built documentation as defined in Section 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General
Requirements and listed elsewhere in this specification.
B. All labeling shall match the final room number identification at completion of the project(not the room
number that is indicated on the Bid Set of drawings). This includes, but is not limited to;the Outlets,
Port Addresses, Patch Panels,As-Built Drawings,and Test Results.
C. Update all documents provided in the Submittal and Shop Drawings to accurately reflect the actual
equipment that was provided for this project,and the actual locations of the installed equipment.
D. The Installing Contractor shall provide As-Built drawings to the Architect,which clearly indicates:
1. The floor plan of the building showing the As-Built location of Telecommunication Outlets and their
associated Port Address(es),conduit runs,and terminal cabinets.
2. A list of EACH Telecommunication Outlet and the associated Port Address(es) shall clearly be
identified according to system labeling scheme. Show all ports and punchdowns.
3. Provide(3)sets of complete As-Builts.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 DATA AND VOICE INRASTRUCTURE
27 20 00- 1 7/1 7
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
SECTION 28 1300
ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE AND RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The pre-approved access control and security vendor for this project is Entrance Controls.
1. All other vendors submit for a prior-approval and be approved by the owner prior to the bid date.
B. The project Access Control System is an addition to the owner's existing system. The Installing Vendor
shall provide new equipment at the project site and include the necessary programming for viewing
reports,changing card holder information,changing card holder access capabilities,and control
functions of the new Access Control System to and from the following locations:
1. Locally at the project site.
2. Remotely at the Owners Administrative Offices.
3. Remotely at the Owners Information Technology Department Offices.
C. Furnish and install a complete Access Control System as described herein and as shown on the Plans;to
be wired,connected,and left in first class operating condition. The system shall include, but not be
limited to:Access Control Panels, Access Control Reader Interface(s), Input Board(s),Output Board(s),
Power Supplies,Card Readers, Door Position Switches, Request to Exit motion sensors, Electric Locks,
Electrified Exit Devices, Panic Buttons, Push Buttons, Intercom Stations,device Input supervision,
control Relays, importing of Database(s),Configure, Program,conduit,junction boxes,fittings,wire,
connections to devices,and all other necessary material for a completely reliable and fully functional
system.
D. The installing vendor shall coordinate new cards and card readers with the owner's existing cards and
card readers.
E. The system shall be of modular design to facilitate both expansion and service, providing an individual
system for specific requirements of this project.
F. The system shall grant access to card holders with a valid card, monitor the status of open and closed
doors,and activate relays. All relay outputs shall be programmable to change state via control-by-event
equations, programmable inputs,and timed-events.
G. All activity of the Access Control System shall be recorded in an event history log. This history shall be
able to be printed in a report format.
H. The system shall support industry standards for databases, networks,credential printers,and more,
such as Microsoft'"SQL.
I. An important aspect of the construction process for this project is the Pre-Construction Kick Off
Meeting,which shall take place PRIOR to Submittal of equipment data sheets. See"Submittals"and
"Coordination" listed elsewhere within this specification.
J. Section 26 0000—General Electrical Conditions.
K. The system shall meet ALL of the requirements listed in Section 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems General
Requirements PART 3"Testing&Complete System Functionality", prior to "Substantial Completion".
L. Contractual information,guidelines, requirements,or other work specified to provide a fully functional
system for Section 28 1300 includes, but is not limited to the sections identified in Section 27 0000 as
well as Section 08 7100 Finish Hardware.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 1/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1.02 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Access Control System:
1. Overview:
a. The Access Control System and related components shall control access and prevent un-
authorized entrance to selected areas from entrance during secure hours using Cards and
Card Readers.
b. Integrate with other systems as described within these specifications and as required.
C. The system shall integrate various systems and devices, fully, completely, and seamlessly
through the use of inputs, outputs, and software interfaces. The system shall serve as the
hub for all system functions. The software shall allow System Operators to view specific
information and status of devices and equipment.
d. The modularity of the system shall allow the Owner to add or remove control functions,
adapting to their needs as the system expands and as the operating requirements change.
e. The system shall also be configured with remote workstations sharing system monitor and
control tasks, if required. From Video to Alarm and printing equipment, industry standard
protocols shall be used as the system framework.
f. The software shall also combine all application information into a unified database, allowing
for more informed operation and automatic system communication transfer between
Subsystems, regardless of system drivers and/or protocols.
2. Central Configuration for System Monitoring and Control
a. To support alarm management and monitoring, the system shall provide a wide range of
display and control features.
b. History Log:
1. The History Log shall monitor all incoming events. At a minimum, this shall provide the
following information:
a. Date/Time
b. Device state
C. Card Holder Name.
d. Access denied/granted
e. Door/Gate/Device location
C. Reports:
1. The System Operator shall be able to search and generate reports from groups or
individual persons, doors, locations, inputs, or outputs.The reports shall be captured in
a standard document format. The report shall include, but not be limited to the
following data:
2. Date/time.
3. Group name(s).
4. User name(s).
5. Door(s).
6. Location(s).
7. Input(s).
8. Output(s).
d. Display of Events:
1. The system shall support the real-time display of EACH event.
e. Schedules and Timers:
1. The system shall provide timer and schedule functions to support:
2. Time based control of programmable relays
3. Time based automatic controls into any subsystem
4. The timer shall support time frames per weekday, public holidays, and individual special
days.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 2/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
f. System Operator Generated Alarm:
1. The system shall support a manual alarm trigger by a System Operator to allow alarm
operation,for example, lock all doors.
B. Workstations and User Interface:
1. Workstations shall be connected by standard IP network. Any computer on the network shall be
usable as a workstation.
2. The system shall be expandable to support an unlimited number of integrated workstations.
3. The system shall provide a flexible and simple way to adapt to specific Owner requirements, such
as different System Operator groups.
C. System Modularity:
1. The system shall have a modular structure that provides specific project solutions.The system shall
be expanded at a later date. Common expansion may include the number of System Operators,
Subsystem connections,or monitored devices and/or equipment.
D. System Operators and Authorization Management:
1. The system shall allow the creation of individual authorizations per System Operator or operator
group. This includes:
2. Selectable displaying, monitoring, and control of locations, such as individual floor, building, or site
permissions.
3. Selectable displaying, monitoring,and control of Subsystems,such as CCTV System, Intrusion Alarm
Systems, Fire Alarm System,etc.
4. Selectable displaying, monitoring,and control of devices,such as cameras, readers,doors,or gates.
E. Subsystem and Device Programming:
1. Subsystems and their peripheral devices shall be configurable in the system configuration tool.
F. Customizing the System:
1. The system shall be adaptable and configurable to the project requirements, the expertise of the
System Operator, and to the configuration of the workstations (resolution and number of
monitors).
2. The system shall automatically detect from where a System Operator is logging in, and supplies the
correct features,contents,and resolution for EACH appropriate workstation.
3. The system shall provide a toolbox containing all specific controls for display features, such as
location tree,alarm queue,toolbar,and customizable action buttons for individual use.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Installing Vendor shall identify and designate two(2) Manufacturer Trained and Certified Installing
Vendor Technicians for the duration of this project.
1. To be deemed a qualified Installing Vendor for this project, a minimum of(2)technicians shall hold
the following Manufacturers Certifications PRIOR to issuing submittals for this project:
a. The Installing Vendor shall submit copies of the technicians Manufacturer Certification(s).
B. The Installing Vendor shall provide a Staff Commitment Letter in the Submittal and Shop Drawings
submittal package,that states the following:
1. The Installing Vendor shall identify and designate two (2) Manufacturer Trained and Certified
Installing Vendor Technicians for the duration of this project.
a. One of the Technicians shall be the designated LEAD TECHNICIAN.
1. This individual shall be responsible for no less than 80% of the technical portion of this
project.
b. The other Technician shall be the designated BACK-UP TECHNICIAN, who may assist the Lead
Technician with the project.
1. This individual shall be responsible for no greater than 20% of the technical portion of
this project.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 3/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
C. The Installing Vendor shall submit copies of the above designated technicians Manufacturer
Certification(s).
d. Additional Installing Vendor field technicians may also work on the site, but only while one of
the two designated technicians are on-site.
2. The Installing Vendor shall identify and designate a Project Manager whose responsibilities will
include, but are not limited to:
a. The Primary Point of Contact between the Owner and the Installing Vendor.
1. This person can be the Lead Technician.
b. Scheduling of technicians to perform the work on the Owners premises.
C. Scheduling of any meetings.
1. All meetings shall be on the Owners premises.
d. Scheduling and coordination of any deliveries to the Owners premises.
C. The system,devices,and equipment,shall be manufactured under the appropriate category by
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL),and shall bear the UL label. Partial or pending listings are not
acceptable. The installation of EACH device and/or component shall be in compliance with the UL
listing. The system,devices,and equipment shall fully comply with the latest issue of these standards,
where applicable,which includes, but is not limited to:
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)-USA:
a. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
b. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
2. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)-USA:
a. UL 294 Access Control Systems
b. UL 1034 Burglary-Resistant Rated
C. UL 1076 Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems
3. Meet or exceed Building Codes and Standards:
a. Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) Requirements
b. State
1. WAC 51-20 Washington Barrier Free Regulations
C. National
1. National Electrical Code(see NFPA 70)
2. Americans with Disabilities Act
d. International
1. International Building Code
2. International Electrical Code(see NFPA 70)
3. International Fire Code
D. Approvals:
1. The system shall have proper listing and/or approval from the following nationally recognized
agencies:
a. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
b. ULC Underwriters Laboratories Canada.
C. Factory Mutual.
d. FCC.
E. The Installing Vendor shall,at a minimum, provide and/or perform on-site installation assistance to the
Contractor throughout the duration of the project, up to and including acceptance of the System as
defined in Section 27 0000"Testing&Complete System Functionality".
F. Service and Software Modifications:
1. Provide the services of a Manufacturer Certified/Authorized Technician to perform all system
software modifications, upgrades or changes.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00-4/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. For non-emergency service, response time of the technician to the site shall not exceed 4 hours. If
the call is received by the Installing Vendor before 1:00pm, service shall be provided that day, and
if the call is received after that time,then the response shall be the following business day.
3. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to modify the
system on-site. Modification includes addition and/or deletion of system devices, changes to
system operation, and custom label changes for devices. The system structure and software shall
place no limit on the type or extent of software modifications on-site.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to specification 27 00 00 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements,for additional data sheet
submittal requirements and the shop drawing submittal requirements.
B. Refer to"As-Built Drawings"for additional requirements.
C. Data Sheets Submittals and other documentation.
1. Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting:
a. PRIOR to submitting any project Data Sheets, coordinate with the General Contractor as
described in Section 27 0000.
1. Submit the Coordination Questions a minimum of 14 Days in advance of the meeting for
Owner review for the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting as described under
"Coordination" identified elsewhere in this specification.
b. The Installing Vendor shall document the Meeting Minutes of the Pre-Construction Kick Off
Meeting as described under"Coordination" identified elsewhere in this specification.
C. Provide the follow up documentation for the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting as described
under"Coordination" identified elsewhere in this specification.
1. The Installing Vendor shall make the necessary corrections or changes as discussed
during this meeting and provide a revised formal Submittal through the normal
construction channels.
2. Be sure to include ALL responses by the Owner in the revised formal Submittal. This
includes, but is not limited to:
a. IPAddress Equipment List.
2. Installing Vendor/Manufacturer Agreement. Provide the following documentation of the
Manufacturer of the equipment being installed:
a. The Installing Vendor shall be an Authorized Partner that is trained and certified by the
Manufacturer of the equipment being installed.
3. Installing Vendor Staff Qualifications. Provide copies of the following information (Certification and
Training documents):
a. Provide a copy of no less than (2) separate technicians (from the Installing Vendors local
office) Factory Certifications issued by the manufacturer of the equipment that is being
installed.
4. Provide The Installing Vendor Staff Commitment Letter as described in "Quality Assurance" listed
elsewhere in this specification.
5. Materials List:
a. A complete materials list,which shall include;the quantity of each device,the manufacturer's
name, model number, and a description of the equipment for each individual system
component or device that will be provided. This list shall precede the data sheets.
b. Equipment Data Sheets. Each System component or device data sheet shall have an
indicating arrow next to each component or device that is being submitted.
C. Prior to ordering or installation of any equipment, the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall
obtain written approval by the Architect.
6. Provide ALL requested submittal documents in "Programming Survey" listed elsewhere in this
specification. This includes, but is not limited items listed under"Interview the Owner":
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 5/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
a. Generate the document titled "Section 28 1300 Access Control System — PRE-INTERVIEW of
Owner Requested Systems Programming Sheet"and submit for review.
b. Provide a sample copy of the Step-by-Step Instructions.
7. Submit the "System Device Naming Matrix" listed elsewhere in this specification, with the Data
Sheet submittal.
8. Load Calculations.
a. UPS Load Calculations. Provide load calculations for the MDF UPS and each designated IDF
UPS location.
1. Each device connected to the UPS shall be included in the calculations.
b. ACPS Load Calculations. Provide load calculations for each ACPS location.
1. Each device connected to the ACPS shall be included in the calculations.
D. Shop Drawing Submittals shall include the following items:
1. Prior to ordering or installation of any equipment, the Installing Vendor/Contractor shall obtain
written approval by the Architect.
2. Provide the follow up documentation for the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting as described under
"Coordination" identified elsewhere in this specification.
a. The Installing Vendor shall make the necessary corrections or changes as discussed during this
meeting and provide a Revised Submittal through the normal construction channels.
1. Be sure to include ALL responses by the Owner in the Revised Submittal.
3. Device Point-to-Point Wiring Diagrams:
a. Provide an Illustration of EACH Device that is being provided for this project.
1. Identify EACH conductor and the equipment type and termination point that it is
intended to be connected to.
2. For equipment that is being connected to Integrate to another system, provide a brief
description of the functional operation of the two different systems.
4. Device Mounting Details:
a. Provide an Illustration of EACH Device that is being provided for this project.
1. Identify the back box, conduit rough-in, and manufacturer recommended mounting
method.
5. Door Hardware Illustrations and Wiring Diagrams:
a. Coordinate with the Electrical Contractor/General Contractor as required to obtain the
following information that shall be included on the Shop Drawing submittal:
1. Provide a "typical" Illustration of EACH Electro-Mechanical Door Hardware device that
the access control system will be connecting to.
2. Provide a "typical" Point-to-Point Wiring Diagram of EACH Electro-Mechanical Door
Hardware device that the access control system will be connecting to.
a. Show a "typical"of EACH connection and termination to the Access Control Reader
Interface(ACRI)and/or Access Control Panel.
6. The Riser Diagram shall show the following items:
a. Identify EACH Equipment location (the MDF and EACH designated IDF)separately.
1. Identify EACH cable type, size, and quantities between the MDF and EACH designated
IDF location.
b. Identify EACH Device and the associated room number where it is located in the building. Use
the designated door number on the Contract Drawings.
1. Identify the associated cable for EACH device(as described on the wire legend) routed to
the Access Control Reader Interface(ACRI)and each cable routed from EACH ACRI to the
MDF and EACH designated IDF location.
2. This includes, but is not limited to; Card Reader(s), Door Position Switches, Request to
Exits,ACRI(s),ACPS(s), EDPS(s),Server(s),Workstation(s),and other system equipment.
7. Rack and/or Equipment Layout.
a. Show the intended equipment layout within EACH of the Rack(s)and/or Cabinets.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 6/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
b. Indicate the rack unit size of each device or filler plate in the rack.
C. Show blank filler plates in spaces where equipment is not installed.
d. If rack equipment is installed on the rear side of the rack,show rear view of the rack also.
e. Show the equipment layout as it is intended to be installed.
8. An Elevation View of the Wall Mount equipment for the Electrical, MDF Room and each designated
IDF location shall be provided.
a. The proposed locations for EACH wall mount device (control panel(s), power supplies, and
other equipment), proposed cable routing, wire management, 120vac conduits (including
receptacles and junction boxes).
b. All equipment shall be shown to scale.
C. Provide dimensions of the equipment,the space required between the adjacent item and the
overall dimensions of the anticipated wall space.
9. Floor Plans shall show EACH Device type,style,and each individual cable required for EACH Device.
10. Shop Drawings shall be specific to the System that is specified in the Section.
a. Do NOT show other low voltage system equipment on the Shop Drawings, except where this
system is integrated to other equipment and/or systems.
b. Provide EACH device Symbol and related description (as described on the Contract Drawings)
on the Legend with the text that states"provided by others".
1. Intrusion Alarm System as described on the Floor Plans and Riser Diagrams.
2. Fire Alarm System integration as described on the Floor Plans and Riser Diagrams.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. See Section 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional information.
B. See Section 27 2000 Data and Voice Infrastructure for additional equipment requirements.
C. The Access Control System design,devices and/or wiring arrangement shown on the drawings represent
that based on equipment as manufactured by Lenel. Any changes resulting from differences between
the specified product and other manufacturers or substitute manufacturers,shall be the responsibility
of the Installing Vendor.
1. Substitutions of the specified equipment and/or supplier will be considered provided that sufficient
documentation is provided to the Engineer which certifies that the equipment and or supplier
qualification meets the requirement of these specifications.
D. Provide all equipment as defined in the specification(s)and shown on the drawings.
E. Refer to PART 1 for any equipment that is not specifically defined.
2.02 COORDINATION
A. Refer to"Submittals"for additional coordination requirements.
B. The Installing Vendor shall include in their bid;the time,staff,and materials that are necessary to
perform the following services.
C. Provide the follow up documentation. Each of the items discussed during the Pre-Construction Kick Off
Meeting shall be included in the Data Sheet Submittals and shown on the Shop Drawing Submittals.
D. Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting. An important aspect of the construction process for this project is
the Pre-Construction Kick-Off Meeting. The Installing Vendor shall allow as much time as necessary to
accommodate each of the Owner preferences for; equipment layout, programming features,and each
item identified within this specification. This meeting shall take place PRIOR to the Submittal of
equipment Data Sheets and/or Shop Drawings.
1. The Installing Vendor Technician shall attend this MANDATORY meeting.
2. The Installing Vendor shall coordinate with the Electrical Contractor to confirm the date and time
of this meeting.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 7/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3. See the paragraph titled "Coordination" in Section 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems General
Requirements for more information.
4. Coordination Questions shall be submitted a minimum of 14 Days in advance of the meeting for
Owner review for the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting. This would include, but is not limited to;
a. IPAddress Equipment List.
b. Rack/Equipment layout preferences.
c. Automatic (pre-programmed) functions, such as; Lock/Unlock times of perimeter doors on a
door by door basis.
d. The Installing Vendor Other questions that would like clarification of.
5. The Installing Vendor shall bring to the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting 95% design engineered
submittal documents,which shall be a complete Preliminary Submittal package.
a. These items shall be reviewed during the course of the meeting. The intent is to identify
incomplete or inaccurate information that was intended to be submitted. The Drawings,
Material Lists,and/or Data Sheets will be marked up during this meeting.
b. The Installing Vendor shall make the necessary corrections and provide a revised formal
Submittal through the normal construction channels.
1. Be sure to include ALL responses by the Owner in the revised formal Submittal.
C. Provide a minimum of(3) Full-Size sets of 95%design engineered Shop Drawings. Insure that
the drawings show the following items:
1. A legend that identifies; each device, manufacturer, model number, description, rough-
in of electrical back boxes and the related conduits.
2. The proposed Rack / Equipment layout(s) for the MDF Room and each designated IN
location that will have Rack mounted equipment provided for this project.
3. An Elevation View of the Wall Mount equipment for the Electrical Room, MDF Room and
each designated IN location shall be provided. The proposed locations for EACH wall
mount device (control panel(s), power supplies, and other equipment), proposed cable
routing, wire management, 120vac conduits (including receptacles and junction boxes)
shall be shown to scale. Provide dimensions of the equipment, the space required
between the adjacent item and the overall dimensions of the anticipated wall space.
4. Proposed route for cable installation (throughout the building).
5. Riser Diagram. Insure the following items are shown:
a. The MDF Room.
b. Each individual designated IN Room.
C. Each type shall be shown between the MDF and each designated IN location.
d. Provide a minimum of(3)sets of 95%design engineered Material List.
1. Provide the Data Sheets for each device and component on the Material List.
6. The items discussed at the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting shall include, but not be limited to:
a. Coordinate with the Electrical Contractor and General Contractor to obtain the Door
Hardware Illustrations and Wiring Diagrams, so that this information can be included on the
Access Control System Shop Drawing submittal. See"Submittals"for more information.
b. Coordination with other Trades.
C. Cable ID labeling.
d. Confirmation of the Outlet Connector Type.
e. Owner furnished equipment to be installed by the Installing Vendor.
f. Verification and approval by the Owners of the following items:
1. Proposed Rack/Equipment layout.
2. Proposed Rack locations and orientation within the MDF Room and EACH designated IDF
location.
3. Proposed wall mounted equipment layout(s)for the MDF Room and each designated IDF
location.
g. Automatic(pre-programmed)functions,such as;
1. Lock/Unlock times of perimeter doors on a door by door basis.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 8/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. First Man In functional operation.
h. Integration to other systems. Discuss the intended operation.
E. Additional items to be discussed shall include, but not be limited to:
1. General questions about IT Department standards.
2. Access to locked doors within the building.
3. General coordination with staff.
F. Follow up documentation of the Pre-Construction Kick Off Meeting. The purpose of this information is
to illustrate to the Owners IT Department that the information discussed during the Pre-Construction
Kick Off Meeting was understood by the Installing Vendor. Provide the following information:
1. Make corrections to the Shop Drawings as marked up and discussed with the Owner and Engineer.
2. Each of the above items and items discussed during the meeting shall be included in the Data Sheet
Submittals and/or Shop Drawing submittals.
2.03 NETWORK RELATED EQUIPMENT
A. Switch(s):
1. Utilize the Owners Ethernet Switch(s) at the MDF Room and EACH designated IDF location
indicated on the drawings. The Owner shall provide the necessary switches for a functional
LAN/WAN.
2. The Access Control System Installing Vendor shall program all other system equipment.
B. Data Infrastructure:
1. Section 27 2000 Data and Voice Infrastructure shall provide EACH of the following items at EACH
location required:
a. CATSe/Cat6 Cable Infrastructure.
b. Patch Panels.
C. Patch Cords.
2.04 SERVER(S)AND WORKSTATION(S)
A. Server(s).
1. Additional server(s)are not required for this project.
2. Use the server(s)that will be provided by the Owner.
B. Workstation(s).
1. Additional Workstation(s)are NOT required for this project.
2. Use the Workstation(s)that will be provided by the Owner.
2.05 SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. The Lenel Access Control System and Lenel On Guard Software are the basis of design.
B. Substitutions of the specified equipment and/or supplier will be considered provided that sufficient
documentation is provided to the Engineer which certifies that the equipment and or supplier
qualification meets the requirement of these specifications.Any request for substitution shall be
submitted by the contractor in writing so as to be received by the Architect not later than (10)days
prior to the bid due date.Approval by the Engineer will be issued by addendum prior to the bid date.
C. Software.
1. The owner is to provide the most current version of software available by the Manufacturer.
D. It is the Installing Vendors responsibility to insure that the system is fully functional with the specified
equipment.
1. The database shall be programmed and accessed through the Owners WAN.
2. Import/Download the database to the ACP(s)and ACRI(s),as required.
3. The software shall operate completely separate and independently from other locations.
E. General Functional Operation:
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 9/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1. It will be the Installing Vendors responsibility to insure that the system is fully functional.
a. Provide configuration and functional operation of EACH door as directed by the Owner.
2. Load and configure the software as required. This includes,but is not limited to;
a. User Groups.
b. Time Zones.
C. Automated functions,such as; Door(s)automatically Lock and Unlock.
3. Populate all database fields as directed by the Owner.
4. Coordinate with the Owners IT department as required.
F. Emergency Lock Down functionality.
1. Provide manual Emergency Lock Down button(s) (ELD) for system activation. When the ELD is
pressed,the following actions shall include, but not be limited to;
a. Lock the perimeter doors.
1. Override EACH door that is an automatic timer that is unlocked. Lock each door.
b. Close and Lock the interior doors(that are held open by Magnetic Door Holders).
c. Send a Text Message to multiple Owner Staff members as directed by the Owner.
d. Provide the functionality of the Graphic Maps as described elsewhere in this specification.
2. Provide a manual Reset Key Switch to restore the system to its normal operating condition.
G. The following functional capabilities are to be considered standard,without the need for add-on
software. Not all of the system features are listed in this specification. This information shall be used as
a summary of the requirements.This summary does not lessen the specified system Make, Model
Number,and performance requirements in any way.
1. General Requirements:
a. All databases will have the ability to ADD, DELETE, REPORT,VIEW and EDIT information.
b. Provide storage of all system transactions in a retrievable file.
C. Log all events by time and date.
d. Provide ability for the Owner to make system configuration changes such as, but not limited
to door open time, door contact shunt time, point and reader names, when and where a
cardholder is valid,and the ability to add or modify card databases at any time.
e. Provide mode of system operation that stores system commands that were not accepted by
the hardware.
f. All commands and updates to the panels shall be verified and shall automatically retry if
communications have failed.
g. Provide a system scheduler that shall automatically initiate a preprogrammed command
event/action and also synchronize system to intelligent controller time.
2. Cardholder Database:
a. Cardholder information shall include unique card number digits and optional Personal
Identification Number.
b. Allow multiple cards per cardholder.
C. Provide special card options that include, but are not limited to:
1. Time zone reference,which defines valid time.
2. Temporary User, which provides a specified activation date and expiration date
(spanning years).
3. Provide ability to store digital images of cardholder or other digital images such as
property or family members. Up to two (2) such images shall be associated with the
cardholder.
d. Upon editing card information, the updated information shall be sent automatically to the
appropriate access control panel(s) and access control reader interface(s), when hardwired,
with no other user intervention. If the scheduler is used, then card updates shall be sent
based on scheduling.
3. Access Levels:
a. Provide the ability to define specific times of access.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 10/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
b. Provide the ability to define specific readers to specific locations.
C. Provide a template of a defined access level detail, where changes can be made to the
template and saved as a new access level detail.
4. Alarm Monitoring—Alarms Only View:
a. Execute alarm notification in all modes of operation.
b. Provide a display of the most current transactions in real time.
C. Provide a "Panel Not Responding"alarm if communication to a panel is lost.
5. System Operator Database:
a. Provide ability for manual System Operator control of system function.The manual functions
shall include the ability to Lock, Un-Lock, Activate and Restore the Emergency School Lock-
Down System.
b. The software shall allow the assignment of System Operator levels to define the system
components that each System Operator has access to view,operate,change or delete.
C. Define the accounts to which the System Operator has access.
d. Provide the ability to log System Operator actions in the history files.
6. Reports:
a. Provide reporting capability for printing of selected system transactions from the disk files by
specific time and date selection, range from time and date to time and date, or from start
time to end time each day of the selected date range.
b. Provide feature to generate a history report for a card(s)state.A card state shall be defined as
Normal, Trace, Not Found, Anti-Passback Violation, PIN Violation, Time Zone Violation, Site
Code Violation, or Expired card.Additional search criteria shall include cardholders that meet
up to at least 3-note field restriction and filter the report with defined reader location(s).
C. Provide feature to generate a history report for System Operator(s) activities.The report shall
include time, date, operator name the device associated with the action and the type of
action performed by the operator.
d. Provide complete database reporting of all data programmed into the system data files.
7. Time Zones:
a. Time zone definitions shall include Starting time, Ending time, Days of the week, and Holiday
override.
b. Time shall be definable in 24-hour(military)time.
c. The maximum time zones that can be defined in a system shall be a maximum of 255 time
zones.
8. Lenel: Model#On Guard 2008,Version 7.2 release or greater.
2.06 ACCESS CONTROL PANEL(ACP)
A. Provide the most current version of panel and firmware available by the Manufacturer.
B. The following functional capabilities are to be considered standard,without the need for add-on
software or hardware. Not all of the system features are listed in this specification. This information
shall be used as a summary of the requirements. This summary does not lessen the specified system
Make, Model Number,and performance requirements in any way.
C. The Access Control Panel (ACP)shall include an on-board LAN/WAN communication module and shall
link the Access Control System software to all other Subsystems. The system field devices(Access
Control Reader Interfaces [ACRI], Readers, Door Position Switches,etc.)shall connect to the ACP and/or
ACRI(s). EACH ACP and EACH ACRI shall provide full distributed processing of access control,alarm
monitoring operations,emergency school lock-down,and reader led control (to indicate when the door
is locked/unlocked).
D. Access levels, hardware configurations,and programmed control functions assigned at the
administration workstation or database server shall be downloaded to EACH ACP and EACH ACRI,which
shall store the information and control functions.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 11/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
E. EACH ACP and EACH ACRI shall be wall mounted and installed in enclosures located as shown on the
drawings.
F. The Access Control Panel (ACP) shall contain the following features:
1. Communications: The following communication formats shall be supported:
a. RS-485 to EACH of the ACRI(s).
b. Ethernet at 10/100Mbps(10/100BASE-T, RJ45).
1. The Installing Vendor/Contractor shall provide the following for the LAN/WAN Interface:
a. Furnish all necessary wiring, RJ45 jacks, modular harness's, and patch cords as
required for connection to the designated LAN/WAN. Provide programming, final
testing,and use the communication protocol as necessary so that all information is
reported the Server and workstations,as required.
b. Coordinate with the Owners IT Department as required, to insure proper
communication over the LAN/WAN.
2. All access granted/denied decisions shall be made at the ACP to provide fast response to
card reader transactions.
3. Memory for the ACP shall be Flash-based and shall be completely non-volatile. If power
to an ACP is lost, upon restoration of power the unit shall retain all information
contained in the unit at the time of the power loss including cardholder database,
system configuration,event transaction history,etc.
2. Memory:
a. Real time program updates,and overall host communications shall utilize flash memory.
b. Shall be configured for up to 240,000 cardholders and 50,000 event buffer.
3. Processor:The controller shall contain a 32-bit processor.
4. Light emitting diodes(LED)shall indicate status of components and communication links.
5. Readers:The controller shall support the following:
a. Up to eight card formats and facility codes.
b. Multiple card technologies.
C. Biometric interface support.
d. Integration with other manufacturers'card readers.
e. Issue code support shall be provided for both magnetic and Wiegand card readers.
f. Up to eight-digit PIN codes.
g. Up to two (2) card readers, two (2) door position switches, two (2) Request to Exit devices,
two (2) electro-mechanical locking devices, four (4) auxiliary input devices, and two (2)
auxiliary relay output devices.
6. Electrical Power:
a. Primary input power shall be 120vac.
7. Lenel: Provide Model #LNL-3300 series Intelligent System Controller, EACH in a Model # LNL-
AL6000LX-4CB6 key locking metal enclosure with Model # ABT-12. Provide quantities as required
to service the number of Readers, Emergency Lock-Down System, and other devices shown on the
drawings,detail sheets,and listed in this specification.
G. The Star Multiplexer:
1. The Star Multiplexer shall be capable of eight different downstream directions in RS-485 (2-wire)
communications (using Belden 9841 or equivalent) or four different downstream directions with
RS-485 (4-wire) communications (using Belden 9842 or equivalent). Each Leg of the star, in either
configuration, shall support a maximum wire distance of 4000 feet. Each leg shall support up to
eight(8) Lenel hardware RS-485 devices in many configurations.
2. Electrical Power:
a. Primary input power shall be 120vac.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 12/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3. Lenel: Provide Model #LNL-8000 series Star Multiplexer, EACH in a Model # LNL-AL6000LX-4CB6
key locking metal enclosure with Model # ABT-12. Provide quantities as required to service the
number of Readers, Emergency Lock-Down System, and other devices shown on the drawings,
detail sheets,and listed in this specification.
2.07 POWER SUPPLIES
A. Power Supplies of various types shall be used to provide power to system related equipment,as
required, providing a fully functional system.
B. Access Control Power Supply(ACPS):
1. For some applications,the ACRI will provide the electric power. For applications that require more
power than the ACRI is capable of outputting, use an Access Control Power Supply(s) (ACPS's) to
power; Electric Locks(EL), Electric Strikes(ES),and Maglocks(MAG) as required. This power supply
may also be used to power other system related equipment as required. The power supply shall be
U.L. listed, have sixteen (16) Class 2 Rated PTC Power Limited outputs and a key locking enclosure.
The ACPS shall have automatic switch over to stand-by batteries when AC power fails, and have AC
fail supervision which is a Form"C"contact closure upon loss of power.
a. Connect as required, one (1)ACRI Input to monitor AC power for EACH ACPS that is provided
for this system.
2. The power supply shall be capable of supplying 10.0 Amps.
3. At a minimum, provide (1) ACPS at EACH location shown on the drawings and/or as required for a
fully functional system. If additional ACPS's are needed, provide the quantities as required for a
fully functional system, while maintaining the design requirements that are defined elsewhere in
these specifications.
4. Altronix: Model#AL1024ULXPDI6CB.
C. Electrified Exit Device Power Supply(EDPS):
1. See"Field Devices" listed elsewhere in this specification.
2.08 BATTERY BACKUP FOR COMPLETE SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Battery back up power shall be an integral part of the Access Control system.
B. Provide and install gel-cell, maintenance free batteries,as required. Provide battery back up power for
the entire Access Control system to provide a minimum of(1) hour of standby operation. Batteries shall
be sized to provide at least 20%spare capacity.
1. Provide quantities as required for maintaining or exceeding the submittal calculation requirements
listed elsewhere in Section 27 0000"Submittals and Shop Drawings".
C. EACH Power Supply shall have automatic switch over to stand-by batteries when AC power fails. The
power supply/charger shall be an integral portion of the control panel and/or power supply and be
capable of charging fully discharged system batteries to 100%in 8 hours.
D. All batteries shall be placed inside a key lockable, metal enclosure that is approved by the
manufacturer.
E. Each battery shall have the date of installation written on the battery with a permanent marker. The
date shall be legible and clearly written in 1" numbers and be visible when the enclosure door is open.
2.09 FIELD DEVICES
A. Review the Access Control System Riser Diagram for Card Reader related equipment that is NOT shown
on the drawings, but shall be provided and installed for this project.
B. Prior to Bidding and Ordering ANY equipment, it shall be the responsibility of the Installing Vendor to
confirm the Owners existing Access Cards will work on the specified equipment.
C. Access Control Reader Interface(ACRI):
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 13/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1. The ACRI shall incorporate support communications between ACRI's via the ACP for local
input/output programming.
2. ACRI's shall be able to provide 12 VDC (125 mA) to each Reader and also provide Reader LED
control (to indicate when the door is locked/unlocked).
3. Communications shall be RS-485 to the Access Control Panel. The ACRI shall be equipped with an
input/output port. If one of the ACRI's should lose power, it shall not affect the operation of the
AC R I's.
4. Memory:
a. Real time program updates and shall utilize flash memory.
5. Light emitting diodes(LED)shall indicate status of components and communication links.
6. Readers:The ACRI(s)shall support the following:
a. Up to eight card formats and facility codes.
b. Multiple card technologies.
C. Biometric interface support.
d. Integration with other manufacturers'card readers.
e. Issue code support shall be provided for both magnetic and Wiegand card readers.
f. Up to nine-digit PIN codes.
g. Up to (2) card readers, (2) door position switches, (2) Request to Exit devices, (2) electro-
mechanical locking devices, (4)auxiliary input devices,and (4)auxiliary relay output devices.
h. Electrical Power:
1. Primary input power shall be 12VDC or 24VDC.
7. Lenel: Model # LNL-1320 Series2 Intelligent System Controller, located in a Model # LNL-CTX key
locking metal enclosure. Provide quantities as required to service the number of Readers,
Emergency Lock-Down System, and other devices shown on the drawings, detail sheets, and listed
in this specification.
a. One(1)ACRI shall be located at EACH Card Reader location.
b. One(1)ACRI shall be located at EACH Electro-Mechanically controlled door location.
C. Provide additional ACRI's as required for a complete and fully functional system.
d. See "System Software" for the functional requirements. This includes, but is not limited to;
General Functional Operation, Emergency Lock Down functionality, and Graphic Map
software.
D. Card Readers and Credentials: Provide one(1)Card Reader at EACH location shown on the drawings.
Card readers shall connect to the ACRI,for a fully functional system,as required.
1. The card reader(s)shall be compatible with existing access cards.
2. Card Readers shall meet the following minimum requirements:
a. Provide Card Reader(s)that are compatible with the ACRI(s)and ACP(s).
b. Private labeled Readers are not permitted.
C. Readers shall be weather resistant.
d. When a card is presented to the reader,the beeper shall sound.
e. The LED's shall be controlled individually by the host system.
1. Reader LED's shall change color when the door is unlocked.
f. Reader color shall be specified by the Architect.
1. PRIOR to ordering,obtain written approval of the color selection.
g. Manufacturer's lifetime warranty.
3. Single Gang Mount—ThinLine II:
a. Read range distance up to 4",as listed on the manufacturer's data sheet.
b. Surface mount to a single-gang electrical box.
C. HID Corporation: Model#5395 Series. Provide quantities,as shown on the drawings.
4. Mullion Mount—MiniProx:
a. Read range distance up to 3",as listed on the manufacturer's data sheet.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 14/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
b. Surface mount onto metal surfaces, such as door mullions or storefront applications, where
indicated on the drawings.
C. HID Corporation: Model#5365 Series. Provide quantities,as shown on the drawings.
S. Credentials:
a. Credentials shall meet the following minimum requirements:
1. Provide Credentials that are compatible with the Card Readers,ACRI(s),and ACP(s).
2. Private labeled Credentials are not permitted.
3. A unique Credential identification number shall be preprinted and encoded on each
Credential.
b. Cards:
1. Provide 500 Cards.
a. HID: Model#1386 Corporate 1000 ISOProx II
b. Coordinate with Owner.
E. Card Badging Stations:
1. Provide all devices, software and equipment except workstation PC for a complete turnkey system.
Workstation PC shall be furnished by Owner. Provide only one (1) Card Badging Station for this
project to be turned over to the owner at the beginning of the project.
a. Software: Provide one(1)SWC-IDADV license
2. Manufacturers: Provide the following manufacturers' products that adhere to the following
specifications and will be incorporated into the Work:
a. HID Global—Fargo HDP5000
b. HID Global—ISOProx II Card—Corporate 1000 Format
C. RFldeas—pcProx Plus Enroll.
d. Videology Imaging Solutions Inc.—24C708AF
3. Equipment for enrolling personnel into, and removing personnel from, system database, using a
dedicated workstation PC.
a. Include equipment to enroll selected biometric credentials.
4. Enrollment equipment shall support encoding of credential cards including cryptographic and other
internal security checks as required for system.
a. Allow only authorized entry-control enrollment personnel to access the enrollment
equipment using passwords.
b. Include enrollment-subsystem configuration controls and electronic diagnostic aids for
subsystem setup and troubleshooting with the central station.
C. Enrollment-station records printer shall meet requirements of the report printer.
5. Entry-Control Enrollment Software:
a. Shall include database management functions for the system, and shall allow an operator to
change and modify the data entered in the system as needed.
b. Software shall not have alarm response or acknowledgment functions as a programmable
function.
C. Multiple, password-protected access levels shall be provided at the enrollment station.
d. Database management and modification functions shall require a higher operator-access level
than personnel enrollment functions.
e. Software shall provide a means for disabling the enrollment station when it is unattended,to
prevent unauthorized use.
f. Software shall provide a method to enter personnel identifying information into the entry-
control database files through enrollment stations to include a credential unit in use at the
installation.
g. In the case of personnel identity-verification subsystems, this data shall include biometric
data.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 15/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
h. Software shall allow entry of this data into the system database files through the use of
simple menu selections and data fields.The data field names shall be customized to suit user
and site needs.
i. Personnel identity-verification subsystems selected for use with the system shall fully support
the enrollment function and shall be compatible with the entry-control database files.
6. System Capacity: Number of badges shall be limited only by hard disk space. Badge templates and
images shall be in color,supporting the maximum color capability of Microsoft Windows.
7. Badge Configuration:
a. Software for badge template creation shall include a template consisting of background and
predetermined locations of photographs, text objects and data fields for text, and bar-code
and biometric information. Include automatic sizing of data fields placed on a badge to
compensate for names,which may otherwise be too large to fit in the area designated.
b. Allow different badge templates to be used for each department,tenant,or visitor.
C. As a setup option, templates shall be automatically selected for the badge, based on the
group to which the credential holder is assigned. Allow the operator to override the
automatic template selection and use a template chosen by the operator for creating a
badge.
d. Setup shall determine which graphics and credential-holder information will be displayed and
where on the card it will be placed.All data in the security access system, such as name, code,
group, access level, and any of the 99 user-defined fields, shall be selectable, with the ability
to place them anywhere on the card.
e. System shall include an importing, filing, and recall system of stored images and shapes that
can be placed on the badge.
f. Allow multiple images on the same badge, including, but not limited to, bar codes, digital
photos,and signatures.
g. Support transparent backgrounds so that image is only surrounded by the intended
background and not by its immediate background.
8. Photo Imaging: Integral to security access.
a. Import images from bitmap file formats, digital cameras,TWAIN cameras, or scanners. Allow
image cropping and editing, WYSIWYG badge-building application, and badge print-preview
and printing capabilities.
b. System shall support multiple images stored for each credential holder, including signatures,
portrait views,and profile views.
9. Text Objects: Badge configuration shall provide for creation of custom text as an object, allowing
font selection, typing, scaling, and formatting of the text object. Formatting options shall include
changing font, font size, text flow, and text alignment; bending or curving the text object into a
circle or semicircle; applying 3-D effects; and applying predefined effects such as tilt, extrusion, or
beveling.Text shall be placed and optionally automatically centered within any region of the badge
layout.
10. Badges and Credential Cards:
a. Badges are credential cards that do not contain data to be read by card readers.
b. Credential cards shall store uniquely coded data used by card readers as an Identifier.
1. Proximity Cards: Use proximity detection without physical contact with the reader for
proper operation.
C. Allow entry-control card to be modified by lamination or direct print process during the
enrollment process for use as a picture and identification badge without reduction of
readability.The design shall allow for the addition of at least one slot or hole to accommodate
the attachment of a clip for affixing the credential card to the type of badge holder used at
the site.
1. Card Size and Dimensional Stability: Standard size (CR-80); dimensionally stable so that
an undamaged card with deformations resulting from normal use shall be readable by
the card reader.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 16/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. Card Material: Abrasion resistant, nonflammable, and nontoxic; and impervious to solar
radiation and effects of ultraviolet light.
3. Card Construction: Core and laminate or monolithic construction. Lettering, logos, and
other markings shall be hot stamped into the credential material or direct printed.
a. Incorporate holographic images or phosphorous ink as a security enhancement.
b. Furnish equipment for on-site assembly and lamination of credential cards.
4. Card Durability and Maintainability: Provide manufacturer standard one year warranty.
Allow credential cards to be cleaned by wiping with a sponge or cloth wetted with soap
and water.
11. Card-Making Equipment: Consisting of a workstation,video camera,video-imaging equipment, and
a printer.Provide one set of Card-Making Equipment.
a. Camera: NTSC color standard, RGB video output, 470 lines minimum horizontal resolution,
and automatic white balance with full rated output under illumination of 0.5 fc(5 Ix).
b. Video Imaging: Live-image capture software and hardware and a digital signature capture
pad.
C. Standard workstation, modified as follows:
1. Redundant workstation is not required.
2. Inkjet Printer is not required.
3. UPS is not required.
4. Sound card is not required.
d. Printer: Dye-sublimation resin thermal transfer, 300 dpi resolution, 16.7 million colors,
accepting standard HID card size (CR-80) and having card thickness ranging from 0.030 to
0.050 inch (0.762 to 1.27 mm).Throughput shall be not less than 60 seconds per card.
F. Request To Exit(REX): Provide Dual Technology REX with Built-In Sounder.
1. Provide REX(s)at EACH Reader location,as shown on the drawings.
a. For EACH single door location, provide one(1) REX.
b. For EACH double door location, provide two(2) REX's.
C. Provide manufactures recommended mounting plates as required.
2. GE: Model#RCR-REX-W.
G. Door Position Switches(DPS's):
1. Coordinate with the Intrusion Alarm System Installing Vendor. See the Electrical Legend and Riser
Diagram for more information.
a. A DPDT Door Position Switch shall be provided for the following systems to use;
b. Access Control System.
C. Intrusion Alarm System.
2. Roll-up Doors:
a. Each switch shall be provided with the magnet, for the roll-up doors application and all
necessary mounting brackets as recommended by the manufacturer. Provide all necessary
mounting brackets and fasteners,as recommended by the manufacturer.
b. GE (formerly Sentrol): Model#2202AU-L.
H. Auxiliary Relays(AUXR):
1. Where called for on the plans, specifications, or where required, provide the necessary quantities
of auxiliary relays,as required.
2. For outdoor applications.
a. Space Age Electronics: Model#SSU-PAM-1.
3. For indoor applications.
a. Space Age Electronics: Model#SSU-PAM-1,SSU-MR-101 Series,or SSU-MR-201 Series.
I. Access Control Power Supply(ACPS):
1. Use Access Control Power Supply(s) (ACPS's) to power; Electric Locks (EL), Electric Strikes (ES), and
Maglocks(MAG)and other system equipment that consume 24vdc power as required.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 17/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
2. The power supply shall be U.L. listed, have sixteen (16) Class 2 Rated PTC Power Limited outputs
and a key locking enclosure. The ACPS shall have automatic switch over to stand-by batteries when
AC power fails, and have AC fail supervision which is a Form "C" contact closure upon loss of
power.
a. Connect as required, (1) ACP Input to monitor AC power for EACH ACPS that is provided for
this system.
3. The power supply shall be capable of supplying 10.0 Amps.
4. At a minimum, provide (1) ACPS at EACH location shown on the drawings. If additional ACPS's are
needed, provide the quantities as required for a fully functional system, while maintaining the
design requirements that are defined elsewhere in these specifications.
5. Altronix: Model#AL1024ULXPDI6CB.
a. The ACPS shall be adjusted to provide 26.Ovdc or less.
J. Electrified Exit Device Power Supplies(EDPS):
1. Elector-Mechanical locks shall be powered by and/or be compatible with the system Power
Supplies. The following items provided by the Division 8 Door Hardware supplier, shall include, but
not be limited to:
a. Electric Locks and/or Electrified Exit Devices.
b. Electrified Exit Device Power Supply(EDPS).
K. Local Door Alarm:
1. Provide Multi-Tone Electronic Chime.
2. ATW Security: Model#PC-300,or approved equal. Provide quantities as shown on the plans.
L. Panic Button:
1. United Security Products: Model#Hub-2SA.
M. Strobe Light(activate when the Panic Button is pressed):
1. Wire this device for the Strobe only. Silent operation is required (do not wire the siren portion of
this unit).
2. ATW Security: Model#Doberman.
N. Push Buttons:
1. Emergency Lock Down (ELD) Button, manufactured by Schlage (formerly Locknetics): Model#623—
RD-1-2/1-L-626. Provide quantities as shown on the Drawings.
a. The Emergency Lock Down (ELD) Buttons Illuminated LED's shall continually display the
current status of the system (LED in Normal Mode and then change LED color when in Lock
Down Mode).
2.10 SPARE CAPACITY
A. Spare capacity to add additional devices in the future,shall be an integral part of the system design.
B. INCLUDE the additional system growth capability items listed below,when CALCULATING the
requirements for EACH of these items, listed elsewhere in this specification.
C. Access Control Power Supply(ACPS):
1. The ACPS(s) shall have enough spare power available to add no less than two (2) additional electric
locks that are typical for this project.
D. Spare Cables:
1. Provide spare cabling as shown on the drawings.
2.11 FLEXIBILITY IN SYSTEM DESIGN LAYOUT
A. Where indicated on the drawings,the Installing Vendor shall have the flexibility in their design to
provide system equipment at any of the MDF and designated IDF locations. Do not install equipment in
other locations, unless noted otherwise.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 18/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
B. Provide all quantities of equipment as specified,while maintaining the"Spare Capacity" requirements
listed elsewhere within this specification.
C. Coordinate the exact location of field devices with the Architect, prior to installation.
2.12 SYSTEM DEVICE NAMING MATRIX
A. The installing Vendor shall include in the pricing of their bid,the time and materials to generate and
create a single System Device Naming Matrix. From left to right, list the information for EACH device,
which shall include,but not be limited to the following;
1. Each row shall have an "Item#".
2. The device name(i.e.: Reader, Duress Button,etc.).
3. The device abbreviation.
a. This is a sample abbreviation that could be used: (i.e. Reader= Rdr).
4. List the Serial Number for EACH device.
5. The device ID number.
6. Device model number.
7. Device Location (for example;South Wing Side Door, MDF Room XXX,etc.).
8. For other system equipment (such as "Head end Equipment"), add rows to the bottom of the
matrix,and list the appropriate information.
a. Group this information by location. Such as MDF Room XXX, IDF Room XXX,etc.
B. Use the maximum characters allowable from the system,to be incorporated into a fully functional
system.At the Top of the Matrix,state the Maximum number of characters that are available.
1. Submit this information with the Submittals and Shop Drawings in 11'x 17'format,or smaller.
C. Prior to ANY system programming,obtain written approval from the Architect of the System Device
Naming Matrix. Make corrections as noted.
D. Using the Matrix that is included at the end of this specification (see Exhibit'A'for a partial sample
format),the Installing Vendor shall create a spread sheet and identify EACH system device and
description. For room or area abbreviations that are not listed or if there is more than one room or
area of the same name, use a reasonable and logical name.
1. The Matrix shall have consistent information of EACH device.
2. Each system device shall be wired and programmed to communicate to the ACRI(s),ACP(s), system
Server, and Workstation(s), to indicate EACH system device abbreviation, as indicated on the
System Device Naming Matrix.
2.13 SYSTEM CABLES,CONNECTORS,AND PATCH CORDS
A. See PART 3 of this specification and Section 27 0000 for additional requirements.
B. Include the"Spare Capacity" requirements listed elsewhere within this specification,for the calculations
and sizing requirements of the cables and/or conductors.
C. ALL cables and conductors shall be the same size and color throughout EACH cable run. Such as from
EACH field device to the terminals on the ACID,ACRI,and Power Supply.
D. Cables/Conductors:The minimum allowable size conductors are specified below. Use larger conductors
and/or additional conductors,as required. Prior to Bidding,consult with the system Manufacturer that
the following cable types are acceptable. It shall be the Installing Vendors responsibility to provide and
install Manufacturer approved cables. Use the Manufacturers equivalent cable requirements,to meet
all code requirements [such as"Wet Rated"or"Aerial Rated"cable]for the appropriate devices.
1. CAT6 cable(s):
a. Refer to Section 27 2000.
b. The outer jack of the data cable color is specified in Section 27 2000.
2. Readers:
a. Non-Plenum:West Penn 3021(18/6oas),or approved equal.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 19/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
1. Provide additional conductors for Reader control of LED's as specified,as required.
b. Plenum:West Penn 253186B(18/6oas),or approved equal.
1. Provide additional conductors for Reader control of LED's as specified,as required.
3. Door Position Switches(DPS's):
a. Non-Plenum:West Penn 221(22/2ns),or approved equal.
b. Plenum: West Penn 25221E(22/2ns),or approved equal.
4. Request To Exit's(REX's):
a. Non-Plenum:West Penn 241(22/4ns),or approved equal.
b. Plenum:West Penn 25241E(22/4ns),or approved equal.
5. Electro-Mechanical Locks:
a. Non-Plenum:West Penn 224(18/2ns),or approved equal.
b. Plenum:West Penn 25224E(18/2ns),or approved equal.
6. Electrified Exit Devices:
a. Non-Plenum:West Penn HA210(10/2 ns),or approved equal.
b. Plenum:West Penn 25210(10/2 ns),or approved equal.
E. Connectors/Terminations: Use the manufacturer approved wire strippers and crimping tool as required.
1. CAT6 cable(s):
a. Refer to Section 27 2000.
2. Maintain all cable and system requirements.
F. Patch Cords:Size EACH cable length to provide ease of maintenance,while not leaving excessive slack.
1. CAT6 cable(s):
a. Refer to Section 27 2000.
2. Maintain all cable requirements.
2.14 PROGRAMMING SURVEY
A. The Installing Vendor shall include in the Pricing of their Bid,the time and materials necessary to
generate and create the following Documentation, provide the staff and necessary equipment as
required to provide the following services,as described below.
B. EACH of the documents shall have the following:
1. List the Name or Title of the document, the Section Number, and Section Title. This shall be bold
and centered at the top.
2. Header of document:
a. The Project Name and the current date.
3. Footer of document:
a. Use multiple pages as required, but identify each page by having the footer state "Page 1 of
X", "Page 2 of X",etc.
C. Interview the Owner for no less than a minimum of two (2)4-Hour sessions. Allow for additional time if
required,at no additional cost to the Owner. The Installing Vendor shall be present for this meeting.
The purpose of this Interview is to verbally discuss all of the feature sets of the system. The dialog shall
describe the benefits for implementing each of the systems features,thus allowing the Owner to make
an informed decision on the how they can maximize the functional operation of their system.
1. Prior to starting the Interview process with the Owner, have EACH attendee fill out a "Sign In
Sheet" listing EACH attendee's name,department they work in,and their phone number.
2. Provide a detailed list of software features on a document titled "Section 28 1300 Access Control
System — PRE-INTERVIEW of Owner Requested Systems Programming Sheet". This shall be
provided in the "Submittal and Shop Drawings" with the Section 27 0000 submittal. This shall be
used as the basis of discussion for the Interview process.
a. For EACH separate software feature, provide a row with an ascending number indicating the
"Item#" (on the far left side of the page).
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 20/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
b. Next to the Item #, provide a Yes, No, and N/A column. This shall be checked off by the
Installing Vendor during the course of the Interview, to determine which options the Owner
would like to have programmed.
C. On each row, provide a brief description of the feature set.
d. On the far right of each row, provide adequate space to write comments.
3. All parties shall review the drawings and discuss the intended functions of EACH device. This will
allow all parties to have a complete understanding of EACH system devices purpose and the
performance requirements of the system that was identified during the Interview process.
4. At the conclusion of the Interview with the Owner, prior to leaving the premises, the Installing
Vendor shall do the following:
a. Review with the Owner, by verbally recapping EACH of the feature sets listed on the "Section
28 1300 Access Control System— PRE-INTERVIEW of Owner Requested Systems Programming
Sheet" and reiterating this with a Yes (the Owner wants this feature) or No (the Owner does
not want this feature). Make any corrections as required.
b. Provide no less than three (3) copies of the completely filled out, "Section 28 1300 Access
Control System — PRE-INTERVIEW of Owner Requested Systems Programming Sheet" to the
Architect.
5. For Bidding Purposes, the Installing Vendor shall be expected to program the system to Industry
Standards, based on a project of this size, scope, typical functionality for this market segment, and
as described throughout this specification.
a. Review the testing requirements specified elsewhere within this specification for additional
information.
D. Within five(5) business days of the conclusion of the Interview, provide the following documents to the
Architect for review:
E. The updated Interview Document with a new title of"Section 28 1300 Access Control System—Owner
Requested Systems Programming Sheet". This shall have the Yes, No,and N/A columns electronically
filled out to demonstrate what will and will not be programmed. Include at the conclusion of this
document,the following;
1. The date(s)of the Interview with the Owner.
2. The address, building name, room name, and room number of the location that the Interview took
place at.
3. Provide copies of the sign in sheet(s).
2.15 ADDITIONAL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
A. See Part 3 of this specification for additional provision of system Equipment and/or Labor.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. See Section 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems General Requirements for additional information.
B. See Section 27 2000 Data and Voice Infrastructure for additional cable and installation requirements.
C. Prior to rough-in,coordinate with the Architect for the exact location(s).
D. Install all equipment,devices,and cabling, per the manufacturer's recommendation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. EACH CABLE RUN SHALL CONTINUOUS,WITHOUT ANY SPLICES,from the device to the terminal strip on
the ACRI(s),ACP(s),and Power Supplies. Any cable run that does not meet this requirement shall be
replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Setup,connect,and configure the Servers/Workstations/Monitors per the manufacturer's
recommendations to operate as intended. Load,configure,and test the software for a fully functional
system.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 21/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.03 MOUNTING HEIGHTS,LOCATIONS,AND SETTINGS
A. Mount enclosures as specified in Section 27 0000.
B. Prior to Bidding,the Installing Vendor(s)shall confirm and coordinate the actual quantities and
locations of the power requirements with the electrical contractor see"Power Supplies"and "Flexibility
in System Design Layout" listed elsewhere in this specification. At a minimum, provide 120vac wiring
and connections to the ACP(s)and all power supplies,as required for a fully functional system.
C. Prior to rough-in,coordinate with the Architect for the exact location(s).
D. Install EACH of the devices and/or equipment per the manufacturer's recommendation.
E. Access Control Reader Interfaces(ACRI's):
1. Install EACH ACRI:
a. On the hinge side of the door, and approximately 5'-0" from the door on parallel or
perpendicular walls,to accommodate servicing this unit without blocking the doorway.
b. Approximately 6" above the accessible ceiling (where applicable) or at 8'-0" above the
finished floor, unless otherwise noted.
F. Card Readers:
1. Install EACH Card Reader:
a. Flush to the wall surface.
1. Surface mounted boxes are unacceptable.
2. At 44"on center.
2. For Electric Strike(s), install per the manufacturers recommendation.
G. Request To Exits(REX's):
1. Prior to rough-in:
a. Verify exact location with the Architect.
b. Mount in the middle of the door frame or header,as recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Verify the functional operation of the REX will not be hindered by other equipment. Such as
exit signs.
2. Install manufactures recommended mounting plates,as required.
3. Install and make all adjustments to EACH REX, per the manufacturer's recommendation.
H. Door Position Switches shall be installed on the latch side of the door, NOT the hinge side. At the upper
portion of the door, near the top of the door(surface mount),on the top of the door(recessed mount),
and 4"to 6"from the edge of the door(unless approved by the Architect). Install per manufacturers
recommendations. After installation the door shall be able to close properly without rubbing on the
door position switch.
1. Provide the appropriate style of Door Position Switch and application appropriate magnet for each
type of door.
2. Recessed Mount Door Position Switches:
a. The Door Position Switch shall be provided and installed by the Intrusion Alarm Installing
Vendor. Coordinate with the Installing Vendor for cable terminations,as required.
3. Surface Mount Door Position Switches:
a. Install per the manufacturers recommendation. Conceal all cabling within the walls and/or
ceiling,as required.
4. Hollow Metal Door with Grout Filled Frame(s)and/or Concrete/CMU Wall Applications:
a. Heavy Duty Surface Mount Door Position Switches:for these types of applications, secure the
device to the frame and/or wall using a minimum depth of 1.25 inch of screw in the wall
penetration. Plastic insert anchors are NOT acceptable. Either one of the following methods
is acceptable or approved equal;
b. Lead anchors.
C. Concrete sleeve anchors.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 22/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
d. Secure the armored cable every 4" with U-shaped two-hole steel clamps that are secured on
both sides of the clamp, sized to be a snug fit on the armored cable, until it enters the
junction box. Secure at the junction box with a screw type clamp as it enters the junction
box.
5. Roll-Up Door Applications:
a. The door position switch(s) shall be installed in a manner to be the least obtrusive in the door
opening. Consult with the Architect for actual location, prior to mounting.
b. Secure the device to the floor and/or wall using a minimum depth of 1.25 inch of screw in the
floor or wall penetration. Plastic insert anchors are NOT acceptable. Either one of the
following methods is acceptable or approved equal;
1. Lead anchors.
2. Concrete sleeve anchors.
c. Secure the armored cable every 4" with U-shaped two-hole steel clamps that are secured on
both sides of the clamp, sized to be a snug fit on the armored cable, until it enters the
junction box. Secure at the junction box with a screw type clamp as it enters the junction
box.
I. Access Control Power Supplies(ACPS):
1. Electric Lock Power Supplies (ACPS) shall power the Electro-Mechanical Door Hardware and other
system related equipment.
2. Mounting of ACPS's, wiring, and terminations of ALL Elector-Mechanical locks shall be by the
Installing Vendor/Contractor.
a. Locate the ACPS's in the MDF/IDF locations,as required, unless noted otherwise.
J. Electrified Exit Device Power Supply(EDPS):
1. Electrified Exit Device Power Supply (EDPS) shall power the Electrified Exit Devices (ED). The
following items shall be provided by the Division 8 Door Hardware supplier.
a. Electric Locks and/or Electrified Exit Devices.
b. Electrified Exit Device Power Supply(EDPS).
2. Mounting of EDPS's, wiring, and terminations of ALL Elector-Mechanical locks shall be by the
Installing Vendor/Contractor.
a. Locate the EDPS's directly above the ACRI, unless noted otherwise.
b. Mount approximately 6" above the accessible ceiling (where applicable) or at 9'-0" above the
finished floor, unless otherwise noted.
3.04 DATA CABLES AND OUTLET LOCATIONS
A. See Section 27 2000 Data and Voice Infrastructure for additional information. Connect the ACP(s)to the
LAN/WAN as required.
3.05 PROGRAMMING AND CONFIGURATION
A. Program the database as described in "System Software" listed elsewhere in this specification.
B. Program the system emergency lock down as required by the owner.
C. Time and Date Synchronization.
1. EACH of the ACRI(s), EACH of the ACP(s), and the Access Control Server(s) shall be synchronized for
the Time and Date to be exactly the same(where applicable).
2. The "Access Control System" shall be synchronized to other designated systems, such as the CCTV
System,for the Time and Date to be exactly the same(where applicable).
D. The Installing Vendor shall program the system as defined in the documents that were completed
during the"Interview the Owner",as described throughout this specification,and as required for a fully
functional system.
1. The Owner shall program the Owners staff.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 23/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
E. Program EACH ACRI to communicate to the Server and EACH ACRI on the Owners LAN/WAN as
required.
F. The Installing Vendor shall program the Configuration Files of the system to be automatically backed up
onto the Designated Server. These back ups shall occur once per week. Coordinate with the Owners IT
Department,as required. This includes, but is not limited to:
1. EACH of the Configuration Files of EACH ACRI and EACH ACP.
2. EACH Site Workstation.
3. The Server.
3.06 TRAINING
A. Training for Site Staff:
1. The training sessions shall be held at the project Site.
a. Provide Training for up to ten (10)Site Staff.
b. Provide a total of two (2) separate training sessions for the Owners personnel. Schedule both
training sessions with the Owner, providing a minimum of 14 days advance notice,and offer a
minimum of three dates to choose from.
2. The Site Training Session(s) shall only take place AFTER the Owners Administrative Staff have had
their first training session.
3. The 1st Training Session shall consist of:
a. Being conducted by one of the designated Installing Vendor technicians. The training shall be
a minimum of one (1) 4-Hour session that shall be held on the same day, and provide a
thorough and in depth full feature training session. Provide additional training time as
required, to answer EACH of the staff's questions, at no additional cost to the Owner. This
training shall address EACH of the software features that meet the Owners requirements
identified on the documents that were filled out during the "Interview with the Owner". This
includes, but is not limited to:
1. The "Section 28 1300 Access Control System—Owner Requested Systems Programming
Sheet".
2. The Manufacturers Programming Worksheets.
3. At the Owners option, the Installing Vendor may be allowed to provide the Training
Session on the Owners Workstation.
b. The 2nd Training Session shall consist of:
1. A refresher training session shall be held approximately 30 days after the first training
session. The training session shall be a minimum of two (2) hours that may be
conducted by one of the Installing Vendors designated technicians that attended the
first training session. Provide additional training time as required, to answer EACH of
the staff's questions,at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. Using an Installing Vendors laptop and projector, connect to the Owners WAN and
demonstrate each of the features and functions that the Owner's staff would like
clarification on.
a. No less than five (5) business days in advance of this meeting,the Installing Vendor
shall request from the Owner, EACH of the items that the Owner would like
clarification on.
b. The documents that were filled out during the "Interview with the Owner" shall be
used as the reference document.
C. At the Owners option,the Installing Vendor may be allowed to provide the Training
Session on the Owners Workstation.
C. Following the 2nd training session,the Installing Vendor shall include additional programming
to accommodate system functionality changes, based on the requirements of the Owner.
1. Provide up to four(4) hours of system programming changes.
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 24/25
Renton City Attorney& Police Training Center -Bid Documents 15 July 2019
3.07 AS-BUILTS
A. Provide all As-Built documentation as defined in Section 27 0000 Low Voltage Systems General
Requirements and listed elsewhere in this specification.
B. Update all documents provided in the Submittal and Shop Drawings to accurately reflect the actual
equipment that was provided for this project,and the actual locations of the installed equipment.
C. The Installing Vendor shall include in the pricing of their bid,the time and materials to generate and
create the documentation,as described below.
1. Provide an "Equipment Information Sheet", in the O & M manuals. At a minimum, from left to
right, provide the following information;
2. Each row shall have an "Item#".
3. Manufacturers Name.
4. Equipment Device Type(such as Workstation,Control Panel,etc).
S. Location (such as MDF room 103,or area of building).
6. IP Address.
7. Software Name.
8. Software Version that is installed on the device.
9. List the"Highest Level"configurable password for EACH device.
10. List"EACH System Operator" password.
11. List all other password settings for EACH device.
D. Provide ALL CD(s)/DVD(s)of installation software, legally required software licenses,and the associated
documentation to reinstall all portions of the software that is running on the new and/or existing
Server/Workstations.
1. Separate ALL information by Server, and EACH individual Workstation, into large plastic Ziploc bags
that are clearly identified with a PC generated label. The information on the label shall include, but
is not limited to:
a. Project Name.
b. Date.
C. PC location (building name, room name,and room number).
d. List the contents of EACH bag.
e. Software:
1. List EACH bag for EACH PC and lists the contents of EACH bag.
END OF SECTION
Job Number 2170712.00 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
28 13 00- 25/25